ATP 3-34.40 (FM 3-34.

400)
MCWP 3-17.7

GENERAL ENGINEERING

February 2015

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Headquarters, Department of the Army

FOREWORD
This publication has been prepared under our direction for use by our respective commands and other
commands as appropriate.

ANTHONY C. FUNKHOUSER K. J. GLUECK, JR.

Brigadier General, USA Lieutenant General, USMC
Commandant Deputy Commandant for
U.S. Army Engineer School Combat Development and
Integration

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online

<https://armypubs.us.army.mil/doctrine/index.html>.
To receive publishing updates, please subscribe at
<http://www.apd.army.mil/AdminPubs/new_subscribe.asp>.
It is also available at the U.S. Marine Corps Web site
at Marine Corps Doctrine at <https://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/>.
*ATP 3-34.40 (FM 3-34.400)
MCWP 3-17.7

Army Techniques Publications Headquarters, Department of the Army

No. 3-34.40 Washington, DC

Marine Corps Combat Development Command

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication Quantico, VA
No. 3-17.7
25 February 2015

General Engineering

Contents
Page
PREFACE.............................................................................................................. iv
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... vi
Chapter 1 GENERAL ENGINEERING AS A DISCIPLINE AND FUNCTION .................... 1-1
Life Cycle Activities ............................................................................................. 1-1
Employment Considerations .............................................................................. 1-3
Chapter 2 GENERAL ENGINEERING SUPPORT TO OPERATIONS .............................. 2-1
Range of Military Operations .............................................................................. 2-1
Theater and Operational Levels ......................................................................... 2-1
Tactical Level ...................................................................................................... 2-6
Chapter 3 PLANNING AND DESIGN ................................................................................. 3-1
Joint General Engineering Planning ................................................................... 3-1
United States Army and United States Marine Corps General Engineering
Planning .............................................................................................................. 3-4
General Engineering Design ............................................................................ 3-15
Engineer Work Line .......................................................................................... 3-21
Unified Facilities Criteria ................................................................................... 3-23
Field Force Engineering ................................................................................... 3-24
Chapter 4 CONSTRUCTION............................................................................................... 4-1
Plans and Estimates ........................................................................................... 4-1
Project Management .......................................................................................... 4-3
Methods of Construction..................................................................................... 4-4
Construction Materials ........................................................................................ 4-6
Construction Techniques .................................................................................. 4-14
Chapter 5 SEAPORTS ........................................................................................................ 5-1

Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

*This publication supersedes FM 3-34.400, 9 December 2008.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 i

Contents

Responsibilities and Capabilities ........................................................................ 5-1

Scope of Port Operations .................................................................................... 5-5
Planning and Design ........................................................................................... 5-6
Construction ...................................................................................................... 5-10
Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 5-13
Chapter 6 AIRFIELDS AND HELIPORTS........................................................................... 6-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ........................................................................ 6-1
Planning and Design ........................................................................................... 6-3
Construction ...................................................................................................... 6-10
Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 6-13
Chapter 7 ROADS AND RAILROADS ................................................................................ 7-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ........................................................................ 7-1
Planning and Design ........................................................................................... 7-3
Construction ...................................................................................................... 7-12
Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 7-15
Chapter 8 BRIDGING .......................................................................................................... 8-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ........................................................................ 8-1
Planning and Design ........................................................................................... 8-3
Chapter 9 BASE CAMPS AND BED-DOWN FACILITIES ................................................. 9-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ........................................................................ 9-1
Planning and Design ........................................................................................... 9-2
Construction ...................................................................................................... 9-13
Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 9-22
Chapter 10 REAL ESTATE AND REAL PROPERTY MAINTENANCE ............................. 10-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ...................................................................... 10-1
Objectives ......................................................................................................... 10-4
United States Army Policies .............................................................................. 10-5
United States Navy Policies .............................................................................. 10-5
Planning ............................................................................................................ 10-5
Real Property Maintenance .............................................................................. 10-9
Real Estate or Real Property Transfer ............................................................ 10-13
Chapter 11 POWER SYSTEMS .......................................................................................... 11-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ...................................................................... 11-1
Planning and Design ......................................................................................... 11-4
Construction, Installation, and Connection ....................................................... 11-9
Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 11-9
Chapter 12 WATER PRODUCTION, WELL DRILLING, AND DISTRIBUTION ................. 12-1
Responsibilities and Capabilities ...................................................................... 12-1
Planning and Design ......................................................................................... 12-3
Water Production .............................................................................................. 12-4
Water Detection ................................................................................................ 12-5
Well-Drilling Operations .................................................................................... 12-5
Distribution ........................................................................................................ 12-6
Appendix A METRIC CONVERSION CHART ...................................................................... A-1
Appendix B BASE CAMP CONSTRUCTION PLANNING FACTORS ................................. B-1

ii ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Contents

GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1

REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1
INDEX .......................................................................................................... Index-1

Figures
Figure 1-1. Contiguous, noncontiguous, and unassigned areas ............................................ 1-8
Figure 3-1. Division engineer work line in contiguous operations ........................................ 3-22
Figure 3-2. Division engineer work line in noncontiguous operations .................................. 3-23
Figure 4-1. Project management process .............................................................................. 4-3
Figure 6-1. Airfield damage categories ................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 9-1. Base camp development planning process ......................................................... 9-8
Figure 9-2. Southeast Asia hut company cluster.................................................................. 9-15
Figure 11-1. Power continuum ............................................................................................. 11-4

Tables
Introductory table-1. Modified U.S. Army term ......................................................................... vii
Table 3-1. General engineering in the military decisionmaking process .............................. 3-11
Table 4-1. Sample stockage level for engineer Class IV supply point ................................... 4-8
Table 9-1. Sample construction standards ............................................................................. 9-6
Table 9-2. Minimum distances between facilities ................................................................. 9-12
Table 10-1. Example of base camp estimated solid-waste disposal in tons per day ......... 10-12
Table 11-1. Example of estimated power plant sizes, in kilowatts ....................................... 11-8
Table A-1. Metric conversion chart .........................................................................................A-1
Table B-1. Summary table—base camp engineer construction effort....................................B-1
Table B-2. Summary table—base camp aggregate requirements .........................................B-2
Table B-3. Construction effort—site preparation requirements ..............................................B-2
Table B-4. Construction effort—facilities requirements (temporary to semipermanent
standard/temperate climate/wood frame) ...........................................................B-3
Table B-5. Motor park .............................................................................................................B-4
Table B-6. Soldier or Marine support facilities ........................................................................B-4
Table B-7. Covered/open storage requirements for 14 days of stockage ..............................B-4
Table B-8. Cold storage requirements for 14 days of stockage .............................................B-5
Table B-9. Fuel storage ..........................................................................................................B-5
Table B-10. Soldier or Marine housing ...................................................................................B-5
Table B-11. Quality-of-life standards for tentage....................................................................B-5
Table B-12. Selected tentage planning factors ......................................................................B-6
Table B-13. General planning factors for potable and nonpotable water requirements.........B-6
Table B-14. Selected transportation information ....................................................................B-7

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 iii

This page intentionally left blank.
Preface
This manual provides general engineering (GE) doctrine for the United States (U.S.) Army and U.S. Marine
Corps. This manual is linked to joint and U.S. Army doctrine to ensure its usefulness for joint and U.S. Army
commanders and staffs. To comprehend the doctrine contained in this manual, readers must first understand the
nature of unified land operations as described in ADP 3-0 and ADRP 3-0, joint engineer functions discussed in
JP 3-34 and NWP 4-04, and U.S. Army engineer disciplines discussed in FM 3-34.
In addition, readers must also fully understand the discussion of engineer operations at echelons above brigade
in ATTP 3-34.23, the fundamentals of assured mobility found in ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.5 and ATP 3-
90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, the discussion of Seabee operations in the Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF) found in
NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5, the discussion of base camps found in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N, and the
protection tasks discussed in ADP 3-37 and ADRP 3-37.
The principal audience for this manual is all members of the military profession of arms. Commanders and
staffs of U.S. Army and Marine headquarters serving as joint task force or multinational headquarters should
also refer to applicable joint or multinational doctrine concerning the range of military operations and joint or
multinational forces. This manual will be used in training and by educators throughout the U.S. Army and U.S.
Marine Corps. The other intended audiences for this publication are the leaders and staff sections within
engineer units that are required to conduct GE tasks.
Commanders, staffs, and subordinates ensure that their decisions and actions comply with applicable U.S.,
international and, in some cases, host nation (HN) laws and regulations. Commanders at all levels ensure that
Soldiers and Marines operate according to the law of war and the rules of engagement. (See FM 27-10.)
Unless stated otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.
Appendix A contains a metric conversion chart for the measurements used in this manual. For a complete listing
of preferred metric units for general use, see Federal Standard 376B.
This manual uses the term planning process to indicate the military decisionmaking process (MDMP)/U.S.
Marine Corps planning process and troop leading procedures. This manual uses the term mission variables to
indicate the U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps uses of the term. For the U.S. Army, mission variables consist of
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, and civil considerations
(METT-TC). For the U.S. Marine Corps (and in joint doctrine), mission variables consist of mission, enemy,
terrain and weather, troops and support available–time available.
This manual uses the term operational variables to indicate the U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps uses of the
term. For the U.S. Army, operational variables consist of political, military, economic, social, information,
infrastructure, physical environment, and time. For the U.S. Marine Corps (and in joint doctrine), operational
variables consist of political, military, economic, social, information, and infrastructure.
This publication uses joint terms where applicable. When this manual uses two terms separated by a slash (/),
the first term is the U.S. Army term and the second term is the U.S. Marine Corps term. For example, U.S.
Army sustainment and U.S. Marine Corps combat service support are written in this manual as
sustainment/combat service support. Selected joint, U.S. Army, and U.S. Marine Corps terms and definitions
appear in the glossary and the text. For definitions shown in the text, the term is italicized and the number of the
proponent publication follows the definition. This publication is not the proponent for any U.S. Army terms.
This publication applies to the Active U.S. Army, U.S. Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the
United States, U.S. Army Reserve, U.S. Marine Corps, and U.S. Marine Corps Reserve unless otherwise stated.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 iv

Preface

The U.S. Army proponent of this publication is the U.S. Army Engineer School. The preparing agency is the
Maneuver Support Center of Excellence Capabilities Development and Integration Directorate; Concepts,
Organizations, and Doctrine Development Division; Doctrine Branch. Send comments and recommendations on
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Commander, U.S. Army
Maneuver Support Center of Excellence, ATTN: ATZT-CDC, 14000 MSCoE Loop, Suite 270, Fort Leonard
Wood, MO 65473-8929; e-mail the DA Form 2028 to <usarmy.leonardwood.mscoe.mbx.cdidcodddengdoc
@mail.mil>; or submit an electronic DA Form 2028.
Marine Corps personnel should submit suggestions and changes by e-mail to <[email protected]> or by mail
to Deputy Commandant for Combat Development and Integration, ATTN: C116, 3300 Russell Road, Suite 204,
Quantico, VA 22134-5021.

v ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Introduction
General Engineering provides doctrine for the conduct of GE support by the U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps.
It emphasizes the GE unity of effort by providing a common philosophy, language, and purpose. GE is a joint
function and a U.S. Army discipline. This manual discusses how GE enables commanders to achieve their
objectives in supporting joint and U.S. Army operations. This publication also introduces subordinate doctrine.
This revision of the December 2008, Army-only FM 3-34.400 (now obsolete) makes this manual a multi-
Service publication with the U.S. Marine Corps. This manual builds on the collective knowledge, wisdom, and
military expertise gained through recent operations, numerous lessons learned, and doctrine revisions. This
doctrine has also been adjusted to reduce the duplication of technical detail already contained in the referenced
subordinate manuals.
This publication describes how engineer commanders, staffs, and subordinate leaders conduct GE to support
U.S. Army and Marine forces within the framework of joint operations. Additional considerations for engineer
operations in coalition operations are reviewed in Allied Joint Publication 3-12 Allied Joint Doctrine for Joint
Engineering and Allied Tactical Publication -52 Edition B, Land Force Combat Engineer Doctrine.
The following is a brief introduction and summary of changes by chapter:
 Chapter 1 discusses GE as a joint and U.S. Marine Corps engineer function and a U.S. Army
engineer discipline. It introduces the new GE life cycle activities of planning, design, construction,
operation, maintenance, transfer, and closure that are used to frame the discussion in other chapters.
It then discusses employment considerations for GE.
 Chapter 2 describes GE support across the range of military operations at theater, operational, and
tactical levels.
 Chapter 3 provides an overview of GE planning and design that is discussed in detail within other
chapters.
 Chapter 4 discusses construction and introduces multi-Service doctrine on project management and
estimating. This chapter discusses methods of construction and construction material procurement
and production. It adds the framework of construction techniques that are discussed in numerous
subordinate technical manuals.
 Chapter 5 provides an overview of seaports. Seaports could be used for deployment and
redeployment as a seaport of debarkation or as a seaport of embarkation. It includes a discussion on
planning and design, construction, operation, maintenance, and logistics over-the-shore (LOTS)
support.
 Chapter 6 provides an overview of airfields and heliports aligned with revised subordinate doctrine to
include planning and design, construction, operation, and maintenance.
 Chapter 7 provides an overview of roads and railroads aligned with revised subordinate doctrine to
include planning and design, construction, operation, and maintenance.
 Chapter 8 discusses an overview of bridging to include bridge types, planning and design,
construction, operation, and maintenance.
 Chapter 9 merges discussion of base camps and bed-down facilities that includes support area
facilities. It discusses a GE overview of base camps, aligned with ATP 3-37.10/Marine Corps
Reference Publication (MCRP) 3-17.7N. It also includes base camp responsibilities, Service
capabilities, planning and design, standards, site layout, and construction.
 Chapter 10 discusses real estate and provides an overview of real property maintenance that is
covered in detail within the other chapters of this manual. It deletes the use of the term real property
maintenance activities and only discusses real property maintenance.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 vi

Introduction

 Chapter 11 discusses electrical power systems and design considerations for reliability, efficiency,
and scalability. It also discusses the emerging requirements to store electricity and incorporate
renewable sources of energy. It provides an overview of Service capabilities and electrical safety
requirements.
 Chapter 12 discusses GE support to the sustainment/combat service support water functions of
production and distribution. The chapter discusses well drilling and includes water production and
distribution responsibilities, planning and design, Service capabilities, employment, and operations.
It expands discussion on water distribution within facilities as a plumbing task.
The GE doctrine provided in this manual presents an overview of a wide range of topics and allows the reader
to understand how the topics fit together. The engineer must refer to the referenced materials throughout the
manual to gain a complete understanding of the GE life cycle activities. This manual is not meant to be a
substitute for the creative thought, innovation, and initiative among engineer leaders, Soldiers, or Marines.
Rather, its intent is to build, enhance, and strengthen their present knowledge and understanding. General
engineers take their training, experience, capabilities, and understanding of doctrine and apply them to solve
and unravel unique and obscure challenges to meet operational needs. Based on current doctrinal changes, a
term for which this manual was the proponent has been modified for the purposes of this publication. (See
introductory table-1 for the specific term change.)

Introductory table-1. Modified U.S. Army term

Term Remarks
airfield damage repair Retained based on common English usage; no longer defined

vii ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 1
General Engineering as a Discipline and Function
GE is a U.S. Army engineer discipline (see FM 3-34) and a joint engineer function
(see JP 3-34). GE complements and supports combat engineering (mobility,
countermobility, and survivability) and geospatial engineering and encompasses
those engineer tasks that establish and maintain the infrastructure required to conduct
and sustain military operations. Such tasks are conducted with unified action partners
and are integrated into the force commander’s plan (ADRP 3-0). This force may be
led by any one of the Services, and GE support may come from any or all Service
engineers, contractors, HN capabilities, or the engineers of other nations (ADRP 4-0).
GE occurs throughout the area of operations (AO) and across the range of military
operations. This chapter discusses GE employment considerations and provides
guidance on integrating and synchronizing GE with joint theater and maneuver
commanders’ strategic, operational, and tactical plans. It also introduces the GE life
cycle activities and employment considerations for engineering that are used to frame
discussions in the other chapters in this manual.

LIFE CYCLE ACTIVITIES

1-1. GE life cycle activities are used to view the major activities required to produce a desired effect. GE
life cycle activities are conducted during the life cycle of an operation or during the life cycle of a specific
project. To effectively and efficiently conduct any single GE life cycle activity, all life cycle activities must
be considered together with their interrelationships and their impact on other activities. These life cycle
activities should not be viewed separately or be conducted alone, because each activity impacts the other.
For example, the designer should complete a design based on planning guidance, consider the ability of the
military unit to quickly construct the design, and consider the impact of the design on operation and
maintenance (O&M). Each life cycle activity is considered in an economic evaluation of life cycle costs.
1-2. GE life cycle activities include—
 Planning and design.
 Construction.
 Operation.
 Maintenance.
 Transfer and closure.

PLANNING AND DESIGN

1-3. GE planning includes conceptual, detailed, and master planning. Significant GE will be conducted in
the joint operations area (JOA), so an understanding of joint planning and other Service planning and
capabilities is required. (See CJCSM 3122.05, FM 3-34, JP 1, JP 3-34, and JP 5-0 for more information on
joint planning.)
1-4. Design should not be confused with the U.S. Army design methodology (or operational design)
discussed in ADRP 3-0 and ADRP 5-0. Design in this manual is an extension of planning that matches and
links engineering principles and construction means against mission requirements to create the necessary
engineering and construction details needed for building and dismantling facilities and infrastructure. The
general life cycle activities of planning and design are interdependent, although both apply critical and
creative thinking to understand, visualize, and describe unfamiliar problems and the approaches to solving
them.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-1

Chapter 1

CONSTRUCTION
1-5. Construction is the art or process of building or assembling structures such as base camps, bed-down
facilities, or infrastructures. It consists of a wide range of activities, methods, and techniques used to
combine individual parts and to assemble resources together to create a greater whole. Construction is
performed by military units, contractor personnel authorized to accompany the force (CAAF), and non-
CAAF to accompany the force. Facilities and infrastructure are built using various methods that are
evaluated and determined during planning and design.

Baseline General Engineer Units

1-6. Baseline general engineer units that support construction efforts are vertical companies, horizontal
companies, and engineer support companies. Their capabilities are discussed in detail in FM 3-34 and ATP
3-34.22.

Specialized Engineer Units

1-7. Specialized engineer units that support general engineers in construction efforts include engineer
facilities detachments, engineer utilities detachments, survey and design teams, firefighting teams,
construction management teams, real estate teams, diving teams, asphalt teams, concrete teams, well-
drilling teams, geospatial teams, quarry teams, and prime power teams.
1-8. Specialized engineer unit capabilities are applied in augmenting and enhancing GE efforts as
described by the following:
 Dive teams assist in seaport or bridging efforts.
 Asphalt teams assist in paving operations for airfields and roads.
 Quarry teams assist in quarry, borrow pit, and rock-crushing operations.
 Concrete sections assist in concrete production.
 Engineer facilities detachments and engineer utilities detachments assist in facility assessments,
inspections, services, maintenance, and repair.
 Construction management teams, topographic units, equipment support platoons, survey and
design teams, and geospatial planning cells assist in infrastructure efforts.
 Engineer prime power teams plan and design power systems and install, operate, and maintain
deployable prime power systems.
1-9. Specialized engineer unit organizations and capabilities are discussed in detail in FM 3-34 and
ATP 3-34.22.

OPERATION
1-10. This manual discusses the operation of engineer-specific equipment and systems that produce
engineering effects. The operation of these systems usually requires specifically designed, equipped,
organized, and trained units or trained individuals. Some facility engineer organization examples include
facility engineer detachments and engineer utilities detachments. Some equipment or system examples are
power systems, waste treatment systems, and float bridges. The tasks of O&M are often grouped together
but are sometimes separated in this manual because the engineer may be required to maintain some things
that they are not required to operate, such as an airfield that is operated by a U.S. Army aviation unit.
1-11. Base camp operation is the O&M of the base camp physical plant and the provision of base camp
services and support measures that are needed to achieve the purpose of the base camp and to fulfill
functional requirements. The skills needed for operating and managing base camps do not reside in any
single branch or functional area. A grouping of capabilities is required to produce synergic effects within
the base camp. Success hinges on placing the right people with the right skill sets at the right time.
Shortfalls in skills or capabilities at base camps are filled through tenant units, augmentation reachback
measures, or contracted support methods. (See ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for additional information on
base camp operations.)

1-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

MAINTENANCE
1-12. Maintenance is the process of keeping facilities and infrastructure in good working condition so that
they can continue functionality and good service for the community they support. Engineers review
maintenance service records, conduct physical inspections, order parts, request services, and schedule
repair or service maintenance of individual facilities or of the overall infrastructure.
1-13. Facility maintenance responsibility has always been a teamwork process for the following reasons:
 The commander has the overall responsibility to ensure that maintenance gets the proper
attention it deserves and the adequate resources it requires. The commander leads the
maintenance efforts.
 The using units or tenant units are responsible for properly maintaining their own facilities.
Because they use the facilities on a daily basis, they are responsible for performing routine
upkeep and for reporting facility maintenance issues beyond their repair capabilities.
 Engineers are responsible for assisting in facility maintenance areas that are beyond the training
and expertise of tenant units. This includes providing engineer expertise and resources to resolve
facility maintenance issues and bringing in external specialized engineering services. Engineers
can conduct facility assessments, inspections, services, maintenance, and repair.
1-14. This manual discusses the maintenance of completed GE projects and engineer-specific equipment
and systems. Maintenance and repair tasks are also often grouped together but are sometimes separated in
this manual because engineers may be responsible for repairing some things that they are not responsible
for maintaining, such as a finished well that has been turned over to a logistics unit for O&M.
1-15. The life cycle activities of O&M are discussed within the chapters of this manual for each specific
area. This manual discusses specific O&M requirements for construction, seaports, airfields, heliports,
roads, railroads, bridges, base camps, real estate, power systems, and water production.

TRANSFER AND CLOSURE

1-16. All or part of the facilities may be transferred, destroyed, abandoned, or closed. See ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for a discussion on the transfer and closure of base camps.
1-17. The combatant commander (CCDR) develops policies and procedures for transfer and closure as part
of the theater-based strategy. GE supports the overall plan to transfer or close facilities. Engineers have
specific procedures to transfer individual projects or facilities, such as bridges or drilled wells. Transfer and
closure has documentation requirements to maintain and archive records and documents. The planned end
state for each facility is considered during each GE life cycle activity.

EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
1-18. General engineering consists of those engineering capabilities and activities, other than combat
engineering, that modify, maintain, or protect the physical environment (JP 3-34). GE encompasses the
engineer tasks that establish and maintain the infrastructure required to conduct and sustain military
operations. Examples include the construction, repair, maintenance, and operation of infrastructure,
facilities, line of communications (LOC), bases, terrain modification and repair, and selected explosive
hazard activities. (See JP 3-34.)
1-19. This manual serves as the primary reference for planning and executing GE as an engineer function
at the U.S. Marine Corps level and as an engineer discipline at the U.S. Army level. It is directly linked to
ADRP 3-0, FM 3-34, and JP 3-34.
1-20. GE is the most diverse of the three interrelated engineer functions and is usually the largest
percentage of all engineer support provided to an operation. GE missions are typically performed in a joint,
interagency, and multinational environment. Besides occurring throughout the AOs at all levels of war and
aside from being executed during every type of military operation, GE may employ many of the engineer
military occupational specialties within the U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-3

Chapter 1

1-21. GE units are organized and equipped to respond to requirements across the range of military
operations. Engineer units with a GE mission must be trained and prepared to integrate engineer disciplines
or functions to support the maneuver commander. They must also be able to use and integrate geospatial
products into their operations and be capable of conducting limited combat engineering functions to
facilitate the construction mission. General engineers must be technically and tactically proficient to
conduct tasks across the range of military operations. They must also be well trained in small-unit tactics,
including convoy security, work site security, and limited offensive operations.
1-22. GE includes—
 Constructing or repairing existing logistics support facilities, supply and LOC routes (including
bridges and roads), airfields, ports, water wells, power systems, water and fuel pipelines, base
camps, and force bed-down facilities. (Firefighting and engineer dive operations may be critical
enablers to these tasks.)
 Conducting engineer tasks through a modified table of organization and equipment or through
the United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE).
 Conducting engineer tasks by using a combination of joint engineer units, civilian contractors,
HN forces, or allied engineer capabilities. (As the AO matures, the GE effort may transfer to
civilian contractors, such as to those who operate under the logistics civil augmentation
program).
 Incorporating field force engineering (FFE) to leverage capabilities throughout the Engineer
Regiment. (This includes linkages that facilitate engineer reachback.)
 Requiring various engineer reconnaissance measures and assessments to be performed before, or
early on in, a particular mission. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4.)
 Supporting disaster preparedness planning, response, and defense support of civil authorities
(DSCA). (See ADP 3-28.)
 Acquiring and disposing of real estate and real property.
 Supporting the engineer protection planning and construction tasks that are not considered
survivability tasks under combat engineering.
 Conducting camouflage, concealment, and deception tasks. (See ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.)
 Performing environmental support engineering missions.
 Conducting base or area denial missions.
 Obtaining large quantities of construction materials, which must be planned and provided for in
a timely manner.
 Producing construction materials.
 Integrating environmental considerations.
 Clearing areas of unexploded ordnance and mines before job tasks are executed if combat
engineers are not available.
 Reducing obstacles in an unopposed or nonhostile environment.

GENERAL ENGINEERING SUPPORT

1-23. GE supports combat engineering (including mobility operations and countermobility operations),
enhances protection (including survivability), enables force projection and logistics, builds partner
capacities, and develops infrastructure.

COMBAT ENGINEER SUPPORT

1-24. Countermobility operations is the construction of obstacles and emplacement of minefields to delay,
disrupt, and destroy the enemy by reinforcement of the terrain (JP 3-34). GE may support combat
engineers, but GE normally supports countermobility with earthwork and timber construction in the support
or sustainment area for operational area security and survivability. (See ATP 3-90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, FM 3-
34, and JP 3-34 for additional information on countermobility.)

1-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

1-25. GE support to combat engineering efforts is not limited to countermobility. If combat engineering
assets are completely committed or if they exceed combat engineering capabilities and the situation
requires augmentation or greater engineer support, general engineers may be tasked to assist mobility units
or be assigned other tasks. However, the primary focus of GE is to develop infrastructure to support
mobility, force projection, logistics, base camps, force bed-down facilities, stability operations, and DSCA.

FORCE PROTECTION
1-26. GE enhances protection areas through the planning, design, construction, maintenance, and
hardening of facilities, including—
 Operational area security.
 Antiterrorism measures.
 Survivability.
 Detainee and resettlement operations.

FORCE PROJECTION
1-27. GE enables force projection by the planning, design, and construction to deploy forces. This includes
peacetime locations, intermediate staging bases, support accesses, and force bed-down facilities.

LOGISTICS
1-28. GE enables logistics by the planning, design, construction, maintenance, and repair of LOC, base
camps, and bed-down facilities. LOCs support logistics but are not incorporated into this consideration area
of logistics.

PARTNER CAPACITY
1-29. GE builds partner capacity by training and developing local leaders and engineer assets and by
involving the local community. General engineers develop partner infrastructure and perform tasks
alongside partner engineers to develop physical and engineer capacities.
1-30. Engineer partnerships can be local, national, joint, interagency, or multinational, based on the mutual
cooperation to achieve common engineering goals and purposes. Partnerships can be beneficial in sharing
construction efforts, ideas, or techniques, which leads to overall improvements. An example of building
capacity is the USACE assistance with a water resource study and engineer unit completion of water
infrastructure projects with HN involvement.
1-31. General engineers may be involved in building partner capacity in the development of infrastructure.
Engineers combine the capabilities of all three disciplines to build partner capacity and develop
infrastructure, which is vital to stability and counterinsurgency tasks that yield the greatest return. Partner
capacity building is not exclusively limited to only performing GE tasks; it can also include other tasks to
achieve the overall purpose and desired effect. (For example, performing GE tasks that enable force
projection and logistics that change the manner in which the task is executed.)
1-32. The overall purpose of building partner capacity is to support the commander in improving the
conditions of HN leaders, institutions, and infrastructure development capabilities and influencing them to
achieve military objectives for self–defense. (See FM 3-34 for more information on building partner
capacity.)
1-33. In support of building partner capacity, GE tasks may include—
 Building, repairing, and maintaining various infrastructure facilities.
 Providing essential services.
 Building roads to improve economic conditions using local labor resources.
 Assisting the local population in improving the quality of drinking water systems.
 Training, educating, and developing local leaders and engineers in public works projects,
including exchange programs and conferences to build stronger relations and bonds.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-5

Chapter 1

 Developing local engineer projects that involve the community to a greater degree, such as parks
and recreational centers that improve the quality of life.
 Using geospatial engineers and USACE resources to assist in locating and mapping local water
sources.
 Improving local water distribution systems, such as adding pumping stations or constructing new
water wells.

INFRASTRUCTURE
1-34. GE develops infrastructure to support mobility, force projection, logistics, base camps, force bed-
down facilities, stability operations, and DSCA. Infrastructure support includes construction, rehabilitation,
repair, maintenance, and modification to landing strips, airfields, check points, main supply routes (MSRs),
LOC, supply installations, building structures, bridges, and other related aspects.
1-35. General engineer units (in support of infrastructure development) may also perform repair and
limited reconstruction of railroads or water and waste facilities. The basic capabilities of general engineer
units can be expanded by augmenting them with additional personnel, equipment, and training from
specialized engineer units or other sources. Such augmentation can expand general engineer capabilities to
conduct bituminous mixing and paving, quarrying and crushing, pipeline support construction, and dive
support to complete major construction projects (highways, storage facilities, seaports, airfields).
1-36. Specialized engineer units also support infrastructure efforts. GE infrastructure capabilities can be
expanded with assistance from—
 Forward engineer support teams who are subordinate to FFE.
 Laboratories and research centers, such as the USACE Reachback Operations Center.
 Centers of expertise (USACE, Naval Facilities Engineering Command [NAVFAC], U.S. Army
Engineer School).
 FFE.
 Search and rescue companies.
 Technical rescue teams.

UNIVERSAL JOINT TASK LIST

1-37. CJCSM 3500.04F contains a hierarchical listing of tasks that are performed by a joint military force.
The manual provides a common language and reference system for joint commanders, staffs, planners,
combat developers, and trainers. As applied to joint training, the Universal Joint Task List is a key element
of the requirements-based mission for task analysis. It contains strategic national and theater operational
and tactical tasks. Each task contains measures of performance and criteria that support its definition.
1-38. At the tactical level, the Universal Joint Task List links the operational tasks to tactical tasks by
requiring the Services to produce Service-specific tactical task lists. For example—
 For the U.S. Army, this is codified in FM 7-15. Although an analysis of the Universal Joint Task
List is important, the most relevant links for GE tasks (since they are typically considered
tactical tasks in this hierarchy) are in FM 7-15, which outlines GE tasks that units may use as a
source to establish their mission-essential task list and the U.S. Army tactical tasks that are
subordinate to providing GE support. While there may be examples of GE tasks not listed under
U.S. Army tactical tasks, the vast majority are included in these subtasks.
 For the U.S. Marine Corps, this is codified in the Universal Naval Task List. The Universal
Naval Task List outlines Marine GE and combat engineering tasks. The Marine engineers
develop the mission-essential task list from these and other documents in support of the
commander’s assigned mission.

PRIMARY AND SUBORDINATE TASKS

1-39. GE primary tasks provide a construct to categorize the tasks performed during GE life cycle
activities. The following paragraphs include the typical subordinate tasks for each GE primary task.

1-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

1-40. Conduct general engineer life cycle activities tasks, which include—
 Perform GE planning.
 Perform GE design.
 Perform GE construction.
 Perform GE operation.
 Perform GE maintenance.

1-41. Perform GE planning and design tasks, which include—

 Determine requirements.
 Determine standards.
 Develop GE options.
 Conduct engineering reconnaissance.
 Perform site reconnaissance and site selection.
 Produce site layout.
 Perform economic analysis.
 Recommend GE priorities, including engineer effort, construction, material, allocation, and
contractor support.
 Perform master planning.
 Perform program and project management.

1-42. Provide engineer construction support tasks, which include—

 Perform construction planning and estimating.
 Perform project management.
 Procure construction materials.
 Produce construction materials.
 Perform construction techniques.

1-43. Construct and maintain LOC tasks, which include—

 Construct and maintain seaports of debarkation.
 Construct and maintain airfields and heliports.
 Construct and maintain roads and railroads.
 Construct and maintain bridges.

1-44. Construct and maintain base camp and force bed-down facilities tasks, which include—
 Perform bed-down development planning.
 Perform base camp development planning.
 Perform planning and facilities design.
 Perform existing facilities conversion.
 Conduct site selection and layout.
 Construct base camps.
 Provide force bed-down facilities.
 Perform facilities O&M.

1-45. Perform real estate and real property maintenance activities tasks, which include—
 Acquire real estate.
 Manage real estate.
 Manage utilities.
 Transfer real estate and real property.

1-46. Provide power system support tasks, which include—

 Assess power system requirements.
 Plan and design power systems.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-7

Chapter 1

 Construct, install, and connect power systems.

 Operate and maintain power systems.
 Expand or deconstruct power systems.
 Provide base closure support.
1-47. Support water production and distribution tasks, which include—
 Perform water planning and design.
 Support field water supply.
 Perform water detection.
 Conduct well-drilling operations.
 Support water production and distribution.
 Perform plumbing, pipefitting, and sewage operations.

GENERAL ENGINEERING IN CONTIGUOUS AND NONCONTIGUOUS AREAS

1-48. Commanders visualize the concept of operations and describe their intent in the AO in spatial terms
of deep, close, and security operations. These terms are more useful to general engineers when such
operations are contiguous and against a clearly defined symmetric enemy force. The operational
environment may seldom allow the commander the luxury of describing the AO in such terms. The
situation will most likely consist of noncontiguous operations against an enemy. Figure 1-1 graphically
describes a possible means by which the commander may visualize the AO.

Legend:
AO area of operations
BCT brigade combat team

Figure 1-1. Contiguous, noncontiguous, and unassigned areas

1-49. The concept of contiguous and noncontiguous operations includes the following:
 A contiguous area of operations is where all of a commander’s subordinate forces’ areas of
operations share one or more common boundaries (FM 3-90-1). Because they share some
boundaries, units can more easily pool resources together and plan a common defense.
 A noncontiguous area of operations is where one or more of the commander’s subordinate
force’s areas of operation do not share a common boundary (FM 3-90-1). This makes it difficult
to share resources and plan a common defense due to geographic distance or separation.

1-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

1-50. The combination of contiguous and noncontiguous operations that the commander selects impacts
the planning and execution of GE tasks for the following reasons:
 In a contiguous AO, GE tasks are typically performed to the rear of division boundaries by
engineer units assigned to higher echelon headquarters.
 In a less contiguous AO, GE tasks are required in forward areas in proximity to combat units.
Because GE assets are not organic to the brigade combat team (BCT), the BCT is normally
augmented with the necessary engineer assets to perform GE tasks within the BCT AO. The
types of GE assets that will augment the BCT depend on the types of missions to be
accomplished and the availability of engineers. Selected GE tasks may need to be performed by
combat engineers. (See FM 3-90-1, JP 3-0, and JP 3-34 for additional information on contiguous
and noncontiguous operations.)
1-51. The impact of the noncontiguous battlefield on GE tasks is numerous and includes increased—
 Work site security. Because units perform GE near forward elements, contact with the enemy is
much more likely. Units conducting GE tasks must be proficient in combat operations to provide
for their own defense against such threats. Commanders directing the performance of GE
missions must treat these missions like any combat operation and protect personnel. General
engineers who focus on combat operations cannot focus on performing GE missions and tasks. It
benefits the maneuver commander to keep general engineers out of close combat operations and
focused on GE missions and tasks.
 General and local work site security. During contiguous operations, units receive general
security from forward maneuver units. Local security is performed by internal assets. On the
noncontiguous battlefield, units face the same threat level as maneuver units operating in the
AO. In addition, there is the loss of ability to mass when attached or placed in direct support.
 Numbers and lengths of LOCs and MSRs. With construction and maintenance of these assets
critical to sustainment/combat service support operations, the noncontiguous battlefield greatly
increases the GE effort required. Engineer planners can expect smaller-sized units to be spread
over greater geographic distances than during contiguous operations. Increased personnel
security along those routes is needed, and greater convoy security measures are required.
 Facility construction efforts. Units operate with more autonomy within their own AO and
require facilities for deployment, supply, maintenance, and other sustainment/combat service
support activities.
 Possibility of combat engineer units conducting additional GE tasks. Maneuver commanders
at BCT, regimental combat team, and higher levels must be able to task organic or assigned
combat engineer elements to conduct selected GE tasks. However, Marine engineers are task-
organized and can have different command relationships than other services. Regimental combat
teams do not have organic engineer units but can be designated engineer units in direct and
general support relationships, unless otherwise directed. Some tasks can be performed without
augmentation. A conscious trade-off of potential combat engineering tasks possibly being
performed must precede a commander’s decision to have these tasks executed. Selected
additional GE can be performed by combat engineer units when they receive additional
specialized equipment and expertise. However, combat engineers cannot perform all GE tasks.
 Likelihood of GE assets being task-organized to a much lower level. Because of the great
distances involved in a noncontiguous AO and the impact on the geographical span of control,
engineer commanders may not effectively provide GE efforts in a manner that is responsive to
maneuver commander needs without a decentralization of authority. These assets can be placed
in direct support or attached to BCTs to provide timely and responsive GE support.

GENERAL ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES

1-52. In the pursuit to improve effectiveness, achieve greater efficiency, and retain best practices,
engineers have attained numerous principles to aid them in their profession. These have been retained due
to their continuing importance, relevance, and value. A principle is a comprehensive and fundamental law
or an assumption of central importance that describes how an organization or function approaches the

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-9

Chapter 1

conduct of operations. Principles are considerations that should guide the employment of an organization or
function.
1-53. GE is guided by—
 Sustainability.
 Scalability.
 Modularity.
 Standardization.

Sustainability
1-54. GE solutions should be sustainable. The solutions may be a facility, a service, a technique, or a
procedure. There are many elements of sustainability that GE applies to achieve greater efficiencies for
increased effectiveness. Sustainability helps achieve increased effectiveness through increased operational
efficiencies, reduced logistics requirements, and reduced costs.
1-55. GE pursues the goal of delivering effective, resilient, sustainable, and efficient solutions. There is a
balance between efficiency and effectiveness. Sometimes operational requirements allow the balance to
shift to increased efficiency. At other times, operational requirements shift the balance toward increased
effectiveness, regardless of efficiency. When conditions permit, sustainable design and construction
practices should be considered during the development of GE solutions.
1-56. GE integrates and supports sustainability by—
 Applying sustainable design, construction, and O&M practices.
 Developing cost-effective solutions by using available resources to produce desired results.
 Developing more efficient solutions that reduce the consumption of resources (energy, water,
labor, equipment, time, materials, money).
 Reducing demands on sustainment/combat service support systems.
 Reducing energy consumption by reducing demand, enhancing efficiencies, and using renewable
energy sources.
 Developing sustainable facilities and infrastructures. (Reduce, recycle, and reuse waste with
solutions that are simple and inexpensive to operate, maintain, and repair.)
 Developing initial life cycle planning cost estimates and economic analysis.

Notes.

1. See UFC 1-200-02 for additional information on sustainable development.

2. See ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for more information on sustainable base camps.

3. See FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B for more information on sustainable environmental

considerations.

Scalability
1-57. GE solutions should be scalable. Scalable solutions can be easily expanded or contracted to meet
changing requirements without the need to redesign. Scalable solutions remain efficient and practical when
applied to a larger or smaller requirement.
1-58. The use of modular and multifunctional designs and systems contribute to scalability. Some
comprehensive, scalable GE solutions are integrated and developed at the joint and Service level.

Modularity
1-59. GE solutions should be modular. GE modular solutions contribute to scalability, but solutions may be
scalable without being modular. Modularity is the degree to which system components may be separated or
recombined. For example, standard military bridges are modular. A large project or system combines

1-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

smaller subprojects or systems. The use of modular systems and prefabricated or preengineered
components is maximized to facilitate rapid development and achieve scalability.
1-60. Modular construction techniques use standard materials and component sizes to build a single
structure or mass-produce components of the structure for quicker assembly. The use of modular
construction techniques does not ensure that the design is scalable.

Standardization
1-61. GE solutions should be standardized. Standardizing plans, designs, and construction methods or
techniques simplifies maintenance and repair. Standardization—
 Reduces uncertainty in meeting mandatory requirements and provides for more accurate
estimates of materials, schedules, and costs.
 Helps to improve and sustain proficiency and readiness through the universal application of
approved practices and procedures.
 Reduces the adverse effects of personnel turbulence associated with reassignments and
facilitates interoperability between different organizations.
 Uses standardized, scalable, and adaptable designs and construction methods.
 Simplifies construction programming activities, improves early planning techniques, and
provides consistency in solution deliveries.
 Uses standard solutions for one set of requirements that can be modified or adapted to meet
similar requirements.
 Reduces costs and inventory requirements without having to maintain large inventories of
diverse parts or equipment.
 Increases sustainability.
 Seeks to standardize Service construction standards to provide commanders with consistent
expectations and the use of proven best practices and tactics, techniques, and procedures. (A
standard solution may not always be the best solution to meet unique requirements.)
1-62. An example of standardization is the development of the Unified Facilities Criteria. This is a
Department of Defense (DOD)-developed standardized facility planning, design, construction, and O&M
criteria system for use by all Service components. The Theater Construction Management System (TCMS)
contains standardized data that engineers can use to construct a variety of buildings.

Other Key Considerations

1-63. There are other key considerations for the application of GE in an AO. These include—
 Speed.
 Economy.
 Flexibility.
 Authority decentralization.
 Priority establishment.

1-64. Effective proactive planning and engineer initiative combine to accomplish challenges inherent in
each of the considerations discussed in the following paragraphs.

Speed
1-65. Speed is fundamental to all activities in an AO. Given the tendency for GE tasks to be resource-
intensive in time, materials, manpower, and equipment, speed is often most critical. Proper planning and
prioritization are essential to achieve the desired GE effect. Key practices that best support speed include—
 Proper prior planning. Speed is a relative term if the planning before the operation did not set
the conditions for facilitating real speed in terms of mission accomplishment. Speed requires
effective, broad, inclusive, proactive, and synchronized planning across all staff sections and
engineer capabilities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-11

Chapter 1

 Existing facility use. Engineer units must rapidly provide facilities that enable forces to deliver
maximum combat power. The use of existing facilities greatly contributes to achieving speed by
eliminating unnecessary construction support. The use of existing ports, pipelines, warehouses,
airfields, and roads during operations is critical. Commanders and staffs must be capable of
planning and conducting real estate and real property acquisition to facilitate this effort. Often,
the joint force commander (JFC) must effectively negotiate with the host government for HN
support to use existing facilities. In mature theaters, such as the Republic of Korea, status of
forces agreements may dictate procedures for using existing facilities.
 Standardization. Standard materials and plans save time and construction efforts and permit the
streamlining of production line methods, including the prefabrication of structural members.
Standardized assembly and erecting procedures increase work crew efficiency by reducing the
number of methods and techniques required. This supports simplicity. Standardization between
Service engineers is essential for success.
 Simplification. The simplicity of design and construction reduces requirements when faced with
limited manpower resources, materials, and time allowances. When scarce resources are
available, simple methods and materials allow installation in a minimum amount of time. This
may also allow HN labor use to support construction.
 Bare-bones construction. Military construction in an AO is characterized by using the
minimum necessities when possible. The theater commander must make the decision on
construction standards early in the planning process.
 Phased construction. Phased construction allows for the rapid completion of critical
components of buildings or installations and uses these components for their intended purpose.
Engineers primarily use the Gantt chart as a tool to plan and track progress.

Economy
1-66. GE in an AO requires the efficient use of personnel, equipment, and materials. To most effectively
accomplish the tasks assigned to engineers, it is necessary for commanders to carefully consider
augmentation requirements. General engineer units are very capable of accomplishing their assigned tasks;
however, they are designed to accomplish specific types of tasks. Therefore, it is imperative that the proper
assets be allocated from the engineer force pool when task-organizing engineers. Proper proactive planning
is the first step in the application of economy. Other considerations include—
 Conserving manpower. Construction tasks are time-consuming, and engineer commanders
must deal with engineer and construction worker shortages. Labor must be conserved, and every
engineer must function at the peak of efficiency for long hours to accomplish the GE mission.
Careful planning and coordination of personnel are necessary. Missions must be well organized
and supervised, and personnel must be carefully allocated for the task. Selected GE tasks can be
performed by combat engineers but require a conscious decision by the commander to trade off
one set of engineer capabilities to further GE tasks.
 Conserving equipment. Military construction equipment might be in short supply, particularly
at the beginning of a contingency operation. The operational capability of equipment may be
impaired by shortages in repair parts and maintenance personnel. A possible solution is to
contract for local equipment and repair parts to alleviate shortages. The preventive maintenance
of equipment is essential to ensure the availability of long-term use. Commanders must ensure
that time is allocated for scheduled services to optimize equipment capabilities.
 Conserving materials. The critical aspect of completing a GE task is often the availability of
appropriate materials. Although planners should maximize the use of local resources in their area
of responsibility, these resources may not be available or may be in short supply. Planners must
anticipate shipping materials from outside the AO, which may require longer transit times. The
conservation of materials while executing GE tasks is a critical consideration.
 Evaluating environmental factors. Apply environmental considerations early in the process.
While some situations require putting aside risk associated with environmental considerations,
the earlier the risk is mitigated, the easier and less complex mitigation procedures will need to be
to be employed later. As the staff proponent for environmental issues, engineers must analyze
environmental considerations and recommend appropriate courses of action (COAs) to the

1-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering as a Discipline and Function

commander. If an environmental baseline survey (EBS) and an environmental health site

assessment (EHSA) are required, ensure that they are performed early in the process.
 Evaluating financial factors. The types of funding and financial considerations involved are
identified in FM 3-34 and JP 3-34. Identifying appropriate funding sources and properly using
funding resources are important economic applications.

Flexibility
1-67. Rapidly changing situations during operations require that GE tasks in all stages be adaptable to new
conditions. Units must rapidly transition from all types of operations, and engineers must be agile in
applying the GE principle of flexibility to facilitate this transition. To meet this requirement, use standard
plans that allow for adjustment, expansion, and contraction whenever possible. For example, a standard
building plan may be easily adapted for use as an office, barracks, hospital ward, or dining facility. Forward
airfields should be designed and located so that they can later be expanded into more robust facilities that
are capable of handling larger aircraft and a larger maximum (aircraft) on ground (MOG) capacity.
Standardization enhances flexibility.
1-68. Flexibility facilitates versatility between Service engineers and within engineer organizations to
accomplish GE tasks. This includes providing selected technical expertise and equipment to a variety of
engineer organizations to perform GE missions that they are not specifically designed for or organized to
perform. Engineer units must display a multifunctional ability to perform engineer tasks outside their
mission-essential task list. An example is using combat engineers to perform selected GE tasks. However,
such a decision requires a risk analysis and higher echelon commander approval. This ensures that the
engineers are not removed from performing other, more critical missions in supporting movement and
maneuver for BCTs and other combat forces.
1-69. The basic deployability of engineer organizations and their designed modularity are enablers of
flexibility. Engineers must be ready to send only those assets specifically required to perform a mission.
They must establish functional, high-performing teams from a variety of U.S. Army engineer units while
maximizing capabilities from multi-Service engineer organizations. The integration of commercial engineer
equipment and the flexibility of engineer mission command or command and control must be able to
support the decentralization of authority.

Authority Decentralization
1-70. The wide dispersion of forces in the AO requires decentralizing engineer authority as much as
possible. The engineer commander or engineer staff officer in charge of operations at a particular location
must be granted authority that is consistent with responsibilities. As previously noted, this is particularly
essential on the noncontiguous battlefield.
1-71. The decentralization of authority requires effective mission command or command and control and
flexibility of its application to integrate the variety of engineer capabilities and accomplish selected GE
tasks or missions. Service engineers must strive for seamless integration between units and capabilities to
meet joint or component commander needs.

Priority Establishment
1-72. A lack of resources (planning and design capability and capacity, funding, equipment, personnel,
systems, logistics) severely impedes the commander from executing necessary GE tasks concurrently.
Therefore, careful prioritization must occur. It is essential to establish priorities to determine how much
general engineer effort must be devoted to a single task. While detailed priority systems are usually the
concern of lower echelon commands, all levels (beginning with the JFC and Army Service component
command [ASCC]) must issue directives that establish broad priority systems to serve as guides for
detailed systems. Resources are initially assigned only to the highest-priority tasks. Low-priority tasks are
left undone, while recognizing and assessing the risk of doing so. At the theater level, planners can assume
general priorities for initial phases of an operation and refine the priorities as the planning effort matures.
Project approval processes and acquisition review boards ensure an equitable distribution of resources
according to established priorities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 1-13

Chapter 1

1-73. Engineer-prioritized project lists are developed by systems at each level, from brigade or regimental
combat team through theater. The priority system may include the procedures to process and review
requests, cost-benefit analyses, risk assessments, resource commitment approval steps, and prioritization
procedures.

GENERAL ENGINEERING COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

1-74. One of the most critical aspects of ensuring adequate GE support is assigning the proper command
and support relationship to subordinate units. Engineer staff officers must carefully examine the required
GE effort when recommending command and support relationships. (See ADRP 6-0, ATTP 3-34.23,
FM 3-34, and JP 3-34 for additional information on command and support relations.)

1-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 2
General Engineering Support to Operations
This chapter discusses the GE support required across the range of military
operations, spanning the levels of war from the theater and operational level to the
tactical level. It also discusses how GE supports offensive, defensive, stability, and
DSCA tasks. Engineers are considered to be a force multiplier and are employed by
the commander to maximize their capabilities in enhancing operations. Engineers
play a key role in contributing to the support of the operations process.

RANGE OF MILITARY OPERATIONS

2-1. Commanders use engineers in all elements of unified land operations across the range of military
operations. (See ADRP 3-0.) They use engineers to assure mobility, enhance protection, enable force
projection and logistics, build partner capacity, and develop infrastructure. GE is the engineering
capabilities and activities (other than combat engineering) that modify, maintain, and protect the physical
environment. (See FM 3-34.) GE is primarily focused on affecting terrain and may include support to the
range of military operations in the homeland and abroad.
2-2. GE occurs throughout the AO at all levels of war during every type of military operation and may
include the employment of DOD civilians, contractors, HN forces, and multinational engineers. U.S. Army
GE organizational capabilities are discussed in FM 3-34.
2-3. GE tasks may occur simultaneously at different levels and may support multiple operations. The
purpose, priority, effort, and timeline to complete a GE task may be changed significantly based on a
change in priority of the primary operation it supports or based on a change in the strategic, operational, or
tactical situation.

THEATER AND OPERATIONAL LEVELS

2-4. The U.S. Army has specialized engineer units that are normally employed at the theater and
operational levels and that augment capabilities at the tactical level. Most of the specialized engineer units
are teams or sections that require support from the supported unit. These specialized units may provide
limited support, in quantity and duration, at the tactical level without sustainment/combat service support.
2-5. At the operational level, general engineer planners must anticipate the impact of geography, force
projection infrastructure with specific engineer missions, and available general engineer units within the
AO. Such considerations support the CCDR’s operational design to shape and win decisively. These
planners must understand the capabilities and limitations of Service general engineer forces, prioritize
limited assets, and mitigate risks. They also provide the scheme of base camps and environment
assessments, request geospatial products and services, recommend survivability measures, and request the
capabilities to meet requirements. As the link to tactical engineer integration, general engineer planners set
the conditions for success at the tactical level by adequately anticipating requirements and by ensuring that
GE capabilities are available.
2-6. The U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps add the focus on support to ground maneuver forces. GE
provides support at strategic and operational levels to enable force projection and logistics, enhance
protection, build partner capacity, and develop infrastructure. Combat engineering provides support at the
tactical level to assure mobility.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-1

Chapter 2

2-7. General and combat engineers perform engineering tasks at different levels. For example, general
engineers typically perform mobility operations at the operational level, while combat engineers focus on
mobility at the tactical level. Likewise, ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 are supported by general engineers at
the operational level, while combat engineers support survivability at the tactical level.
2-8. The GE effort at theater and operational levels is coordinated and synchronized with tactical combat
operations. At the operational level, general engineer activities may not be conducted as part of a combined
arms mission, but they are fully coordinated with the maneuver commander responsible for the AO.
2-9. General engineer units may follow and support combat engineers as they transfer bridges, roads,
bypasses, or forward tactical airfields to allow forward movement with maneuver units. These tactical
efforts may then become operational efforts that have to be maintained or upgraded. For example, in some
situations, tactical trails may become roads and those roads may be upgraded to MSRs. To reduce the
construction effort, it is more likely that existing roads would be upgraded.

GENERAL ENGINEERING SUPPORT

2-10. GE at theater and operational levels includes support to—
 Force projection.
 Force deployment.
 Theater access.
 Assured mobility.
 Theater opening and closing.
 Infrastructure planning.
 Infrastructure development.
 Partner capacity building.
 Master planning.
 LOC.
 Base camp development.
 Base camp operation.
 Construction management.
 Protection.
 Logistics.

2-11. General engineer units support offensive, defensive, stability, and DSCA operations at theater and
operational levels. Combat engineer units may provide support at theater and operational levels if it is
available or if the condition requires close support to maneuver forces that are in close combat.
2-12. General engineers may also be involved in countermobility operations intended to achieve
operational or strategic effects. (See ADRP 3-90.) These engineering efforts focus on denying the
adversary the freedom of movement and maneuver by slowing or diverting the enemy to increase target
acquisition and increase weapons effectiveness.
2-13. Although primarily a combat engineer task, general engineers may be required to supplement combat
engineer efforts with the development of a system of barriers and obstacles with the integration of fires to
increase maximum effect. (See ADRP 3-90, ATP 3-90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, FM 3-34, JP 3-34, and TM 3-
34.85/MCRP 3-17A for additional information.)

Force Projection
2-14. General engineers may be required to support force projection efforts. (See ADRP 4-0.) Force
projection is the ability to project the military instrument of national power from the United States or
another theater, in response to requirements for military operations (JP 3-0).
2-15. Force projection includes GE tasks that enhance movement from the strategic to the operational level
and from peacetime locations to assembly areas or base camps. Tasks that support force projection may
simultaneously support logistics.

2-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering Support to Operations

Access
2-16. General engineers contend with the following access types:
 Informational access to USACE resources and higher-level engineering expertise to support
engagement strategies and wartime operations.
 Physical access, such as forcible entry into a theater.

2-17. General engineers may be required to support efforts to gain access into a theater. Engineer efforts
ensure the mobility and flow of forces by establishing and securing an initial foothold, beachhead, or entry
point into the theater to enable follow-on forces to continue onward penetration to the objective. Like
forcible-entry operations, access efforts by friendly forces may be stopped and repelled by the adversary
use of counterattacks, coordinated and synchronized weaponry systems, and layered obstacle systems. (See
ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8, TM 3-34.85/MCRP 3-17A, FM 3-34, JP 3-18, and JP 3-34 for additional
information.)
2-18. The support to early-entry includes reconnaissance that mitigates antiaccess and area-denial
mechanisms to clear and open aerial ports of debarkation and seaports of debarkation. These tasks are often
considered combat engineering tasks, even though general engineer units can perform them when
conditions allow (See FM 3-34). Geospatial engineers can provide high-resolution mapping to clarify
situational understanding of early-entry and initial AOs at landing sites.
2-19. During access, combat engineers usually support forcible entry and the seizure and establishment of
lodgments. General engineers normally support the establishment and expansion of lodgments and bed-
down facilities.
2-20. GE tasks in support of access may be required to augment combat engineers to—
 Clear beaches and remove antiaccess systems (such as barriers and obstacles) from roads,
airfields, and ports.
 Construct initial combat trails and roads, gap crossings, LOCs, MSRs, mobility bridges,
airfields, base camps, and ammunition and supply depots.
 Support countermobility and survivability efforts earlier in the insertion to repel enemy
counterattacks to recover lost land.

Assured Mobility
2-21. Assured mobility is a framework—of processes, actions, and capabilities—that assures the ability of
a force to deploy, move, and maneuver where and when desired, without interruption or delay, to achieve
the mission (ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8). Assured mobility is applied at strategic, operational, and
tactical levels of war to facilitate the commander’s freedom to move and maneuver. Combat engineering
assures tactical mobility, while GE assures operational mobility and supports strategic mobility. The GE
effort is directed at providing the assured mobility of forces, from ports of debarkation to forward AOs.
2-22. The fundamentals of assured mobility and the specific linkages to GE are as follows:
 Predict. Engineers and other planners must accurately predict potential enemy impediments to
joint force mobility by analyzing enemy tactics, techniques, procedures, capabilities, and
evolutions. Prediction requires an updated understanding and awareness of the operational
environment. When applying GE, planners must predict the impact of enemy and military
operations on the infrastructure required to maintain mobility and momentum. For example, they
must predict the damage to a MSR caused by the movement of a large mechanized force over a
single route.
 Detect. Using information collection assets, engineers and other planners identify early
indicators for the location of natural and man-made obstacles, make preparations to create or
emplace obstacles, and determine potential means for obstacle creation. They also identify actual
and potential obstacles and propose solutions and alternate COAs to minimize or eliminate
potential effects. For the GE function, planners must be aware of the effects to strategic,
operational, and tactical mobility impacted by engineering solutions.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-3

Chapter 2

 Prevent. Engineers and other planners apply this fundamental by denying the enemy the ability
to influence mobility. This is accomplished by forces acting proactively before obstacles are
emplaced or activated, including executing aggressive action to destroy enemy assets and
capabilities before they can be used to create obstacles. Political considerations and the rules of
engagement may hinder the ability to apply this fundamental early in a contingency.
Commanders apply necessary GE assets in a timely manner to prevent mobility impediments to
the force. An example of a GE task to support this fundamental is constructing a bridge bypass
before a bridge becomes unusable.
 Avoid. If prevention fails, the commander maneuvers forces to avoid impediments to mobility if
it is viable within the scheme of maneuver. GE is an integral part of the maneuver force ability
to avoid such impediments. Examples of GE tasks that support this fundamental are building
roads around natural or man-made obstacles, constructing alternate airfields, and implementing
other actions that allow maneuver elements to operate effectively.
 Neutralize. Engineers and other planners plan to neutralize, reduce, or overcome obstacles and
impediments as soon as possible to allow the unrestricted movement of forces. The breaching
tenants and fundamentals apply to the fundamental of neutralize. An example of a GE task to
support this fundamental is building a tactical or LOC bridge that neutralizes a river obstacle.
 Protect. Engineers and other elements plan and implement survivability and other protection
measures that deny the enemy the ability to inflict damage as joint forces maneuver. This
includes executing countermobility missions to deny the enemy the ability to maneuver and
providing protection to friendly maneuvering forces. Commanders can ensure that GE efforts
focus on survivability support (berms, bunkers, hardened facilities), which is primarily centered
on the hardening aspect of survivability as described in ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.
2-23. The assured mobility construct enables a joint force to achieve the commander’s intent. Assured
mobility emphasizes proactive mobility and countermobility, supports survivability, and integrates engineer
functions to accomplish this. Assured mobility is broader than mobility and should not be confused with the
limited application of mobility operations as described in ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8. Assured mobility
focuses on supporting the maneuver commander’s ability to gain a position of advantage in relation to the
enemy. This can be accomplished by conducting mobility operations to negate the impact of enemy
obstacles, conducting countermobility operations to impact and shape enemy maneuver, or conducting a
combination of mobility and countermobility operations.
2-24. Assured mobility is an integrating process related to each U.S. Army warfighting function and is
similar to targeting, risk management, and intelligence preparation of the battlefield. As an integrating
process, assured mobility provides linkage between the tasks associated with mobility, countermobility, and
survivability and their roles across the six warfighting functions. Assured mobility applies in all operations
and across the range of military operations. While it is an enabler of warfighting functions and other
integrating processes, assured mobility is also enabled by other integrating processes. The purpose of
assured mobility is to ensure the freedom of maneuver, preserve combat power throughout the AO, and
exploit superior situational understanding.

Infrastructure Development
2-25. General engineers may be required to support infrastructure development in support of force
projection, theater opening, and sustainment. (See ADRP 4-0.) Theater opening is the ability to establish
and operate ports of debarkation (air, sea, and rail) to establish a distribution system and
sustainment/combat service support bases. It also facilitates port throughput for the reception staging,
onward movement, and integration of forces within the theater of operations (TO). (See ADRP 4-0.)
Engineer efforts are focused on ensuring that the structural framework is in place to support a network of
bases, a logistics network, a transportation network, and interconnecting service facilities to sustain forces.
2-26. GE tasks in support of infrastructure development may include—
 Establishing and maintaining the infrastructure necessary for supporting early-entry and follow-
on forces in support of force projection and for sustaining military operations.
 Conducting master planning and design, construction, and real estate actions.
 Coordinating for environmental and geospatial support, O&M, and assessment.

2-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering Support to Operations

 Continuing to improve, upgrade, and expand infrastructure as the TO matures and requirements
increase.
 Constructing seaports, airfields, bases, and mass logistics storage facilities.
 Developing water, power, and waste systems. (See ADRP 4-0 and JP 3-34.)

Protection
2-27. U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps forces face hybrid threats, which are described as the diverse and
dynamic combination of regular forces, irregular forces, terrorist forces, and/or criminal elements unified to
achieve mutually benefitting effects (ADRP 3-0). These forces and elements can employ hostile actions to
inflict serious damage on personnel, physical assets, or information. Such hostile actions pose threats to
survivability requiring adequate protection of personnel and physical assets.
2-28. Survivability has two aspects: avoiding and withstanding. Avoiding can include concealment,
camouflage, and disbursement. Withstanding can include construction or the hardening of protective
positions. There are a variety of protective measures that can be employed. These measures are discussed in
the following paragraphs.
2-29. Hostile actions usually involve the employment of weapons. ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 addresses
various types of weapons effects and the design considerations to mitigate them.
2-30. Adversaries use sensors to increase the effectiveness of weapons. Sensor systems are categorized
based on the component of the electromagnetic spectrum in which they operate. ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-
17.6 addresses sensor systems and the principles and techniques for using camouflage and concealment to
defeat them.
2-31. Concealment protective measures include the use of weather effects, battlefield dust, debris, smoke
munitions, or other potential obscurants to hamper observation and target acquisition capability or to
conceal activities or movement. Battlefield obscuration is typically provided by specialized chemical,
biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) elements or fires, which can conceal friendly positions and
screen maneuvering forces from enemy observation. (See ATP 3-11.50 for additional information on the
employment of obscurants. See ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 for more information on camouflage,
concealment, and decoys.)
2-32. Hazards associated with the surrounding environment also pose threats. Weather conditions, natural
disasters, diseases, and terrain-related hazards are common examples. (Environmental hazards are
addressed in FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B)
2-33. Although it is often considered to be a part of countermobility operations, another protective measure
is the use of obstacles, which is a key enabler to ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6. Obstacles provide friendly
forces with close-in protection, which enhances the effectiveness of survivability positions. (See ATP 3-
90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, for additional information on protective obstacles.)
2-34. Military forces are composed of personnel and physical assets, each having their own inherent
survivability qualities or capabilities that can be enhanced through various means and methods. Although
units conduct ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 within the limits of their capabilities, the U.S. Army and U.S.
Marine Corps have a broad range of diverse engineer capabilities that can enhance unit survivability, which
is discussed in this chapter.
2-35. GE may be required to support the preservation of the force so that the commander can apply
maximum combat power. (See ADRP 3-37.) Engineers possess unique equipment and personnel
capabilities that can be used directly to support survivability and related protection efforts. General
engineer support to protection and survivability continues as improvements are continuously reassessed and
additional assets are made available. (See ADRP 3-37, TM 3-34.85/MCRP 3-17A, FM 3-34, FM 5-415,
ATP 3-90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, JP 3-15, JP 3-34, and ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.)
2-36. At the operational level, general engineer support will be continuously conducted to harden and
prepare positions for facilities and installations. Engineers possess unique equipment and personnel
capabilities that can be used directly to support survivability and related protection efforts.
2-37. GE tasks in support of protection may include—

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-5

Chapter 2

 Constructing field fortifications.

 Hardening critical infrastructure and facilities.
 Preparing protective positions.
 Emplacing protective obstacles around critical fixed sites, such as base camps and sustainment
sites.
2-38. GE tasks in support of protection tend to be equipment-intensive and may require the use of
equipment timelines to optimize the use of low-density, critical equipment.

Logistics
2-39. GE may be required to support logistics. (See ADRP 4-0.) Engineer efforts help ensure the
continuous and uninterrupted flow of material, equipment, and supplies to the force. Engineers can
combine all three disciplines (combat, general, and geospatial engineering) to establish and maintain the
infrastructure necessary for sustaining logistics operations in the AO.
2-40. GE tasks in support of logistics may include—
 Building, repairing, and maintaining roads, bridges, airfields, ammunition supply points,
warehouses, supply points, maintenance facilities, waste management facilities, and open
structures for aerial ports of debarkation, seaports of debarkation, MSRs, and base camps.
 Expanding the infrastructure base to accommodate increased logistics demands. Such tasks can
include constructing larger storage facilities, enlarging seaports and airfields, and upgrading the
transportation network (such as strengthening and widening roads and improving bridges) to
accommodate increased volume and logistics traffic flow.
 Planning, acquiring, managing, and remediating real estate.
 Providing power system support, waste management support, environmental support, and
firefighting support.
 Supporting joint logistics over-the-shore (JLOTS), force projection, or access. (See FM 3-34 and
JP 3-34.)

TACTICAL LEVEL
2-41. GE supports unified land operations. GE does not normally provide close support to maneuver forces
that are in close combat and provides less direct support to offensive and defensive operations. General
engineer support tasks to the offense and defense are mostly at the operational level, but they can
accomplish tactical-level tasks that exceed the combat engineer force capability. GE may provide more
support to defense in the support area and provide significant support to stability and DSCA. GE also
supports protection and logistics at the tactical level. (See ADRP 3-0, ADRP 3-07, ADRP 3-90, FM 3-34,
and JP 3-34 for additional information.)

OFFENSIVE
2-42. The main offensive focus is using engineer support for movement and maneuver. GE support is
primarily focused on the tasks that support mobility. The general engineer function reinforces combat
engineering, enables logistics, and develops infrastructure. Enabling sustainment/combat service support
includes the creation and sustainment of LOCs and bed-down facilities. GE assets may be task-organized to
augment combat engineer units.
2-43. General engineer tasks that support the offense include—
 Supporting theater access (seaports, airfields, bed-down facilities).
 Supporting mobility.
 Constructing and repairing bridges.
 Constructing and repairing roads, airfields, and heliports that support the mobility of the
maneuver force.
 Conducting earthmoving operations.

2-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering Support to Operations

 Conducting engineer reconnaissance.

 Conducting area damage control that supports the mobility of the maneuver force.
 Constructing detention or resettlement facilities.
2-44. GE units may conduct combat engineering tasks to support the offense if tactical conditions do not
exceed their capability to protect themselves and defeat expected threats. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-
17.8.)

DEFENSIVE
2-45. The primary defensive focus is using engineer support for movement, maneuver, and protection. GE
support to defense is primarily focused on tasks that assure mobility and enhance protection. The GE
function reinforces combat engineering and enables protection. Countermobility operations are dominant,
but some support to mobility operations may be provided to ensure the ability of forces to freely move and
maneuver. The engineer primary protection task is support to survivability. (Countermobility and combined
arms obstacle integration are discussed in detail in ATP 3-90.8/MCWP 3-17.5, and JP 3-15. Protection is
discussed in ADRP 3-37. Survivability is discussed in ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.)
2-46. General engineer tasks that support the defense include—
 Constructing entry control points.
 Erecting barriers to deny access to fixed sites.
 Providing area damage control and assessments.
 Supporting survivability.
 Hardening facilities.
 Constructing sustainment sites.
 Constructing decontamination sites.

2-47. GE units may conduct combat engineering tasks to support the defense if tactical conditions do not
exceed their capability to protect themselves and defend against expected threats. (See ADRP 3-90 and FM
3-90-1.)
2-48. Engineers must carefully analyze the threat to adequately predict and carefully plan the GE
requirements for an operational mission. Changes in the threat status may affect how units designed to
perform GE missions are equipped and trained.
2-49. General engineer planners should use their knowledge of the conditions in a specific AO to predict
and estimate the level of GE effort by examining the state of the infrastructure (ports, roads, bridges,
airfields, utilities). An examination of the physical environment (including environmental considerations
affecting the mission) will assist in determining the scope, level, and type of GE requirements.

STABILITY
2-50. General engineers may be required to support stability operations. (See ADRP 3-07, JP 3-07, and
MCIP 3-33.02/NWP 3-07/COMDTINST M3120.11.) Stability tasks are conducted as part of operations
outside the continental United States (OCONUS) in coordination with other instruments of national power
to maintain or reestablish a safe and secure environment and to provide essential government services,
emergency infrastructure reconstruction, and humanitarian relief.
2-51. The primary stability focus is using engineer support to stabilize a region by improving the
infrastructure and integrating with and supporting other forces in their missions. Maritime force engineers
(Marines and Seabees) are capable of performing emergency repair of maritime infrastructure under
varying conditions of instability. These engineers may embark in amphibious ships or be airlifted to
locations. (See MCIP 3-33.02/NWP 3-07/COMDTINST M3120.11.) Most overall engineer effort during a
stability operation is likely to be through the GE function.
2-52. GE may support all primary stability tasks. No GE task only supports stability. The purpose, desired
effect, and conditions for the task may differ in stability, which may affect how the task is accomplished.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-7

Chapter 2

For example, a task to support stability may be accomplished with the involvement of more HN
participation.
2-53. In addition to their normal support of U.S. forces, GE tasks primarily focus on the reconstruction or
establishment of services that support the population in conjunction with civilian agencies. Engineers
conducting missions provide resources to assist in disaster or theater response in areas outside U.S.
territory. Rapid and effectively emplaced sustainment/combat service support operations can reduce human
injuries and fatalities and harden infrastructure.
2-54. General engineer support for the restoration of essential services and infrastructure development is
the primary engineer focus in stability operations. Essential services for engineer considerations include
food and water, emergency shelter, and basic sanitation (sewage and waste disposal). GE may support the
mobility of the population.
2-55. General engineer support may be necessary for the sustainment/combat service support and
protection requirements of the force or for others conducting stability operations. Stability operations tend
to have a longer duration than offensive and defensive operations. (See ADRP 3-07 and FM 3-07 for
additional information on stability.) As such, the GE level of effort is very high at the onset and gradually
decreases as the TO matures. As the AO matures, the GE effort may transfer to civilian contractors, such as
to those who operate under the logistics civil augmentation program. Given the nature of stability, the risks
associated with environmental hazards may have greater importance and impact in stability than in
offensive or defensive operations.
2-56. GE support to stability is primarily focused on tasks to build partner capacity; build infrastructure;
and assure mobility, sustainment/combat service support, and protection. Countermobility operations are
dominant, but some support to mobility operations may be provided to ensure the ability of forces to freely
move and maneuver.
2-57. General engineer tasks that support stability may include—
 Conducting infrastructure reconnaissance (survey and assessment).
 Providing infrastructure development (reconstructing or establishing infrastructure to provide
essential services that support the population, developing HN capability and capacity, providing
water resources).
 Constructing base camps and force bed-down facilities.
 Constructing survivability and other force protection support.
 Constructing support area facilities.
 Providing infrastructure support, including utilities and other essential services.
 Providing reliable electrical power.
 Providing LOC construction, maintenance, and repair.

2-58. GE may include conducting countermobility tasks to control traffic or the population. Entry control
facilities may be required at base camps or support facilities.
2-59. Stability operations may include humanitarian and civic assistance. U.S. Army and Marine forces act
as part of a joint force with the U.S. country team and the U.S. Agency for International Development.
2-60. General engineers may be required to provide support to special forces operations. (See FM 3-34,
JP 3-0, and JP 3-34.) Such tasks could be diverse and range from small- to large-scale operations. They
could also include training others in demining techniques, providing technical capabilities to restore
essential services, and providing infrastructure reconstruction and humanitarian relief to demonstrate U.S.
commitment.

HOMELAND DEFENSE
2-61. The military will continue to play a vital role in securing the homeland through the execution of
homeland defense. General engineers must be prepared to provide the required effort and resources when
necessary.

2-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering Support to Operations

2-62. Homeland defense is the protection of United States sovereignty, territory, domestic population, and
critical infrastructure against external threats and aggression or other threats as directed by the President
(JP 3-27). DOD is the lead for these missions.
2-63. The strategy for homeland defense necessitates securing the United States from attack through an
active, layered defense. DOD engineering capabilities, coupled with the commercial sector or with
contractor capabilities, can provide extensive, in-depth engineering for homeland defense. (See JP 3-27.)
Massive national general engineer support may be garnered from local, state, and federal resources via a
multitude of avenues or agreements.
2-64. General engineers may be required to augment national efforts in homeland defense. Engineer
support could be directed toward offensive and defensive operations if supporting homeland defense. (See
JP 3-27 for additional information on homeland security. See JP 3-26 for more information on the
overarching homeland security framework.)
2-65. Homeland defense and DSCA are separate mission sets with different leads. (See JP 3-28 for a
review of the relationship between homeland defense, homeland security, and DSCA.)

DEFENSE SUPPORT OF CIVIL AUTHORITIES

2-66. During a major crisis or severe disaster, the military and DOD may be required to rapidly respond to
requests for assistance from civil authorities. These requests may include domestic emergency support, law
enforcement support, domestic activity support, or support from qualifying entities for special events. In a
DSCA scenario, civil authorities are the lead for the missions while the military is the support role.
2-67. Defense support of civil authorities is support provided by U.S. Federal military forces, DOD
civilians, DOD contract personnel, DOD Component assets, and National Guard forces (when the Secretary
of Defense, in coordination with the Governors of the affected states, elects and requests to use those forces
in title 32, U.S.C., status) in response to requests for assistance from civil authorities for domestic
emergencies, law enforcement support, and other domestic activities, or from qualifying entities for special
events (DODD 3025.18). General engineers may be required to support DSCA. (See ADP 3-28; ADRP
3-28; DODD 3025.18; DODI 3025.21; JP 3-28; and ATP 3-28.1/MCWP 3-36.2/NTTP 3-57.2/AFTTP 3-
2.67 for additional information on DCSA.)
2-68. In national preparedness doctrine, any type of domestic disaster, emergency, or event requiring
support may be called an incident. An incident is an occurrence, caused by either human action or national
phenomena, that requires action to prevent or minimize loss of life, or damage, loss of, or other risks to
property, information, and/or natural resources (JP 3-28). General engineers must be prepared to provide
support to civil authorities by rendering assistance in any of those areas when required. U.S. Army National
Guard Engineers can be called on during emergencies by the governor of a state under Title 32, United
States Code (32 USC). The term civil support has been superseded by DSCA, except when the National
Guard is conducting these missions in state active duty status or 32 USC status to civil authorities for
domestic emergencies or for designated law enforcement and other activities.
2-69. For U.S. Army forces, the primary tasks associated with DSCA include—
 Providing support for domestic disasters.
 Providing support for domestic CBRN incidents.
 Providing support for domestic civilian law enforcement agencies.
 Providing other designated support.

2-70. GE support to DSCA is primarily focused on tasks that enable sustainment/combat service support
and enhance protection. GE tasks to DCSA include—
 Focusing on first responder and population mobility.
 Reinforcing civil authorities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-9

Chapter 2

 Supporting military forces by enabling logistics, repairing infrastructures, and restoring critical
services.
 Repairing or restoring selected civil and commercial infrastructure that provides water, power,
communication, transportation, and other essential utilities that military forces and DOD support
organizations depend on to meet operational needs.
2-71. There are few unique GE tasks performed in DSCA that are not performed during other operations.
The difference is the context in which they are performed. (See ADRP 3-28.) Because of the unique nature
of the hazard or threat, planning for DSCA is significantly different than planning for offense, defense, or
stability tasks, although the basic missions may be similar to those of stability tasks. For example, the
hazard or threat will most likely be a natural or man-made disaster with unpredictable consequences. The
military will assume a support role to DSCA operations.

Notes.

1. See ATTP 3-34.23 for a discussion of engineer capabilities that could be applied to support
DSCA requirements.

2. See ATP 3-28.1/MCWP 3-36.2/NTTP 3-57.2/AFTTP 3-2.67 for more information on specific
DSCA tasks and planning considerations.

3. See ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 for information on considerations for stability or DSCA
tasks.

2-72. General engineer support for the restoration of essential services after an incident is the primary
engineer focus in DSCA. Engineer support may also be required for forces providing DSCA command to
government agencies at all levels until they can function normally.
2-73. There are 15 national emergency support functions used by the federal government and states as the
primary means to organize and provide assistance. General engineers may be tasked to support some of
them. Each emergency support function is identified and discussed in detail in ADP 3-28, ADRP 3-28,
JP 3-28, and ATP 3-28.1/MCWP 3-36.2/NTTP 3-57.2/AFTTP 3-2.67.
2-74. For engineers, the most applicable function is the Emergency Support Function #3–Public Works and
Engineering Annex. USACE is the primary coordinating agency for this emergency support function that is
responsible for providing technical advice and evaluations, engineering systems, construction management
and inspection procedures, emergency contracting procedures, emergency wastewater and solid waste
facility repair, debris handling and removal, and roadway maintenance and openings following presidential
disaster declarations. (See ADP 3-28.)
2-75. The overall scope of Emergency Support Function #3–Public Works and Engineering Annex includes
infrastructure protection and emergency repair, infrastructure restoration, engineering service and
construction management, and emergency contracting support for lifesaving and life-sustaining services.
Some examples of GE support to providing or restoring essential services may include—
 Supporting urban search and rescue.
 Providing food and water.
 Conducting emergency shelter and base camp construction.
 Providing emergency transportation.
 Providing boats during flooding.
 Providing trucks for hauling critical supplies and equipment.
 Providing hauling assets for population movement.
 Providing public works and other engineering support.
 Providing firefighting support.
 Providing deployable prime power systems.

2-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

General Engineering Support to Operations

 Providing basic sanitation (sewage and waste disposal).

 Assisting local responders in providing minimum essential access to affected areas.
2-76. GE support to DSCA, first responders, supporting units, or the population may include—
 Supporting mobility by rubble and debris removal.
 Restoring and maintaining transportation infrastructure networks (roads, bridges, airfields,
seaports, heliports).
 Conducting infrastructure reconnaissance, assessment, and technical assistance.
 Conducting emergency demolition.
 Providing diver support.

2-77. GE support may be required for force sustainment/combat service support and protection
requirements and may be extended to support other agencies during DSCA. Likely missions include—
 Debris removal.
 Route clearing operations.
 Expedient (temporary) road and trail construction and repair.
 Forward aviation combat engineering (including the repair of paved, asphalt, and concrete
runways and airfields).
 Device installation that prevents foreign object damage to rotary-wing aircraft.
 Temporary bridging construction.
 Port, airfield, reception, staging, forward movement, and integration facility upgrades and
construction.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 2-11

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 3
Planning and Design
Effective planning and design are essential for enhancing mission success. Engineers
at all levels perform GE planning and design. At the CCDR level, planning and
design are conceptual in scope; while at lower levels, they are more detailed. At the
lowest tactical level, planning and design capability is limited because the engineer
unit is focused on mission execution. Planning and design are separate tasks, but this
chapter discusses them together because they are closely related and influence each
other. Design is an extension of planning, and both are interrelated and
complementary processes. Planning and design integrate engineering capabilities and
balance tactical, operational, sustainment/combat service support, protection, and
engineering requirements. There is no single correct plan or design; instead, there is a
range of acceptable solutions. This chapter provides an overview for GE planning
and discusses its terminology, requirements, tools, MDMP, engineer work line,
Unified Facilities Criteria, and FFE.

JOINT GENERAL ENGINEERING PLANNING

3-1. The primary joint doctrinal publication for planning GE support is JP 3-34. The U.S. Air Force and
U.S. Navy have a narrower focus for the GE function than does the U.S. Army and often refers to it as civil
engineering. The U.S. Air Force and U.S. Navy consider general (civil) engineering to be primarily a
logistics function that is executed to sustain forces in a contingency operation. Their activities tend to focus
on missions, such as base camp and life support development, seaport of debarkation construction and
repair, aerial ports of embarkation, and other facilities or sites. GE can provide augmentation to field forces
or it can complement combat engineering.
3-2. Joint planning takes a comprehensive look at coordinating, integrating, and synchronizing the
capabilities from each service and contractor support to produce the synergy of effort as the situation
requires. This helps commanders and their staffs visualize and design a broad approach to mission
accomplishment early in the planning process, which makes detailed planning more efficient. (See JP 1 and
JP 3-0.)
3-3. Engineers should contact the contracting command to determine existing contracting support and to
plan for additional contractor support. Contracted support could include supplies (materials), services
(design, operation, maintenance), labor, or construction. (See Defense Contingency Contracting Handbook,
JP 3-34, and JP 4-10 for an overview of each Service GE capability.)

JOINT OPERATIONS PLANNING PROCESS

3-4. The joint operations planning process underpins planning at all levels and for missions across the
range of military operations. Joint engineer planning may occur under several staffing options, an engineer
special staff element or an engineer staff section within the operations directorate of a joint staff or the
logistics directorate of a joint staff. The engineer staff actively participates in the planning process on the
joint staff, addresses all potential engineer requirements, and provides the required products. They also plan
for conducting an EBS and obtaining real estate support to obtain land leases.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-1

Chapter 3

3-5. GE planning and design (along with preparation, execution, and assessment) are often collaborative
efforts between higher headquarters, constructing units, facility commanders, and users or tenants. (See
JP 1 and JP 3-0 for a discussion of the joint operations planning process. See JP 3-34 for engineer
contributions in operation plans [OPLANs] and operation orders [OPORDs].)
3-6. Careful consideration during planning and execution must be made for command relationships to
effectively achieve seamless integration of GE support throughout the TO or JOA. The overarching
doctrine for command is contained in capstone doctrine such as ADRP 3-0, ADRP 5-0, ADRP 6-0,
FM 3-34, JP 3-0, and JP 3-34 and in U.S. Army engineer implementing manuals such as ATTP 3-34.23.
3-7. GE involves the application of technical knowledge and judgment to make trade-offs among
competing requirements and to recommend solutions to difficult problems. Construction OCONUS may
also be governed by DOD guidance, status of forces agreements, HN-funded construction agreements and,
in some instances, bilateral infrastructure agreements. Planners and designers must ensure compliance with
the more stringent standards as applicable.

JOINT ENGINEER SUPPORT PLAN

3-8. The joint engineer support plan (usually found in the logistics annex or as a separate annex or
appendix) is produced by a joint staff for input to a joint OPLAN as part of the deliberate planning process.
It identifies the minimum-essential engineering services and construction requirements required to support
the commitment of military forces. It is the most critical appendix for GE in a joint OPLAN or OPORD.
Other critical portions of a joint OPLAN or OPORD for GE planning include—
 Appendix 8, Annex C: Air Base Operability.
 Appendix 15, Annex C: Force Protection.
 Appendix 16, Annex C: Critical Infrastructure Protection.
 Appendix 5, Annex D: Mobility and Transportation.
 Annex K: Civil Affairs.
 Annex L: Environmental Considerations.

3-9. General engineers assigned as joint engineer staff officers must be well trained to effectively plan
and synchronize joint GE operations as members of a JFC staff. Action officers must be well versed in the
complex mission command or command and control of the joint force and be knowledgeable in the
capabilities of all Service engineer forces to maximize the use of their capabilities.
3-10. U.S. Army and U.S. Marine Corps engineers must recognize that other Service engineer forces
organize and equip their engineer forces for different functions and adapt their capabilities to meet specific
needs. This is particularly critical for GE, where each Service has capabilities and limitations that must be
properly understood to effectively employ them. JP 3-34 provides the necessary baseline planning
information for all Service engineer capabilities.

JOINT ENGINEER BOARDS

3-11. The GE effort may be greatly impacted by various joint boards that assist the JFC or joint task force
commander in establishing priorities and policies for the GE effort. Three typical boards include the joint
civil-military engineering board, joint facilities utilization board, and joint environmental management
board.
3-12. Other boards or cells may also be created as required. Each board addresses a separate need within
the joint force and is described in detail in JP 3-34. The JFC tailors the scope, roles, and responsibilities of
each board to meet the specific operational needs. To adequately integrate and synchronize GE efforts,
engineers must possess a good working knowledge of the doctrinal aspects of the board and the theater-
specific procedures.

KEY JOINT TERMS THAT AFFECT GENERAL ENGINEERING PLANNING

3-13. Contingency contracting is the process of obtaining goods, services, and construction via contracting
means in support of contingency operations (JP 4-10).

3-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-14. A contingency engineering management organization is an organization formed by the combatant

commander, or subordinate joint force commander to augment their staffs with additional Service
engineering expertise for planning and construction management (JP 3-34).
3-15. A Department of Defense construction agent is the Corps of Engineers, Naval Facilities Engineering
Command, or other such approved Department of Defense activity, that is assigned design or execution
responsibilities associated with military construction programs, facilities support, or civil engineering
support to the combatant commanders in contingency operations (JP 3-34).
3-16. Environmental Considerations states that an EBS is an assessment or a study in an area of interest (a
property to define the environmental state or condition of that property before use by military forces). It is
used to determine the environmental impact of property use by military forces and the level of
environmental restoration needed before returning the property upon their departure.
3-17. See FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B is the spectrum of environmental media, resources, or programs that
may affect the planning and execution of military operations (JP 3-34). Environmental considerations
comprise a broad range of issues that must be integrated into planning, design, and construction.
Environmental considerations play an important part in all phases of an operation. Planners must consider
the effect that environmental considerations have and how they may constrain or influence various actions
and decisions.
3-18. An environmental conditions report is a concise summary of environmental conditions at a base
camp site, based on the environmental baseline survey, supported by maps and backup documents,
prepared by base camp commanders for each base camp. The environmental conditions report documents
conditions at the site if claims or other legal challenges arise against the government. (FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-
11B)
3-19. An environmental site closure survey is the mechanism used to document the final condition of the
occupied property, ensure that units have properly prepared sites for transfer or closure, and protect U.S.
forces against undue liability. The environmental site closure survey is based on the EBS and
environmental conditions reports that have been completed during occupation of the base camp, along with
other historical or archived environmental reports, corrective action plans, and information. The initial
environmental site closure survey is normally conducted 90 days (30 days at a minimum) before the base
camp transfer or closure date.
3-20. The final environmental site closure survey and the associated environmental closure report must be
completed before the unit or base camp commander is released of responsibility for the base camp. (ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N) To effectively complete the closure report, it is essential to reference the initial EBS
(and update it if applicable) and the log of periodic environmental conditions reports that have been
completed on the particular site or area. Units will record the grid coordinates and take post closure digital
photographs of each waste management site. This information is incorporated into the environmental site
closure report and is archived for future reference. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-
11B.)
3-21. Final governing standards are a comprehensive set of country-specific substantive environmental
provisions, typically technical limitations on effluent, discharges, etc., or a specific management practice
(JP 3-34).
3-22. An Overseas Environmental Baseline Guidance Document is a set of objective criteria and
management practices developed by the Department of Defense to protect human health and the
environment (JP 3-34).
3-23. A special operations weather team is a task organized team of Air Force personnel organized,
trained, and equipped to collect critical environmental information from data sparse areas (JP 3-05).

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-3

Chapter 3

UNITED STATES ARMY AND UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS

GENERAL ENGINEERING PLANNING
3-24. Planning and design are separate activities, but they are grouped together because they are
interdependent. Planning pertains to the specific tasks conducted in gathering, generating, and sharing the
necessary information needed for GE in support of mission objectives. The GE design task (which is
different from the U.S. Army design methodology described in ADRP 5-0) is an extension of the GE
planning task that matches engineering principles and construction means against requirements to create the
necessary engineering and construction details needed for building and dismantling facilities and
infrastructure.
3-25. Planning and design efforts have the greatest impact on improving facility efficiencies, implementing
cost-effective practices, and reducing costs. Planning and design continue during all phases of the operation
and the life cycle of a facility and are integral parts of master planning.
3-26. Planning is the art and science of understanding a situation, envisioning a desired future, and laying
out effective ways of bringing that future about (ADP 5-0). In other words, planning is the means by which
the commander visualizes a desired outcome or end state; crafts the means by laying out effective ways of
achieving it; and successfully communicates to subordinates the commander’s vision, intentions, and
decisions, focusing on the results to achieve. Planning helps create a common vision that results in a plan
and orders that synchronize the action of forces in time, space, and purpose to achieve objectives and
accomplish missions.

PLANNING AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

3-27. During planning, commanders and staffs must understand that the types and magnitude of GE tasks
and the purposes that can be accomplished will vary based on the type, capability, and resources available
to the engineer unit to which the mission is assigned. The continuous refinement of the mission analysis in
the MDMP and the engineer estimate determines if the proper assets are available to accomplish all tasks.
MDMP is an iterative planning methodology that is used to understand the situation and the mission,
develop a COA, and produce an OPLAN or OPORD.

Planning
3-28. Planning follows these general steps:
 Determine operational requirements.
 Conduct site selection and reconnaissance.
 Conduct initial engineering reconnaissance.
 Analyze existing infrastructure.
 Develop repair, upgrade, or modification plans.
 Determine new construction requirements.
 Determine O&M requirements.
 Coordinate planning with concept or initial designs.

3-29. MDMP helps engineers apply thoroughness, clarity, sound judgment, logic, and professional
knowledge to understand situations, develop options to solve problems, and reach decisions. It helps
facilitate collaboration and parallel planning and seeks the optimal solution. The MDMP process outlined
in ADRP 5-0 is used for GE. There are particular considerations and tools for planning GE missions that
must be understood and integrated into the process to make them an effective portion of the planning
process.
3-30. Planning and design are continuous interactive and iterative processes throughout the military
operation and the life cycle of the facility or infrastructure. Planning and design can be conceptual or
detailed and highly structured or less structured. Plans and designs may be initial or final-approved and are
often documented in master plans.

3-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-31. Planning affects design, and design affects planning. Each may provide information to, and constrain
or restrict, the options of the other. Planning and design are interdependent efforts that are combined to help
facilitate a desired outcome. Effective design hinges on the accuracy and completion of the information
generated during planning, particularly information related to facility and infrastructure requirements,
available resources, construction means, and site location. Automated planning and design tools are
available to assist general engineers in expediting the process.
3-32. Critical information resulting from design that is integrated into planning includes construction
estimates (bill of materials, equipment, personnel, cost, and time) that the commander needs to know in
establishing priorities of support, priorities of effort, timelines associated with movement, the basing of
forces, and the flow of the operation.
3-33. Failure to remain continuously linked and updated with mission planning as it progresses can result
in design solutions that are unsustainable based on the concept of operations and are inadequate in meeting
the commander’s needs. Planners and design engineers develop an integrated collection plan for engineer
reconnaissance to support planning and design.
3-34. Planners may use basic periods of time (such as the two-shift, 20-hour working day) or the days in a
month to prepare estimated labor needs extending over a period of time. However, adverse physical
conditions peculiar to the location must be considered. For example, severe icing conditions during the
winter months, periods of extreme tide range, or severe seasonal winds may have a direct bearing on
construction or rehabilitation work. When heavy seasonal rains, snowfall, icing, seasonal winds of unusual
severity, frequent or seasonal fogs, or exceptionally high or low temperatures are typical to a coastal area,
work time estimates should be modified accordingly to allow for such conditions. When operating in other
countries, planners need to consider holidays and their impact on local contractor work schedules. For
example, Muslims observe Ramadan as a month of fasting and do not go to work for a few weeks.

Design
3-35. The design of structures in TO construction is specified in the authorizing or construction directive.
Normally, engineers build one of two structures in the TO—initial or temporary. Initial design life is up to
6 months; temporary design life is up to 2 years. The use and actual life of the structure may exceed the
design life.
3-36. When possible, standard designs are used to save time in design, construction, and maintenance.
Using standard designs and their accompanying bill of materials allows for the advance procurement of
construction materials and equipment. The engineer must fit these designs to the site and adapt them to the
existing conditions. Reconnaissance, construction surveys, soil bearing tests, test piles, and, perhaps, a
sieve analysis of local sands and gravels are thus prerequisites to the preparation of final design drawings
and bill of materials.
3-37. The design of nonstandard structures is usually carried out only if standard designs cannot be adapted
or modified accordingly.

PLANNING AND DESIGN TASKS

3-38. General planning and design engineering planning tasks include—
 Determining requirements.
 Determining constraints.
 Determining standards.
 Developing GE options.
 Conducting engineering reconnaissance.
 Performing site reconnaissance and site selection.
 Producing site layout.
 Performing economic analysis.
 Recommending GE priorities, to include engineer effort, construction, material allocation, and
contractor support.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-5

Chapter 3

 Performing master planning.

 Performing program and project management.

General Engineering Requirements

3-39. Most GE requirements are determined during mission planning but may emerge as operations
progress and conditions change. GE requirements come from a variety of sources, to include operational
requirements, unit requirements, engineering principles, Unified Facilities Criteria, standards, rules of
allocation, and the user. The user may be referred to by many names, to include client, customer,
commander, tenant, civil authority, people, or occupant.
3-40. GE may be performed by a variety of units and individuals, such as a combat engineer, general
engineer, geospatial engineer, DOD civilian, contractor, specially trained technician, master planner,
professional architect, professional engineer, or professional environmental engineer.
3-41. Defining life cycle requirements specifies the capabilities and attributes that the designed facility
must have over its planned life cycle to achieve a specific purpose or function or fulfill a need of the
intended users. Defining requirements must often balance competing requirements, such as commander’s
guidance, best engineering practices (some viewed as constraints), and available funding.
3-42. Contingency construction plans and designs are characterized by the following traits:
 They are rapidly constructed or emplaced.
 They are standardized, modular, and scalable.
 They demonstrate the maximized use of pre-positioned stocks and locally procured materials
(sizes, quality, and military specifications).

Constraints
3-43. A constraint dictates an action or inaction, thus restricting how something can be done. Planning and
design are constrained by—
 Base camp standards (facility allowances and construction standards).
 Construction resources availability (labor, equipment, materials, money).
 Terrain and climate conditions.
 Weather effects.
 Available and usable vacant land areas.
 Funding limits.
 Force protection requirements.
 HN agreements.
 Environmental considerations and impacts.
 Operational timelines.
 Civil considerations and impacts.
 Locally available commercial power characteristics.

Standards
3-44. General engineer planners and designers consider all standards established by the CCDRs or higher
level headquarters for their area of responsibility. Some CDDRs publish guidebooks with rules of
allocation and planning or construction standards. CCDRs often establish standards in orders that may take
precedent over guidebooks.
3-45. Standards may be established in a number of areas that affect GE, to include design, construction,
materials, O&M, quality of life, and environmental considerations. Some are in Unified Facilities Criteria,
technical manuals, or other publications or are provided by commanders. Standards help provide effective,
efficient, and sustainable solutions. These are not to be confused with task standards that are used to assess
individual or unit performance.

3-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-46. Standards can be viewed as a continuum with a wide range of professionally recognized
specifications and expectations, from minimum to highly restrictive. Standards can have steps with
different names and various levels of complexity and technical details. For example, airfield standards are
initial or temporary contingency operations standards. The general engineer must be aware of these
standards, whether they are Service-oriented, state, national, or international in nature.
3-47. The CCDR specifies the facility allowances and construction standards for the theater to minimize
the engineer effort expended on any given facility while assuring that the facilities are adequate for health,
safety, and mission accomplishment. Typically, the CCDR will develop the base camp construction
standards for use within the theater utilizing the guidelines provided in JP 3-34. There can be construction
quality standards and material property standards that must be checked using quality assurance and quality
control activities. (See EP 415-1-261 series for information on quality assurance representative activities.
See NTRP
4-04.2.5/TM 3-34.42/AFPAM 32-1020/MCRP 3-17.7F for information on project quality control plans.)
3-48. The engineer must recommend the most feasible solutions to meet each requirement based on
construction guidelines and other planning factors. Standards documents that provide specific construction
examples are in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. The commander may also establish standards in specific
OPLANs, OPORDs, and directives. These standards are used as initial guides, provide planning tools, and
may also provide priorities for construction within base camps.

General Engineering Options

3-49. Planners and designers use multiple COAs in conceptual or initial plans and designs. These are
developed during initial planning when much of the needed information may not be available and
assumptions help fill the information gaps. This conceptual thinking helps frame the problem and narrow
the range of possible options or COAs. Preliminary estimates are refined and documented in the staff
running estimate.
3-50. As more information becomes available, planning and design may produce a series of more detailed
plans and designs. The MDMP is a routine process to develop and evaluate COAs. The engineering
evaluation of options or COAs includes evaluation criteria based on the range of considerations discussed
throughout this manual and most important to the operation or the solution being evaluated.
3-51. The MDMP or another technique may be used to reach a final decision on plans and designs. The
designated approving authority ensures that the detailed plans and designs conform to approved standards
and the master plan and approves them before contracting or construction begins.

Engineer Reconnaissance
3-52. Engineer reconnaissance enables GE planning and design by providing the information needed to
perform planning and design. Availability and assessment information requirements include infrastructure
(en route to and within the operational area), materials, LOC supportability, local labor, and contractor
capabilities. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 for more information.)

Site Reconnaissance
3-53. Each potential site should be reconnoitered to select the most economical use of available resources.
General locations and potential sites are determined by tactical requirements and initially analyzed by
preliminary studies (intelligence or technical), reports, and interviews with locals and remote
reconnaissance, such as a review of maps, aerial reconnaissance, aerial or space images, and databases. An
initial on-site reconnaissance may be made by the planning headquarters and later confirmed and expanded
by the constructing unit.

Site Selection
3-54. The exact site selection is normally made by the constructing unit after conducting a ground
reconnaissance that considers the selection factors for the specific project, such as access routes,
trafficability, soil characteristics, location, quality and quantity of materials, wind patterns, drainage,

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-7

Chapter 3

bivouac sites, and security. Other factors, such as real estate acquisition and EBS, should be considered as
well.

Site Layout
3-55. The site layout considers the access, environmental conditions, clearance, drainage, visitor center,
parking area, break area, equipment staging area, equipment park, bivouac sites, borrow sites, quarries,
aggregate supplies, haul routes, material storage areas, facility locations, utilities, and security. A simple
site layout sketch for some projects may evolve to detailed plans in master planning documents. Site
preparation requirements are discussed in TM 5-301 series.

Economic Analysis
3-56. GE analyzes the projected life cycle cost and potential mission impact of GE solutions and makes
recommendations to the commander based on this analysis. The economic analysis looks at all resources to
include labor, materials, equipment, and funds. Economic analysis may affect the planning, design,
construction, O&M methods, materials, and procedures.
3-57. A detailed cost estimate is developed to allow a cost comparison of concept designs or to help
analyze the engineering trade-offs made to complete the detailed plans and designs. Economic analysis may
need to be made at specific intervals over the life of a program or project as new information that changes
initial conditions becomes available. For example, the use and upgrade of existing facilities can save
resources, but the risk may be significant due to the impacts of unknown or unforeseen conditions.

Priorities
3-58. GE priorities and resource allocation conflicts may be resolved by boards with the final resolution
subject to the approval of the commander. GE priorities are identified and set at all levels. The priorities
guide the application of scarce or limited resources. Priorities may be adjusted many times as operations
progress.

Master Planning
3-59. Master planning is an integrated strategy for the long-range approval, design, construction, and
maintenance of required facilities and infrastructure throughout their life cycle that integrates
improvements for protection, quality of life for residents, and efficiencies and effectiveness at their best
possible cost. Proper master planning enables scalable and sustainable facilities, conserves resources, and
prevents wasted construction. Early master planning facilitates the transition to improved facilities of the
right size, with the right capabilities, and at the right locations as the operation develops. At lower levels,
the master planning is linked to the scheme of base camps and is the responsibility of the commander. A
good master plan will also incorporate an EBS. EBSs are an important part of the initial survey,
development, and master planning for base camps.
3-60. Key features of master planning include—
 Producing a documented initial plan and plans for changes of operational requirements, capacity
requirements, the purpose, construction standards, protection requirements, quality of life
standards, resources, contracted support, efficiencies, and effectiveness.
 Seeking to attain cost-effective, scalable, and sustainable solutions.
 Serving as the long-term blueprint for the implementation of future improvements or changes to
the service life of the base camp.
 Starting early to help facilitate the transition to more permanent facilities on the base camp as an
operation develops. (See JP 3-34.)

Note. See TM 5-803-1 and TM 5-803-5/NAVFAC P-960/AFM 88-43 for more information on
installation master planning.

3-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

Master Planning for Base Camps

3-61. Each base camp with a life-span of 6 months or more has a master plan that is linked to the higher
headquarters broader master plan. Theater guidance will address archiving requirements. Master planning
is one of the base camp commander’s most important responsibilities. The base camp commander,
supported by a team, a staff, or a base camp master planning working group, develops the base camp
master plan collectively with input from supported units.
3-62. The tasks to conduct master planning are under the construct of base camp operation. The current and
future operational requirements are analyzed, documented, and integrated into the master plan. The level of
detail of the base camp master plan depends on the maturity of the location, the speed at which the
operational need for a base camp develops, and the expected length of stay. Base camp master plans for
expeditionary or initial standard camps may be simply a sketch of the camp, while base camp master plans
for temporary or semipermanent camps will include fully engineered construction plans based on complete
surveys that integrate environmental considerations.
3-63. Master planning is one of the base camp commander’s most important responsibilities. Base camp
commanders involve tenant units and organizations in the process. Tenant units and organizations (military,
governmental, and contractors) provide input into master planning, to include the necessary designs and
details needed to fulfill their operational requirements. The CCDR establishes the policies and procedures
for developing, approving, and implementing base camp master planning in the JOA. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP
3-17.7N for additional information.)
3-64. The CCDR establishes the policies and procedures for developing, approving, and implementing
master planning in the JOA. These requirements for master planning are linked to the theater bed-down and
basing strategy and detailed in subordinate unit plans and orders. At the tactical level, commanders develop
a scheme of base camps. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N)
3-65. Master planning for base camps generally follows the process that is used for permanent
installations, except that it has a shortened planning horizon and is often not prepared to the same level of
detail. (See AR 210-20.) The techniques and procedures of master planning can also be used to develop
theater, JOA, or AO bed-down plans. (See UFC 2-100-01 and UFC 2-000-05N for additional information.)
3-66. Land use planning is also referred to as site design or site layout. (See EP 1105-3-1 for additional
information.)

TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES

3-67. The Army Facilities Components System (AFCS) is a set of standard facility designs managed and
supported by USACE.
3-68. The TCMS is an automated military engineering construction planning and execution support system
that delivers AFCS engineering and construction information.
3-69. There are a variety of other automated systems, tools, and applications that can assist in GE planning,
design, and construction. One example is the base engineering survey tool kit. The base engineering survey
tool kit is a stand-alone geographic information system application designed to simplify bed-down
planning, such as planning tent city layouts and configurations. It is a decision support tool that provides
the expedient forward infrastructure that is consistent with the requirements for rapid deployment, minimal
logistics, and required protection. (See the Base Engineering Survey Tool Web site.)

GENERAL ENGINEER STAFF

3-70. The general engineer staff assists the commander by furnishing engineer advice and
recommendations to the commander and other staff officers and coordinating and supervising specific
engineer activities for which the engineer staff is responsible. The engineer staff assists the commander by
performing a variety of functions to synchronize engineer operations in the operational area. (See
FM 6-0, FM 3-34, and FM 7-15.) General engineer staff functions include—
 Advising the commander on engineer capabilities and the best means to integrate and
synchronize engineer efforts to achieve the desired outcome.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-9

Chapter 3

 Integrating and synchronizing engineer operations between multiple commands and

organizations to achieve the commander’s unity of effort.
 Preparing the engineering portion of plans, the engineer estimate, engineer fragmentary orders
and warning orders; producing supporting products; and updating the engineer estimate.
 Participating on project approval and acquisition review boards and other boards or working
groups, as necessary.
 Providing real-time reachback linkage to USACE, the U.S. Army Engineer School, and
supporting national assets.
 Planning and coordinating engineer support that uses military engineering units and contractors.
 Recommending policies and priorities for construction and real estate acquisition and for Class
IV construction materials.
 Planning and coordinating the procurement and distribution of Class IV construction materials.
 Furnishing advice on the effect of bed-down facilities and base camp operations on the
environment according to applicable U.S., international, and HN laws and agreements.
 Recommending appropriate construction standards.
 Standardizing infrastructure systems and design approaches.
 Identifying engineering support requirements that exceed funding authorizations and organized
engineer capabilities.
 Furnishing advice on the feasibility, acceptability, and suitability of engineering plans.
 Coordinating with DOD construction agents and other engineer support agencies through
appropriate channels.
 Coordinating the development of environmental and waste management plans.

UNITED STATES ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

3-71. USACE provides the engineering standards for construction; guidance on scalability, standardization,
and modularity; expertise on contingency standard designs; and management of the AFCS. They also
manage the worldwide power contingency contracts that provide power system services during conflict and
disaster response locations. USACE provides deployable augmentation teams to support commanders.

MILITARY DECISIONMAKING PROCESS

3-72. The MDMP is well defined in ADRP 5-0. Likewise, the planning construct in a joint environment is
well articulated in JP 5-0. Many GE tasks have unique requirements that must be considered when applying
the MDMP to a specific mission. Table 3-1 lists some potentially unique aspects of GE missions as they
pertain to each MDMP step.
3-73. Although not nearly all-inclusive of the variations required of the GE effort, this list demonstrates
that GE missions and tasks can be complex, resource-intensive, and require extensive and proactive
coordination. Additionally, a successful GE effort requires a masterful understanding of all engineer
requirements (combat, general, and geospatial) and their roles in the concept of operations.

ENGINEER RECONNAISSANCE
3-74. Reconnaissance is a mission undertaken to obtain, by visual observation or other detection methods,
information about the activities and resources of an enemy or adversary, or to secure data concerning the
meteorological, hydrographic, or geographic characteristics of a particular area (JP 2-0).
3-75. Route classification is a classification assigned to a route using factors of minimum width, worst
route type, least bridge, raft, or culvert military load classification, and obstructions to traffic flow
(JP 3-34). Route classification results from collecting detailed technical information on various components
of a designated route, such as the road network, the bridges along a selected route, any underpasses and/or
overpasses, and so forth. Route classification provides a graphical display of the load-carrying capacity and
the rate-of-travel capacity of the selected route. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 and MCWP 3-17 for
additional information.)

3-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

Table 3-1. General engineering in the military decisionmaking process

Steps of the Military

Decisionmaking General Engineering Considerations
Process
• Review joint orders.
• Receive higher headquarters construction directives.
Receipt of the mission
• Request geospatial and medical information about the AO.
• Establish engineer-related boards.
• Determine the availability of construction materials.
• Review the availability of U.S. Army, joint, multinational, HN, and contract
assets.
• Determine and review established construction standards and base camp
master planning documents.
• Review Unified Facilities Criteria.
Mission analysis • Review existing geospatial and medical data on potential sites.
• Conduct site reconnaissance (if possible).
• Determine the threat, including environmental and explosive hazards.
• Obtain necessary geologic, hydrologic, and climatic data.
• Determine the level of interagency cooperation required.
• Determine funding sources.
• Produce different designs that meet the commander’s intent. (Use the
TCMS when the project is of sufficient size and scope.)
COA development • Determine alternate construction locations, methods, means, materials,
and timelines.
• Determine real property and real estate requirements.
• Utilize the critical path method to determine the length of different COAs
COA analysis and the ability to crash the project.
• Perform an economic analysis.
• Determine the most feasible, acceptable, and suitable methods of
COA comparison completing the GE effort.
• Determine and compare the risks of each GE COA.
• Gain approval of the construction management plan, safety plan, security
COA approval plan, logistics plan, and environmental plan.
• Produce construction directives.
Orders production • Provide input to the appropriate plans and orders.
• Ensure that resources are properly allocated.
• Conduct construction prebriefings.
Rehearsal • Conduct preinspections and construction meetings.
• Synchronize the construction plan with local and adjacent units.
• Conduct quality assurance, quality control, and midproject inspections.
Execution and • Participate in engineer-related boards.
assessment • Maintain as-built and redline drawings.
• Conduct project turnover activities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-11

Chapter 3

Table 3-1. General engineering in the military decisionmaking process (continued)

Legend:
AO area of operations
COA course of action
GE general engineering
HN host nation
TCMS Theater Construction Management System

3-76. The five forms of reconnaissance are zone, area, route, force, and special. See ADRP 3-90 for
additional information on the forms of reconnaissance.
3-77. Site reconnaissance includes obtaining information to plan security, site layout, and site drainage.
Survey and soils experts should participate in the site reconnaissance. Reconnaissance to support the
construction of a new road may be classified as area or route reconnaissance. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-
17.4 and FM 3-90-1.)
3-78. When available, an automated route reconnaissance kit can provide engineer units with an automated
reconnaissance package that allows the reconnaissance element to collect and process reconnaissance
information. An overlay is made with attachments that describe all pertinent terrain features in detail. This
overlay forms part of the mobility input to the common operational picture and is maintained by the
engineer unit tasked to perform the reconnaissance. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 and MCWP 3-17 for
more information on route reconnaissance.)
3-79. An air or map reconnaissance includes a general study of the topography, drainage pattern, and
vegetation. Construction problems, camouflage possibilities, and access routes should be identified. A route
reconnaissance plan is developed by selecting the areas to investigate and the questions to be answered
from the information available or, if time is available, to request and support the reconnaissance. Air and/or
map reconnaissance can be used to eliminate unsuitable sites, but cannot be relied on for site selection.
Digital imagery greatly enhances the usefulness of this method of reconnaissance.
3-80. While air and map reconnaissance can effectively minimize needed ground reconnaissance, it cannot
replace ground reconnaissance. It is on the ground that most questions must be answered or that most
observations tentatively made from available information are verified.
3-81. There are two types of engineer technical reconnaissance discussed in FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4
that may be performed as part of a reconnaissance or as a special task (route classification or an
assessment) or as a survey. Engineer assessments and surveys are typically conducted at the operational
level and in support of the GE function. Assessments and surveys include—
 Bridge reconnaissance.
 Gap crossings and choke points.
 Engineer resource assessments.
 Infrastructure reconnaissance.
 Environmental reconnaissance.
 Airfield assessments.

3-82. Engineer reconnaissance includes two levels of detail: assessment and survey. The comparison and
contrast is as follows:
 Assessment. An assessment, in the context of engineer reconnaissance, is a judgment about
something based on a technical understanding of the situation. Within the range of technical
reconnaissance, an assessment takes less time and technical expertise to perform than a survey
but yields less technical detail than a survey. Reconnaissance elements do not require specialized
technical expertise to perform an assessment. They conduct assessments following the same
basic formats that a survey would use.
 Survey. A survey, in the context of engineering reconnaissance, looks at or considers something
closely, especially to form a technical opinion. Within the range of technical reconnaissance, a
survey requires more time and technical expertise than an assessment to perform, but it

3-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

subsequently produces more technical detail. Specific technical expertise is required to conduct a
survey. The survey team is normally augmented by forward USACE personnel assigned to a
forward engineer support team, other technical specialties (such as medical, civil affairs, other
government agencies, contractors, and HN), and reachback as needed to enhance the survey
quality.
3-83. General engineers working at the operational level will conduct reconnaissance primarily to identify
requirements for operational level sustainment/combat service support. Technical reconnaissance
capabilities are typically conducted by a general engineer assessment team or survey team to gather the
technical information required for—
 Maintenance and upgrades of ground LOCs.
 Bridge construction and repair.
 GE support of airfields and heliports.
 GE support of seaports.
 GE support of protection procedures.
 Real estate and real property maintenance activities.
 Procurement and production of construction materials.
 GE support of bed-down facilities, base camps, and support areas.
 Power systems.
 Support to petroleum pipelines and storage facilities.
 Water supplies and well drillings.
 Underwater and other specialized construction support requirements.
 Infrastructure surveys.
 Environmental baseline assessments.
 Environmental remediation surveys and assessments.

ROUTE CLASSIFICATION
3-84. The route classification is assigned to a route using factors of minimum width and worst route type;
least bridge, raft, or culvert military load classification; and obstructions to traffic flow. The military load
classification is a standard system in which a route, bridge, or raft is assigned class number(s) representing
the load it can carry. Vehicles are also assigned number(s) indicating the minimum class of route, bridge, or
raft they are authorized to use. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 for more information on route
classification.)
3-85. Route reconnaissance is normally a combat engineer task. Route classification is normally a GE task.
However, there is no clear dividing line from the technical effort required for the combat engineering task
of classifying a route for combat vehicle traffic to the GE task of conducting a road reconnaissance to
estimate the effort required for the design of an upgrade of a MSR.
3-86. The combat engineering task will effectively address classification of the route, but will also provide
information useful in the general engineer estimate. Similarly, the general engineer estimate will effectively
address the effort required for an upgrade and will provide the information required to properly classify the
route. The general engineer conducts reconnaissance to obtain information needed to classify and provide
designs for upgrades.
3-87. Route reconnaissance is conducted to evaluate the proposed routes, soil properties, terrain, borrow
sites, quarries, hydrology, and condition of existing roads. The information from route reconnaissance
supports route selection decisions; design of a new road; or the maintenance, repair, or upgrade of an
existing road needed before a route can carry the proposed traffic.
3-88. Route reconnaissance is classified as hasty or deliberate. The way in which route reconnaissance is
performed depends on the amount of detail required, the time available, the terrain problems encountered,
and the tactical situation.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-13

Chapter 3

3-89. Hasty route reconnaissance determines the immediate military trafficability of a specified route. It is
limited to critical terrain data necessary for route classification. The results are part of the mobility input to
the common operational picture. Information concerning the route is updated with additional reports as
required by the situation and/or the commander's guidance.
3-90. A deliberate route reconnaissance is conducted when sufficient time and qualified technical
personnel are available. Deliberate route reconnaissance is usually conducted when operational
requirements are anticipated to cause heavy, protracted use of the road and may be the first reconnaissance
conducted or follow the conduct of a hasty route reconnaissance.

INFRASTRUCTURE RECONNAISSANCE (ASSESSMENT AND SURVEY)

3-91. Infrastructure reconnaissance is a multidiscipline variant of reconnaissance to collect detailed
technical information on various categories of the public systems, services, and facilities of a country or
region. The infrastructure reconnaissance develops the situational understanding of the local capability to
support the infrastructure requirements of the local populace or military operations within a specific area.
Infrastructure reconnaissance is accomplished in stages: the infrastructure assessment and the infrastructure
survey. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 for additional information.)
3-92. Coordinating with the combat engineer units for an on-site visit, an engineer reconnaissance team
can be expected to conduct the initial assessment with available expertise from the supported unit. The
initial assessment provides information to confirm or deny planning assumptions, update running
estimates/staff estimates, determine immediate needs, develop priorities, obtain resources, and refine a
plan. As operations continue, general engineer and other supporting technical support elements provide
teams that are qualified to perform an infrastructure survey. These infrastructure survey teams use the
infrastructure assessments from the engineer reconnaissance teams to prioritize categories and identify
those parts of the infrastructure to be reassessed in more detail. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 for more
information.)
3-93. GE reconnaissance capabilities, when not in direct support of combat engineers, are typically
organized into assessment or survey teams. These task-organized teams will have a specific focus for the
collection of technical information and are less likely to be teamed directly with reconnaissance units in the
BCT or regimental combat team. The regimental combat team will tend to rely more heavily on joint
Service support or other GE augmentation to provide the engineer technical reconnaissance.
3-94. Technical capabilities required to perform a comprehensive reconnaissance include robust support
from joint Service, multiagency, contractor, HN, multinational, and reachback elements. FFE provides a
broad range of primarily generating-force activities that can support reconnaissance by linking in through
the GE element on the ground to apply a higher degree of technical expertise to the assessment or survey
mission. FFE, as it relates to reconnaissance, is discussed in detail in FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4.

ENVIRONMENTAL RECONNAISSANCE
3-95. Environmental reconnaissance is focused on collecting technical information on existing
environmental conditions and identifying areas that are environmentally sensitive or of relative
environmental concern. The information collected is used to assess the impact of military operations on the
environment and to identify potential environmental impacts on safety and protection.
3-96. Like infrastructure reconnaissance, environmental reconnaissance is a multidiscipline task conducted
by a base team augmented as necessary with additional expertise. An engineer reconnaissance team may
conduct the initial site assessment and gather information, which assists in determining whether a parcel of
land is acceptable for military use. This assessment is as detailed as the situation permits and is focused on
determining whether the site is healthy for Soldiers and Marines.

ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE SURVEY AND HEALTH SITE ASSESSMENT

3-97. The general engineer will likely be responsible for coordinating environmental reconnaissance to
conduct the EBS but should rely on other branches (CBRN, medical, civil affairs, and explosive ordnance
disposal) for assistance in those areas requiring specialized expertise.

3-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-98. If the tactical situation permits, commanders conduct an EBS before occupying a site. An EBS
documents the original environmental condition of the land. An EBS is required if an area is to be occupied
by U.S. forces for more than 30 days. Linking an EBS to the signing of a lease whenever possible is an
excellent method of providing desired financial protection for the United States and its allies against unjust
and unreasonable claims and charges for using, renting, or leasing real or personal property.
3-99. An EBS identifies environmental hazards and issues that could impact area suitability for occupation
by U.S. forces. This document is also critical during base cleanup and closure, when the U.S. military
prepares to return the land back to the HN in its original condition. An EBS is also conducted to protect the
U.S. government from future claims or liability.
3-100. Ideally, the EBS is conducted in conjunction with an EHSA since the two documents support each
other. An EHSA is conducted by a medical base team augmented with other specialties (engineer, CBRN,
or others).
3-101. An EHSA is conducted to determine whether environmental contaminants from current or prior
land use, disease vectors, or other environmental health conditions that could pose health risks to deployed
personnel exist at the deployment sites. Additionally, an EHSA identifies industrial facility operations and
commodities near the site that could, if damaged or destroyed, release contaminants harmful to personnel.
While the EBS is generally more visual and engineer-related, the EHSA is more analytical (which includes
a greater variety and detail of sampling), with a greater focus on health hazards.

Note. See the Environmental Surveys Handbook: Contingency Operations (Overseas) and FM 3-
34.5/MCRP 4-11B for more information on conducting an EBS before the establishment of a
base camp.

UNCERTAINTY
3-102. Commanders and their staffs must have tolerance for the uncertainties (beyond their span of
control) associated with planning GE solutions, specifically base camps and bed-down facilities, and be
prepared to handle the inherent ambiguities and complexities through extensive planning and continuous
coordination that effectively mitigate risk. Two of the most demanding challenges are as follows:
 Projected population. Accurately estimating the intended base camp population (personnel,
vehicles, and equipment that will be on the base camp or facility at any one time). This can be
difficult due to fluid changes in assigned units, transient personnel, contractors, and HN
personnel.
 Projected service life-span. Accurately determining the expected service life-span of the base
camp or facility based on mission duration. The size and composition of the deployed force may
change between planning and construction and will almost certainly change over the life-span of
a base camp or facility. In addition, the actual mission support timeline may also change over
time and require adjustment as well.
3-103. These uncertainties force planners to plan and seek design GE solutions based on valid
assumptions, which if proven false can result in inadequate facilities and infrastructure or wasted
construction that cannot support the mission. With this in mind, engineers strive for planning and designing
scalable solutions, which will assist in mitigating the effects of uncertainty.

GENERAL ENGINEERING DESIGN

3-104. Most design is performed by trained architects and engineers of many disciplines, such as civil,
architectural, geotechnical, structural, electrical, and environmental. Some engineers may be professionally
registered, and others may be trained to perform simpler designs. Most military design does not require the
plans to be certified and stamped by a professional engineer. The U.S. Army has designated some duty
positions that require a professional architect, a professional engineer, or a professional environmental
engineer certification or registration.
3-105. Military engineers are trained to perform design by several methods: using basic engineering
principles, equations, and design procedures; using step-by-step procedures with tables and charts; and

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-15

Chapter 3

using computer- or application-aided design. Each method may be needed to site-adapt standard facility
designs. All methods of design require engineering judgment, the application of engineering principles,
mathematical problem solving, and engineering knowledge.

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3-106. Key design considerations include—
 Operational requirements.
 Resource constraints.
 Basing strategies.
 Base camp schemes.
 Master plans.
 Design criteria.
 Standards.
 Design life expectancies.
 Economic analysis.
 Available materials.
 Available units.
 Intended purposes or functions.

3-107. Design produces efficient and effective solutions. Ideally, if a new design is necessary, it should be
simple and flexible and must reflect available materials and the level of training of construction personnel.
(See TM 3-34.51.)
3-108. During design, engineering principles, construction means, standards, site conditions, and
adaptable, scalable designs are matched against client facility and infrastructure requirements. The end
result is the production of detailed site designs, plans, drawings, specifications, and special instructions
needed for constructing facilities and infrastructure that meet requirements. Some higher headquarters
designs may be conceptual, preliminary, detailed, or final-approved designs. Some designs cannot be
finalized until the construction unit completes their engineering reconnaissance to obtain on-site
information. Other standard or detailed designs may be site-adapted with or without higher headquarters
approval.

Design Agency Processs

3-109. The design agency may be a military headquarters engineer staff, a constructing unit, a service
construction agent (USACE or NAVFAC), or a contracted architect or design firm. Design begins during
initial project planning. DD Form 1391 (FY____ Military Construction Project Data) is a programming
tool used to request and justify a user need. The DD Form 1391 format enables the preparing official to
systematically provide the data required for design, proper review, and validation of the project. Refer to
AR 420–1,
FC 1-300-09N, OPNAVINST 11010.20H, and UFC 1-300-07A for information on preparing the DD Form
1391, project programming development, and design procedures.
3-110. However, not all design work is based on DD Form 1391. Other projects may also be designed
based on construction directives from higher headquarters, such as an OPORD to an engineer unit
designated as the construction agent for a design-build project. The design period may begin before, during,
or after force deployment.

Architect and Engineer Roles

3-111. The design architect or engineer is professionally liable for any failure in the functionality and
safety of the design. Therefore, the architect and engineer have a vested and shared interest in ensuring that
the project is correctly built according to plans and specifications. The contracting office or responsible
design headquarters engineer organization coordinates with the architect or engineer to produce the plans

3-16 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

and specifications and to design change directives required to accommodate the differing site conditions,
client-requested changes to the design, or problems encountered during construction.
3-112. The architect or engineer produces a set of plans and specifications (to include a submittal register
for materials, equipment, and systems requiring approval before use) based on the concepts and
requirements that define and meet the needs of the client. The architect and engineer may provide design
and engineering assistance and oversight during project construction.

Site-Adapted Designs
3-113. Site-adapted designs are generally approved by the headquarters that completed the concept
designs. The constructing unit may possess the necessary engineering expertise (or obtain it through
reachback), automated design tools, access to standard designs, and network capability to share, archive,
and print construction documents.
3-114. Planners and the constructing unit assess the progress and compare forecasted outcomes with
actual events to determine overall effectiveness. Based on this assessment, adjustments are made or new
options are developed to achieve the desired results. Lessons learned and recommended improvements to
standard designs and theater adaptations are captured to facilitate design modifications, and facility records
and as-built designs are updated and maintained to facilitate future construction and transfer or closure.
3-115. One of the possible options for base camp and bed-down facility design of new facilities should be
the use of standard AFCS designs. As plans are finalized, the standard designs are site-adapted accordingly.
If some or all existing facilities are used, the information from the AFCS can be used as planning factors to
help estimate and assess facility requirements and design upgrades. Standard facility designs should be
modular, scalable, sustainable, and energy-efficient. The AFCS and Service doctrinal design and
construction technical publications should provide metric designs and standards that can be used in regions
that use the metric system.
3-116. When possible, the construction unit should be included in the design effort. Since the construction
unit may not yet be identified during the initial design effort, an engineer with construction experience,
knowledge of construction techniques, and unit capabilities should be part of the design team. The
construction unit or its immediate higher headquarters should be included in the detailed design process if
they are not directly responsible for it.

Drainage System Designs

3-117. The drainage system for each facility or project site should be planned and designed before
occupying the site or starting construction. The planning and design of drainage systems are conducted by
the higher headquarters design engineers and the constructing unit. The drainage system includes the
overall drainage plan, area drainage structures, individual facility drainage structures, and temporary
construction drainage.
3-118. Drainage system design includes construction drainage, a sedimentation control plan, and
permanent drainage structures. The three basic procedures in drainage system design are—
 Determining the area that is contributing runoff.
 Estimating the quantity of runoff.
 Designing the drainage structure for maximum runoff.

3-119. In permanent, peacetime construction, underground drains are often used because the efficient use
of space, environmental considerations, and safety practices do not permit large, open ditches, particularly
for the disposal of collected runoff. In contrast, designs for road drainage in contingency operations use
surface ditching almost exclusively because of limited pipe supplies and the absence of storm sewer
systems to collect runoff. Design the drainage system to remove surface water effectively from operating
areas, to intercept and dispose of runoff from adjoining areas, to intercept and remove runoff expected due
to the selected design storm, and to minimize the effects of exceptionally adverse weather conditions.
3-120. The siting of base camps and individual facilities can have major effects on required drainage
structures and their associated cost in terms of materials and construction effort. Inadequate drainage is the

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-17

Chapter 3

most common cause of road and airfield failure. Data on local drainage conditions for initial planning may
be obtained from maps and aerial reconnaissance and then confirmed with on-site ground reconnaissance
and information from local inhabitants. (See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, for a discussion
on drainage system designs.)

DESIGN VARIABLES
3-121. Some of the primary variables affecting design that must be resolved through planning and
reconnaissance include—
 The availability of suitable existing facilities and infrastructure.
 The availability of suitable construction materials and means for performing construction
(skilled labor and special equipment provided by troops and or contractors).
 Facility allowances and construction standards.
 The prescribed level of capabilities and linkages to other similar facilities.
 Terrain and weather effects at selected facility locations.
 Protection and security requirements (based on threat and vulnerability assessments).
 Civil and environmental considerations.
 Cost and time constraints.
 Governing U.S. regulations and policies and HN laws and customs.

PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS
3-122. Facilities should be designed to resist attack through selecting proper materials, limiting the
number of doors and windows, and orientating openings to minimize overall blast radius exposure.
Minimum contingency requirements normally are hardened walls and roof that protect occupants and that
are sized to adequately accommodate personnel.
3-123. Overhead blast protection designs can be incorporated into contingency construction facilities and
are available as a retrofit for existing structures (such as low-emissivity glass [commonly referred to as
e-glass]). The most common design is a layered structure with one layer used to detonate incoming
munitions and a second layer used to absorb the blast concussion and shrapnel.
3-124. The AFCS incorporates limited protection requirements into its designs. Protection designs fall
into two main categories: isolation and hardening. For facility protection, planners consider using facility
hardening, dispersion, standoff, and security. Some examples are as follows:
 For facilities that must be isolated, most designs will need to be augmented. One means is the
use of soil-filled containers to create a system of barriers that surround and separate the facility.
 The hardening of facilities is desirable when terrain constricts dispersion and the threat analysis
indicates that the facilities are likely possible targets for enemy weapons. Concrete masonry
walls can be hardened with reinforced concrete up to the blast height. The walls can also be
reinforced with blast mitigation products as outlined in GTA 90-01-011. Hardening techniques
are discussed in ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.
 Widely dispensing facilities (where terrain conditions permit) should be established to prevent
the enemy from inflicting massive damage in a single strike; however, precautions must be made
to ensure that operations are not unduly hampered by ill-planned dispersion schemes.
 Standoff distances that equate actual distance from force protection barriers, such as fences, to
the closest facility should also be considered. Avoid building facilities close to fences.
3-125. The force protection of a facility or installation may be accomplished by active and passive
security measures, including facility hardening and dispersion. (See ADRP 3-37 and ATP 3-37.34/MCWP
3-17.6.) The enemy situation must be evaluated as carefully and thoroughly as possible. Threats to supply
and maintenance facilities may include conventional and nonconventional ground forces, CBRN threats,
and attacks delivered by direct and indirect systems. The remote delivery of mines should also be
considered.

3-18 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-126. Insurgent activities may pose a threat to logistics assets. In determining how to best protect a
facility against interdictory attacks, the commander must take into account the surrounding terrain, local
weather and climate conditions, the availability of Class IV and V materials to support protective measures,
and the current enemy situation.
3-127. From the GE perspective, the protection areas that most affect base camp development (site
selection, layout, design, and construction) include base camp security and defense, antiterrorism measures,
survivability, facilities for force health protection, safety techniques (including fratricide avoidance),
physical security systems and, if assigned the task, detainee and resettlement facilities. The development of
the base camp layout will ensure the adequate protection of personnel and assets.
3-128. The key to the effective development of base camp protection is a working partnership between
those personnel focused on antiterrorism and other protection issues and the site engineers. This partnership
facilitates the development of integrated physical security protective measures and security procedures that
are consistent with base camp design.
3-129. The early identification of protection requirements is essential to base camp planning efforts.
Addressing the collective protection concerns early helps to ensure that site location and layout are
compatible with security operations and mission accomplishment.

Notes.

1. See ADRP 3-37, AFCS program guidelines, ATP 3-37.2, ATP 3-39.32, GTA 90-01-011, and
ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 for additional information on determining threats, assessing
vulnerabilities, and integrating antiterrorism and protection measures within operations.

2. See UFC 4-010-01 and UFC 4-010-02 (FOUO) for additional information on antiterrorism
standards.

3. See UFC 4-010-03, UFC 4-010-05, UFC 4-020-01, UFC 4-020-03FA (FOUO), UFC 4-021-
01,
UFC 4-021-02, UFC 4-022-01, UFC 4-022-02, UFC 4-023-03, UFC 4-023-07, UFC 4-024-01,
and UFC 4-025-01 for additional information on facility force protection planning, design, and
construction.

4. See UFC 1-201-01 for additional information on the criteria for life safety- and habitability-
related design requirements for nonpermanent facilities in support of military operations.

Fire Protection and Fire Prevention

3-130. An effective fire protection plan is critical to the safety of personnel, facilities, and equipment.
Adequate fire protection must be included in the design of base camps. This includes proper tent and
building spacing, means of egress, wiring standards, use of flame-retardant materials, firefighting vehicle
access, availability of water supply, and fire protection and hazmat spill response equipment. (See
FM 5-415 and UFC 3-600-01 for more information.)
3-131. The engineer firefighting unit is discussed in TM 5-315. Engineer firefighting units are considered
specialized units. They specialize in fire prevention, rescue, and firefighting to protect personnel, assets,
and installations. They can assist in fire inspections and fire prevention training and can advise the
commander on fire hazards. They are typically assigned to installations, seaports, and airfields.
3-132. Temporary structures generally use combustible materials. Austere environments often lack
adequate water and maintenance resources to support modern fire suppression systems. Fire can result in
the rapid loss of facilities and can spread quickly to other structures. Poor construction standards,
flammable materials, and human error can make facilities very susceptible to fire damage and the
catastrophic loss of life or materials. TM 5-315 gives specific guidance for firefighting and rescue
procedures in the TO. This technical manual prescribes the assignment of firefighting assets based on the
supported population or facility area. For example, airfields, troop populations of 5,000 to 10,000 persons,

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-19

Chapter 3

or storage areas containing more than 100,000 square feet of storage space are each allocated at least one
fire pumper truck team.
3-133. The commander has full responsibility for implementing fire prevention and protection. All U.S.
Army, command, and local fire regulations must be enforced. Programs of inspection must be established,
self-help and firefighting responsibilities identified, and equipment assigned. AR 420-1 provides further
information about fire prevention and protection.
3-134. Fire protection measures available to the commander include—
 Enforcing the rule.
 Setting up alarm and notification procedures.
 Procuring and making available extinguishers and other firefighting equipment.
 Training personnel in fire prevention and protection measures.
 Locating water tanks and reservoirs in key centralized areas to properly support firefighting
activities.
 Ensuring that installation or base camp facilities allow access for firefighting personnel and their
vehicles to move about freely to perform their duties unimpeded.
3-135. An additional requirement for the assets that provide fire protection is responding to hazmat spills.
This support is an important part of environmental considerations that may have a direct effect on force
health protection. (See UFC 3-601-02 for additional information on dry chemical suppression systems.)

Safety
3-136. Designers work together with safety specialists to mitigate hazards that are developed as part of
risk management, which is initiated during planning and continues throughout the base camp life cycle.
3-137. The design influences safety considerations during construction. Some designs and the associated
construction methods may be more difficult, especially when unskilled labor is used, and inherently more
dangerous. Designers must ensure that the complexity of designs is reasonable and justifiable based on the
construction means available and that the means for enforcing safety and mitigating risks during
construction is achievable. HN laborers and contractors may not adhere to expected construction and safety
standards.
3-138. Any specifications in component configurations, materials, and construction tasks that are essential
for achieving the quality and safety features of the design must be clearly articulated and communicated to
the constructing unit and become part of the overall quality assurance or quality control plan. Any incorrect
design decisions, changes desired by the facility user, or material substitutions based on availability may
require the reevaluation of designs.
3-139. One of the possible options for the base camp and bed-down facility design of new facilities
should be the use of standard AFCS designs. As plans are finalized, the standard designs are site-adapted
accordingly. If existing facilities are used, the information from the AFCS can be used as planning factors
to help estimate and assess facility requirements and design upgrades. Standard facility designs should be
modular, scalable, sustainable, and energy-efficient. The AFCS converts U.S. standard designs to metric
designs.
3-140. When possible, the construction unit should be included in the design effort. Since the construction
unit may not yet be identified during the initial design effort, an engineer with construction experience,
knowledge of construction techniques, and unit capabilities should be part of the design team. The
construction unit or its immediate higher headquarters should be included in the detailed design process if
they are not directly responsible for it.

Structural Integrity
3-141. The safety risks from structural collapse increase when existing buildings are used for a new
purpose with greater loads or when damaged. Although contingency construction standards are generally
conservative to address a wide range of loads in different environments, the structural integrity and
conditions of an existing structure can vary greatly based on HN construction standards, the quality of

3-20 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

construction, and the effects of battle damage. Existing structures may have little resistance to seismic
activity, abnormal weather, or impact loads.
3-142. The general engineer or other qualified engineer representative must oversee the allowable use of
existing structures. A proper structural analysis and materials evaluation must be completed before any
protection measures are affixed to an existing structure since they may increase the load-bearing structural
capacity.
3-143. A qualified engineer oversees the repair, modification, or expansion of any existing building to
ensure that it conforms to established policies and standards. Construction variances with structural
components that deviate from the Service standards require a structural assessment and compliance with
Unified Facilities Criteria. Material substitutions for structural members with standard designs require a
structural assessment and compliance with Unified Facilities Criteria. This necessitates completing a
structural assessment and repair before buildings can be occupied.

GENERAL ENGINEERING DESIGN PROCESS

3-144. Military GE does not use any single specified design process. A specific design process may be
better suited for one type problem than another, or a designer may be more experienced using another
specific design process. Design is often a collaborative and interactive process with planners, engineers,
and actual or potential users. A typical design process generally consists of the following steps:
 Define life cycle requirements.
 Identify resources and constraints.
 Develop and conceptualize options.
 Evaluate options.
 Make a decision.
 Implement, assess, and adjust as necessary.

ENGINEER WORK LINE

3-145. The control mechanisms established in ADP 3-0, ADP 5-0, and ADP 6-0 are essential tools to help
engineers accomplish the mission according to the commander’s intent. An engineer work line is a
coordinated boundary or phase line used to compartmentalize an AO to indicate where specific engineer
units have primary responsibility for the engineer effort. (See FM 3-34.) It may be used at division level to
discriminate between an AO supported by division engineer assets and an AO supported by direct support
or general support corps engineer units. The engineer work line may also be used as a boundary between
engineer organizations, but this should not be its primary purpose. It may or may not follow maneuver unit
boundaries.
3-146. Traditionally, the engineer work line is used at division level to discriminate between engineer
assets assigned to the division level and higher-echelon engineer units. It also serves as a visualization tool
for the engineer staff officer. Forward of the engineer work line, efforts are focused on combat engineering
functions and tasks with minimal GE being accomplished. It is behind the engineer work line where most
resource-intensive GE tasks are performed.
3-147. The use of the engineer work line as a visualization tool and mission command or command and
control measure as depicted in figure 3-1 is effective on the contiguous battlefield. This allows engineer
units (who are organic and who augment BCTs) to focus on providing robust combat engineering and
limited GE support forward of the engineer work line. To the rear of the engineer work line, uncommitted
echelons-above-BCT engineer units in a direct support or general support role to the division can focus
primarily on providing GE tasks that sustain the division. Such tasks may include MSR upgrade and repair,
facilities construction, repair of field landing strips, LOC bridging, and other sustainment/combat service
support of the force.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-21

Chapter 3

Legend:
AA assembly area
EWL engineer work line

Figure 3-1. Division engineer work line in contiguous operations

3-148. Figure 3-2 depicts an example of multiple engineer work lines to depict responsibilities between
engineers (who are organic and who augment BCTs) and BCT and echelons-above-BCT engineer units. In
this case, engineers (who are organic and who augment BCTs) would focus primarily on engineering tasks
inside Engineer Work Lines Dog, Cat, and Lion, while echelon-above-BCT engineers are responsible for
GE tasks throughout the remainder of the division AO, including the intermediate staging bases. During the
offense and defense, the focus shifts to providing support to the BCTs and providing combat engineering
support to combat maneuver forces. However, during stability operations or DSCA, GE tasks will be
executed with echelons-above-BCT engineers operating throughout the AO.

3-22 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

Legend:
AO area of operations
EWL engineer work line
ISB intermediate staging base
MSR main supply route

Figure 3-2. Division engineer work line in noncontiguous operations

3-149. At corps, theater, or joint levels, the engineer staff officer for that echelon may establish a corps
engineer work line or theater engineer work line in much the same manner as the division work line. The
theater engineer staff officer augments subordinate echelons by assuming responsibility for specific
support, on a task basis, forward to the appropriate engineer work line, thus releasing the direct
support/general support GE units to engage in activities as far forward as possible.
3-150. The engineer staff officer who assigns the engineer work line to a particular sector is responsible
for planning and advising the commander when the engineer work line shifts. This occurs after a careful
analysis of the ongoing operation, available GE assets, and future requirements. Early in a contingency, it
may be very difficult for the theater engineer staff officer to shift the theater engineer work line out of the
theater staging base because of shortages in GE assets.

UNIFIED FACILITIES CRITERIA

3-151. The Unified Facilities Criteria provide facility planning, design, construction, operations,
maintenance, sustainment/combat service support, restoration, and modernization criteria that apply to all
DOD and Service components. The Army Facilities Standardization Program is a formal process for
developing U.S. Army standards and standard designs. Standard design includes the drawings and
specifications developed to ensure the application of sound engineering principles in the design process.
3-152. The Army Facilities Standardization Committee has final approving authority for all Unified
Facilities Criteria that affect U.S. Army standards. U.S. Army standards are listed in a table of mandatory
criteria containing functional requirements necessary to complete military missions (present and future).
These U.S. Army standards are coordinated with U.S. Army functional proponents and are approved by the
Assistant Chief of Staff for Installation Management in coordination with the Army Facilities
Standardization Committee.
3-153. Unified Facilities Criteria will be used for all Service projects and work for other customers where
appropriate. Individual Unified Facilities Criteria are developed by a single-disciplined working group and
published after careful coordination. Unified Facilities Criteria are jointly developed and managed by
USACE, the NAVFAC, and the U.S. Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-23

Chapter 3

3-154. Although Unified Facilities Criteria are written with long-term standards in mind, planners who
are executing under contingency and enduring standards for GE tasks will find them useful. Topics include
pavement structure design, water supply systems, military airfields, concrete design and repair, plumbing,
electrical systems, and many others. The Unified Facilities Criteria are distributed only in electronic media
and are effective immediately on issuance.
3-155. The Unified Facilities Criteria system provides planning, design, construction, operations, and
maintenance criteria and applies to all Service commands having military construction responsibilities.
Unified Facilities Criteria are living documents and will periodically be reviewed, updated, and made
available to users to provide technical criteria for military construction. Unified Facilities Criteria are
effective upon issuance and are distributed only in electronic media from—
 The Unified Facilities Criteria index Web site.
 The USACE Technical Information Web site.
 The NAVFAC Engineering Criteria and Programs Office Web site.
 The Construction Criteria Base Web site.
 UFC 1-200-01.
 The Whole Building Design Guide Web site.

FIELD FORCE ENGINEERING

3-156. The overarching concept of FFE is provided in FM 3-34. It is the application of U.S. Army
Engineer Regiment capabilities (although primarily GE) across the full range of military operations
facilitated by forward presence and reachback. FFE works to provide seamless specialized GE support to
any military operation and to provide military support to the Department of Homeland Security and the
Federal Emergency Management Agency in federal military support to civilian authority response to
catastrophic civil disasters.
3-157. FFE fuses the capabilities resident in the USACE, U.S. Army Engineer School, theater engineer
command, public works, and civilian contractors. It recognizes the critical need for early, integrated
engineer participation in planning and optimizing engineer capabilities for mission analysis, development,
and accomplishment. Although FFE may apply to all engineer functions, GE missions and geospatial
engineering support best suit its applications.

FORWARD-PRESENCE CAPABILITY
3-158. FFE has the ability to form scalable modular teams that are capable of deploying into theater on
short notice to provide engineering support to the CCDR and fill gaps in capabilities and expertise.
Engineer planners must carefully analyze the mission to determine the required level of forward-presence
support and tailor its requests. Because these teams can be tailored, specificity of requests in terms of the
mission type is critical. To facilitate the engineer planning effort, USACE maintains established liaison
officer planners at the combatant command and ASCC levels.
3-159. Requests for USACE support should be channeled through the USACE liaison officer at the
combatant command or ASCC echelons. The USACE assistant chief of staff, operations (G-3) will respond
to requests for engineer support in the event that coordination through a liaison officer is not possible.

FIELD FORCE TEAMS

3-160. FFE teams include the following:
 Forward engineer support team (advance).
 Forward engineer support team (main).
 Contingency real estate support team.
 Water resource detection team.

3-24 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

REACHBACK CAPABILITIES
3-161. Engineers have a variety of reachback capabilities at their disposal. These capabilities include
the—
 U.S. Army Engineer School.
 U.S. Marine Corps Engineer Center.
 Engineer Infrastructure and Intelligence Reachback Center.
 Base development team.
 USACE Reachback Operations Center.
 Reachback equipment.

United States Army Engineer School

3-162. The U.S. Army Engineer School plays a key role in training new generations of Soldiers in
bridging construction, reviewing current practices, and developing new bridge training. The U.S. Army
Engineer School can provide a reachback capacity to the engineer in the field by providing staff expertise.
It also supports the MSCoE in developing new bridging systems and gap reduction capabilities. (See
FM 3-34 for additional information on the role of the U.S. Army Engineer School.)

United States Marine Corps Engineer Center

3-163. The U.S. Marine Corps Engineer School has a reachback capability in development. Although not
official yet, the capability still resides at the schoolhouse. See the U.S. Marine Corps Engineer School
Training and Education Command Web site for more information.

Engineer Infrastructure and Intelligence Reachback Center

3-164. Previously known as the Infrastructure Assessment Team, the Engineer Infrastructure and
Intelligence Reachback Center serves as the USACE FFE hub for engineering support. The Engineer
Infrastructure and Intelligence Reachback Center geographic information system and infrastructure
intelligence are accessible to engaged military deployments and civil-military operations worldwide. It is
the primary access to USACE for reachback technical assistance and engineering support. It provides
infrastructure assessments, base camp planning, design assistance, and other engineering issues in support
to the U.S. Central Command, U.S. European Command, U.S. Northern Command, U.S. Pacific Command,
U.S. Southern Command, and Federal Emergency Management Agency.
3-165. The availability of military and civilian engineers through reachback provides engineers in the
field with access to the full expertise to support the range of military operations and enhance the
capabilities and expertise of forward-deployed forces while minimizing the required footprint. The U.S. Air
Force and the U.S. Navy also provide some of the same type of capabilities and support through the U.S.
Air Force Civil Engineering Support Agency and NAVFAC. (See FM 3-34 for more information on
reachback.)

Base Development Team

3-166. The base development team provides installation level base development planning and facilities
design expertise for intermediate staging bases, base camps, bases, and detainee or resettlement camps. It
integrates environmental aspects into the design of these facilities. This 10-person, nondeployable
organization is located in various USACE engineer districts and draws support from the USACE
Reachback Operations Center and other USACE centers of expertise.
3-167. The base development team is capable of completing the 30 percent design of a major base camp
within 3 days. It uses the inherent capabilities of the AFCS and TCMS to prepare designs and passes them
to forward presence organizations via the TeleEngineering Operations Center or the Secret Internet
Protocol Router Network. The base development team is prepared to provide support for civil disaster
response as needed.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-25

Chapter 3

United States Army Corps of Engineers Reachback Operations Center

3-168. The USACE Reachback Operations Center facilitates reachback for deployed troops to link up
with subject matter expertise (professional engineers, scientists, and technicians; private industry;
academia; and databases) that is not resident in the theater or the AO. Troops are able to obtain a detailed
analysis of complex problems that would be difficult to achieve with the limited expertise or computational
capabilities available in the field.
3-169. USACE Reachback Operations Center staff members respond to incoming information requests
and provide detailed analysis, such as flooding potential due to dam breaches, load-carrying capabilities of
bridges, field fortifications and protection, the evaluation of transportation networks, and water resource
data. It has access to the USACE Transportation System Center, which includes subject matter experts on
airfields, roadways, and railroads.
3-170. The USACE Reachback Operations Center serves as the focal point for videoconferences. It has a
classified bridge with ports for videoconferences and an unclassified bridge with additional user ports. For
more information, see the USACE Reachback Operations Center Web site.

Reachback Equipment
3-171. USACE and other engineer organizations use a variety of systems for facilitating reachback for
technical engineering support for problems requiring rapid solutions. Reachback equipment includes the
TeleEngineering Communication Equipment, geospatial assessment tool, automated route reconnaissance
kit, and TeleEngineering Toolkit software.

TeleEngineering Communication Equipment

3-172. TeleEngineering Communication Equipment provides a secure and nonsecure communications
link between deployed USACE personnel, their headquarters, engineer units, and subject matter experts to
meet mission objectives. TeleEngineering Communication Equipment provides reachback capability using
cutting edge, off-the-shelf communications equipment with added encryption. Videoconferences and data
transfers can be conducted from remote sites where other means of communication are nonexistent or
unavailable.
3-173. TeleEngineering Communication Equipment comes with its own satellite links and, therefore, does
not use bandwidth from units deployed in theater. Although originally designed for use by USACE
organizations, TeleEngineering Communication Equipment sets have been fielded to a number of tactical
units to enhance their reachback capability.

Geospatial Assessment Tool

3-174. The geospatial assessment tool is a suite of applications that allows field data collection. A desktop
application serves as a conduit to synchronize data from the field to the desktop and then to an online data
repository and geographic information mapping system. Such information can include the assessment of
critical infrastructure, real estate environmental condition reports, access control points, and weather
information.

Automated Route Reconnaissance Kit

3-175. The automated route reconnaissance kit is an adaptable, easy-to-use reconnaissance package that
allows military units and civilian agencies to rapidly collect, process, and distribute route reconnaissance
information.

TeleEngineering Toolkit Software

3-176. The TeleEngineering Toolkit software is a USACE-supported software product that provides a
valuable analysis tool for a graphic display of engineer products, analysis, and digital data. By annotating
an area of interest, a small reference file can be sent back to subject matter experts to provide information
requests for a variety of information requests, such as a cross-country mobility analysis, a flood analysis,
and vegetation information.

3-26 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Planning and Design

3-177. The response is sent back from the mission support element and is graphically displayed on the
TeleEngineering Toolkit software system. It also works with the automated route reconnaissance kit using a
global positioning system, a video camera, and a three-dimensional accelerometer to provide a mounted
vehicle or airborne automated reconnaissance capability.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 3-27

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 4
Construction
Construction is the art or process of building or assembling structures as base camps,
bed-down facilities, or other infrastructure. It consists of a wide range of activities,
methods, and techniques used to combine individual parts and for marshaling
resources together to create a greater whole. Construction, as part of the GE life
cycle, refers to the means and methods for constructing, modifying, upgrading, and
deconstructing base camps and bed-down facilities that are devised through planning
and design. Construction is performed by military units and CAAF and non-CAAF.
Facilities and infrastructure are built using various methods that are evaluated and
determined during planning and design. Existing facilities and infrastructure are used
to the fullest extent to minimize the overall construction effort and reduce the
logistics footprint. The military maximizes the use of modular systems and
prefabricated or preengineered components, which facilitates rapid development,
achieves scalability, and reduces the time required for closing facilities that are no
longer needed. This chapter describes general construction planning and estimating,
project management, methods of construction, and procurement and production of
construction materials and provides an overview of construction techniques.

PLANS AND ESTIMATES

4-1. Construction planning and estimating begin at each level as early as possible to determine
requirements, timelines, and COAs for construction methods, materials, construction techniques, and
resulting unit requirements. There are two levels of construction planning: preliminary planning performed
by service construction agents and engineer unit higher headquarters and detailed planning performed by
the constructing engineer unit. Project estimates are used to support construction project planning.
4-2. Each headquarters level verifies the planning and estimating facts, assumptions, and details from the
higher level and develops additional information for subordinate staffs and units. The constructing unit
produces the detailed construction plan. The detailed construction plan includes the site layout, safety, and
jobsite security. Detailed estimates include material, equipment, and labor estimates.
4-3. NTRP 4-04.2.3/TM 3-34.41/AFPAM 32-1000/MCRP 3-17.7M provides all Services with standard
procedures, information, and data on the construction project estimating of projects built by military
engineer units. Commercially available estimating tools and books are also available. Planners, designers,
and project managers use the U.S. Army TCMS as a source for man-day estimates. TCMS supports
engineer planners with facilities design information for OCONUS or theater operation mission
requirements. (See the USACE Web site for additional information on TCMS.)
4-4. Engineers should examine subordinate doctrinal TMs for more detailed discussion on planning and
estimating. Appendix B provides engineer construction planning factors for base camps. Constructing unit
standard operating procedures based on the unit equipment; level of training; and site-specific,
demonstrated unit production rate may provide the best detailed estimates. For estimating quantities, use
NTRP 4-04.2.3/TM 3-34.41/AFPAM 32-1000/MCRP 3-17.7M. Planning factors are found in doctrinal
publications or unit standard operating procedures based on site-specific conditions and experience.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-1

Chapter 4

UNITED STATES ARMY THEATER CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4-5. The U.S. Army TCMS is a personal computer-based, automated military construction planning
system with a digital design, management, database, and reporting system that is used by military engineers
for contingency construction activities in an operational area. It provides military planners, logisticians, and
engineers with the information necessary to plan, design, and manage theater construction projects where
austere, temporary facilities are required. TCMS is the official tool of the U.S. Army for base camp
development, planning, and design.
4-6. The primary purpose of the TCMS is to support engineer planners with facilities design information
for OCONUS theater operation mission requirements. TCMS is the delivery vehicle of the AFCS program.
The proponent agency of AFCS is the U.S. Army Office of the Chief of Engineers. (Refer to the TCMS
Web site for additional information.)
4-7. TCMS is the approved method for distributing AFCS designs and related information. The AFCS
provides logistics and engineering data that is organized, coded, and published to assist engineer planners
and designers in executing GE missions in contingency environments. (See TM 5-304 for information on
how to use the AFCS system.)
4-8. Key features of TCMS include—
 Planning. Users can develop facility and installation plans to satisfy mission construction
requirements using TCMS computer routines. The system determines personnel and material
requirements and the cost, weight, and volume of materials needed for a specific project.
 Design. Users can prepare site-specific new design or construction drawings, use existing AFCS
designs within the TCMS, modify the drawings as required, and adapt mission requirements
using the TCMS computer-aided design and drafting capability. The system provides standard
plans for base camp developments, utilities, and airfields.
 Management. Users can set up and manage construction progress and resource allocation and
utilization throughout the construction time frame.
 Reporting and communication. The TCMS develops and transmits the necessary reports
following the engineer chain of command to facilitate the decisionmaking process using
intercomputer electronic and direct entry.

ARMY FACILITIES COMPONENT SYSTEM

4-9. AFCS is the primary tool that provides engineers with the information needed to plan, design, and
manage theater construction projects where austere, temporary facilities are required. AFCS is discussed
further in the TM 5-301 series. AFCS and the TM 5-301 series provide a set of standard facility designs
managed and supported by USACE. AFCS is an engineering construction support program for U.S. Army
mission construction.
4-10. AFCS also supports emergency construction during disaster relief in any area when required. It
provides planning guidance, construction drawings, a bill of materials, and labor and equipment estimates.
AFCS designs include troop camps, hospitals, bridges, marine terminals, port facilities, petroleum storage
and distribution facilities, and ammunition storage facilities.
4-11. The facilities and components in the AFCS satisfy many of the base camp and bed-down facility
requirements identified during planning. The AFCS provides ready-made, on-the-shelf standard designs
that are site-adaptable, scalable, and capable of serving many functions. The AFCS facilities have an
expected design life of at least 24 months.

DRAINAGE
4-12. The constructing unit establishes construction drainage on the construction site to prevent water from
interfering with the construction progress. Construction drainage may be temporary drainage structures or
part of the permanent drainage system constructed early.

4-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

PROTECTION
4-13. The constructing unit constructs protective structures using protection designs, construction
techniques, and methods discussed in ADRP 3-37, AFCS program guidelines, ATP 3-37.2, and ATP 3-
37.34/MCWP 3-17.6.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4-14. NTRP 4-04.2.5/TM 3-34.42/AFPAM 32-1020/MCRP 3-17.7F provides all Services with common
methods, procedures, and formats for construction project management at the operational unit level
required by military engineers to successfully plan, schedule, and execute GE and contingency construction
projects. The duration and amount of effort for each phase depends on mission variables (the scope and
complexity of the project involved, the time available for planning, and the operational environment).
Project management does not replace the military planning process used by each Service for contingency
and crisis action planning or troop leading procedures at the tactical level for conducting unit operations.
4-15. Program and project management are used for most GE management. The U.S. Army has designated
some duty positions that require program or project management professional certification. Planners use the
construction project management as a tool to assist them in their process of coordinating the skill and labor
of personnel using machines and materials to configure the materials into a desired structure.
4-16. Figure 4-1 shows the project management process that divides the effort into three parts, consisting
of preliminary planning, detailed planning, and project execution. Preliminary planning may include the
completion of detailed designs by the constructing unit or provide an adjustment to the designs as required
by information obtained from the site investigation.

Figure 4-1. Project management process

4-17. General engineer planners and construction units rely extensively on the TCMS to produce the
products required by the project management system. Effective products produced during the planning
phases greatly assist during the construction phase. In addition to the TCMS, the engineer has various other
reachback tools or organizations that can exploit resources, capabilities, and expertise that is not organic to
the unit that requires them.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-3

Chapter 4

4-18. Digital, handheld devices can be used to document existing conditions, speed accurate reporting, and
provide timely information to the construction site. They can decrease idle time on the construction site due
to decreased wait time for information. They can also decrease the time spent by supervisors on nondirect
construction tasks, such as reports and requests for information on-site and to or from higher headquarters.
4-19. Based on careful analysis, construction assignments, required facilities, and scheduled target dates
for phased development as outlined in the OPORD, general engineers can formulate a construction
schedule. Construction schedules are prepared to show a detailed time plan for operations in proper
sequence. The equipment hours and man-hours required for each principal operation are then tabulated.
4-20. The construction schedule is based on the—
 Time allowed for completion.
 Available equipment and special assets required.
 Type of labor available (regular troop units, reserve troop units, newly activated troop units,
local contractors, international contractors).
 Delivery of construction materials.
 Local sequence of operations.
 Necessary delays between operations.
 Projected weather and climate conditions.
 Force protection, antiterrorism considerations, and threat assessments.
 Environmental, health, and safety considerations.

JOBSITE SAFETY
4-21. Jobsite safety at the construction site is important in preventing injuries, avoiding accidents, and
preventing death. The following are some of the resources that are available to assist engineers in safety
considerations:
 AR 385-10, ATP 5-19, DA Pamphlet 385-1, and DA Pamphlet 385-10.
 Unit safety standard operating procedures.
 Commander’s guidance and policies.
 U.S. Army Safety Center. (See the U.S. Army Safety Center Web site for additional
information.)
 Center for U.S. Army Lessons Learned. (See the U.S. Army Combined Arms Center Web site
for additional information.)
 Engineer manual 385-1-1. (See the USACE Publications Web site for additional information.)
 U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration. (See the U.S.
Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Web site for additional
information.)

JOBSITE SECURITY
4-22. Jobsite security is of paramount importance in preserving the force. Engineers in a combat role may
have limited manpower to accomplish their construction mission, yet they may find themselves devoting
manpower assets to providing jobsite security in high-threat areas. Consider requesting external
augmentation from infantry or other combined arms units for jobsite security forces. This will allow the
engineer to devote manpower resources toward construction project completion.

METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
4-23. The major construction methods used by military general engineers are on-site construction, design-
build construction, and modular construction. The on-site construction of buildings is also called stick-built
or stick frame if referring to carpentry. Larger post and beam or timber frames may be used for bunkers and
protective structures. Most military GE uses on-site construction.

4-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

4-24. Planners determine the major construction methods for various requirements based on operational
considerations and economic analysis. Standardizing the construction methods used throughout an
operational area simplifies estimating methods, safety requirements, training requirements, quality
assurance, quality control, and O&M. Each construction technique has various construction methods with
considerations, advantages, and disadvantages. The construction unit adjusts the construction methods
based on local conditions, material availability, local construction methods and labor skills, and the ability
of the HN to maintain facilities intended to be turned over to them when no longer needed.
4-25. Construction is a broad term that may include the following tasks:
 Provide new construction.
 Upgrade existing facilities.
 Assemble or erect preengineered buildings or systems.

4-26. Deconstruction is done to scale down the size of a facility, structure, or building. During
deconstruction, many of the same construction techniques may be used if the materials are to be reused on
other projects. Deconstruction may simply be the reverse of a construction technique. Demolition may be
carefully performed to allow the reuse of some construction materials, or demolition may be completed to
prevent the enemy from reusing a facility.
4-27. Construction may be provided by—
 Military units. Troop construction is economical because it eliminates labor cost and contractor
profit. Tactical considerations may create situations in which HN support contractors are
unwilling or unable to undertake construction projects. Troop construction is more flexible
because there are no contracts to negotiate for changes in plans, specifications, or required
available time allowances.
 Contractors. Contractors bring laborers with specialized skill sets in the desired numbers with
specialized equipment and required resources. Contractors have greater flexibility, as opposed to
troop labor that is restricted by combat mission demands. Troop construction equipment may not
be as specialized as contractor equipment, because it must be rugged and flexible enough to meet
combat conditions. Contractors bring a dedicated pool of talent to focus exclusively on the
construction project, as opposed to troops who must focus on combat mission and other military
duties.
 Local labor assets. Using local labor may be more economical than bringing in external
contractors from the continental United States (CONUS) or other countries.
 HN labor assets. Like local labor, HN labor may provide the right skill sets and resources to
meet construction project needs within economical cost.

HOST NATION SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS

4-28. HN support can expand the capabilities of friendly forces by reducing the requirements for engineer
units and expediting construction. In the rehabilitation of developed areas, it may be practical to arrange the
employment of HN engineers, contractors, and superintendents with their organizations. These may include
a variety of skilled workers. In many undeveloped AOs, local businesses have established organizations to
employ and supervise labor in agriculture and other pursuits. Such organizations can often provide labor
skilled in primitive construction methods.
4-29. The plans for employing civilian labor must include adequate consideration of housing costs,
transportation methods, local customs, language difficulties, locally determined complications due to race
or religion, and adapting construction plans to the methods and materials to be used. The use of local
civilian labor may result in savings in mobilization and demobilization costs, and additional savings due to
the local wage scale. (See TM 3-34.73 for additional information.)

DESIGN BUILD
4-30. Design-build (also called design and build contracting process, or method of delivery) is a common
construction method used by industry and Service construction agents. Typically, most design is completed
by architectural engineer firms, who then go out for construction bids. Then, the project is built by

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-5

Chapter 4

construction firms (a design-bid-build contracting process). Design-build combines these two processes
together by having a single organization perform them to achieve time and cost savings.
4-31. Concurrently, construction can begin based on some completed designs while other designs are
completed as construction progresses. As the project progresses, the constructing unit has the opportunity
to provide immediate input to the design based on site conditions, available materials, and preferred
construction methods. Most military unit construction is designed and then built, sometimes by the same
unit. However, on a larger, more complicated project without all requirements known at the start, design
and construction conducted concurrently as information becomes available is an effective construction
method.

MODULAR CONSTRUCTION
4-32. Modular construction is a method of construction, not a building type. Modular construction involves
procuring commercially prefabricated or military unit prefabricated buildings, components, or systems of
multiple sections (called modules) that are joined together on-site. Engineers provide the contracting office,
quality and construction standards, specifications, and codes that the contracted modules must meet.
4-33. The prefabricated sections are typically transported to the site by truck and then, depending on
weight, off-loaded and positioned with a crane or other material-handling equipment. The constructing unit
assembles the prefabricated sections with organic tools or special tools provided as part of the system. The
modules may require limited site preparation or a foundation that can be constructed simultaneously with
off-site module construction.
4-34. The modules may be prefabricated as a box that has more shipping volume or as flat panels or
components that have less shipping volume but require more assembly time on-site. Depending on
transportation restrictions, the modules may be up to 20 feet wide and 90 feet long. Precast or prefabricated
concrete panels, structural insulated panels, or other major building components may be produced on-site,
contracted for and shipped, or locally procured.
4-35. Modular construction may produce semipermanent facilities that may be disassembled and reused.
Another possibility is to design and procure relocatable buildings that are partially or completely
assembled. Relocatable modular buildings are designed to be reused multiple times and transported to
different sites.
4-36. Modular construction may offer several advantages to site-built facilities, such as—
 Increased design time savings (comes predesigned).
 Increased construction speed.
 Fewer weather considerations.
 Increased flexibility of configurations and module layouts (modules that may be disassembled,
refurbished, and reused).

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
4-37. Depending on the project type, required construction materials can be expensive, specialized, and
unique. There are a variety of different materials that can be used in construction, including steel, rock,
wood, and concrete. Class IV supplies include all construction materials and installed facility equipment.
4-38. Theater requisitions for engineer construction materials must take careful account of project
requirements for special, large-scale operations. Issues from stocks are based on the requirements for the
particular work on which the requisitioning unit is engaged. Critical items of Class IV supplies may be
issued under policies approved by the assistant chief of staff, logistics (G-4); uncontrolled items are issued
on-call.
4-39. The task of providing engineer construction supplies can be quite comprehensive and costly, and
every effort must be made to simplify it through the use of local procurement channels and standardized
designs. The unit supply officer maintains a local inventory of continuous stocks of construction materials
and equipment. Class IV supplies suitable for local procurement may include lumber, cement, structural
steel, sand, gravel, rock, plumbing and electrical supplies, hardware, and paint.

4-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

PROCUREMENT
4-40. Obtaining materials on time and in the quantity and quality needed must be coordinated and
synchronized to support the assembly of other resources (time, personnel, equipment) to complete the
project. Construction of any kind will fail if the required materials (or suitable substitutes) are not available
when needed. Efforts to obtain the proper material begin early during the planning phase (receipt of
mission or construction directive) and do not end until the project is completed and turned over.
4-41. For procurement, engineers have the option of obtaining materials from CONUS through the service
supply system, from countries as adjacent to the area of responsibility as possible, and from local suppliers.
Each method has inherent costs and benefits. Engineer units may be used, or a contractor hired, to produce
the necessary materials. Whatever the method, obtaining resources must be an integral part of planning and
executing tasks to properly accomplish the mission.

Class IV Materials
4-42. Units may obtain GE construction materials by using standard supply procedures that unify the way
in which they are requested, managed, and distributed. Most construction materials are Class IV materials
and are distributed according to unit standard operating procedures. Many Class IV materials are also used
for field fortifications, fighting positions, and other types of protection work, making it likely that they are
in high demand and necessitate engineer involvement in distribution decisions.
4-43. Class IV supplies are not maintained in significant quantities and are bulky. This makes handling
and transporting supplies over strategic distances difficult. Obtaining GE materials through normal supply
channels is considered the least efficient and desirable method for GE missions. Engineers should only use
this method after determining that the materials are unavailable locally, the proper quantity and quality
cannot be met locally, or the cost to obtain them is prohibitively high. Engineer logisticians must constantly
track the status of orders throughout the requisition process to ensure that they are filled.
4-44. Maintaining Class IV supply points is a logistics function that engineer units are not organized or
equipped to perform. Although engineer units should avoid operating Class IV supply points, recent and
repeated experience in contingency environments has shown that engineers are habitually forced to do so to
ensure the completion of GE missions, particularly when time constraints exist. Engineers should be
involved, but they should not be required to run Class IV supply points. Units may need to be creative in
the way they obtain Class IV supplies, such as using materials from base camps that are closing.

Other Procurement Methods

4-45. Engineers may also procure construction materials in theater using local-purchase procedures and
contracting methods. In a contingency, engineer logisticians must rapidly learn the methods and rules for
obtaining construction supplies through the appropriate system. To maximize its benefits, local
procurement should be coordinated to occur as close as possible to the actual construction site to minimize
transportation requirements. Engineers must learn specific procedures and rules for local purchase
procedures and contracting. Some of the options include—
 Government-wide commercial purchase card. This card is a useful instrument for the
purchase of supplies up to an established limit. It is an effective method for small purchases.
When deploying, users must determine the specific rules for their card during the specific
contingency. Depending on the deployment location, there may be problems with finding
vendors who are willing to accept a government-wide commercial purchase card.
 Blanket purchase agreement. A blanket purchase agreement is a simplified method of filling
anticipated repetitive needs for supplies by establishing charge accounts with qualified sources
of supply. A blanket purchase agreement is a written understanding between the government and
a supplier that eliminates the need for individual purchase and payment documents.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-7

Chapter 4

 Prime Vendor Program. This is a DOD-institutionalized program that is operated by the

Defense Logistics Agency. It establishes a series of contracts with different vendors. When a
specific item is needed, each vendor is given an opportunity to bid to fill the order in a set period
of time.
 Logistics Civil Augmentation Program. This program is for the preplanned use of a civilian
contractor to augment capabilities of selected forces during a contingency. Units may obtain
logistics support to include Class IV supplies through this program.

Considerations
4-46. Although obtaining materials for GE missions is often the most advantageous method of needed
requirements, engineers must consider the following factors:
 Standard sizes of GE materials may be different in the AO. Dimensional lumber is often cut to
different standards in foreign countries. Voltage systems in overseas locations are also typically
different from CONUS.
 The quality of different items may be considered substandard. Lumber, concrete, and asphalt are
three examples of construction materials that are typically not consistent with U.S. standards.
 Language and cultural differences may make it difficult to communicate and obtain GE supplies.
In some situations, local vendors may feel that it is more important to try to please you in initial
discussions than to tell you the truth about whether they are capable of providing materials in the
quantity and quality needed.
 Military operations may drive up prices. Shortages caused by multiple units competing for the
same resource may induce local suppliers to inflate prices and profiteer from ongoing operations.
4-47. Table 4-1 is a list of supplies that units might maintain in an engineer Class IV supply point during a
contingency. Note that it contains only very basic materials and supplies.

Table 4-1. Sample stockage level for engineer Class IV supply point

Line Nomenclature NSN UI

4 AA Sandbags 8105-00-142-9345 HD
4 AB Wire, barbed 5660-00-224-8663 RO
4 AC Wire, concertina 5660-00-921-5516 RO
4 AD Pickets, long, 6' long 5660-00-270-1510 EA
4 AF Pickets, short, 3' long 5660-00-270-1589 EA
4 AG Barrier, Hesco bastion, 2' x 2' x 10' 2590-99-169-0183 EA
4 AH Barrier, Hesco bastion, 2' x 2' x 4' 2590-99-001-9392 EA
4 AI Barrier, Hesco bastion, 3' x 3' x 2 1/2’ 2590-99-001-9393 EA
4 AJ Barrier, Hesco bastion, 3' x 5' x 2 1/2’ 2590-99-001-9395 EA
4 AK Barrier, Hesco bastion, 4 1/2’ x 3 1/2’ x 2 1/2’ 2590-99-835-7866 EA
4 AL Barrier, Hesco bastion, 4 1/2’ x 4' x 2 1/2’ 2590-99-391-0852 EA
4 AM Barrier, Hesco bastion, 7' x 7' x 7 1/2’ 2590-99-335-4902 EA
4 AN Lumber, 1" x 6" x 12' 5510-00-220-6080 EA
4 AO Lumber, 1" x 4" x 12' 5510-00-220-6078 EA
4 AP Lumber, 1" x 10" x 12' 5510-00-220-6084 EA
4 AQ Lumber, 2" x 4" x 8' 5510-00-220-6194 EA
4 AR Lumber, 2" x 4" x 10' 5510-00-220-6194 EA
4 AS Lumber, 2" x 4" x 12' 5510-00-220-6194 EA
4 AT Lumber, 2" x 6" x 8' 5510-00-220-6196 EA

4-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

Table 4-1. Sample stockage level for engineer Class IV supply point (continued)

Line Nomenclature NSN UI

4 AU Lumber, 2" x 6" x 10' 5510-00-220-6196 EA
4 AV Lumber, 2" x 8" x 14' 5510-00-220-6198 EA
4 AW Lumber, 2" x 10" x 12' 5510-00-220-6200 EA
4 AX Lumber, 2" x 12" x 12' 5510-00-220-6202 EA
4 AY Lumber, 4" x 4" x 8' 5510-00-220-6178 EA
4 AZ Lumber, 4" x 4" x 10' 5510-00-220-6178 EA
4 BA Lumber, 4" x 4" x 16' 5510-00-220-6178 EA
4 BB Timber, 6" x 6" x 8' 5510-00-550-6825 EA
4 BC Timber, 6" x 6" x 10' 5510-00-550-6825 EA
4 BD Plywood, ½” x 4' x 8' ply 5530-00-128-5143 EA
4 BE Plywood, 5/8” x 4' x 8' ply 5530-00-128-5147 EA
4 BF Plywood, 3/4" x 4' x 8' ply 5530-00-128-5151 EA
4 BG Nail, common wire steel 5d 5315-00-010-4656 LB
4 BH Nail, common wire steel 8d 5315-00-010-4659 LB
4 BI Nail, common 3" 10d 5315-00-753-3883 LB
4 BJ Nail, common 3 1/4” 12d 5315-00-753-3884 LB
4 BK Nail, common 3 1/2” 16d 5315-00-753-3885 LB
4 BL Nail, common 20d 5315-00-753-3886 LB
4 BM Screening, insect nonmetal 48” wide 8305-00-559-5047 YD
4 BN Bolt machine 3/4" x 12" with nut 5306-00-550-3697 EA
4 BO Washer flat cad stl 13/16" id 2" od 5310-00-236-6478 EA
4 BP Hinge butt steel leaves 3 1/2" x 1 3/4" 5340-00-243-6193 EA
4 BQ Hook and eye door steel 3" 5340-00-243-3224 EA
4 BR Nipple pipe steel galv 1/2" x 4" long 4730-00-196-1547 EA
4 BS Union pipe galv for 1/2" pipe 4730-00-240-1674 EA
4 BT Elbow pipe galv 1/2" x 90° angle 4730-00-278-4773 EA
4 BU Elbow pipe galv 3/4" x 90° angle 4730-00-249-1478 EA
4 BV Reducer, pipe galv 3/4" to 1/2" 4730-00-231-5650 EA
4 BW Valve gate brz scr 3/4" class 125 4820-00-288-7567 EA
4 BX Pipe steel galv 3/4" x 21 feet thds 4710-00-162-1019 EA
4 BY Nipple pipe steel galv 3/4" x 4" long 4730-00-196-1500 EA
4 BZ Nipple pipe steel galv 3/4" x 2" long 4730-00-196-1505 EA
4 CA Union pipe galv fem 3/4" 300 psi/wog 4730-00-240-1675 EA
4 CB Coupling pipe mall irn 1/2" std wt 4730-00-187-7612 EA
4 CC Coupling pipe mall irn 3/4" std wt 4730-00-187-7613 EA
4 CD Cap pipe galv mall iron 1/2" 4730-00-231-2424 EA
4 CE Cap pipe galv mall iron 3/4" 4730-00-231-2425 EA
4 CF Primer adhesive for PVC pipe 8040-01-001-2705 PT
4 CG Pipe PVC dwv sch 40 20’ lg 2" 4710-00-476-5870 EA
4 CI Outlet box, 4” x 4 1/2" to 3/4" knockout 5975-00-159-0969 EA

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-9

Chapter 4

Table 4-1. Sample stockage level for engineer Class IV supply point (continued)

Line Nomenclature NSN UI

4 CJ Cover junction box 4” square flat 5975-00-281-0057 EA
4 CK Jct box rect sfc mtd for sw or recp 5975-00-281-0090 EA
4 CL Cable 1/c 6 AWG 7-str cu bare mhd 6145-00-299-4456 EA
4 CM Cable 3/c&gnd 12 AWG sol cu nmc 6145-00-519-1332 FT
4 CN Cable 2/c&gnd 12 AWG sol cu nmc 6145-00-519-2718 CL
4 CO Cable 1/c 1/0 awg19-str cu thw black 6145-00-939-4951 FT
4 CP Cable 1/c 1/0 awg19-str cu thw blue 6145-01-204-6473 FT
4 CQ Cable 1/c 1/0 awg19-str cu thw white 6145-01-204-6477 FT
4 CR Cable 1/c 1/0 awg19-str cu thw red 6145-01-204-6478 FT
4 CS Lamp fluorescent f40t12 cool white 6240-00-152-2987 EA
4 CT Lamp incandescent 115v 100 w a21 bulb 6240-00-990-8191 EA
4 CU Fxtr ltg fluorescent incandescent rs 2-40 w stl 6210-00-865-8451 EA
4 CV Fxtr ltg wp 100 w wall mtg stl 6210-00-893-7241 EA
4 CW Cement port gen conc constr 94 lb 5610-00-250-4676 BG
Legend:
AWG American wire gauge
bg bag
brz bronze
c copper
cad cadmium
cl class
conc concrete
constr construction
cu copper
d penny
dwv drain, waste, and vent
ea each
fem female
ft foot/feet
fxtr fixture
galv galvanized
gen general
gnd ground
hd hundred
Id inch diameter
irn iron
jct junction
lb pound
lg long
ltg lighting
mhd medium hard drawn
mtd mounted
mtg meeting
nmc National Electric Code Multi-Conductor
NSN national stock number

4-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

Table 4-1. Sample stockage level for engineer Class IV supply point (continued)
od olive drab
port portable
psi per square inch
pt pint
PVC polyvinyl chloride
recp receptacle
rect rectangle
ro roll
rs rustproof series
sch schedule
scr screwed
sfc surface
sol solid
st set
std standard
stl steel
str strand
sw solid wall
thds threads
thw thermoplastic vinyl-insulated building wire
v volt
w watt
wog water, oil, or gas
wp wall plug
wt weight
UI unit of issue
yd yard

PRODUCTION
4-48. Certain types of materials are typically needed in such large quantities and are of such great weight
that engineers must produce them locally (or contract a supplier). Soil for fill, sand, and gravel are
examples of materials that are typically obtained from local sources. Contracted construction and the
construction directive for engineer units should specify quality standards for the use of local materials that
are verified through inspections as part of the quality assurance or quality control plan.
4-49. To produce more refined products, engineers may need to further process materials to obtain required
construction materials, such as crushed rock, asphalt, and concrete. There are specialized engineer units
(quarry teams, asphalt teams, concrete sections) that handle production missions for most types of
construction materials. Significant environmental considerations may be placed on U.S. forces when
creating or operating construction sites.

Geology and Materials Testing

4-50. TM 3-34.61 provides a comprehensive discussion on geology. Geology is the science that deals with
the substance, structure, and origin of earth. It is the application of chemistry, physics, biology, and related
sciences to study earth. In military operations, geologists can translate geologic information into concepts
that can be used readily and effectively in conjunction with combat and engineer needs.
4-51. Combat units can benefit from geologic information in the evaluation of soil trafficability, the
estimation of stream fordability, and the availability of cover and concealment. Engineers can use geologic
information in the location and use of construction materials, the location of groundwater supplies, the
siting of roads and airfields, the evaluation of the foundation suitability, the proper location of excavations,

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-11

Chapter 4

and the evaluation of possible sites for underground installations. Military commanders should incorporate
geologic information with other pertinent information when planning military operations.
4-52. Material testing involves obtaining samples, performing engineering tests and calculations on soils,
bituminous paving mixtures, and concrete. These materials include aggregates, bituminous materials, and
stabilized soil, including stabilizing agents such as bitumens, cements, lime, fly ash, and chemical
modifiers. Material testing is conducted to achieve proper design with these materials and adequate control
over their use in construction. (See FM 5-472/NAVFAC MO 330/FAJMAN 32-1221(I) for a discussion on
material testing. See TM 5-818-1/AFM 88-3 for information on soils and geology.)

Borrow Pits and Quarries

4-53. TM 3-34.65/NTRP 4-04.2.12/AFMAN 10-903 provides discussions on opening and operating
borrow pits and quarries. The specialized engineer unit that can assist is the quarry team. This team has
trained personnel and equipment to support borrow pit and quarry operations. Engineers plan, design, and
conduct operations in pits and quarries. Pits and quarries are sites where open excavations are made for the
purpose of removing rock for use in construction projects. Pits are sites that generally do not require
blasting, while quarries usually require drilling, cutting, or blasting. The rock is normally processed
through a crushing and screening plant to produce crushed rock. (See TM 3-34.65/NTRP 4-
04.2.12/AFMAN 10-903 for information on geology and quarry selection, layout, and development; blast
design; explosives and initiating devices; blasting operations; and safety. See FM 3-34.214 for additional
information on explosives and demolitions.)
4-54. Borrow pits are the preferred source of construction aggregate and fill material when resources are
scarce and material quality is not critical. They are similar to quarries, except they tend to be smaller and
generally require no blasting and minimal mechanical efforts. Materials in borrow pits seldom need to be
blasted, crushed, or screened. Though the gravel, sand, and fines obtained in a borrow pit may not be as
good as crushed stone, it is often acceptable. Equipment needed for a borrow pit includes dozers for
grubbing and clearing; dump trucks for hauling; and scoop loaders, scrapers, or cranes with a shovel and
dragline for loading.
4-55. Borrow pits are best located at the tops of hills close to or on the construction site for the ease of
material handling. If borrow pits are located away from the construction site, careful consideration should
be made in locating them to ensure operation efficiency and minimal environmental damage and impact on
the local population. In planning the GE mission, units should consider the time required to close the
borrow pit in the overall timeline.
4-56. Quarries are similar to pits except that they generally require drilling, blasting, or the mechanical
removal of aggregate to obtain suitable material for a GE mission. Although not specifically part of the
quarry operation, planners may find it advantageous to colocate rock-crushing capabilities, asphalt plants,
and concrete production facilities. Specific information on quarries is contained in TM 3-34.65/NTRP 4-
04.2.12/AFMAN 10-903.
4-57. In a contingency operation, if it is determined that a quarry is required to support GE efforts, then
extensive planning must occur to ensure that the operation is efficient, meets production requirements, and
conforms to applicable environmental considerations. Unless there is an extremely large construction
project, it is likely that one quarry will support multiple GE missions. Determining a quarry location must
be considered in a holistic and centralized manner. The layout of the site consists of preplanning the
location, dimensions, and arrangement of the quarry and the supporting roads and facilities. Planners must
consider the mission, source geology, amount of overburden, equipment available, access, drainage, and
traffic flow when determining a quarry location.

Crushed Rock
4-58. TM 3-34.65/NTRP 4-04.2.12/AFMAN 10-903 provides a discussion on aggregate production
through rock-crushing operations. Rock of specific size and gradation is required for asphalt and concrete
production. Crushed rock is used as the base course for roads and airfields. Rock from quarry operations
and borrow pits must be crushed, screened and, perhaps, washed to meet specific design standards. (See

4-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

FM 5-472/NAVFAC MO 330/FAJMAN 32-1221(I) for more information on methods of testing materials

for proper design characteristics.)
4-59. Almost all contingency operations require some level of crushed-rock supply, and units with a rock-
crushing capability are only in the Reserve Component. The quarry team, a specialized engineer unit,
comes equipped with a rockcrusher to support this type of operation. Planners must be aware that moving
and establishing a rock-crushing capability is a time- and labor-intensive operation that must be well
planned to meet specific project time constraints.
4-60. The rock-crushing plant must be sited within a short distance of the quarry, and the collocation of
these operations may be ideal. The plant should be located on level ground with good drainage and
adequate space for equipment, stockpiles, and maintenance areas. An adequate supply of water must also
be available for the washing process. This water may require a settling basin or some other method to
mitigate the environmental impacts of the operation.
4-61. The two most common rock-processing units have a 75- or 225-ton production capability per hour.
Each plant consists of several large pieces of towed equipment, to include crushers, screening equipment,
washing equipment, and conveyors. The mobile crushing, screening, and washing plant is diesel and
electric motor-driven and consists of nine major components that are capable of producing a minimum of
150 tons per hour of aggregate that is suitable for cement or asphalt concrete.
4-62. The quarry team rockcrusher components and accessories are the primary jawcrushing unit, the
secondary conecrushing unit, the surge bin unit, the tertiary conecrushing unit, the washing and screening
unit, the dolly unit, three generators, ten conveyors, and a water-pumping unit. All units are semitrailer- or
trailer-mounted and can be operated independently, tandem, or both to meet aggregate production
requirements. Planners must be aware that the actual output from a given plant differs from its normal
capacity in that it is dependent on the specific product input, the desired size of the final product, and the
proportion of the by-product.
4-63. The maintenance of rock-crushing equipment is a time-consuming process. Heavy loads and the
abrasive action of the crushing operation, along with the movement of large quantities of material,
inevitably lead to wear and damage of the equipment. The repair of older plants can be difficult because of
a lack of spare parts. Dust, noise, and other environmental considerations must be considered when
planning for the operation of a rock-crushing plant.

Asphalt
4-64. TM 3-34.63 provides information on asphalt production. The specialized engineer unit that can assist
is the asphalt team. This team has the required trained personnel and equipment to support asphalt
operations The typical U.S. Army asphalt plant is a portable, drum type, electric motor-driven facility that
is capable of self-erection (major components) and satisfactory operation without permanent footings. It
consists of major units, components, and accessories as required to assemble a complete plant that is
capable of producing 150 tons per hour of graded asphalt paving mix.
4-65. The asphalt plant may be set up for batch and continuous mix. It is trailer-mounted and can be
interconnected mechanically and electrically and operated to the rated capacity. A good road network is
needed to avoid traffic jams and the resultant cooling of mixes. The planner must also consider the
potential environmental problems, including dust that is generated by the plant and potential soil
contamination from bitumen and fuel spills.
4-66. The construction paving unit will use some asphalt production equipment at the jobsite, to include an
asphalt melter and an oil heater. The following are key features of asphalt equipment:
 The asphalt melter is a skid-mounted, 750-gallon-per-hour, dedrumming asphalt melter. The
dedrumming tunnel is capable of removing 85- to 100-penetration cement from twelve 55-gallon
drums at one time. The unit also contains a 3,000-gallon, hot-storage compartment for heating
the asphalt to pumping temperature (235°F). Melters can operate individually, in pairs, or in trios
and can operate in parallel from a single source of hot oil.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-13

Chapter 4

 The oil heater is a trailer-mounted, heavy-duty, high-output capacity unit that is designed to
transfer oil and pump it through transmission lines to the asphalt melter and storage tank. It
requires fuel and external electric power for operation.
4-67. Asphalt as a construction material has advantages and disadvantages. As a surface covering for roads
and airfields, it provides a flexible and durable covering. However, it is impacted by extremes in climate
and weather conditions affecting its structure. It requires continuous maintenance to remain serviceable and
to extend its service life.

Concrete
4-68. TM 3-34.44/MCRP 3-17.7D provides planners, designers, and general engineers with information on
the production of concrete. Planners refer to it when determining the design mixtures, form design and
construction, concrete production, and testing required for a specific mission. The specialized engineer unit
that can assist in concrete production is the concrete section. This section has the required trained personnel
and equipment to support concrete operations.
4-69. Concrete is produced by mixing a paste of cement and water with various inert materials. The most
commonly used inert materials are sand and gravel or crushed stone. A chemical process begins as soon as
the cement and water are combined.
4-70. Concrete as a building material has advantages and disadvantages. Concrete is fireproof, watertight,
economical, easy to use, and available worldwide. However, concrete can crack and other structural
weakness can detract from its appearance, survivability, and useful life.
4-71. The U.S. Army has mobile mixers in its inventory for the mass production of concrete. They are
mobile and self-contained units, which can produce fresh quality concrete at the construction site. These
mobile mixers include—
 16S concrete mixer. This mixer produces a 16-cubic-foot batch of concrete. It is ideal for small
missions and can be moved to remote locations. The hourly production rate varies between 10
and 15 cubic yards, and it can also mix mortar.
 M5 engineer mission module concrete mobile mixer. This mixer is transported by an M1075
palletized load system and M1076 palletized load system trailer.
 M919 concrete mobile mixer. This mixer is a concrete material transporter and mixing
machine. It has the capacity to carry the materials for 5 to 8 cubic yards of concrete, depending
on usage (mobile/stationary). The M919 has limited trafficability and must remain on firm
ground. It requires a scoop loader to support it while mixing.

Logging and Sawmills

4-72. The Engineer Regiment no longer maintains an organic capability to conduct logging operations and
supply timber products for construction. Planners must procure timber products instead of producing them
or must contract for HN or civilian teams to directly support engineer requirements with logging and
sawmill operations if the demand is high enough.
4-73. Some allies may have organic units in their military forces to conduct these operations. If required to
set up a military logging and sawmill operation, consider using USACE reachback consultation.
4-74. Timber as a construction material has advantages and disadvantages. It can be durable and easily cut
into desired shapes for furniture, framing, paneling, and bracing. Wood is impacted by weather and
temperature extremes, is flammable, and has load-bearing limitations. The use of wood depends on its
availability via forests in the area. It can be more expensive if it must be imported externally, and attempts
should first be made at local procurement.

CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
4-75. Construction techniques are the result of time-proven best practices that are employed by general
engineers. These construction techniques may be used for initial construction or the maintenance, repair,
upgrade, or rehabilitation of existing facilities. They can also be used for some deconstruction.

4-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

Construction capabilities may be viewed as horizontal or vertical. The key features of each construction
technique are described as follows:
 Horizontal construction. Horizontal construction is earthmoving efforts to bring about a
desired design of an earth foundation. It can involve cut and fill operations, the emplacement of
drainage to create a level foundation, or the moving and shaping of earth to create berms. It
involves the employment of heavy-equipment operators and a variety of heavy construction
equipment. It can set the stage for follow-on vertical construction if structures are to be built on a
foundation, or remain as a stand-alone project. Examples of horizontal construction projects are
parking lots, runways, and roads.
 Vertical construction. Vertical construction involves efforts at building or assembling
structures upwards above the ground. It can also involve underground structures, like basements.
It usually involves the employment of masons, carpenters, plumbers, electricians, and other
skilled laborers to build floors, walls, windows, trusses, and roofs. It can involve heavy
equipment to help erect the building components and use pneumatic power equipment.
Examples of vertical construction projects are buildings, bunkers, and skyscrapers.

TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEYING
4-76. Topographic surveying is performed by a topographic surveyor. A geodetic survey considers the size
and curved surface shape of the earth. A geodetic survey report is used for the positioning of field artillery
units, air defense units, aviation units, intelligence units, communications, and construction control points.
Most construction projects use plane surveys that require less accuracy and ignore the curvature of the
earth. Survey classifications include—
 Artillery.
 Basic control.
 Satellite.
 Construction.
 Airfield engineering and navigation aid.
 Hydrographic.
 Field classification and inspection.
 Land.
 Inertial.

CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING
4-77. TM 3-34.55 discusses the methods and techniques used by military construction surveyors.
Construction surveying supports planning with reconnaissance and preliminary data to aide in route and
site selection. During the construction phase, the surveyor may extend geodetic survey control from a
construction control point or use plane surveys to support the layout and quality control of the road,
airfield, bridge, facility, utility, or building. Survey types may be reconnaissance survey, preliminary
survey, final location survey, and construction layout survey. The accuracy of the survey is normally
determined by the project manager.

EARTHMOVING
4-78. TM 3-34.62/MCRP 3-17.7I discusses earthmoving. Earthmoving or horizontal construction is
required on most GE projects. Major horizontal construction projects are typically roads and airfields.
Depending on site conditions, earthmoving for site preparation may consume most of the construction
resources.
4-79. Earthmoving efforts may include site preparation; excavation; embankment; construction; backfill;
dredging; base course, subbase, and subgrade preparation; compaction; and road surface.
4-80. The phases of horizontal construction projects include—

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-15

Chapter 4

 Preparing the subgrade.

 Placing and spreading fill material.
 Compacting fill material for the subgrade and base courses.
 Performing finishing and surfacing operations.
4-81. Earthmoving is conducted with dozers; scrapers; graders; loaders; dump trucks; forklifts; cranes;
hydraulic excavators; air compressors and pneumatic tools; hauling equipment; and soil-processing,
compaction, and surfacing equipment.
4-82. The types of equipment used and the environmental conditions will affect the personnel and
equipment required to complete a given amount of work. Each piece of equipment is specifically designed
to perform certain mechanical tasks. Before preparing estimates, select the best method of operation and the
best type of equipment to use based on economy and effectiveness for each earthmoving operation.
Engineers estimate equipment production rates from experience, unit standard operating procedures,
doctrinal manuals, or operator and maintenance manuals for the make and model of equipment being used.

Notes.

1. See TM 3-34.55 for information on the use of surveying to plan and estimate earthwork.

2. See NTRP 4-04.2.3/TM 3-34.41/AFPAM 32-1000/MCRP 3-17.7M for information on

earthmoving estimates.

3. See EP 1110-1-8 series for information on cost estimates and the hourly usage cost for
construction equipment.

CONCRETE AND MASONRY

4-83. TM 3-34.44/MCRP 3-17.7D discusses concrete and masonry. Concrete and masonry refer to the
materials used in building construction and construction techniques. Concrete work includes—
 Determining concrete mixtures (mix design).
 Designing and constructing forms (concrete slab on grade thickness design).
 Developing construction, reconnaissance, site preparation, excavation, and form procedures.
 Mixing, handling, transporting, placing, finishing, and curing concrete.
 Conducting form removal and repairing techniques.

4-84. Concrete may be reinforced by adding steel or other materials. Precast concrete products may also be
procured. Precast concrete is a mixture of aggregates that are held together by a hardened paste, which is
typically made by combining Portland cement with water. There are five common types and several special
types of Portland cements, all with varying properties and uses. Admixtures can also be added to concrete
to modify properties.
4-85. Concrete has a great variety of applications. It meets structural demands and lends itself to
architectural treatment. In buildings, concrete is used in major building components (footings, foundations,
columns, beams, girders, wall slabs, roof units). Other important concrete applications are in road and
airfield pavements, bridges, dams, irrigation canals, water diversion structures, sewage treatment plants,
and water distribution pipelines. Asphalt cement is used to make asphalt cement concrete for paving.
4-86. Masonry materials usually include concrete blocks, bricks, and structural clay tiles and may also
include rubble stone masonry. Masons use specialized equipment to lay out and construct masonry walls
and other building features. Masons determine the correct mixing proportions for mortar to bond the
masonry units together and safely erect scaffolding.
4-87. Masonry construction procedures include—
 Modular coordination and planning.
 Rubble stone masonry.
 Bricklaying.

4-16 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Construction

 Reinforced brick masonry.

 Structural clay tile masonry.
4-88. Each procedure has its own construction techniques. Modular coordination occurs when the design of
a building, its components, and the building material all conform to a dimensional standard based on a
modular system. Modular measure is the system of dimensional standards for buildings and building
components that permit field assembly without cutting.

CARPENTRY
4-89. TM 3-34.47/MCRP 3-17.7C discusses carpentry details; concrete forms (because concrete forms are
constructed from wood); nonstandard, fixed, wood construction bridges (timber trestle bridges); and timber
pile wharves. Carpentry is the skilled labor of making, finishing, and repairing wooden objects and
structures. Carpentry work includes light wood framing, heavy wood framing (timber construction), finish
carpentry, and roof construction. Carpenters use their skills to perform metal construction work and to erect
metal buildings from a complete set of construction drawings (a set of plans).
4-90. Carpentry routinely uses two methods for erecting buildings as follows:
 The built-in-place method.
 The panel method (or preassemble method).

4-91. Carpenters are issued hand tool kits, power tool kits, and other equipment (such as pneumatic
compressors and nail guns) to speed their work. Carpentry tools include saws, blades, hammers, sawhorses,
braces, and other specialized woodworking tools. Carpenters are assigned to vertical construction platoons
and can be organized into work teams to ensure speed and efficiency.

FACILITIES ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4-92. TM 3-34.46/MCRP 3-17.7K discusses the design, layout, installation, and maintenance of facilities
electrical systems. Interior electricians install and maintain electrical wiring. Electricians are equipped with
electrician tool kits and support equipment. They are assigned to vertical construction platoons and can be
organized into work teams for construction projects.

Notes.

1. See UFC 3-501-01 for information on electrical engineering.

2. See TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083 for information on electrical facility

maintenance.

3. See UFC 3-550-01 for information on power systems.

4. See UFC 3-520-01 for information on exterior and interior lighting.

5. See UFC 3-560-01 for information on electrical safety.

PLUMBING AND PIPEFITTING

4-93. TM 3-34.70/MCRP 3-17.7E discusses plumbing, pipe fitting, and sewerage. Plumbing is a system of
piping, apparatuses, and fixtures for water supply and distribution and waste disposal within a building. It
includes the installation and maintenance of these systems. Plumbers are equipped with plumber tool kits
and pipefitter kits and are assigned to vertical construction units. They can be organized into work crews
for construction projects. Plumbers install and repair water systems, waste systems, fixtures, and heating
systems; cut, ream, thread, and bend pipes; and caulk, solder, and test joints and systems for leaks. (See
ATP 4-43 and FM 10-67-1 for additional information on military petroleum pipeline systems.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 4-17

Chapter 4

WASTE MANAGEMENT
4-94. Waste management is the collection, transport, treatment, or disposal of waste materials in an effort
to ensure a healthy and sanitary environment. (For more information about waste management see FM
3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B.)
4-95. Integrated waste management is the management of the entire waste process, including generation,
storage, collection, transportation, resource recovery, treatment, and disposal. It employs several waste
control methods based on the waste hierarchy (avoidance, reduction, recycling, reuse, recovery, treatment,
and disposal) and is aimed at minimizing the environmental impact of waste. (For more information about
waste management see FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B.)
4-96. Engineers have staff proponency for waste management. Waste is categorized as nonhazardous solid
waste, wastewater, hazardous and special waste, and medical waste. Waste management includes the
construction, operation, and maintenance of new (and the upgrade of existing) utilities (examples are
sewage collection and treatment or landfill construction) and the construction of facilities for the purpose of
waste management.
4-97. TCMS provides some options for collection, treatment, and disposal facilities. (See TM 3-
34.70/MCRP 3-17.7E and FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B for a detailed discussion on waste management. See
UFC 3-240-01, UFC 3-240-02, and UFC 3-240-03N for information on wastewater treatment systems
operation and management.)

PAVING
4-98. To construct roads and airfields, the military typically conducts three types of paving and surfacing
operations: bituminous pavements and surfaces, concrete pavements, and expedient pavements. Bituminous
pavement (wearing surface) is a compacted mass of bitumen and aggregate.
4-99. Concrete pavements usually combine Portland cement, water, and aggregates with possible
admixtures. TM 3-34.63 discusses construction materials and equipment; mix design; and production,
placement, and repair of bituminous and concrete pavements. It also provides a detailed discussion of
expedient pavements and surfaces.

4-18 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 5
Seaports
Strategic sealift forces are employed in all phases of strategic mobility, which are
predeployment (pre-positioned force, equipment, or supplies), deployment (surge),
sustainment/combat service support, and redeployment. In general, sealift delivers
and redeploys U.S. Army heavy combat and supporting units, U.S. Marine Corps
forces, their equipment, and sustainment/combat service support. (See JP 4-01.2.)
Obtaining adequate port facilities for sealift forces early in any contingency is
essential to the efficient flow of troops and materiel. (See JP 3-0 for additional
information.) Securing these facilities is often an initial objective of an overseas
operation. This chapter discusses the scope of port operations, planning and design,
construction methods, maintenance and repair, and LOTS support. Seaport planning
efforts may need to be applied to the front end and back end for deployment and
redeployment. When a force is redeploying, the port they embark from is called the
seaport of embarkation in theater and the seaport of debarkation in CONUS. The
seaport of debarkation is relative depending on which way the force is going. It is
possible that a port which is being improved by engineers could be used as a seaport
of debarkation for deployment and as a seaport of embarkation for redeployment.
However, during redeployment, the original port of embarkation may not necessarily
be used and another port may be assigned. During deployment and redeployment,
seaport roles may need to be switched, capabilities adjusted, and capacity modified to
accommodate throughput requirements. Space must be planned for future expansion
and construction. This manual does not discuss GE support to CONUS seaports of
embarkation or aerial ports of embarkation, such GE support to create ports with
planned capacity would normally be completed prior to contingencies.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

5-1. Port construction, expansion, rehabilitation, and conversion are of vital importance to the success of
any mission as they support assured mobility at the strategic level and are most often inherently joint
operations. Building and operating a port in a JOA is a large and vital undertaking with many divisions of
responsibility between the U.S. Navy and the branches of the U.S. Army.
5-2. The CCDR or ASCC makes basic decisions as to the location of ports, capacity, utilization,
wharfage, and storage facilities. Their decisions are supported by the U.S. Transportation Command
headquarters. (See ATP 4-0.1 and JP 4-01.2.) The CCDR may assign construction responsibilities to U.S.
Army, U.S. Navy, and U.S. Marine Corps engineer units, depending on their capabilities, their availability,
and the overall situation. Mutually supporting or follow-on construction must be coordinated with other
engineer units who are assigned to, or projected for, the AO.
5-3. The U.S. Army and the U.S. Navy maintain an organic capability to perform LOTS missions in
support of their respective Service and can support the CCDR’s requirement for JLOTS. (See JP 4-01.2 for
additional information.) LOTS operations can be conducted over unimproved shorelines and through fixed
ports. (See JP 4-01.6 for additional information on JLOTS systems, requirements, capabilities, and
limitations.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-1

Chapter 5

JOINT TASK FORCE PORT OPENING

5-4. A joint task force port opening force provides the supported ground component commander rapid
port opening capability in advance of other forces. This task force integrates Service organic capability and
enables the U.S. Transportation Command to rapidly deploy (within 36 hours) and establish and initially
operate (45–60 days) a seaport of debarkation and a distribution node. (See JP 4-09 for additional
information on port opening.)

ARMY SERVICE COMPONENT COMMANDER

5-5. According to 10 USC, the ASCC may be tasked for the construction, expansion, rehabilitation, or
conversion of a port, which may include—
 Studies of intelligence reports and available reconnaissance information that apply to each port
area being considered for use.
 A tentative determination of the ports or coastal areas to be used as part of the overall strategic
planning.
 Assignment of the port mission.
 A determination of port requirements.
 A tentative decision on the general methods of construction to be used.
 A determination of engineer units, special equipment, and materials required.

5-6. The ASCC Assistant Chief of Staff, Movements, is responsible for operating ports and furnishing
liaisons with the U.S. Navy, U.S. Coast Guard, and other interested military and authorized civilian
agencies of allied countries and the United States. The Assistant Chief of Staff, Movements, advises and
makes recommendations concerning the engineer troops employed and the work concerned. (See the annex
in the joint OPLAN or OPORD for environmental considerations.)

UNITED STATES NAVY

5-7. The U.S. Navy possesses many of the same GE capabilities for port construction as the U.S. Army.
(See JP 3-34.) The U.S. Navy assigns its Seabees for pier, wharf, port, and waterfront construction and
repair. (See NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5.) Close coordination between the forces must be done to avoid
duplicate or counterproductive efforts. Naval civil engineering capabilities are discussed in NWP 4-04.

UNITED STATES MARINES

5-8. The Marines possess GE capabilities, but have a smaller overall engineer force than the U.S. Army
and have no special seaport capabilities. (See MCWP 3-17.) Most Marine engineer forces are primarily
task-organized to support maneuver units and may only provide port construction that is sufficient to move
Marine units through a port. Marine engineering capabilities are discussed in NWP 4-04.

UNITED STATES ARMY ENGINEER UNITS

5-9. U.S. Army engineer unit capabilities are discussed in FM 3-34. U.S. Army engineer units may be
responsible for port construction, expansion, rehabilitation, conversion, and maintenance and for the
coordination of work with that of U.S. Navy units engaged in harbor clearance and salvage operations, such
as the neutralization of mines and underwater obstacles. U.S. Army engineer dive teams perform minor to
moderate salvage operations, such as clearing obstructions and debris from harbor entrances and improving
channels. This does not include large-scale salvaging, which is a U.S. Navy responsibility.

Diving Support
5-10. Building new ports and facilities requires extensive diving support. A dive detachment is normally
assigned to the ASCC to provide dive support in ports, harbors, and costal zones. Dive detachments are
assigned and attached to the theater engineer command, which allocates them according to mission
requirements. The detachment may be attached or assigned to a subordinate headquarters or task-organized
with supporting units to provide direct-support diving capabilities.

5-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

5-11. Dive detachment capabilities are tailored to the mission (allowing the use of surface-supplied diving
apparatus, scuba, and remotely operated vehicles), and they work closely with heavy equipment operators
for large-scale operations. Supporting diver assets range from a small scuba team to multiple larger teams
with a diverse range of capabilities. An engineer dive team has enough personnel and equipment to conduct
multiple diving operations currently. Divers can work up to a depth of 190 feet in support of GE.

Note. The U.S. Army does not have explosive ordnance disposal-trained diving teams.

5-12. The following are essential missions for engineer divers:

 Port opening, construction, repair, and rehabilitation.
 Reconnaissance.
 Hydrographic survey.
 Underwater inspection.
 Search and recovery.
 Salvage.
 Demolition.
 Force protection.
 Ships husbandry.
 Support to JLOTS.
 Civil assistance/civil defense.

5-13. Port opening, construction, and rehabilitation missions include planning and inspection, clearance,
repair, and quality assurance inspections. Salvage missions include refloating and rigs for towing. Ship
husbandry includes in-water hull inspections, in-water maintenance, and damage control and repair. JLOTS
support includes hydrographic surveys, mooring systems, and off shore petroleum systems. Diver civil
assistance and civil defense missions include humanitarian support, port rehabilitation, construction, and
peacetime missions.
5-14. Divers enhance force protection by conducting security swims and the emplacement or removal of
underwater obstacles and barriers. This includes installing underwater security systems. Divers also enable
expeditionary logistics by providing accurate waterway datum, surveys, and the repair of existing
waterfront facilities. Engineer dive missions assist in building capacity through infrastructure support and
sustainment operations.
5-15. Divers also provide technical assistance and staff planning support to the ASCC through brigade
commanders. (See ATTP 3-34.84/MCRP 3-35.9A/NTTP 3-07.7/AFTTP 3-2.75/CG COMDTINST
3150.1C, SS521-AG-PRO-010, TM 3-34.73, and TM 3-34.83 for additional information on dive teams,
diving support requests, and diving operations.)

Construction Support
5-16. Vertical and horizontal companies augmented with a concrete section, dive team, and other specialty
teams or sections accomplish most construction or salvage tasks. In performing their mission of
construction, expansion, rehabilitation, conversion, maintenance, and repair of a port, U.S. Army engineer
responsibilities include—
 Construction and repair of breakwaters, docks, piers, wharves, quays, moles, and landing stages.
 Construction and maintenance of port area roads.
 Construction and major maintenance of railway facilities required by the port.
 Construction of storage and marshaling areas required by the port.
 Construction or reconstruction of port utilities (water supplies, electrical power systems,
sewerage).
 Construction and major maintenance of tanker unloading facilities (mooring facilities;
submerged pipelines; surface pipelines; rigid petroleum, oils, and lubricant tank farms).
 Maintenance and operation of port firefighting facilities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-3

Chapter 5

 Dredging, except as accomplished by the U.S. Navy.

 Debris and explosive-hazard port area clearance.
 Real estate acquisition of buildings, facilities, and other properties within the port area for
military use.
 Provisions of warehouses, depots, and quarters for port personnel and other facilities as required
for port operation.
 Continuous study of the port situation.
 Preparation of tentative plans for possible contingencies.
 Requisitioning of the supplies and equipment required to carry out the mission.
 Provision of diver support.
 Liaison with naval units to coordinate construction with harbor clearance activities.
 Recommendations for real estate allocations.
 Recommendations based on environmental considerations, including force health and safety
protection.
 Advisement to the CCDR and staff on engineering matters connected with the identification,
classification, in-transit storage, movement, and distribution of engineer equipment and Class II
and IV construction materials.
5-17. Key U.S. Army GE capabilities include pile-driving operations, construction, or repair of port and
waterfront structures; support to over-the-shore causeways; underwater construction/maintenance; support
to bulk fuel storage; support to salvage and recovery operations; dredging operations; and the establishment
of sites for LOTS or JLOTS. (See JP 3-34 and TM 3-34.73.)
5-18. The U.S. Army engineer unit with overall responsibility to support a port may be the theater engineer
command or engineer brigade, battalion, or company, depending on the size and scope of work. For port
construction, it is essential to task-organize a modularized force with the right type and number of
companies, platoons, sections, and teams. The modularized force may include horizontal and vertical
companies, concrete sections, dive teams, survey design sections, and other units as the mission requires.
5-19. Reachback capabilities available via the USACE Reachback Operations Center, using
teleengineering technology through satellite links, can assist general engineers in resolving unique and
complex port issues in assessments, plans, construction, expansion, rehabilitation, conversion, maintenance,
repair, and upgrades. Engineering or other experts can quickly provide the advice and expertise for
achieving viable solutions. (See FM 3-34.)

TRANSPORTATION UNITS
5-20. U.S. Army transportation units are responsible for opening and operating the port and conducting
LOTS operations. (See TM 3-34.73.) U.S. Army equipment includes self-deploying watercraft, lighterage,
modular causeway systems, logistics support vessels, landing crafts, causeway ferries, floating piers,
Trident piers, small tugs, and barge derricks. (See JP 4-01.2.) The unit coordinates operational activities
with the completion of necessary projects and provides liaison with the U.S. Navy and U.S. Coast Guard.
5-21. The transportation unit also conducts a continuous study of port facility requirements to ensure the
smooth and orderly flow of personnel, supplies, and material through the port. The unit staff plans,
supervises, and controls freight movement from the port by rail, motor, inland water transportation and,
under special conditions, air transport.
5-22. Finally, the transportation unit is responsible for establishing engineer port construction priorities and
terminal operations. Transportation units have the capability of providing personnel and haul assets for the
movement of mass volumes of supplies and material. (See FM 4-01 for specific details on transportation
unit equipment and capabilities.)

QUARTERMASTER UNITS
5-23. U.S. Army quartermaster units are responsible for supplying potable water and operating petroleum
pipeline systems, including off-vessel discharging and loading. Their capabilities include providing

5-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

terminal service unit handling equipment, shore-based water storage systems, and inland petroleum
distribution systems. (See JP 4-01.2.)
5-24. Quartermaster units coordinate with naval units, engineer units, and transportation units in
determining the location of tanker unloading and vessel fueling facilities. Quartermaster units have the
capability of providing personnel and equipment assets to support logistics operations and services. (See
TM 3-34.73.)

SCOPE OF PORT OPERATIONS

5-25. According to JP 3-34, port construction is considered a general engineer activity. This chapter is a
guide for the construction and rehabilitation of ship-unloading and cargo-handling facilities in the JOA.
The coverage includes special problems encountered in port construction and the construction of supporting
structures located in and around the port facility. Conventional sealift shipping falls into three broad
categories: dry-cargo ships or freighters, liquid-cargo carriers or tankers, and passenger ships. Based on
current trends in the commercial shipping industry, it is anticipated that up to 90 percent of all cargo
arriving in future JOAs will be containerized. (See JP 4-01.2 and JP 4-01.5 for conventional sealift shipping
and sealift ship programs.)
5-26. Containerized shipping requires dock and road surfaces that are capable of withstanding severe loads
and heavy lift equipment that is capable of transferring the largest loaded container (8 feet wide, 40 feet
long, and 67,200 pounds) from large, oceangoing vessels to shore facilities. These factors should be
considered during port planning. The guidelines concerning facilities for handling containerized cargo and
container shipping outlined within this chapter represent the most current developments in this industry.
5-27. Strategic sealift includes the requirement to achieve over-the-shore cargo discharge capability to
provide minimum sustainment/combat service support to expeditionary forces for not more than 60 days
(JP 4-01.2). While the situation dictates the COA, assault landing facilities are usually used for supply and
replenishment in the initial phase of a campaign, followed by LOTS and JLOTS operations, as discussed
later in this chapter.
5-28. As established port areas are acquired or rehabilitated, LOTS sites are normally abandoned.
(See JP 4-01.6.) Certain AOs, however, may require the use of beach sites for extended periods of time or
indefinitely due to the lack of existing facilities, the geography, the terrain, or the enemy situation.
5-29. For long-term operations, the rehabilitation and renovation of existing port facilities is the preferred
practice. The construction of new ports is normally undesirable, as it requires a large amount of labor,
materials, and time and probably would lack the desirable related facilities, such as connecting road and rail
networks. Therefore, existing ports are usually targeted for rehabilitation and upgrade. The engineer
mission is to support the construction, maintenance, and repair of a wide variety of facilities above and
below the waterline.
5-30. The planner assists in the development of a port inspection plan and provides guidance to the
inspection team for initial, on-site port surveys. After completing the initial inspections, the team leader
designates the appropriate diving element that is most capable of performing the mission. In the event that
the operation requires extensive diving assets (such as major salvage, construction, or harbor clearance),
multiple dive detachments may be task-organized to support the mission. If the inspection is being done in
an unsecure port, diving elements may require the support of security personnel.
5-31. A completed port inspection provides the water terminal commander with a report of the existing
conditions of underwater port facility structures. A detailed report may include a hydrographic survey
depicting water depths, obstruction locations, and side scan sonar images. The information provided helps
the area engineer and port construction units determine the scope of construction required for port repair.
The report may assist in the development of a port repair plan and time estimate.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-5

Chapter 5

5-32. A detailed report may include—

 Details of the port or facility.
 Assessment of underwater damage to existing pier facilities.
 Recommendations for restoration.
 The location and condition of sunken vessels or other obstructions.
 Water depths of ship channels within the port.
 Recommendations for vessel or obstacle removal.
 The location of underwater explosive hazard and munitions.

PLANNING AND DESIGN

5-33. Supporting strategic transportation requirements is a four-step process discussed in JP 4-01.2 and
JP 4-09. Engineers are involved in transportation planning at all levels. They assist in analyzing existing
facilities and estimating and planning for construction, maintenance, and repair requirements. (See TM 3-
34.85/MCRP 3-17A, TM 3-34.55, and TM 3-34.73.) Engineers also recommend measures for protection,
security, and port defense.
5-34. Before occupying a port, planners must carefully consider the current and expected physical
condition and logistics of the port. This includes the quantity and the nature of the cargo and personnel that
the port will handle. U.S. Army and U.S. Navy engineers would be involved in the initial reconnaissance
and survey team activities to determine the physical condition, repair requirements, bare-beach transfer
sites, and in-leasing of port facilities. (See TM 3-34.73 for planning considerations.)
5-35. Reconnaissance and survey teams should be identified and sent into existing port facilities as soon as
possible to assist planners by collecting crucial data on the existing port and infrastructure. This includes
construction and hydrographic surveys. Planners study the relative value of rehabilitation and construction
and the value of specific facilities to the construction effort required. The JFC coordinates indicated
changes and their impact on logistics through U.S. Army engineer, transportation, and other command
channels and Naval units engaged in clearance, dredging, and other harbor projects. (See JP 3-34 and
TM 3-34.73 for more information on seaport planning. See TM 3-34.55 for more information on
hydrographic surveys.)
5-36. When possible, port construction efforts in the JOA should consider the rehabilitation and expansion
of existing facilities rather than initiate new construction. Rehabilitation and construction priorities, the
choice of construction materials, and plans of operations for the port are factors that help gain the greatest
capacity from the port using the least expenditure of manpower and material.
5-37. Once the decision as to the location of the port has been made at the theater headquarters, the mission
is assigned to an appropriate engineer level of command. The location of the port will be made based on an
analysis of the projected capacity of the facility, the quantity and nature of cargo to be handled, the tactical
and strategic situation, and the construction materials and assets available. Engineers may provide solutions
to eliminate facility constraints, increase or restore port throughput capacity or capabilities, and provide
follow-on movement to unit assembly areas or the objective. (See ATP 4-12, ATP 4-13, FM 4-01, and
JP 4-09 for information on transportation planning considerations and requirements. See JP 4-01.5 for
information on joint terminal operations. See JP 4-09 for information on highway systems, rail networks,
and logistics support facilities.)
5-38. Careful, comprehensive planning based on extensive and detailed reconnaissance is essential to
successful port construction. This reconnaissance should immediately begin on receipt of the mission and
continue throughout construction and up to actual occupation. A thorough initial reconnaissance will help
planners to estimate more accurate logistics requirements by providing essential data on the physical
condition of the port to be seized or occupied.

5-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

5-39. Geospatial products may assist before, during, and after seaport reconnaissance.

Notes.

1. See ATP 4-13 for information on a marine beach profile diagram on sea, shore, and beach
slope construction requirements.

2. See FM 4-01 for information on a seaport and supporting facility layout.

4. See FM 10-67-1 for information on seaport facilities.

5. See UFC 4-152-01 for designs on piers and wharves.

6. See TM 3-34.73 and TM 3-34.83 for information on dive team support planning.

5-40. There a variety of designs for different types of port facilities and structures, which include wharfs
(floating and stationary), piers, causeways, breakwaters, seawalls, landing ramps, anchorages, mooring, and
support facilities.

Notes.

1. See TM 3-34.73 for port layouts.

2. See UFC 4 series for port designs and specifications.

3. See TM 5-850-1 for information on military port engineering designs.

4. See TM 5-840-2 for information on port supporting storage depots.

5-41. ATP 4-0.1 gives planning factors for approximate materials and man-hour requirements for the
overall planning and estimating of general and break-bulk cargo port construction. TM 5-301-2,
TM 5-301-4, and TM 5-303 provide information on design, material, and labor requirements for port
structures.
5-42. After the port has been occupied, planners must carefully and critically examine previous plans in
view of the physical condition and structural integrity of the port. Any major proposed changes impacting
logistics and scheduling must be coordinated through engineer, transportation, and command channels.
Priorities established in the OPORD may have to be modified after construction is started based on current
conditions and on-site information. Planning and scheduling are based on meeting all immediate needs,
while ensuring that all work contributes toward successful project completion.
5-43. Comparative studies are made to determine the relative value of rehabilitation of the existing port
versus new port construction. These studies compare the benefits to be gained from specific facilities
within a port to the construction effort required. Among other factors, the selection of the best ports for
further development is determined by the need for dispersion, location of logistics requirements, time and
effort required to move construction units, local availability of materials, and civilian labor.
5-44. The U.S. Army theater sustainment command estimates port capacity requirements. The engineer
usually makes an independent estimate of the port capacity under various alternative methods of
construction, repair, or rehabilitation. This procedure serves as an aid in determining the most
advantageous, relative priorities of engineer projects. The capacity estimates of the sustainment brigade or
theater opening element, however, must govern with respect to military loads. Several software packages
exist that are helpful in determining port capacity and expansion requirements. Consult the reachback
capabilities available through the USACE Reachback Operations Center for information on such software
packages.
5-45. On the basis of port capacity estimates, the engineer recommends schedules for construction,
rehabilitation, and maintenance of port cranes and facilities; road and railroad construction within the port

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-7

Chapter 5

area; preparation of storage and marshaling areas; and others. Port openings may require combat or GE
support to conduct reconnaissance, clear debris or obstacles, and provide facilities.

UNIFIED FACILITIES CRITERIA

5-46. The Unified Facilities Criteria handbooks are guides for engineers, planners, construction workers,
and facility personnel in the scheduling, inspection, maintenance, and repair of mooring hardware at
waterfront facilities and related facilities.
5-47. The following Unified Facilities Criteria apply to port construction: UFC 4-150-02, UFC 4-150-06,
UFC 4-150-07, UFC 4-150-08, and UFC 4-151-10.

WHARF FACILITIES
5-48. Port capacity estimates are based on the discharge rates of ships at the wharf or in the stream, which
are associated with ships at anchor in connection with a JLOTS. Priority is given to methods that allow
ships to be discharged more quickly. Construction is scheduled in coordination with transportation
operations so that construction activities interfere as little as possible with the discharge of ships.

ANCHORAGE
5-49. When sheltered anchorage is available, lighterage operations provide a means of discharging cargo
while deepwater wharves are under construction or repair. By conducting lighterage operations while
construction and rehabilitation work go forward, continued unloading is possible through the use of the
following alternatives:
 The continuous dredging of the deepwater wharf approach channel by using a shallow-draft
approach and discharge outside dredging work areas.
 The use of shallow-draft parts of the wharf systems while some of the deepwater wharves are
under construction.
 The unloading of shallow-draft vessels over deep-draft wharves during construction.

LOGISTICS OVER-THE-SHORE
5-50. At least 90 percent of the tonnage required to support deployed forces in the AO must be provided by
sea LOCs. Although air LOCs usually carry high-priority shipments and personnel, sea LOCs will likely
bear the main burden due to greater carrying capacities of strategic sealift vessels. The uninterrupted
delivery of materiel requires that vulnerable fixed port facilities be backed up by a flexible system, and
LOTS operations provide that system. LOTS is the process of loading and unloading ships without the
benefit of deep draft-capable, fixed port facilities or as a means of moving forces closer to tactical assembly
areas. The scope of LOTS operations depends on geographic, tactical, and time considerations.
5-51. JLOTS operations include U.S. Marine Corps forces and occur when the U.S. Navy and U.S. Army
LOTS forces conduct LOTS together under a JFC. Armed forces LOTS operations involve transferring,
marshaling, and dispersing materiel from a marine system to a land transport system. The rule of thumb for
planners is that 40 percent of all cargo entering contingency theaters by surface means will need to be
delivered through LOTS terminals. In some theaters, this proportion may be much greater. Beaches that are
distant from fixed port facilities serve as LOTS sites. The rapid establishment of a viable LOTS system
depends on engineer construction and maintenance support. (See JP 4-01.6, NWP 4-0M/MCWP 4-2, and
NTTP 3-02.1M/MCWP 3-31.5.)
5-52. Initial LOTS planning and site selection are coordinated between the theater opening element or
sustainment brigade commander (Transportation Corps) and the U.S. Navy/Military Sealift Command. The
initial site selection is based on map studies, hydrographic charts, and aerial reconnaissance.

RESPONSIBILITIES
5-53. Proper logistics planning to support deployed forces on a foreign shore always begins with an
evaluation of in-place, fixed port facilities and capacities. These, combined with connecting railway,

5-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

highway, and inland waterway networks, are the major logistics systems required for military operations.
When a reckoning of available resources is complete, planners determine the need for LOTS terminals to
supplement and back up the transportation network. (See ATP 4-13 for information on LOTS layouts. See
ATP 4-13 and JP 4-01.6 for information on JLOTS.)
5-54. The overall responsibility for LOTS operations lies with the U.S. Army Transportation Corps for the
U.S. Army and with the U.S. Navy for the U.S. Marines Corps. Each LOTS terminal acts under the direct
control of a transportation terminal battalion that comprises two service companies and appropriate
lighterage units. The CCDR may assign construction responsibilities to U.S. Army, U.S. Navy, and/or U.S.
Marine Corps engineer units, depending on their availability and the overall situation. Mutually supporting
or follow-on construction must be coordinated with other engineer units assigned to or projected for the
AO.
5-55. U.S. Army engineers must be prepared to support the LOTS mission because—
 Existing ports may be damaged, incomplete, or unavailable.
 Existing ports may be unable to handle resupply operations.
 Existing port facilities are vulnerable to enemy activities, such as mining, CBRN, or air
interdiction.
 Ports under repair may be unavailable for long periods.

5-56. Engineer units give construction, repair, and maintenance support to LOTS operations. An engineer
unit may expect the following missions when supporting a JLOTS operation:
 Construct semipermanent piers and causeways.
 Prepare and stabilize beaches.
 Construct access and egress routes from beaches to backwater areas.
 Construct access routes to marshaling areas and/or adjoining LOTS sites.
 Construct marshaling and storage areas.
 Construct road and railroad links to existing LOCs.
 Construct utility systems.
 Construct petroleum, oils, and lubricant storage and distribution systems.
 Construct container collection sites.
 Provide other assistance or maintenance determined by the terminal commander.

RECONNAISSANCE
5-57. The reconnaissance party includes representatives of the terminal group commander, the terminal
battalion command, the supporting engineer, the supporting signal officer, military police, U.S. Navy
personnel to provide advice on mooring areas, and a U.S. Army engineer dive team to conduct a detailed
hydrographic survey of the site. Hydrographic surveys provide a depiction of underwater bottom profiles of
an operational shoreline or port area. Such a survey can provide accurate water depths, bottom depth
gradients, ship channels, and the location and type of underwater obstructions or other hazards that may
impede vessel traffic. Others participate if the situation dictates or at the terminal commander’s request.
The reconnaissance party briefs the terminal commander on its findings. The briefing must cover the—
 Engineer effort required to prepare and maintain the site, based on available units, equipment,
and materials.
 Signal construction and maintenance required for necessary communications within the beach
area and between the beach and the terminal group headquarters.
 Types of lighterage craft that may be used, based on beach conditions.
 Safe haven for lighterage craft in stormy weather.
 Location and desirability of mooring areas.
 Adequate egress from the beach. This and the beach dimensions are key factors in determining
tonnage capacity for the beach.
 Intensity of wave action and tidal range.
 Climatic and weather conditions.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-9

Chapter 5

5-58. The supporting engineer must be informed about the layout of the LOTS site and should be involved
early in staff planning and coordinating because the layout determines the required engineer effort. A
LOTS layout varies with the situation and existing geographic conditions. The physical size of the
individual site depends on security considerations, soil trafficability, the number of ships to be unloaded at
the site, and the type of cargo coming ashore. For example, a LOTS terminal may need to be very large if
ammunition and/or petroleum, oils, and lubricants are being unloaded over a beach that is subject to enemy
attack. General cargo unloaded over a secure beach requires less area. (See ATP 4-13 for information on
layout figures.)

LANDING CRAFT UNLOADING POINTS

5-59. Knowledge of the beaching positions designated for landing craft is important to the supporting
engineer, especially if landing points are used for extended periods of time. A common maintenance
problem on beaching positions is the creation of troughs or pits in the beach above and beyond the
waterline. This can also impact routes from the beaches to backwater or remote areas. Troughing is caused
by landing craft ramps, which dig into the inclined beach at a steep angle. This problem is exacerbated
when wheeled vehicles dig into the sandy beach material and water washes the loosened material away.
Vehicles can easily bog down, stall, and get stuck in these troughs, thus slowing or halting unloading
operations. Engineers can reduce the troughing by placing sufficient quantities of stone or gravel at the
unloading point or by cutting down the slope of the beach. Both of these measures require periodic
maintenance for as long as the unloading points are used.

CONSTRUCTION
5-60. As discussed in other instances of construction in this publication, many construction practices apply
to, and remain constant for, seaports. Special consideration for seaport construction is discussed in the
following paragraphs.

PHASED CONSTRUCTION
5-61. Current procedures for port construction in undeveloped areas usually fall under the following
phases:
 Phase One, Preliminary. This phase includes all requirements from the arrival of construction
units to the beginning of construction of deep-draft wharves. The LOTS operations are
conducted during this phase.
 Phase Two, Initial Construction. This phase continues to the point at which the first cargo ship
berth is fully operational, including road and railroad connection; water supply and electrical
services; and bulk petroleum, oils, and lubricant handling facilities that can receive liquid fuels
directly from oceangoing tankers.
 Phase Three, Completion. This phase ends when construction is complete and authorized
facilities are fully operational.

PORT CONSTRUCTION
5-62. Commercial records indicate that at least 9 months are required for a skilled construction crew of 30
to construct a modern (approximately 80 by 1,000 feet) steel or concrete pile wharf by conventional
(cast-in-place and/or on-site job erection) methods. This time requirement, even allowing for larger
construction crews, is excessive for current military operations and indicates that neither steel nor concrete
pile wharves will likely be built by military units using conventional methods in the future. Recent studies
indicate that although steel and concrete are the most common building materials used in new military port
construction, their use is limited to new, unconventional construction and lower cost methods. (See
TM 3-34.73 for additional information.)

5-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

STEEL WHARVES OR PIERS

5-63. The use of steel in future military port construction is expected to occur mainly in the construction of
expedient container ports with large, self-elevating, self-propelled, spud type barge pier units. These can be
placed into service in comparatively short periods of time with less effort and can also be retrieved for
subsequent uses.
5-64. These structures have been used extensively in the oil exploration industry. Their recommended use
in expedient port construction is their actual use in situations that are as demanding as those found in
similar modern military operations. The newer versions of these barges use truss type supports rather than
caissons. They may be elevated at a much faster rate (50 feet per hour) and are more relocatable than older
barges.

CONCRETE WHARVES OR PIERS

5-65. Commercial port engineers are continuing to improve existing designs for precast concrete pier
pilings, caps, decks, and curbs and for the use of new high-strength, quick-curing concrete options. These
new techniques should considerably reduce the efforts and time requirements for conventional concrete
port construction.

SUPPORT FACILITIES
5-66. A large amount of construction effort goes into building port support facilities. If a port is located in
an area where an adequate railway or roadway network exists, then cargo-handling operations will be more
efficient when there are like connectors on the wharves. Engineer units are responsible for the construction
of railway and roadway facilities required by the port. Plans are staffed and coordinated with
Transportation Corps requirements.
5-67. Designs currently being recommended to the U.S. Army for future expedient military container port
construction include the use of tractor-trailers to transport individual International Standards Organization
shipping containers from the wharves. The wharf must be of sufficient load-bearing strength (capable of
supporting up to 1,000 pounds per square foot of live loads) and width (usually 80 to 100 feet) to
accommodate fully loaded tractor-trailers. They must be constructed in such a manner as to avoid excessive
breakover, approach, and departure angles and allow suitable gradients for connections to existing or
planned roadway networks. (See ATP 4-12 for additional information on U.S. Army container operations.)
5-68. Other on-shore construction requirements include—
 Potable and nonpotable water supply for the port and ships docked or moored in the port.
 Electric power systems, which may require overhead and underground systems.
 Firefighting facilities and special systems as needed, such as special facilities for petroleum, oils,
and lubricant terminals.
5-69. Suitable water depths must be maintained at ports to accommodate deep-draft sea vessel
maneuvering requirements. According to TM 3-34.73, the normal draft for a container ship is 40 feet. Daily
tidal ranges can exceed 20 feet and, therefore, must be taken into consideration when determining
acceptable channel and pier side depths. A minimum low-tide water depth of about 35 feet should be used
for planning purposes, because it will accommodate most deep-draft vessels. Current commercial
container-shipping capacity requires port depths of at least 40 feet. The planned construction of wharves in
shallow water may also be justified where—
 It is established that the required depth can be obtained by dredging, that such dredging is
practical as part of the construction project, and that dredging can be performed without
endangering the in-place wharf structure.
 Short-term use is anticipated, thus making the use of lighterage a more feasible option than
dredging or wharf relocation.
5-70. Minimum water depths for new wharf construction are dictated by the intended use of the wharf
(petroleum, oils, and lubricant wharf; container wharf; and lighter wharf), the type of wharf, and the size of

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-11

Chapter 5

the sea vessels to be accommodated. These depths are determined well in advance and are given in the
operations order and/or construction directive.
5-71. Dredging may be necessary to establish and maintain required depths. Experience gained during
World War II and the Vietnam War indicates that there are a number of specific problems associated with
dredging projects in an AO. Hopper dredges and side-casting dredges are the only ones that are seagoing.
The transportation of other types of dredges to the AO can be difficult, and they must be towed to the site
or assembled from components transported aboard cargo ships.
5-72. It may also be difficult to provide adequate security for dredges within a combat zone or wartime
TO. The routine patterns followed by dredges greatly limit the effectiveness of any passive defense
measures. Pipeline dredges are virtually stationary targets. The availability of dredges and crews for use in
the early stages of deployment in an AO can also be a major problem. The U.S. Army has no trained
military dredge crews or portable dredges that are suitable for use in an AO. USACE does possess dredges
and trained crews, but the availability of these is not certain and must be planned for and requested well in
advance.
5-73. Sweeping, covered in detail in TM 3-34.55, is a method of locating pinnacles or other obstructions
that limit the accessibility of some ships to use the area. Sweeping is always used as a final check after
dredging operations. When feasible, obstructions may be partially removed by explosives or other methods
to allow unfettered access. If a sufficient operating area with adequate water depths is available, hazards
may be properly marked with the appropriate use of lights and other signals placed on or near structures,
sunken vessels, and other obstructions for the protection of navigation.

PIER AND CAUSEWAY CONSTRUCTION

5-74. TM 3-34.72 and TM 3-34.73 provide data on the types and use of pile material in the construction of
piers and causeways. Piers and causeways allow cargo vessels direct beach access, thus eliminating the
multiple handling of material and speeding unloading times. Piers are structures with working surfaces that
are raised above the water on piles. Piers on open coasts typically project beyond the surf zone. The
primary advantage of piers is the stability afforded by having working surfaces above the influence of wave
attack, which permits consistent unloading at times when intensive wave action would otherwise prevent or
inhibit landing craft from directly accessing a bare-beach site.
5-75. The sectionalized floating pier is a self-contained pier that can be brought to the LOTS site and
emplaced in a comparatively short time. Specially trained engineer personnel from U.S. Army horizontal
and vertical units can install this equipment. U.S. Army modular causeway units include organic equipment
and forces to conduct GE operations associated with floating modular causeway placement. (See
TM 3-34.73.)
5-76. Other engineer assistance is required at the beach end of the pier to prepare the beach and anchor the
pier. Causeways are floating structures, which project out from the beach. In some applications, they are
used as rafts to ferry equipment from ship to shore. Causeways are more susceptible to intense wave action
than are piers, but they are much more easily deployed. In areas where wave action is not a significant
problem, causeways can be used as floating piers. Engineers provide beach preparation and anchoring for
causeway operations.

ROAD CONSTRUCTION
5-77. Seaport road construction supports the LOTS site layout, road network within the port, and roads
connecting the port to the transportation network. The major engineer effort in LOTS is invested in road
construction and maintenance. Considerable effort must be spent to adequately stabilize soil conditions to
ensure a suitable foundation and improve trafficability in the beach area. Constructed roads must withstand
the large volume and impact of material-handling equipment carrying extremely heavy loads. Roads that
support LOTS are usually constructed in a loop to reduce their required width, eliminate vehicle turning as
much as possible, and prevent vehicle backups.

5-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

5-78. Port operations are performed by U.S. Army transportation units or Naval units. Operation units
perform maintenance within their capabilities. General engineer units perform port maintenance and repair
within their capabilities. Maintenance involves routine engineering efforts to keep port facilities in good
working order and service. Repair involves the correction of critical defects to restore damaged facilities to
operational service. The repair and maintenance of conventional and expedient construction could include
emergency repair, major repair, rehabilitation of breakwater structures, and expedients. (See TM 3-34.73
and TM 5-622/NAVY MO-104/AFM 91-34 for additional information.)

MAINTENANCE
5-79. Routine maintenance is essential to allow the port to continue its functionality and good service.
Inspections are scheduled to review maintenance service records and conduct physical inspections of port
infrastructure and individual facilities. This includes underwater inspections and assessments of port
facilities with the use of dive teams. Based on the inspections, repairs are scheduled and repair
parts/materials are ordered.

EMERGENCY REPAIR
5-80. Emergency repair is immediate work required to repair storm, accident, or other damage to prevent
additional losses and larger repairs. Emergency repairs include—
 Repairs to breached breakwaters to prevent further damage to harbor installations.
 Repairs of wharf damage caused by ships, storms, or enemy action to restore structural strength.
 Adding rock to control foundation scour or breach erosion.

MAJOR REPAIR
5-81. Major repair is required when there is significant damage to the port facilities that requires
replacement work or rebuilding. This includes—
 Replacing wharf decks.
 Resurfacing access roads and earth-filled quays.
 Replacing wharf bracings and anchorages that have been destroyed by decay or erosion.
 Replacing entire spud barge pier, spud, or other major barge pier accessories.

EXPEDIENT REPAIR
5-82. The use of expedient repair methods should be encouraged during limited port operations while
major repair and rehabilitation go forward. (See TM 3-34.73.)
5-83. Possible measures to speed repairs are as follows:
 Use launches or tugboats with a line to the shore for various hauling and hoisting functions in
construction work at the waterfront.
 Erect a derrick or install a crawler or truck-mounted crane on a regular barge; a mechanized
landing craft; a barge of pontoon cubes; or a barge fabricated for military floating bridge units.
 Fabricate rafts for pile bent bracing operations from oil drums, heavy timbers, spare piles, or
local material.
 Improvise floating dry docks for small craft from U.S. Navy pontoons.
 Improvise light barges, floating wharf approaches, and small floating wharves from steel oil
drums.
 Lay diagonal flooring over existing decking to strengthen a structure by distributing the load
over more stringers.
 Remove the decking to add stringers, or place smaller stringers on the pile cap between existing
stringers from beneath the decking and wedged tight against the deck.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-13

Chapter 5

 Drive the piles through the hole, move several floor planks, and then cap new pile bents and
wedge them tight against the stringers. (This can only be done if the wharf can support the
weight of the pile driver.)
 Use a rock- or ballast-filled timber crib to replace a gap in a pile wharf structure or to extend the
offshore end on the wharf. The timber crib may be built on land, launched by using log rollers,
floated into position, and filled with rock or ballast to hold it in place.
 Use standard military floating bridges or U.S. Navy pontoons to supplement or temporarily
replace damaged causeways.
 Use standard military floating bridges or U.S. Navy pontoons to provide access between
undamaged sections of off-loading piers.
 Restore the face of the wharf first if a section of a wharf has been destroyed so that ships may be
worked while the area behind the face is being restored.
 Use the shore end of a pier for lighters or other short vessels while the pier is being extended.
 Use standard or nonstandard fixed bridging to bridge part of a solid-fill wharf. (See
TM 3-34.22/MCRP 3-17.1B, Military Nonstandard Fixed Bridging.)
 Use camels, barges, or other devices to block slips that are filled with rubble. This prevents ships
from being brought to the face of the wharf and allows them to be retained in deep water for
unloading. Alternatively, it may be possible to use standard trestles, fixed bridging, and
assembled U.S. Navy pontoons to extend the width of the pier.
 Use the hull of a capsized or sunken vessel as the substructure for a pier.
 Anchor the shore end of a causeway constructed from U.S. Navy pontoon cubes onshore by
excavating a section of beach, floating the pontoons into the temporary inlet thus made, and then
backfilling to provide a solid anchorage.
 Use field-expedient matting.

REHABILITATION OF BREAKWATER STRUCTURES

5-84. Breakwaters are subject to damage and overtopping by large storms, which can lead to extensive
damage to protected port facilities, infilling of channels, and significant reductions of navigation channel
availability. Therefore, the repair of breakwaters and similar structures is required to protect the structural
integrity of the port from intensive wave action; prevent harbor erosion; and allow safe navigation,
harborage, and port activities. Breached breakwater structures are repaired by placing individual rocks or
engineered concrete armor in interconnecting mounds. The stone rubble is placed in graded layers to
provide filtering and limit wave penetration through the porous structure. Armor size is engineered and
depends on the wave and water level climate. Breakwater layout can be parallel, perpendicular, or at any
angle to the coast, depending on what will maintain tranquil harbor conditions. In situations where large
rock is not available, artificial rubble and protective armor units may be fabricated relatively closely and
delivered to the site for emplacement.

MARSHALING AREAS
5-85. Marshaling areas serve as centralized collection points where unloaded materials and equipment can
be temporarily stored while awaiting distribution to the proper units. The size of the marshaling area varies
with the size and type of shipping, the unloading rate, the exposure to hostilities, and the units being
supported. Marshaling areas are tailored to specific operations and can need as much as 500 acres for large-
scale operations. (See ATP 4-13 for layout information.)
5-86. In hostile environments, marshaling areas are dispersed, with acreage divided into many small
parcels. Other protection considerations must be integrated into the design of marshaling areas as well. (See
ATP 4-13 for specific details on planning, constructing, organizing, managing, and maintaining marshaling
areas.)
5-87. Marshaling area surfaces and foundations must be sufficiently stable to support a fully loaded piece
of material-handling equipment that weighs up to 100,000 pounds. Access and egress roads must be
capable of supporting the same loads. The surface must be protected with adequate drainage.

5-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Seaports

5-88. International Standards Organization container collection areas must be planned and provided. These
areas must have the same trafficability, drainage, and access/egress characteristics as the marshaling areas
and can require nearly as much space. Most material shipped to a JOA via surface transportation is
containerized. Once ashore, the containers are opened and unpacked for distribution to the intended units.
Empty containers are collected and reloaded aboard ships and then returned to their point of origin. (See
ATP 4-12 and JP 4-09 for information on container requirements, operations, and management.)

AMMUNITION STORAGE AREAS

5-89. Areas where ammunition is to be unloaded, sorted, and temporarily stored requires the same type of
planning and engineer effort as marshaling areas. In addition, engineer units will have to perform additional
horizontal construction work, making earthen berms and revetments. Ammunition supply points that will
be used for an extended time must be provided with overhead protection from the elements. (See
ATP 4-35.1 for site layout information.)
5-90. Ammunition storage areas must be remote from other activities on the beach. They must be
dispersed, concealed, and camouflaged. Each site requires access and egress routes, preferably arranged so
that vehicles do not back up and block the traffic flow. (See ATP 4-35.1 and ATP 4-35 for additional
information.)

PETROLEUM, OIL, AND LUBRICANTS STORAGE AREAS

5-91. Fuel storage areas on the beach will likely be the largest concentration of fuels in the distribution
system. Although not a GE task, engineers may be required to assist the Quartermaster Corps by
constructing rigid storage tanks of sufficient size, building a distribution network of pipelines, installing
collapsible tank farms, or constructing related facilities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 5-15

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 6
Airfields and Heliports
Airpower, whether it is an aircraft, helicopter, or unmanned aircraft system, is a
strategic asset that can help determine decisive outcomes. Whether used as weapon
platforms or transportation assets, aircraft require a network of airfields and heliports
to support deployment, access, bed-down, operational maneuver, and
sustainment/combat service support of forces. An adequate aerial LOC network is
one of the keys to shaping operations. (See ADRP 4-0.) Contingency operation
airfield and heliport planning and design involves the airfield layout and pavement
structure design, supporting facilities, and sustaining infrastructure, including air
traffic control and landing systems and petroleum, oils, and lubricant and munitions
storage facilities. It also involves protection, security, health, safety, and
environmental factors. This chapter requires a basic understanding of the common
information about roads and airfields. Contingency operations airfield planning is
similar to base camp or force bed-down planning. An airfield and heliport may be
contained within a base camp or a bed-down facility for aircraft. This chapter will
focus on the planning, design, construction, and O&M of airfields and heliports.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

6-1. Airfields and heliports are considered a mobility engineer function. U.S. Army, Marine, Navy, and
Air Force engineers have the capability to plan, design, construct, repair, and maintain airfields and
heliports. Airfield repair operations are normally done on an emergency basis. All Services have
capabilities to participate in airfield damage repair (ADR) and may be called on to assist in such operations.
(See JP 3-34 for additional information on Service capabilities. See DODD 4270.5 for specific information
on the repair responsibilities of each Service.)

UNITED STATES ARMY

6-2. U.S. Army engineers may be tasked to support initial ADR or rapid runway repair as a part of a
forcible-entry operation as outlined in AFPAM 10-219 V5; DODD 4270.5; JP 3-34; FM 5-430-00-
1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I; and TC 5-340. Forward aviation combat engineering is performed by
combat engineers to enhance mobility. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.)
6-3. Forward aviation combat engineers prepare or repair expedient landing zones, forward arming and
refueling points, landing strips, or other aviation support sites in the forward combat area. These are
considered combat engineering tasks and are focused on providing support to tactical combat maneuver
forces. All other airfield and heliport planning, design, and construction tasks are considered GE tasks. U.S.
Army engineers may assist other engineers, as directed, in airfield and heliport planning, design,
construction, repair, and maintenance. (See ETL 97-9; FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I; and
UFC 3-260-01.)

UNITED STATES MARINES

6-4. Marine engineers, as part of the engineer support battalion, also have organic horizontal assets for
expedient airfield construction and repair. The marine wing support squadron has primary responsibility for
expedient airfield construction and repair. Although it is a secondary mission, Marine engineers can
construct expedient airstrips and landing zones. They can also clear helicopter landing zones; perform
permanent air base construction; conduct air base damage repair, improve and sustain airfields; conduct

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-1

Chapter 6

rapid runway repair; and build, improve, and sustain expeditionary airfields. (See NWP 4.04 for additional
information.)

UNITED STATES NAVY

6-5. The naval mobile construction battalion (Seabees) capabilities include organic horizontal assets to
construct and repair airfields. The construction of expedient airfields (matting) is part of their role in
facilitating the landing and movement of troops, equipment, and supplies from the beachhead. As a GE
task, Seabees repair and improve bare-base existing airfields and repair airfield damage. (See JP 3-34 and
NWP 4-04 for additional information.)

UNITED STATES AIR FORCE

6-6. Due to their specialized expertise, U.S. Air Force engineers take the lead to open, establish, and
sustain airfield operations that support large and high-performance aircraft at locations where U.S. Air
Force aircraft operate. (See JP 3-34.)
6-7. U.S. Air Force engineers are organized into the Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force (Prime
BEEF) and the Rapid Engineer Deployable Heavy Operational Repair Squadron Engineer (RED HORSE)
units. The Prime BEEF provides rapid-response civil engineer capabilities, which include airfield
construction, repair, and maintenance. The RED HORSE is a self-sufficient, mobile heavy construction unit
capable of rapid response and independent operations to include heavy repair and construction capabilities
when the requirements exceed Prime BEEF capabilities. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34 for more
information.)
6-8. Air Force engineers are responsible for establishing air bases to support the projection of airpower.
As such, the U.S. Air Force is responsible for the emergency repair of established U.S. air bases. (See Air
Force Doctrine Annex 3-34.) This includes the emergency repair of air base paved surfaces, which is called
rapid runway repair. When U.S. Air Force engineering capabilities are exceeded, the U.S. Army provides
construction support. (See JP 3-34.)
6-9. The preponderance of work may be performed by U.S. Army engineers due to the availability of
general engineer assets; and in some cases, it may be preferable for U.S. Army (or other Service) engineers
to take the lead in supporting airfield operation. U.S. Army engineer support to U.S. Air Force-controlled
airfields is as follows:
 Develops engineering design criteria, standard plans, and material to meet U.S. Air Force
requirements.
 Performs the reconnaissance, survey, design, construction, or improvement of airfields, roads,
utilities, and structures.
 Repairs U.S. Air Force bases and facilities beyond the immediate emergency recovery
requirements of the U.S. Air Force (semipermanent and permanent repair).
 Supplies construction materials and equipment.
 Assists in the emergency repair of war-damaged air bases.
 Assists in providing expedient facilities (force bed-down).
 Manages war damage repair and base development.
 Supervises U.S. Army personnel. (The U.S. Air Force base commander sets priorities.)
 Performs emergency and permanent repair of war damage to forward tactical airlift support.

6-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

SERVICE RESPONSIBILITY
6-10. The branch of Service that is the primary user of the airfield or heliport has the responsibility for
certifying that facility for flight operations. In most cases during airfield contingency operations, this is a
U.S. Air Force responsibility. U.S. Air Force engineers may assist U.S. Army engineers, U.S. Navy
Seabees, or Marine engineers, as directed, in airfield and heliport planning, design, construction, repair, and
maintenance. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34.)
6-11. The U.S. Air Force provides the following engineer support:
 Performs the primary emergency repair of war damage to air bases and other ADR tasks.
 Constructs expedient facilities for U.S. Air Force units and weapon systems. (This excludes the
responsibility for U.S. Army base development.)
 Operates and maintains U.S. Air Force facilities.
 Performs maintenance tasks.
 Provides crash rescue and fire suppression.
 Provides hazmat response.
 Manages the emergency repair of war damage and force bed-down construction.
 Provides infrastructure support for the disposal of solid and hazardous waste.
 Supplies resources for its own engineering mission.
 Provides the EBS and EHSA for the airfield and its support facilities.

PLANNING AND DESIGN

6-12. Airfield planning requires airfield reconnaissance and an understanding of the airfield types and
classifications. Airfield design includes design considerations, geometric design, pavement structure
design, drainage system design, support facility design, protection design, and special airfield designs
discussed in this chapter.

AIRFIELD PLANNING
6-13. Engineers are responsible for airfield planning. This includes conducting site reconnaissance, making
recommendations, designing the airfield or heliport, and conducting the actual construction of the
individual airfield. Airfield and heliport planning and design include the runway or helipad and the
supporting facilities. The planning and design may include conceptual planning to support aircraft bed-
down, evaluation to rehabilitate or upgrade existing facilities, site adaption of existing standard designs,
preliminary plans and designs, detailed plans and designs, and project management planning. Key planning
actions include site selection, designation of controlling aircraft, construction standards (airfield and
support facilities), and estimation of required construction effort.
6-14. Airfield designs may be provided by one of the Services obtained from the TCMS or UFC 3-260-01;
developed by engineers using manual procedures discussed in FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume
I; or developed by engineers using computer-aided processes. The TCMS provides information on how to
obtain detailed standard designs for the airfield type and capacity. However, the planner may need to alter
and adapt the designs to meet time and material restrictions or the limitations imposed by local topography,
area, or obstruction characteristics. Engineers may alter designs, but must obtain approval from the user for
major changes before starting work.
6-15. Early in the planning process, operations, logistics, and engineer planners should identify potential
forward airfields to support offensive air operations and logistics buildup and outline the engineer tasks
required to open the airfields. It is critical that joint engineers ensure early and effective coordination
between airfield planners and the commands that will operate aircraft at the airfields. Many of the decisions
made early in the planning process can have a critical impact on an airfield utility for aircraft operations.
(See JP 3-34.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-3

Chapter 6

6-16. Most planning factors for road designs are also applicable for airfields. The most important factors
for engineer planners include—
 Mission. To achieve a proper airfield design mission, it is essential to have a complete
understanding of the number and type of aircraft and the purpose, scope, and estimated number
of the particular air missions to be flown by the design-controlling aircraft. The design criteria
are based on the usage by a specific aircraft in relative location to the battlefield. The most
demanding characteristics of the using aircraft establish the controlling aircraft. Categories of
aircraft missions that may be conducted include reconnaissance, cargo transport, or attack.
 Enemy. Devise an adequate plan to ensure that construction troops can protect themselves,
equipment, and materials against harassment and sabotage during airfield or heliport
construction. Consider requirements for additional security forces.
 Terrain and weather. Within mission and operational requirements, establish reasonable site
requirements for each airfield type. Choose geographic locations based on topographic features
(grading, drainage, and hydrology), soils, vegetation, utilities, climatic conditions, and
accessibility of materials. Accurate airfield design requires a topographic survey with minimum
5-foot contour intervals. Other site characteristics to be studied include forecasted weather
effects (such as temperature, barometric pressure, precipitation, seasonal weather variations, and
wind speed and direction) and flight path obstacles. Evaluate all existing transport facilities to
determine the best methods and routes to logistically support the project. These include ports,
rail lines, road nets, and other nearby airfields that might be used for assembling construction
equipment and materials and moving them to the construction site.
 Troops and support available. Evaluate the availability and type of engineer construction
forces to determine if construction capability is sufficient to carry out the required airfield
construction. Weigh the type and availability of local construction materials against the overall
needs for proposed construction. Consider examining naturally occurring materials and other
possible sources of materials for subgrade strengthening. Requirements for importing special
materials for surfacing, drainage, and dust control must be feasible for available construction
time and resources. Have a working knowledge of forces dedicated to ADR. Depending on the
base location, local agreements, and the overall military situation, any combination of U.S.
Army, U.S. Air Force, HN, or contract engineer support may be possible. Consider time-phased
force and deployment data or population flow into the airfield when developing the airfield
master plan.
 Time available. Operational and mission requirements will dictate when the airfields are needed
to support aircraft operations.
 Civil considerations. Consider what civilian construction resources are available in the local
area and what structures already exist that could be used to support airfield construction, repair,
and maintenance. Consider the environmental impact, restricted areas, political and cultural
factors, and other factors that could impact airfield layout and construction.
 MOG. MOG is the maximum number of aircraft that can be accommodated on an airfield. MOG
is normally expressed in terms of C-141s. A minimum of MOG 2 is desired for contingency
operations airfields. (Refer to AFPAM 10-1403 for aircraft dimensions.) There are two types of
MOG:
 Parking MOG is the total number of aircraft that can be parked at an airfield. Parking MOG
is affected by the overall size of the airfield and by how available space is managed.
 Working MOG refers to how many parked aircraft can be off-loaded, how much material
can be through-putted from the aerial port of debarkation, and how many aircraft can be
serviced and prepared for departure. It also refers to how quickly these can be
accomplished. Factors affecting the working MOG include material-handling equipment,
trucks, busses, other surface transport vehicles, road networks, aircraft support equipment,
fuel tankers, and personnel. Ideally, working MOG equals parking MOG; when it does not,
backlogs occur.

6-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

Airfield Reconnaissance
6-17. Airfield reconnaissance differs from road reconnaissance in that more comprehensive information is
typically required. An airfield project involves more effort in man-hours, machine-hours, and material than
road projects. Air traffic also imposes stricter requirements on traffic facilities than does vehicular traffic.
Consequently, the site selected has to be the best available.
6-18. When new construction is undertaken, the planner and the reconnaissance team must choose a site
with soil characteristics that meet strength and stability requirements or a site that requires minimum
construction effort to attain those standards. Airfields present more drainage problems than roads. Their
wide, paved areas demand that water be diverted completely around the field or that long drainage
structures be built. Sites at the low point of valleys or other depressed areas should be avoided because they
tend to be focal points for water collection. As in road construction, subsurface water should be avoided. A
desirable airfield site lies across a long, gentle slope, because it is relatively easy to divert water around the
finished installation. (See TM 5-820-1/AFM 88-5 for information on drainage and erosion control for
airfields and heliports.)
6-19. Airfield reconnaissance must consider the quality and quantity of land available. To accommodate
missions efficiently, airfields require large areas of relatively flat land. Advance location and layout
planning will avoid the overcrowding of facilities. To obtain the required area, the airfield may have to be
spread over a large area. This may call for a complex network of taxiways and service roads. Runways
should be aligned in the direction of the prevailing wind.
6-20. Airfield reconnaissance must consider elevation and the obstacles obstructing aircraft approaches.
The safe operation of fixed- or rotary-wing aircraft requires that all obstacles above elevations specified by
design criteria be removed. These criteria vary according to the operating characteristics of the aircraft that
use the airfield. For example, most heliports require an approach zone with a 10:1 glide angle, whereas
heavy cargo aircraft in the rear area require a glide angle as flat as 50:1. To achieve the right glide angle, it
is often necessary to remove hills and do major earthwork on distant approaches to the airfield proper. The
reconnaissance team should avoid locations requiring extensive earthwork to achieve the necessary glide
angle. Clearances are also required along the sides of runways, taxiways, and parking aprons. An area of
specified width must be cleared of all obstacles and graded according to specifications.

Airfield Types and Classifications

6-21. There are three types of airfields and heliports:
 Initial (drop zones, extraction points, expedient airfields).
 Temporary (sustained for use 6 to 24 months and include a higher standard of construction).
 Semipermanent (have highest standards of construction and are located in rear areas and used by
all mission aircraft).

Note. See FM 5-430-00-2/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume II, for additional information on the types
of airfields and heliports.

6-22. Classifying runways in terms of their length is still common among military planners. Typical
runway lengths are 2,000, 2,500, 3,000, 3,500, 6,000, and 10,000 feet. A controlling aircraft or combination
of controlling aircraft has been designated for each category to establish limiting airfield geometric and
surface strength requirements. Pavement structures are classified as rigid (Portland cement) or flexible
(surfaced or unsurfaced). Runways are classified as follows:
 Class A runways are primarily intended for small, light aircraft. These runways do not have the
potential of foreseeable requirement for development for use by high-performance and large,
heavy aircraft. (See UFC 3-260-01.)
 Class B runways are primarily intended for high-performance and large, heavy aircraft.
(See UFC 3-260-01.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-5

Chapter 6

6-23. U.S. Army airfields and heliports are divided into six classes:
 Class I. Helipads and heliports (Type B) with aircraft 25,000 pounds (11,340 kilograms) or less.
The controlling aircraft is a UH-60 aircraft at a 16,300-pound (7,395-kilogram) operational
weight.
 Class II. Helipads and heliports (Type B) with aircraft over 25,000 pounds (11,340 kilograms).
The controlling aircraft is a CH-47 aircraft at a 50,000-pound (22,680-kilogram) operational
weight.
 Class III. Airfields with three traffic areas (Type A, B, and C). The controlling aircraft
combination is a C-23 aircraft at a 24,600-pound (11,200-kilogram) operational weight and a
CH-47 aircraft at a 50,000-pound (22,680-kilogram) operational weight. Class A runways are
primarily intended for small aircraft, such as C-12s and C-23s.
 Class IV. Airfields with Class B runways. The controlling aircraft is a C-130 aircraft at a
155,000-pound (70,310-kilogram) operational weight or a C-17 aircraft at a 580,000-pound
(263,100-kilogram) operational weight. Class B runways are primarily intended for high-
performance and large, heavy aircraft, such as C-130s, C-17s, and C-141s.
 Class V. Contingency (TO) heliports or helipads (Type B) contingency (TO) supporting U.S.
Army assault training missions. The controlling aircraft is the CH-47 aircraft at a 50,000-pound
(22,680-kilogram) operational weight.
 Class VI. Assault landing zones for contingency (TO) airfields or airstrips (Type A) supporting
U.S. Army missions that have semiprepared or paved surfaces. The controlling aircraft is the
C-130 aircraft at a 155,000-pound (70,310-kilogram) operational weight or the C-17 aircraft at a
580,000-pound (263,100-kilogram) operational weight.

Note. See UFC 3-260-02 for additional information on the classes of airfields and heliports.

6-24. U.S. Air Force airfields are classified into one of six types based on their airfield mission and
operational procedures. A controlling aircraft or combination of controlling aircraft has been designated for
each type to establish limiting airfield geometric and surface strength requirements. These airfield types
include—
 Light—F-15 and C-17.
 Medium—F-15, C-17, and B-52.
 Heavy—F-15, C-5, and B-52.
 Modified Heavy—F-15, C-17, and B-1.
 Auxiliary—F-15.
 Assault Landing Zone—C-130 and C-17.

Note. See UFC 3-260-02 for additional information.

6-25. A bare-base airfield has the minimum essentials to house, sustain, and support operations, to include,
if required, a stabilized runway, taxiways, and aircraft parking areas. A bare base must have a source of
water that can be made potable. Other requirements to operate under bare-base conditions form a necessary
part of the force package deployed to the bare base. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34 and JP 3-05.)
6-26. The airfield must be capable of supporting assigned aircraft and providing other mission-essential
resources, such as a logistics support and services infrastructure composed of people, facilities, equipment,
and supplies. This concept requires modular, mobile facilities; utilities; and support equipment packages
that can be rapidly deployed and installed. A bare-base airfield forms the baseline for contingency
operations airfield planning. (See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I for additional information.)
6-27. Preplanned design layouts within TCMS for each type of field are based on the assumption that
previously unoccupied sites will be chosen. However, the layouts have been coordinated so that, within
terrain limitations, it is practicable to develop a larger field from a smaller one with minimal construction
effort. An existing airfield or a bare-base site can be used if it meets minimum requirements or can be
upgraded to meet operational or mission requirements.

6-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

6-28. The U.S. Air Force issues Engineering Technical Letters to provide engineers with criteria and
guidance for the design, construction, maintenance, and evaluation of airfields and other support facilities.
Many Engineering Technical Letters have been revised and converted into Unified Facilities Criteria. ETLs
are available at the Whole Building Design Guide ETL Web site.

AIRFIELD DESIGN
6-29. There are a variety of airfield designs that must be considered by the engineer. There are design
processes and steps that can be applied. These airfield designs include geometric, pavement, drainage,
support facility, protection, and special.
6-30. Airfield design steps include the following:
 Select the runway location.
 Determine the runway length and width.
 Calculate approach zones.
 Determine the runway orientation based on the wind rose, which statistically quantifies
prevailing winds.
 Plot the centerline on graph paper, design the vertical alignment, and plot the newly designed
airfield on the plan and profile.
 Design the transverse slopes.
 Design taxiways and aprons.
 Select visual and nonvisual aids to navigation.
 Design logistics support facilities.
 Design aircraft protection facilities.

Geometric Design
6-31. Airfield geometric design consists of meeting the minimum geometric requirements for the elements
that compose the airfield—runway, overrun, taxiway, apron, shoulders, graded area, transitional area,
runway end clear zone, turnarounds (hammer heads), imaginary surfaces (approach-departure clearance
surface), and accident potential zones.

Notes.

1. See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, for information on the geometric design

requirements for each airfield type.

2. See UFC 3-260-01 for information on C-130 and C-17 airfield dimensional criteria.

Pavement Structure Design

6-32. The pavement structure designs for airfields are similar to the pavement structure designs for roads.
The same structural principles apply. The design of airfield pavement structure is also called the thickness
design procedure because the design determines the total thickness and cover requirements for each layer.
Several pavement type designs are possible for a specific site. The designer provides analysis to
recommend the most economical design that meets operational requirements and site conditions.
6-33. There are four categories of airfield surfaces:
 Expedient-surfaced (unsurfaced and surfaced).
 Aggregate-surfaced.
 Flexible pavement.
 Rigid pavement.

6-34. There are four types of airfield pavement system surface structures above the subgrade. They are—

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-7

Chapter 6

 Semiprepared airfield (unsurfaced, in-place soils or improved subgrade or surfaced, membrane-

surfaced, and mat-surfaced).
 Semiprepared airfield (aggregate-surfaced layered structure over compacted subgrade).
 Surfaced airfield (flexible pavement or bituminous pavement).
 Surfaced airfield (rigid pavement).
6-35. On operational airfields, pavements are grouped into four traffic types based on their intended use
and design load. These types include—
 Type A. Those traffic areas that receive concentrated traffic and the full design weight of the
aircraft. These traffic areas require a greater pavement thickness than other areas on the airfield
and include all airfield runways and, in most cases, runway ends and primary taxiways. All
airfield pavement structures on contingency operations airfields are considered Type A traffic
areas.
 Type B. Those traffic areas that receive a more even traffic flow and the full design weight of
the aircraft. These traffic areas include parking aprons, pads, and hardstands.
 Type C. Those traffic areas with a low volume of traffic or those where the applied weight of
the operating aircraft is generally less than the design weight (use 75 percent of the design
weight of aircraft to determine the applied weight). These traffic areas include secondary
taxiways, washrack pavements, access aprons, interior portions of runways, and hangar floor
areas trafficked by aircraft.
 Type D. Those traffic areas with an extremely low volume of traffic or those where the applied
weight of the operating aircraft is considerably lower than the design weight (use 75 percent of
the design weight of aircraft to determine the applied weight).

Notes.

1. See UFC 3-260-02 for additional information.

2. See ETL 97-9 and UFC 3-260-02 for information on the strength and thickness of pavement
and structural evaluation criteria of semiprepared and matted airfields for the C-17.

6-36. There are several types of bituminous pavement; however, flexible-pavement airfields usually have
an asphalt concrete wear surface. The frost filter layer to prevent pavement heaving and thermal cracks is
more common in airfield construction than in roads.

Notes.

1. See TM 3-34.63 and UFC 3-260-02 for a discussion on the design of pavements for frost
action.

2. See TM 3-34.63 for structural design and pavement specifications.

3. See UFC 3-260-03 for pavement evaluations.

Drainage System Design

6-37. Drainage system designs are similar to road and railroad designs and are discussed in FM 5-430-00-
1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.

Support Facility Design

6-38. Airfield and heliport base development planning and support facility planning, design, and
construction are similar to the procedures used for base camp and bed-down facilities. Facilities may
include access and service roads, storage areas, navigation aids, hardstands, maintenance aprons, warm-up
aprons, corrosion control facilities, control towers, airfield lighting, and fortifications for parked aircraft.

6-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

6-39. The design of support facilities should be based on the number and type of other organizations
collocated on, or supported by the airfield. The base camp technique of using a design population can help
properly design the airfield support facilities and services. Considerations for airfield or heliport
development, master planning, facility siting, and layout planning include—
 Airfield location.
 Functional effectiveness and efficiency, sustainability, resiliency, security, expandability, and
ease of construction.
 Layout space for land use functions and relationships, facilities, separation distances, accesses,
protection methods, and expansion procedures.
 Adequate drainage.
 Environmental considerations.

6-40. An airfield consists of seven categories of facilities:

 Category 1. Airfield (runways, taxiways, hardstands, aprons, and other pavements; shoulders;
overrun; approach zones; air traffic control landing systems; and design related facilities [access
and service roads; ammunition and petroleum, oils, and lubricant storage areas; arresting
systems; airfield marking and lighting; corrosion control facilities; fixed control towers; and
other support facilities]).
 Category 2. Sanitary facilities (kitchens, dining areas, showers, and latrines).
 Category 3. Direct operational support facilities (munitions, aviation fuels and lubricants,
hazmat, and waste storage sites).
 Category 4. Maintenance, operations, and supply (aircraft maintenance, base shops, operations
buildings, base communications, photography labs, fire stations, weather facilities, general
storage, and medical facilities).
 Category 5. Indirect operational support facilities (roads and exterior utilities, such as water
supply and electric power systems).
 Category 6. Administration (headquarters, personnel services, recreation, and welfare facilities).
 Category 7. General housing and troop quarters.

Protection Design
6-41. The planning and design of protective measures and structures on airfields and heliports are based on
the evaluation of the threat.

Notes.

1. See FM 5-430-00-2/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume II, for information on fortifications for

parked U.S. Army aircraft.

2. See ADRP 3-37 and ATP 3-39.32 for information on force protection measures.

3. See ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6 for information on survivability (hardening) support,

including the construction of revetments for helicopters.

4. See AFMAN 91-201 for information on U.S. Air Force aircraft survivability.

Special Designs
6-42. Special airfields include—
 Drop zones.
 Extraction zones.
 Special operations forces airfields.
 Blacked-out airfields.
 Airfields for unmanned aircraft systems.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-9

Chapter 6

6-43. New construction for some unmanned aircraft systems should only be required when they are
operated from a location without a paved road or an existing runway. To support mobile, unmanned aircraft
system operations, most unmanned aircraft system airfields are constructed with matting. Unmanned
aircraft system operators must provide runway design criteria for systems that do not have standard designs
already developed. (See ETL 09-1 and UFC 3-260-01 for additional information.)
6-44. It may be required to build airfields and heliports in arctic and subarctic conditions. (See TM 5-852-
1/AFR 88-19, Volume 1; TM 5-852-2/AFR 88-19, Volume 2; TM 5-852-4/AFM 88-19, chapter 4; TM 5-
852-5/AFR 88-19, Volume 5; TM 5-852-6/AFR 88-19, Volume 6; and TM 5-852-3 for more information.)

HELIPORTS
6-45. There are four levels of heliport development: landing zones of opportunity, austere forward area
fields, substandard but operational support area fields, and deliberate rear area fields. (See FM 5-430-00-
2/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume II.) The geometric design requirements for helicopter landing areas can be
simplified into four types:
 Helipads.
 Heliports with taxi hover lanes.
 Heliports with runways.
 Mixed battalion heliports.

6-46. The design of a pavement structure for a heliport or helipad is similar to the pavement structure
design for airfields. The three types of heliport and helipad pavement structures include—
 Unsurfaced.
 Surfaced (membrane-surfaced or mat-surfaced design).
 Flexible pavement (thickness design procedure).

6-47. For additional airfield and heliport planning and design information, see the following sources:
 AFCS (TCMS).
 ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.
 FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.
 FM 5-430-00-2/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume II.
 UFC 3-260-01.
 UFC 3-260-02.
 UFC 3-260-17.
 UFC 4-141-10N.

6-48. Reachback resources include the—

 USACE Reachback Operations Center Web site.
 Transportation Systems Center Web site.

CONSTRUCTION
6-49. FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, provides a complete discussion of airfield and heliport
construction. The construction directive usually provides the airfield and heliport geometric design,
pavement structure design, and drainage system design. The constructing unit may site-adapt the designs to
local conditions. Airfield and heliport construction planning tasks to determine earthwork quantities,
material, equipment, personnel, quality control, and environmental requirements are similar to those for
roads and railroads.

CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATES
6-50. Developing an accurate construction estimate can be difficult, as each project must be considered on
a case-by-case basis. A reasonable estimate of construction effort and time required can be made after

6-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

thorough research and planning. Engineers estimate the construction of airfields and heliports based on the
following key factors:
 Volume of earthwork required.
 Difficulties of grading and constructing.
 Drainage required.
 Site clearance required.
 Previous construction experience.
 Capability of the engineer unit assigned.

6-51. Construction may involve new construction or the restoration or upgrade of existing airfields or
heliports simultaneously. A complete air base is a complex construction project. However, careful project
planning, a strict focus on essentials, and phased construction can result in a facility that will support air
operations soon after construction begins. Subsequent improvements and modifications can be made during
use. If construction is guided by a master plan, the staged completion of each structure can be designed to
serve the expedient operation and meet the criteria for the final design plan.
6-52. It is best to complete an air base to its ultimate design in a single construction program. It may be
necessary to initially design it to a lower construction standard to expedite getting the base into operation
within the available time with the available construction support. In such cases, every effort must be made
to proceed to the ultimate design standard for the airfield. The repeated modification of a facility plan is to
be avoided.

PRIORITIES AND STAGES

6-53. Priorities for expanding and rehabilitating an existing airfield are generally parallel to those for new
airfield or heliport construction. Procedures, personnel, and construction material requirements for
expanding or rehabilitating airfields are usually similar to new construction requirements and ADR. Before
using an existing facility for personnel, inspections (ideally, an EBS and EHSA are performed in
conjunction) should be done by environmental and preventive medicine personnel to prevent exposure to
existing environmental and occupational health hazards.
6-54. The first goal in building an airfield is to make it operational. Therefore, construction is designed to
support air traffic as soon as possible. (See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.) The order for
construction proceeds according to the following priorities of work:
 First priority. Emphasis is on providing protection and security. Provide the facilities that are
most essential for air operations as soon as possible. Build airfield operational facilities, such as
runways, taxiways, approaches, and aircraft parking areas of minimum dimensions. Provide
minimum storage for bombs, ammunition, and aviation fuel. Provide essential airfield lighting,
fire protection services, medical services, attack warning systems, sanitation, power systems, and
water facilities. Survey facility groups, air traffic control, and landing systems.
 Second priority. Emphasis is on improving protection and increasing the capacity, safety, and
efficiency of air base operations. Provide indirect support operational facilities. Construct access
and service roads and essential operational, maintenance, and supply buildings.
 Third priority. Emphasis is on improving protection and operational facilities. Provide facilities
for administration and special housing, such as leach fields, washracks, landfills, and an
explosive-ordnance disposal range.
 Fourth priority. Emphasis is on improving protection and providing general housing. Institute a
base operation and facilities maintenance plan. Sustain environmental and medical surveillance
of the airfield and its supporting facilities.
6-55. Construction stages establish a sequence for constructing an airfield. These stages build the airfield
in parts to construct the least amount of operational facilities in the shortest possible time. For example, a
priority task may be reduced to smaller stages as follows:
 Stage I. Construct a loop that permits landing, takeoff, and circulation with a limited apron.
Runway lengths and widths are the minimum required for critical aircraft.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-11

Chapter 6

 Stage II. Construct a new runway. The Stage I runway now becomes a taxiway; and aprons,
hardstands, and additional taxiways are built.
 Stage III. Further expand facilities to accommodate additional aircraft as needed. If an existing
surface in the rear area is inadequate for all-weather operations in support of heavy transport
aircraft or high-performance fighter aircraft, an appropriate pavement structure is designed and
constructed.

Note. See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, for additional information.

PRINCIPLES
6-56. Except for staking requirements, the techniques and principles for conducting airfield and heliport
construction surveys are identical to those for roads. An accurate estimate of earthwork volume is essential
to the proper control and management of a horizontal construction project. Following mass diagram
construction and analysis, equipment is scheduled and project durations are determined. An analysis of the
mass diagram will also determine haul routes, locations of equipment work zones, and areas for waste and
borrow sites.
6-57. Earthwork balancing may also occur between adjacent projects (runway and taxiway, for example).
The constructing unit selects materials that meet design specifications from soils in cuts, borrow pits,
quarries, or local procurement.
6-58. During construction, permanent drainage structures are essential to the successful completion of an
airfield or heliport. Planning considerations are similar to those used for road construction.

PAVEMENT
6-59. The decision to pave an airfield or heliport during contingency operations is based on the urgency to
complete the airfield, the tactical situation, the amount and type of anticipated traffic, the soil-bearing
characteristics, the climate, and the materials and equipment of availability. Surfacing must meet the
allowable roughness criteria for each type of aircraft that will use the facility. Soil stabilization operations
improve strength, control dust, and render surfaces waterproof. The process is discussed in TM 5-822-
14/AFJMAN 32-1019.

EXISTING FACILITIES
6-60. Maximize the use of existing facilities if they meet the minimum design requirements or can be
economically upgraded to meet requirements. Existing airfields and heliports may need an additional
pavement layer (airfield pavement upgrade). There may be requirements to construct or expand an existing
airfield structure (geometric upgrade) or support extensive new support facility construction. Consider the
expansion and rehabilitation of existing infrastructure over new construction. There is generally a
substantial savings in time, effort, and materials to upgrade rather than to build from scratch. Except in
highly developed areas, existing airfields are seldom adequate to handle modern, high-performance aircraft.
6-61. The evaluation of existing airfield pavements is generally a reverse of the design process. The
existing airfield evaluation technical details are fully discussed in FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013,
Volume I, and UFC 3-260-03. Consider the following general guidelines:
 Determine the airfield physical characteristics.
 Determine if the design aircraft can operate from the existing field, based on its minimum
geometric requirements.
 Determine the allowable number of passes, based on the evaluation of the existing airfield in-
place soil strength and pavements structure.
 Outline corrective actions to meet minimum geometric requirements or increase the allowable
number of passes.
6-62. Existing airfield dimensions and pavement structures must be evaluated by the reconnaissance team,
based on mission and operational requirements to determine if the airfield can support air traffic. They also

6-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

determine the construction effort required. Some airfields can be made adequate with minimal effort. They
may also serve as the nucleus for larger fields that meet the specifications of high-performance aircraft.
6-63. Helicopters and light planes can often use existing roads, pastures, and athletic fields. Combat
engineers can upgrade these for initial or temporary use through forward aviation combat engineering.
Support facilities are converted to standards per the theater construction policy. The imaginative use of
existing facilities is preferable to new construction. The ground reconnaissance of an airfield previously
occupied by enemy forces must be cautious, since facilities may contain explosive hazards. Coordinate
facility use with HN authorities because existing airfields, particularly in the rear area, may be needed by
HN air forces or for commercial purposes.

OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
6-64. Expedient surfaces include matting and membranes. Matting gives the U.S. Army and Marines the
capability to build a runway quickly with minimum effort. Membranes provide airfield surfacing (but no
structural strength), dustproofing, and waterproofing. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 and FM 5-430-00-
1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.)
6-65. Upon airfield construction completion, the airfield manager or other individual authorized to monitor
and control on-site aircraft operations certifies the airfield and issues a notice to Airmen to change the
airfield status.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

6-66. O&M of the airfield or heliport is performed by the Service controlling the airfield. GE support is
provided when the O&M tasks exceed the ability of the unit controlling the airfield. General engineer
O&M tasks include supporting airfield and heliport maintenance, road maintenance, drainage structure
maintenance, fire prevention, firefighting, and traffic control signage. O&M of engineer-specific systems
include maintaining utilities and power systems. GE support may also include contracting for electrical
power, waste management, and ADR.

MAINTENANCE
6-67. Airfield maintenance is the routine prevention and correction of damage and deterioration caused by
normal use, wear and tear caused by aircraft, and exposure to the elements. Routine maintenance includes
inspections; stockpiled materials for repair and maintenance work; maintenance and repair of pavement
surfaces and drainage systems; dust control; and snow, ice, and foreign object damage repair. Foreign
object damage removal is generally accomplished using motorized sweepers. The user of the airfield
coordinates with engineers, who are responsible for airfield maintenance, to conduct routine foreign object
damage inspections.
6-68. The procedures and considerations for airfield maintenance are similar to those for road maintenance
and repair. The materials used for airfield maintenance are generally the same as those used for airfield
construction and repair. (See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I; UFC 3-270-01; UFC 3-270-02;
UFC 3-270-03; UFC 3-270-04; and UFC 3-270-08 for additional information.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-13

Chapter 6

6-69. Upon completion of an airfield repair or maintenance mission, crater repair evaluations must be
conducted before resuming aircraft operations. When conducting repair evaluations, consider the following:
 Repair compaction. Verify the strength of the backfill, debris, or subgrade materials.
Depending on the repair method used, verify the thickness and strength of all surface and base
course materials. Test the soil structure using a dynamic cone penetrometer to determine the
California bearing ratio of each layer. Conduct these tests before placing foreign object damage
covers, AM-2 matting, stone and grout, asphalt, concrete, or other surface materials that would
prevent the use of the dynamic cone penetrometer.
 Surface roughness. Check the final grade of the repair using line-of-sight profile measurement
stanchions, upheaval posts, or string lines to ensure that the repair meets surface roughness
criteria. In the case of a crushed-stone repair without foreign object damage cover, check the
repair surface for loose aggregate or potential foreign object damage.
 Foreign object damage cover. Ensure that foreign object damage covers are no more than 5°
off parallel with the runway centerline. Check connection bolts, and verify that all connections
between panels are tight and secure. Check anchor bolts, and verify that all bolts are secure and
that the foreign object damage cover is held snugly against the pavement surface. In taxiway and
apron applications, anchor the leading and trailing edges of the foreign object damage cover.
Anchor the side edges if the cover is located in an area where aircraft are required to turn.
 Setting and curing operations. If the repairs are capped with concrete, stone and grout, or
rapid-set materials, verify that the surface material has set and that adequate cure time is allowed
prior to aircraft operations.
 Cleanup. For all repair methods, verify that the repair and adjacent areas are clear of any excess
repair materials.
 Airfield certification. The on-site engineer who is responsible for the repair certifies that the
repair was accomplished according to the procedures in the appropriate Unified Facilities
Criteria and other applicable publications. The repair procedures are documented on an ADR log
form, which is updated to reflect subsequent aircraft traffic and required maintenance throughout
the repair history. If another team replaces the initial repair team, this form is transferred to the
follow-on team. The information is useful in planning or performing further maintenance or
upgrade of the repairs. Upon completion of repairs, provide the airfield repair status to the
airfield manager or other individual authorized to monitor and control on-site aircraft operations.
This individual then issues a notice to Airmen to change the airfield status.

AIRFIELD DAMAGE REPAIR

6-70. Airfields are subject to damage by a complex array of destructive weapons, including cannon fire,
rocket fire, bombs, and bomblets. Explosive hazards (such as unexploded ordnance [to include scatterable
mines and unexploded bomblets] and improvised explosive devices), barriers, and other hindrances may
challenge efforts to make airfields capable of supporting air traffic. ADR includes airfield pavement repair,
damage assessment, explosive-ordnance disposal reconnaissance, minimum operating-strip selection,
quality control repair, and aircraft arresting system and utility system repair.
6-71. All Services accomplish ADR pavement repair in a similar manner. Major differences in the Services
methodology are in the final 18 to 24 inches of crater repair and capping due to mission differences, team
configuration, and available resources. U.S. Army engineers normally conduct minimal ADR as part of a
forcible-entry operation by focusing on runway clearance and surface repair. ADR operations also include
the infrastructure required to conduct operations at a base that is seized from the enemy or offered for use
by a friendly HN. It also includes repairs required to sustain operations or to reestablish operations after
enemy attack. (See ETL 07-8, ETL 08-2, ETL 13-3, and UFC 3-270-07 for additional information.)
6-72. The U.S. Marines Corps has specially organized and equipped units to handle ADR, which are the
damage assessment teams or damage assessment response teams. U.S. Marine Corps aviation ground
support detachment teams are trained to task-organize damage assessment teams and damage assessment
response teams to respond to hostile-induced rapid runway repair.

6-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

6-73. Engineers must conduct a damage assessment, prepare for explosive hazard reconnaissance and
removal, understand the repair quality criteria, and know the requirements for the minimum aircraft-
operating surface. Consider including U.S. Air Force technical experts and airborne RED HORSE elements
as a part of the U.S. Army combat engineer element participating in the forcible-entry operation. They can
assist in approving the aircraft-operating surface, control aircraft landing and departure, and serve as liaison
to the airfield-opening team. The airfield-opening team can work with general engineer elements to take the
airfield to a higher standard of repair after the lodgment area has been secured.
6-74. For intelligence on all existing airfields and their dispositions or to request airfield damage
assessment and pavement evaluations, see the U.S. Air Force Civil Engineer Center Web site.

Repair Packages and Categories

6-75. A light airfield repair package is a capability-based organization. Its composition varies according to
mission specifics, such as the type of flight landing strip, number of pallets available, and engineer
parachute allocations. It consists of 8 to 16 personnel and 7 airdrop platforms or 5 external loads on a CH
47D helicopter. U.S. Army airborne and air assault engineer units have the sole capability of repairing
airfields to obtain a required minimum operating strip during forcible-entry operations. They use an air-
transportable ADR kit, which is an expedient pavement repair kit, with the materials and nonorganic unit
equipment required to repair one crater 7.6 meters (25 feet) in diameter, on a concrete- or asphalt-surfaced
runway. To install this kit, U.S. Army units use a light airfield repair package with organic construction
equipment and the ADR kit.
6-76. Pavement damage categories are shown in figure 6-1, page 6-16. Damage to the pavement includes
the apparent crater damage and the upheaval of pavement around the crater. The damage category for a
given munition depends on the delivery method, penetration extent, and charge size. (See UFC 3-270-07.)

Repair Priorities
6-77. The airfield commander prioritizes essential ADR missions, usually in the following order:
 Reconnaissance and damage assessment.
 Explosive-ordnance disposal.
 Minimum airfield-operating surface repair.
 Repair to operational facilities, communication systems, ammunition storage facilities, essential
maintenance facilities, fuel storage and distribution areas, utilities, on- and off-base access routes
as a result of indirect damage due to direct-attack explosives that missed their primary targets.
 Environmental and occupational health hazards.

Emergency Repair
6-78. Emergency repairs provide an expedient and temporary fix to allow the earliest resumption of air
missions. The Service that is responsible for the airfield determines the minimum operating strip and
performs crater and surface repair. The minimum operating strip is the minimum width and length required
for an aircraft to land and take off. Normally, the largest area of the airfield with the least amount of
damage is selected and identified as the minimum operating strip. All explosive hazards, including
remotely delivered mines, must be cleared from the minimum operating strip before surface repair starts.
6-79. U.S. Army engineers organic to the BCTs will typically conduct the initial forcible entry. ADR is
performed by airborne and air assault engineer elements who center on combat engineering skills and use
specific force packages or modules to conduct emergency repair primarily using a sand grid. Forward
aviation combat engineering is a combat engineering mission. However, GE units may be required to
perform, or augment combat engineers who are performing, forward aviation combat engineering missions,
depending on the situation. At this level of repair, this is a forward aviation combat engineering task that is
enabling mobility operation. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for a discussion on forward aviation combat
engineering operations.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-15

Chapter 6

Legend:
ft foot/feet
kg kilogram(s)
lb pound(s)
m meter(s)

Figure 6-1. Airfield damage categories

6-80. U.S. Air Force engineers have sole responsibility for conducting emergency repair of established
U.S. air bases. The goal is to achieve sustained operations within 4 hours. This is done by specific force
packages or unit types formed from U.S. Air Force RED HORSE or Prime BEEF units. The U.S. Air Force
uses the following emergency repairs, depending on the nature of the damage:
 Crushed stone over debris.
 Choke ballast repair.
 Choke ballast over debris.

6-81. U.S. Army engineers use two methods to make beyond-emergency repairs to established U.S. air
bases: stone and grout repair and concrete cap repair.

6-16 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Airfields and Heliports

6-82. Air Force, Navy, and Marine engineers use similar techniques. The airfield commander directs the
priority of pavement repair effort, allowing permanent repair to begin as soon as the tactical situation,
available equipment, and labor permit. Pavements outside the minimum operating strip, including taxiways,
usually have a lower repair priority. Deliberately marking or clearing explosive hazards (to include
unexploded ordnance and improvised explosive devices) must be completed before permanent repairs can
begin. Explosive-ordnance disposal personnel are usually available for these types of area clearance
operations. However, engineers may have to perform these tasks if time is critical and the risk is
acceptable.
6-83. U.S. Army engineers are responsible for assisting U.S. Air Force RED HORSE or Prime BEEF
teams to repair critical airbase support facilities when such repairs exceed the U.S. Air Force capability.
Methods for repairing indirect damage are much the same as ordinary engineer construction techniques.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 6-17

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 7
Roads and Railroads
Militaries throughout history have relied on ground transportation networks to
facilitate rapid movement and sustainment/combat service support to influence the
outcome of conflicts. Maintaining forward-deployed forces during contingency
operations requires an extensive logistics network. An adequate ground LOC network
is a critical part of this network and is a key to facilitating sustainment/combat
service support operations. Depending on the METT-TC, roads and railroads may
form the primary LOCs during a contingency operation. Roads and railroads
primarily support operational mobility through the movement of personnel,
equipment, and supplies and link support to military ground operations. Railroads
provide an efficient and economic means to convey large volumes of equipment and
supplies over ground. Engineers play a key role in the transportation network by
being responsible for road and railroad construction, limited operations, maintenance,
and repair. This chapter will focus on road and railroad capabilities, planning and
design, construction, and O&M.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

7-1. Each Service has responsibilities and capabilities for constructing or repairing roads and railroads.

ROADS
7-2. Whether they are temporary or permanent, roads require some degree of Service support. This
section discusses the similarities and differences between each Service in providing road repair or
construction.

United States Army

7-3. U.S. Army engineers consist of three groups—combat engineers, general engineers, and specialized
engineers.

Combat Engineers
7-4. Combat engineers are responsible for combat trails and roads. Building combat trails and roads is a
combat engineering task that is conducted in close support to ground maneuver forces that are in close
combat and to support mobility. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.)
7-5. Baseline U.S. Army combat engineer units consist of sapper companies, mobility augmentation
companies, clearance companies, and multirole bridge companies. Their basic capabilities include
earthmoving assets for the hasty (expedient and temporary) construction of combat trails, roads, or
protective berms. Combat engineers can perform road-clearing operations, to include demolitions for
blasting, removing, and hauling away road obstructions, such as rock or heavy debris. They may be
required to link these combat trails and roads across gaps by bridging. (See ATP 3-34.22.)
7-6. Combat engineers have the capability to deny enemy access to combat roads and trails through
obstacle systems and networked munitions in support of their countermobility mission. (See ATP 3-
90.8/MCWP 3-17.5.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-1

Chapter 7

7-7. There are limitations to combat engineer road-building capabilities. Combat engineers lack the
personnel, equipment, and expertise to construct surveyed and graded roads or to pave road surfaces.
Combat engineers may require augmentation with additional engineering assets and training. Therefore,
general engineers may be tasked to assist in the construction and repair of combat roads and trails if the
repair exceeds combat engineer capabilities. (See ATTP 3-34.23 and ATP 3-34.22 for more information on
capabilities.)

General Engineers
7-8. General engineers are responsible for military roads. Higher-level road work is a general engineer
task. General engineers have the capability to plan, design, construct, and maintain military roads. General
engineers possess horizontal and vertical assets, which expand and enhance their capabilities beyond
combat engineers. They can construct and repair roads, MSRs, and railroads and handle large-scale
projects. They possess specialized expertise, such as the ability to perform quality road construction and
pave road surfaces, and include surveyors and soil analysts. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.)
7-9. General engineers can be augmented and enhanced with specialized engineer units to support road-
building efforts. They include construction management teams, topographic units, equipment support
platoons, survey and design teams, asphalt teams, concrete sections, and geospatial planning cells.
7-10. General engineers possess a variety of heavy construction equipment, to include graders, scrapers,
loaders, large dump trucks, excavators, cranes, concrete trucks, asphalt producers, and pavers. Their
capabilities also include quarry platoons with rockcrushers to produce and haul road base construction
material and asphalt teams for road surface paving.
7-11. The basic capabilities of engineers can be expanded through the augmentation of additional
expertise, personnel, and equipment for extensive road construction projects. Engineers also have the
capability of reachback for accessing additional construction expertise as needed. (See ATP 3-34.22 for
additional information on capabilities.)
7-12. General engineers coordinate geospatial support as needed. (See ATP 3-34.80 and FM 5-430-00-
1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.)
7-13. U.S. Army engineer construction units have the following responsibilities and capabilities:
 Route, road, and bridge reconnaissance.
 Road base materials testing.
 Maintenance, repair, and upgrade of existing roads.
 Construction of new roads.
 Recommendations for traffic control procedures.
 Construction and installation of signs and other route-marking materials.
 Regulation traffic where engineer work is being performed.

United States Marines

7-14. The primary Marine engineer tasking is combat engineering and limited GE in support of the
MAGTF. Marines organized under an engineer support battalion have organic horizontal capabilities to
construct combat trails and roads. The Marine wing support squadron also possesses horizontal capabilities
to perform this task as well. Marines have no capabilities for road-paving operations, and it is not an
assigned task. (See MCWP 3-17, NWP 4-04, and NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5 for additional information
on Marine capabilities.)

United States Navy

7-15. The Navy mobile construction battalion has organic capabilities for conducting road work. In their
combat support role, Seabees can provide the temporary repair and maintenance of existing roads and
construct unpaved combat trails and roads. In their base construction and civil works construction support
role, they can construct asphalt roads if necessary. (See NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5 for additional
information on Seabee capabilities.)

7-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

United States Air Force

7-16. Although their primary mission is airfields, U.S. Air Force engineers are trained and equipped with
organic capabilities to construct, repair, and improve routes and railroads. Their capabilities include
pavement evaluation and repair and concrete, asphalt, and paving operations. U.S. Air Force engineer units
are organized as Prime BEEF and RED HORSE units, and they can provide a broad array of general and
adaptable engineering capabilities. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34.)

RAILROADS
7-17. The process for authorizing the construction, acquisition, or operation of railroad lines is discussed in
49 USC 10901. Military construction projects are discussed in 10 USC 2801.
7-18. General engineers are responsible for new railroad construction. With vertical and horizontal
companies, they can perform repairs to restore railroads to service and perform the limited construction of
railroads. U.S. Army general engineers have no railroad-specific technical training, but apply their road and
facilities capabilities to railroads. (See ATP 3-34.22.)
7-19. The U.S. Army transportation battalion (railway) is responsible for operating railroads and
performing rehabilitation and routine maintenance. The railway battalion is responsible for the operation of
railway locomotives and trains, conduct of railway inspections and maintenance, and repair of major track
damage. The battalion must also inspect, maintain, and repair diesel-electric locomotives and rolling stock,
provide train wreck support, conduct vehicle recovery, and operate up to 240 miles of track.
7-20. Each transportation railway battalion may be assigned from 90 to 150 miles of main line with
terminal operating and maintenance facilities, signaling equipment, and interlocking facilities necessary for
operation. The rail transportation officer task is to make the most efficient use of existing facilities by
maximizing maintenance efforts. Where HN agreements exist, day-to-day O&M may be largely conducted
by the local work force.
7-21. U.S. Army railway transportation units are organized to provide the U.S. Army with train operations
and railway maintenance support crews. Their rolling stock includes diesel-electric locomotives, cranes,
tank cars, freight cars, and other equipment. They are capable of operating railway main line and yard
operations, operating freight and passenger trains, switching in yards and terminals, and providing
personnel to operate trains on a 24-hour basis. (See ATP 4-14 for additional information on U.S. Army rail
operations.)
7-22. The U.S. Army capacity to operate railways does not include the equipment needed to mount a
railway operation. For this reason, the U.S. Army ability to use rail transportation depends largely on the
existing capacity of the AO. Rail is a strategic asset and an operational-level-of-war asset. Within CONUS,
the Military Traffic Management Command arranges for all rail movements of cargo and personnel to the
seaport of embarkation. In CONUS, the ASCC is responsible for doing the same when deploying armed
forces in support of a military operation. Because of limited military resources, the use of HN personnel or
contractors may become the primary source of O&M capability. (See FM 4-01.)

PLANNING AND DESIGN

7-23. The military uses roads and railroads to allow ground traffic to get from one point to another quickly
and efficiently, for as long as necessary, based on operational requirements. An analysis of the
requirements for roads and railroads can be completed by the phase of the operation or by the purpose. The
analysis by the phase of the operation may determine the need for roads or railroads to support access,
theater opening, force bed-down, offense, defense, base camps, stability, DSCA, or redeployment.
7-24. The analysis by the purpose may determine the roads or railroads to assure operational mobility,
enable force projection and logistics, or build partner capacity and develop infrastructure. Based on
operational requirements, the planner determines locations that must be connected, the degree of
permanence or use, the characteristics of estimated traffic type, and the volume of traffic. LOCs may
determine the locations of some military facilities or the location of some military facilities may determine
the location of some LOCs.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-3

Chapter 7

7-25. Road site preparation includes the following procedures:

 Establish security.
 Establish bypass and detour for existing traffic.
 Stage equipment and materials.
 Construct temporary support facilities.
 Survey and stake out the road geometric design.
 Rehearse on a test strip to verify quality assurance and quality control plans.

7-26. Road construction planning methods and tools include—

 Equipment and personnel task organization.
 Earthwork and time estimates.
 Mass diagrams.
 Personnel and equipment schedules.
 Procurement.

ROUTE SELECTION
7-27. Based on operational requirements and reconnaissance data, the engineer and transportation staff
officers propose an initial route for roads and railroads. This proposed route is analyzed based on obstacles,
route restrictions, grades, and the best horizontal and vertical alignment. The original route survey consists
of straight-line segments or tangents that are then connected through an iterative design process with
horizontal and vertical curves to achieve the shortest, smoothest, most efficient route that requires the least
construction resources.

ROADS
7-28. Military roads are classified according to their degree of permanence and the characteristics of traffic
they are designed to support—wheeled or tracked of a specific volume (number of vehicles per day).
Military roads are classified as Type A, B, C, or D, depending on the amount of traffic they are expected to
sustain per day. Type A roads (four-lane) are designed for the highest capacity, while Type D roads (one-
lane) are designed for the lowest. Normally, Types B, C, and D apply to TO construction. (See FM 5-430-
00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, for additional information.)

Combat Roads and Trails

7-29. Combat roads and trails are a combat engineering mission because they are typically performed in
close support of ground maneuver forces; however, combat and general engineers build them. Combat
roads and trails are usually characterized by expedient construction methods and are intended to handle low
volumes of traffic for a short duration to meet immediate requirements. Combat trails are intended to last
only a few days. Combat roads have a temporary surface of material (such as crushed rock) to increase
trafficability. Since combat engineers do not have the time, equipment (graders, water distributors,
compactors), and training of general engineers, they cannot construct a road to meet all geometric design
for military roads. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for additional information on combat roads and trails.)
7-30. Military roads are rarely constructed to meet the exacting standards of comparable civilian
construction, to include environmental standards. Their degree of permanence varies, depending on how
long they are needed. The primary difference between combat roads and conventional roads is the degree of
permanence and the characteristics of the traffic they are designed to support. Combat roads are built to
handle low volumes of traffic for a short duration. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for more information
on combat roads and trails.)

7-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

7-31. A combat trail is a travelled way that has been cleared of obstacles, but has not been temporarily
surfaced. A trail may be roughly graded by combat earthmoving equipment (such as an armored combat
earthmover [M9] or a deployable, universal combat earthmover) to provide a relatively smooth surface.
Combat trails are usually adequate for tracked and wheeled combat vehicles. A combat trail is a route
through areas where routes do not exist.
7-32. A combat road is a travelled way that has been cleared of obstacles and temporarily surfaced by an
expedient means to increase its trafficability. Combat roads usually do not have bituminous or concrete
surfaces. Combat roads require more effort to build than combat trails, but they support a broader range of
vehicles and tend to last longer.

Unsurfaced and Surfaced Roads

7-33. Unsurfaced roads consist of hastily cut pathways with native soil that is graded and drained to form a
surface to carry traffic. Unsurfaced roads are the result of the first three steps of the construction sequence
(clearing, grubbing, and stripping); this could become the subgrade for later surfaced roads. Unsurfaced
roads—
 Are used in combat areas where the speed of construction is required and equipment and
personnel are limited.
 Are used generally in dry weather or by light traffic.
 Are used as haul roads in construction areas and as service roads on base camps or bases.
 Require periodic maintenance and, possibly, dust control.
 Are designed to initial standards to enhance mobility for a short time (less than 6 months).

7-34. Surfaced roads are laid out, designed, and constructed to specific criteria. The subgrade is compacted
to design specifications, and layers are added to create the road structure. Surfaced roads—
 Are used in rear areas or support areas where general engineers and resources are available.
 Are not limited by most weather and are designed for specific traffic loads.
 Are used as more permanent road networks, such as MSRs and primary LOCs.
 Require periodic maintenance and can be easily upgraded.
 Are designed to temporary standards to sustain mobility for a longer period (up to 2 years).

7-35. During contingency operations, nearly all roads are constructed to temporary standards. In some rare
cases, semipermanent and permanent roads may be designed to provide long-term mobility (up to 20
years). Permanent roads are often planned, designed, and constructed in conjunction with USACE or
similar organizations. The employment of civilian contractors or Service general engineer organizations
may be used.
7-36. Most new, two-lane military roads are surfaced with aggregate (sand; gravel; crushed rock; slag; or
recycled, crushed concrete), stabilized soil, or the best locally available materials. This allows for future
upgrades and permits the maximum use of readily available materials to complete the road rapidly.
Selected high-use portions, such as intersections, may be surfaced with more durable materials to support
heavier loads. Only a few highly used, new military roads receive asphalt concrete or Portland cement
concrete surfaces due to the time required and the added cost for this type of construction.
7-37. Asphalt is a petroleum-based product with two primary subgroups used in construction: asphalt
cement and liquid asphalt materials. Asphalt cement is mixed with aggregate and sand to make asphalt
concrete. Liquid asphalt materials are sprayed on roads for various purposes. Bitumen (a generic term) is a
broad category of materials that occur naturally, or it could be an asphalt that is distilled from petroleum or
a tar that is distilled from coal. Bitumen and asphalt are often used interchangeably; bitumen is often used
outside the United States. Asphalt concrete (often called asphalt) and bituminous concrete are made with a
bituminous material as a binder for sand and gravel. Bituminous design is described in detail in
TM 3-34.63.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-5

Chapter 7

Road Networks
7-38. There are a number of factors that must be considered when establishing any road network. They
include the following:
 Mission. Operational and mission requirements will determine the minimum road classification
and design requirements, based on the expected period of usage and the anticipated traffic load.
 Enemy. Threat capabilities and anticipated types of action could affect the methods of
construction and the road location and design. Avoid creating choke points and other potential
ambush points when possible.
 Terrain and weather. The location of a road is dictated by operational and mission
requirements. Existing slopes, drainage, vegetation, soil properties, weather patterns, and other
conditions may affect layout and construction.
 Troops and support available. Use local materials, labor, and equipment when and where
possible. Use simple or preexisting designs, such as those in the TCMS that require minimal
skilled labor and specialized equipment when possible.
 Time available. Speed is critical when establishing a road network during a contingency
operation because of the rapid and dynamic tempo of military operations. It is essential to save
as much time as possible by efficiently using the minimum amount of resources. Use effective
project management techniques to save resources. When possible, use staged construction to
allow the early use of roadways while further construction, maintenance, repair, and upgrades
continue.
 Civil considerations. Civilian property restrictions, real estate actions, existing structures,
restricted areas, cultural beliefs, environmental considerations, and other factors may also affect
road layout and construction.

Route Reconnaissance
7-39. It may be necessary to conduct bridge reconnaissance and classification computations. (See FM 3-
34.170/MCWP 3-17.4 for additional information on route reconnaissance.)
7-40. Proper site selection is a crucial step in new road construction. Future construction problems can be
avoided by the careful reconnaissance and wise consideration of future operational requirements. A road
project that is poorly laid out will not meet the requirements for construction ease and efficiency,
maintainability, usability, capacity, and convenience.

Engineer Reconnaissance Team

7-41. The engineer reconnaissance team is briefed as to the anticipated traffic (wheeled, tracked, or a
combination) and the anticipated traffic flow. Single-flow traffic allows a column of vehicles to proceed
while individual oncoming or overtaking vehicles pass at predetermined points. Double-flow traffic allows
two columns of vehicles to proceed simultaneously in the same or opposite directions.
7-42. The reconnaissance team may also be asked to determine the grade and alignment, horizontal and
vertical curve characteristics, and nature and location of obstructions. Obstructions are defined as anything
that reduces the road classification below what is required to support the proposed traffic efficiently.
7-43. Prior to the start of the actual route reconnaissance, the engineer reconnaissance team should conduct
a map reconnaissance of the site or area, to include studying aerial photos, reviewing available geological
and hydrological information and other geospatial information, and considering any other available,
relevant information. The engineer reconnaissance team may request the following sources of information
to aid in planning reconnaissance missions and in making the preliminary study of a specific mission:
 Existing intelligence reports and threat analysis.
 Strategic and technical reports, studies, and summaries.
 Road, topographic, soil, vegetation, or geologic maps or other geospatial information.
 Existing aerial reconnaissance reports.
 Existing road design information or maintenance plans.

7-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

Soil Properties
7-44. The engineer reconnaissance team may also determine soil properties on-site and at potential borrow
pits and quarry sites along the proposed route. Soil properties (such as the liquid limit, plasticity index,
California bearing ratios, and gradation) are required to properly design a new road pavement structure or
upgrade an existing road pavement structure, based on the anticipated traffic that the road will support.
These soil properties are also required to evaluate the suitability of aggregate taken from potential borrow
pits and quarries for use in road construction, maintenance, and repair.

Drainage
7-45. Drainage patterns impacting roads are also important in site selection. When the tactical situation
permits, roads should be located on ridgelines. Thus, natural drainage features minimize the need for the
costly and time-consuming construction of drainage structures. When possible, avoid excessive subsurface
water. If it is impossible to avoid road construction in locations with saturated terrain, water tables must be
lowered during construction. Steps must also be taken to minimize adverse effects of water on the strength
of the supporting subgrade and base course.

Obstacles
7-46. Where possible, avoid obstacles (such as rivers, ravines, and canals) to minimize the need for bridge
construction or similar structures. Such construction is time-consuming and calls for materials that may be
in short supply. Make maximum use of existing structures to decrease total work requirements. Do not
bridge an obstacle more than once. Should gap-crossing operations be necessary, ensure that the proper
type of bridging or other methods provides an adequate and sustainable solution.
7-47. To sustain traffic, roads have a crowned driving surface and pavement structure, a shoulder area that
slopes directly away from the driving surface to provide drainage off the driving surface, and side ditches
for drainage away from the road itself. The shoulder areas and side ditches along many roads may be
minimal, depending on their location and their road classification.

Road Design
7-48. The four major road designs that can be applied are—
 Geometric design.
 Pavement structure design.
 Drainage system design.
 Bridge design.

7-49. The road geometric design consists of the selection of road type, estimated traffic volumes, grade and
alignment, horizontal curves, and vertical curves. Each road type has geometric design data, such as cross
section elements and alignment elements that provide safe and rapid traffic movement. The geometric
design data is provided to the constructing unit that lays out the design information on the ground with the
construction survey. The construction survey provides stakes with survey details that construction
equipment operators can use to conduct earthmoving.
7-50. Unsurfaced roads use the natural soil or borrow soil as the road surface. The design of unsurfaced
roads is based on traffic characteristics and the compacted in-place soil strength. Unsurfaced roads meet all
geometric design data for the selected road.

Pavements
7-51. During contingency operations, consider whether to pave a road by considering the urgency of its
completion, the tactical situation, the expected traffic, the soil-bearing characteristics, the climate, the
availability of materials and equipment, and the necessity of dust control. (See UFC 3-260-17.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-7

Chapter 7

7-52. Pavements, including the surface and underlying courses, may be rigid and flexible. The wearing
surface of rigid pavement is made of Portland cement concrete. Asphalt cement concrete pavements are
classified as flexible pavements. The typical road pavement structure (cross section) consists of layers
(pavement or surface course, base, subbase, and select material) on top of a compacted subgrade. (See UFC
3-250-04 and UFC 3-250-06.)
7-53. There are four types of road pavement structure designs, which are distinguished by the pavement or
surface layer. These types are as follows:
 Unsurfaced roads.
 Aggregate-surfaced roads. (See UFC 3-250-09FA.)
 Bituminous-surfaced roads.
 Concrete-surfaced roads.

7-54. Flexible pavements are used almost exclusively in contingency operations. They are adaptable to
almost any situation and fall within the construction capabilities of normal engineer troops. Rigid
pavements are not usually suited to construction requirements during contingency operations. Because
flexible pavements reflect distortion and displacement from the subgrade upward to the surface course,
their design must be based on complete and thorough investigations of subgrade conditions, borrow areas,
and sources of select materials, subbase, and base materials. (See UFC 3-250-03 and UFC 3-250-08FA for
more information on flexible pavements.)
7-55. A road pavement structure sits on top of the subgrade or the soil in place. A layer of compacted
subgrade sits on top of the subgrade, and a layer of select material sits on top of the compacted subgrade. A
layer of subbase material sits on top of the select material, and the base course sits on top of the subbase. A
road may have a flexible pavement (asphalt) or a rigid pavement (concrete) surface on top of the base
course. The thickness of a layer depends on the strength of the layer below it. Depending on design
requirements, some layers may not be required. These pavement structures are designed to distribute wheel
loads over a wider area of each subsequent underlying layer within the pavement, thereby reducing
pressure on the subgrade soils.
7-56. During contingency operations, nearly all roads are constructed as aggregate-surfaced roads. These
designs permit the maximum use of readily available materials and are easy to upgrade–permitting great
flexibility to respond to changing operational and mission requirements. When possible, the roadbed should
be aligned to take advantage of the most favorable surface and subsurface terrain. An alignment over soil
with good properties meets the design standards for strength and stability and minimizes the need to
remove undesirable materials.

Other Road Considerations

7-57. The pavement structure design considers traffic characteristics, soil and construction aggregate
conditions, compaction, and cover requirements. The most common military road is constructed with an
aggregate pavement structure design. The pavement structure design produces the layer material properties,
thickness, and compaction design and final design profile with cut-and-fill information. FM 5-430-00-
1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, provides additional detailed information on the design of bituminous- and
concrete-surfaced roads. TM 3-34.63 covers rigid-pavement structure design for roads and airfields. (See
UFC 3-250-01FA.)
7-58. The overall road design consists of many factors. It may include chemically stabilized layer design,
frost design, and geotextile design. One option to improve the ability of the road to support traffic is soil
stabilization. The goals of soil stabilization are the stabilization of expansive soils, soil waterproofing, and
dust control. Soil strength improvement increases the load-carrying capability of the road. Dust control
alleviates or eliminates dust generated by vehicle and aircraft operation. (See TM 5-818-7; TM 5-818-
8/AFJMAN 32-1030, TM 5-822-14/AFJMAN 32-1019; and UFC 3-260-17.)
7-59. Soil waterproofing maintains the natural or constructed strength of a soil by preventing water from
entering it. Soil stabilization is generally accomplished by either mechanical or chemical methods. In
mechanical stabilization, soils are blended and then compacted. In chemical stabilization, soil particles are

7-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

bonded to form a more stable mass, using additives such as lime, bitumen, or Portland cement. (See UFC
3-250-11 for additional information.)
7-60. Traffic flow over roads is far more efficient if curves and grades are held to a minimum. Even gentle
curves significantly decrease traffic capacity if there are too many on a route. Therefore, lay out all routes
with a minimum of curves by making the tangent lines as long as possible. The availability of long tangents
is influenced by terrain. It is also limited by other principles of efficient location, such as minimizing
earthwork, avoiding excessive grades, and obtaining desirable soil characteristics.

RAILROADS
7-61. The ability to rapidly move troops and materiel to key locations may well decide the outcome of a
conflict. Railroads provide one of the most effective and efficient forms of land transportation available to
forces during contingency operations. They can move great volumes and tonnages of materiel and large
numbers of personnel over long distances with considerable regularity and speed in nearly all weather
conditions. Railroads are flexible and versatile, and rolling stock may be tailored for transporting cargo.
Extensive railway systems exist in most regions of the world and have an interoperability provided by
standard equipment and common gauge. These capabilities make railroads a preferred means of
transportation during contingency operations.
7-62. Maximizing a rail system may depend on its capacity (length and condition of existing track,
condition of rolling stock and other facilities) and its ability to support operational and mission
requirements while still maintaining essential commercial traffic. ATP 4-14 describes the organizations,
processes, basic construction and maintenance standards, and systems involved in rail operations. (See
UFC 4-860-01FA for additional information on railroad design. See TM 5-628/AFR 91-44 for more
information on railroad track standards.)
7-63. All existing facilities must be used to the maximum extent possible to minimize construction time
and effort. Transportation units in coordination with engineers conduct a reconnaissance and select new
routes. New railroad construction will normally consist of short spurs to connect existing networks with
military terminals or to detour around severely damaged areas. The focus of engineer effort should be on
modifying and repairing existing railroads to meet operational and mission requirements.
7-64. Local labor and management are key to the rapid modification and continuing maintenance of
existing facilities. Local personnel can often supply materials and skilled labor to speed the work and
relieve military personnel for other projects. Local railway operating personnel can be a good source of
information on existing conditions, operations, and supply facilities in a given area.
7-65. In order to expedite operations, railroads constructed during contingency operations may have
accepted lower safety factors, sharper curves, and steeper grades than recommended by the American
Railway Engineering Association. Once the minimum standard for immediate service has been attained,
phased improvements can be made, provided the importance of the line justifies the effort.

Railroad Bridges
7-66. A railroad bridge is a LOC bridge and is classified as a nonstandard bridge. The U.S. Army does not
have design criteria for nonstandard railroad bridges, nor does it possess railroad float bridge equipment.
Many varieties of standard railroad bridges are available through AFCS. Construction details and bills of
material are addressed in TM 5-302-1. Standard railroad bridging is available for the Bailey bridge and for
certain contracted panel bridges.
7-67. The railway bridge construction process begins with a proper determination of design requirements.
The engineer must determine the appropriate load-bearing capacity of the intended bridge to support the
full weight of the train itself, plus its maximum cargo load. In most cases, the design criteria should
consider Copper E80 loads (train with a locomotive weight of 520 metric tons and axle loads equal to 37
metric tons).
7-68. Steel stringer bridges supported on timber trestles or piles satisfy most railway bridging
requirements. (See TM 3-34.23 for information on Bailey bridge railway bridges.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-9

Chapter 7

7-69. Panel bridge equipment can be used as a field expedient for the assembly of railway bridges.
However, it can only be used in special conditions because there is much deflection. Because of this,
railway bridging is restricted to spanning gaps no longer than 70 feet (21.5 meters). Usually, panel bridges
can be assembled as a single-track bridge. (See TM 3-34.23 for more information.)
7-70. The engineer must establish immediate liaison with the Transportation Corps for support in railroad
planning. The following information is needed:
 Mission and required capacity of the proposed systems.
 Type, size, and weight of rolling stock to be operated.
 Track gauge.
 Initial, intermediate, and final terminal points along the route.
 Servicing and maintenance facilities required.
 Connections with other railway systems.
 Maximum gradient and degree of curvature required.
 Scheduling or timetable for completing construction.
 Direction of future development and expansion.
 Outbound movement—the ready track and wye.

7-71. Railroad service facilities should be laid out so that servicing operations can be performed in proper
sequence as the locomotive moves through the terminal. The usual relationship of operations and facilities
from terminal entrance to terminal exit is—
 Inspections. Inspection pits or platforms.
 Lubrications. Oil and grease service areas.
 Ash pits. Ash pits for cleaning fires if steam locomotives are used.
 Facilities. Coal, sand, diesel oil, and water-appropriate facilities.
 Repairs. Running repairs (engine house).

7-72. The urgency of the situation or lack of additional bridging assets may require that a railroad bridge
be converted into a highway bridge by constructing a smooth roadway surface. The use of the bridge by
rail, wheeled, and tracked vehicles can be achieved by constructing planks along the ties between and
outside the rails, up to the level of the top of the rail.
7-73. The repair and reinforcement of existing railroad bridges is a much more viable option than new
construction. Nonstandard railroad bridging can be repaired or improved using any available and suitable
materials. Railroad bridges will require specialized construction equipment and is labor-intensive. This
generally precludes the construction of railroad bridges at locations away from existing rail lines. When a
site must be selected, use the basic criteria for general bridge sites.

Railroad Reconnaissance
7-74. After design requirements have been determined, transportation unit representatives and engineers
will conduct a field reconnaissance to determine the siting of the rail system. The surveys, studies, and
plans required for railroad construction are necessarily more elaborate than those for most road
construction. Studies of the best available topographic maps, imagery, and other geospatial products narrow
the choice of routes to be reconnoitered. Factors that affect the location of a route include logistics, length
of line, curvature, gradients, load-bearing capacity of travelled surface, and ease and speed of construction.
Each of the factors of METT-TC can impact on railway site selection, just as they affect the location of a
road.

Logistics
7-75. Logistics is a major consideration in selecting a rail route during contingency operations. Normally, a
rail line will extend from a seaport of debarkation, aerial port of debarkation, beachhead, or another source
of supply in theater to the logistics support areas sustaining the forces present. Alternate routes are
desirable for greater flexibility of movement and as insurance against cases of mainline obstruction because
of threat actions, wrecks, washouts, floods, fires, landslides, or enemy activity.

7-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

7-76. The length of line (mileage from point of origin to terminus) is important only when it adds
materially to the time of train movement. As much as a 30 percent increase in mileage is permissible when
it proves advantageous to the other factors involved.

Curvatures
7-77. Sharp curvatures should be minimized as much as possible, consistent with the speed of construction.
Determining the curvature for a military railroad will depend largely on the maximum rigid wheelbase of
train cars and locomotives. Superelevation is used to counteract centrifugal force on curves by raising the
outer rail higher than the inner rail. (See TM 3-34.55.)

Ruling Grades
7-78. The ruling grade of a route is the most demanding grade over which a maximum-tonnage train can be
handled by a single locomotive. Where diesel-electric units are used, a single locomotive may consist of
two or more units that are coupled and controlled from the cab of the leading unit. The ruling grade is not
necessarily the maximum grade. Steeper grades can be negotiated with the use of an additional locomotive
as a helper engine; or if the grade is very short, the train may be carried over the crest by momentum. Since
military railroads operate at slow speeds, the ruling grade must be kept to a minimum. As always, the
necessity for rapid construction must be a top priority.

Ground Reconnaissance
7-79. Select a good route that will allow the rail line to be rapidly constructed using minimal resources.
Many additional hours of earthwork and grading can be avoided by a careful route selection.
7-80. A complete ground reconnaissance of the possible railroad routes is required. The reconnaissance
team should note distance and elevation odometer and barometer observations, general terrain
characteristics, controlling curvatures, soil and drainage conditions, bridge and tunnel sites, bridge sizes
and types, railway or important road intersections, ballast and other construction material availability, and
points at which construction units would have access to the railway route. Factors to be taken into
consideration include the roadbed, rock cuts, hillsides, drainage, security, water supply, passing track, and
surveys.

Roadbed
7-81. The roadbed should be built on favorable soils. Clay beds, peat bogs, muck, and swampy areas are
unstable foundations and provide unsuitable soils for building fills. Cuts through unfavorable soils will
slough and slide. Seek minimum earthwork in locating the roadbed and track. Where rock cuts are
proposed, select locations that will allow the bedding planes to dip away from the track to prevent
rockslides. Avoid locations at the foot of high bluffs, which will subject the track to rock falls, slides, and
washouts. Rockwork is time-consuming; avoid it when practicable. In a temperate zone, choose sites along
the lee side of hills. This prevents snowdrifts and resists wind effects.

Site Selection Considerations

7-82. The proposed railroad site should facilitate drainage or prevent the need for it. Ridge routes are best
for this purpose, but may be exposed to enemy fire or observation. Avoid locations that require heavy
bridging. Note that diesel equipment cannot be operated over track inundated above the top of rail, because
water will damage traction motors. If steam operation is planned, an adequate water supply must be
available at 15- to 20-mile intervals along the route. Suitable sites for passing sidings must be planned.
Passing-track spacing depends on traffic density and expected peak conditions of traffic flow.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-11

Chapter 7

Surveys
7-83. The preliminary railroad survey includes cross sections along the feasible routes. Trail locations are
plotted and adjusted to give the best balance of grades, compensated grades, cuts, and fills. This establishes
or fixes the line of the railroad. Field survey parties locate the precise line and stake it. This requires much
more precision than the location survey of most new roads, since curves and super elevations must be
accurately computed.
7-84. Once the necessary railroad reconnaissance and surveys are complete, the engineer prepares an
estimate of the work and materials required and a plan for carrying out the construction. The engineer must
schedule the priority and rate of construction and provide for the even flow of material to ensure orderly
progress. Schedules must continually be updated to accommodate changed field conditions or other
exigencies. In addition to their planning function, the schedules can also serve as progress charts.

CONSTRUCTION
7-85. Road and railroad construction require carefully planned methodologies. This section discusses the
reconnaissance, steps, processes, estimating, and sequence required for sound construction and the
upgrading requirements.

ROADS
7-86. The construction directive usually provides the road geometric design, pavement structure design,
and drainage system design, but probably not the temporary construction drainage structures. Road
construction encompasses the following considerations:
 Site reconnaissance.
 Site preparation.
 Construction planning.
 Construction survey.
 Construction sequence of execution.
 Existing intelligence reports and threat analysis.
 Strategic and technical reports, studies, and summaries.
 Road, topographic, soil, vegetation, and geologic maps or other geospatial information.
 Existing aerial reconnaissance reports.
 Existing road design information or maintenance plans.

Construction Steps and Processes

7-87. Road construction processes encompass the following considerations:
 Clearing.
 Grubbing.
 Stripping.
 Cutting and filling.
 Grading and shaping.
 Ditching and sealing.
 Road maintenance.

7-88. Clearing, grubbing, and stripping are the same in road and airfield construction. Earthmoving
operations are usually the largest single work item on any project involving the construction of a road,
unless the road will have significant gaps to cross. Any step that can be taken to avoid excessive earthwork
will increase job efficiency.

7-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

7-89. Adequate drainage is essential during the construction of a military road or airfield to control water
runoff. A construction drainage system is temporarily established to prevent construction delays and
structural failure before completion. The construction drainage system requires continuous inspection and
maintenance.
7-90. Consider the proposed use of the road. If it is to be used only for a short time, such as 1 or 2 weeks, a
detailed drainage system design is not justifiable. However, if improvement or expansion is anticipated,
design drainage so that future construction does not overload ditches, culverts, and other drainage facilities.
(See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.)
7-91. Drainage problems are greater when all-weather use occurs as opposed to intermittent use. Consider
the availability of engineer resources. Heavy equipment (such as dozers, graders, scrapers, and excavators)
is commonly used on drainage projects. However, where unskilled labor and hand tools are readily
available, drainage work can be done by hand.

Work Estimates
7-92. When the necessary reconnaissance and mission analysis are complete, the engineer prepares an
estimate of the work and materials required and a plan for carrying out the construction. The engineer must
schedule the priority and rate of construction and provide for the even flow of material to ensure orderly
progress. Schedules must continually be updated to accommodate changed field conditions or other
exigencies. In addition to their planning function, the schedules can also serve as progress charts.

Construction Sequence
7-93. Once earthwork estimation, equipment scheduling, and necessary surveys are complete, the
construction sequence can begin. Prepare the construction site by clearing, grubbing, and stripping. These
operations are usually done with heavy engineer equipment. Use hand or power felling equipment,
explosives, or fire when applicable. The factors determining the methods to be used are the acreage to be
cleared, the type and density of vegetation, the effect of the terrain on equipment operation, the availability
of equipment and personnel, and the time available for completion. For best results, use a combination of
methods, choosing each method for the operation in which it is most effective.
7-94. Conduct cut and fill operations when clearing, grubbing, and stripping are finished. Cut and fill
operations are the biggest part of the earthwork in road construction. The goal of cut and fill work is to
bring the route elevation to design specifications. Throughout the fill operation, compact the soil in layers
(lifts). Achieve soil compaction with self-propelled or towed rollers. The end state is a structure that
minimizes settlement, increases shearing resistance, reduces seepage, and minimizes volume change.
7-95. The advantages that accompany soil compaction make this process standard procedure for
constructing embankments, subgrades, and bases for road and airfield pavements. Cut, fill, and compaction
efforts are intended to achieve the final grade. This alignment takes into consideration superelevation along
curves to ensure load stability and falls within military road grade specifications. When final grade is
achieved, cut ditching to control drainage runoff and crown the road along its centerline. The road is now
ready for surfacing.

Surfacing Considerations
7-96. All unpaved roads will emit dust under traffic, making it an inherent problem. The amount of dust
that an unpaved road produces varies greatly depending on local climatic conditions and the quality and
type of aggregate used for road construction. Common dust control agents include chlorides, resins, natural
clays, asphalts, and other commercial binders and membranes. Dust control and soil waterproofing can be
carried out by applying these agents in a spray (soil penetrants) or admixture or by laying aggregate,
membrane, or mesh as a soil blanket. (See UFC 3-260-17 for additional information on dust control
measures.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-13

Chapter 7

7-97. The agronomic method (using vegetation cover) is suited to stable situations, but is rarely useful
during contingency operations. To effectively apply stabilizers and dust control agents, ensure that the
aggregate road surface has good gradation, construct a good crown on the driving surface, ensure good
drainage, ensure that the equipment is calibrated accurately and is working properly, and rehearse the
application of the agent using a test strip.
7-98. Use expedient surfaces as temporary means to quickly cross small areas with extremely poor soil
conditions (such as swamps, quicksand, and wetlands) when lacking the time or resources for standard road
construction. These are unsurfaced roads where some material has been placed on the natural soil to
improve trafficability. There are two types of expedient roads—hasty and heavy. Hasty expedient roads are
built quickly to last only a few days. Heavy expedient roads are built to last until a durable standard road
can be constructed. Expedient surfacing methods include cross-country tracks, corduroy, chespaling
landing mats, U.S. Army track, plank tread, wire mesh, snow and ice, and sand grid.
7-99. The availability of construction material determines the types and strength of roads that can be
constructed. Naturally occurring materials, such as rock and wood, may be scarce or of poor quality.
Portland cement may not be available or may be prohibitively expensive to use. Sand grid material is
excellent for use in areas of cohesionless soil. Matting, steel planking, or geotextiles may be used if they
are available. When roads are constructed in areas of poor soil conditions, roadways must be well marked
and adequate drainage must be provided. (See ATP 4-13.)
7-100. Spray applications and surface treatments are the most economical, troop-constructed surfaces.
Surface treatment can be divided into two categories—sprayed treatments and sprayed bitumen with
aggregate surface. Bituminous materials are tars, road tar cutbacks, or asphalt emulsions. Spray
applications provide soil or aggregate with the following surface treatments:
 Prime coat (waterproofing).
 Tack coat (binds bituminous pavement to the surface).
 Dustproofing.

7-101. Spray bitumen with an aggregate surface provides a waterproof, abrasive, wear-resistant surface
with no significant structural strength.

Upgrades
7-102. Where possible, use existing road facilities. In most areas, an extensive road network already
exists. With the expansion and rehabilitation of the roadway and the preparation of adequate surfaces, the
road network can be improved to carry required traffic loads. Upgrading an existing road, combined with
routine maintenance and repair, usually involves reducing or eliminating obstructions. It is the preferred
method of improving the trafficability of a selected route.
7-103. Techniques, equipment, and materials needed for upgrading roads are generally the same as those
for new construction. A changing tactical situation and unpredictable military operations may also require
that military engineers modify and expand completed construction. The location of a road should allow for
potential expansion. Expanding an existing route or facility conserves labor and material and permits
speedier completion of a usable roadway.

RAILROADS
7-104. As a first stage in organizing railroad construction work, the engineer divides the line into sections
in which special features (such as bridges, stations, yards, and rock cuts) can be constructed while other
work is in progress. Work can proceed concurrently at several locations. The standard construction
sequence is as follows:
 Clear and grub.
 Prepare the subgrade by cutting or filling and compacting.
 Unload and distribute track materials.
 Align and space cross ties.
 Place line rails or ties.

7-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

 Place gauge rail on ties to ensure proper spacing.

 Line the track.
 Unload the ballast.
 Raise and surface the track.
 Make final alignments.
7-105. In addition to the actual rail line, certain facilities are necessary to rail operations or are required
due to particular physical conditions. Sidings are auxiliary tracks next to the main line, which are used for
meeting and passing trains, for separating and storing equipment that breaks down enroute, and for storing
rolling stock that cannot be moved to its destination. The railway transportation unit will determine siding
locations in coordination with engineers. Sidings are built parallel to the rail line and should be 250 feet
longer than the longest train that will use it and have a turnout at either end.
7-106. Avoid highway and road crossings at grade when possible. When crossings must be installed,
construct them so that the road axis is approximately perpendicular to the railroad centerline. Rail crossings
carry one track across another at grade and permit the passing of wheel flanges through opposing rails. The
design of frogs to allow these crossings depends on the angle at which they cross. In military railroads,
most frogs are made of precast, immobile rails that can be easily installed.
7-107. Wyes are used in place of turntables, which are impractical for use in contingency operations. A
wye is a triangular-shaped arrangement of rail tracks with a switch or set of points at each corner where two
or more rail lines join to allow trains to pass from one line to the other. Wyes may be installed at engine
terminals, summits, junctions, and railheads as time permits. In some cases, the stem of the wye may be
long enough to permit the turnaround of the entire train.
7-108. Structures needed for supporting railroad operations include—
 Facilities for train crews and maintenance personnel.
 Yards and terminals.
 Shop facilities for train and rail repair.
 Engine house.
 Water stations.
 Storage areas for material and tools.
 Loading ramps for cargo.
 Block stations (facilities that house the switching and signaling equipment that controls train
movements).
7-109. A railhead is at the end of a railroad. Yards are a system of tracks that serve three basic functions.
These functions include—
 One or more tracks long enough to receive an entire train.
 A system of shorter tracks for the storage or classification of freight.
 Departure tracks on which rolling stock from the classification yard may be assembled for
dispatching.
7-110. In addition to the auxiliary facilities described above, other specific construction requirements may
be dictated by the terrain or operational requirements. Special equipment, materials, and expertise may be
required to construct a railroad and its accompanying facilities to quickly and efficiently support units.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

7-111. Roads and railroads require O&M to extend their service life and usefulness to support the force.
This section discusses the routine and scheduled requirements and considerations.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-15

Chapter 7

ROADS
7-112. The operation of roads is often performed and controlled by transportation units or movement
control teams when they are designated MSRs or alternate supply routes. Operation involves controlling
traffic with orders, signs, checkpoints and, possibly, patrols.
7-113. Road maintenance requires a substantial amount of resources and technical expertise on a
continuous basis. Roads must be maintained and repaired for safe and speedy traffic movement.
Maintenance is the routine prevention and correction of damage and deterioration caused by normal use
and exposure to the elements. Repair restores damage caused by abnormal use, accidents, hostile forces,
and severe weather actions. Repair includes the resurfacing of a road or airfield when maintenance can no
longer accomplish its purpose. Rehabilitation restores roads or airfields that have not been in the hands of
friendly forces and do not meet operational requirements. Rehabilitation resembles war damage repair,
except that it is accomplished before occupancy.
7-114. Routine maintenance and repair operations include inspections, stockpile of materials for
maintenance and repair work, maintenance and repair of road surfaces and drainage systems, dust and mud
control, and snow and ice removal. The main purpose of maintenance and repair work is to keep road
surfaces in usable and safe condition. Routine maintenance and repair also maintains route capacity and
reduces vehicle maintenance requirements. Effective maintenance begins with a command-wide emphasis
that stresses good driving practices to reduce unnecessary damage. Once damage has occurred, prompt
repair is vital. After deterioration or destruction of the road surface begins, rapid degeneration may follow.
A minor maintenance job that is postponed becomes a major repair effort involving the reconstruction of
the subgrade, base course, and roadway surface.
7-115. The following guidelines should be observed in conducting sound road maintenance and repair:
 Minimize interference with traffic. To keep surfaces usable, maintenance and repair activities
should interfere as little as possible with the normal flow of traffic. A temporary bypass may be
required.
 Correct the basic cause of surface failure. Efforts spent to make surface repairs on a defective
subgrade are wasted. Any maintenance or repair should include an investigation to find the cause
of the damage or deterioration. That cause must be remedied before the repair is made. To ignore
the cause of the damage is to invite prompt reappearance of the damage.
 Reconstruct the uniform surface. Maintenance and repair of existing surfaces should conform as
closely as possible to the original construction in strength and texture. Simplify maintenance by
retaining uniformity. Spot strengthening often creates differences in wear and traffic impacts,
which are harmful to the adjoining surfaces.
 Assign priorities. Priority in making repairs depends on the operational requirements,
commander’s guidance, traffic volume, and hazards that would result from the complete failure
of the facility.

Maintenance Inspections
7-116. The purpose of road maintenance inspections is to detect early defects before actual failure occurs.
Frequent inspections and effective follow-up procedures early in the process prevent minor defects from
becoming serious and causing major repair jobs later. Prompt and adequate maintenance (care of joints,
repair of cracks, replacement of broken areas, and correction of settlement) and drainage involves retaining
a smooth surface and keeping the subgrade as dry as possible. A smooth road surface protects the pavement
from the destructive effects of traffic, and it reduces vehicle wear and tear. (See TM 3-34.63 for more
information.)
7-117. Road inspections are essential to prevent road failure. When inspecting road surface and drainage
defects, look for actual causes of the defects. Potholes are the most common type of road failure in
bituminous wearing surfaces. Potholes and pavement defects can usually be attributed to excessive, heavy
loads and traffic; inferior surfacing material; frost in the base; poor subgrade; excessive settlement in the
base; inadequate drainage; or a combination of these conditions. Ensure that all drainage channels and
structures are kept unobstructed. Exercise extra vigilance during rainy seasons and spring thaws and after
every heavy storm.

7-16 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Roads and Railroads

Notes.

1. See TM 3-34.63, UFC 3-270-01, UFC 3-270-02, and UFC 3-270-08 for additional
information on road inspections and repairs.

2. See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, for additional information on drainage

system maintenance.

3. See TM 5-626 for information on unsurfaced road maintenance.

Other Maintenance Considerations

7-118. Generally, the materials used in road maintenance and repair are the same as those used in new
construction. Maintenance activities may include opening pits and stockpiling sand and gravel, base
materials, and premixed cold patching material. Place materials in convenient, centralized locations and
stock in sufficient quantities for emergency maintenance and repair. Arrange stockpiles for quick loading
and transportation to key routes.
7-119. In some areas, extensive repairs are required to make roads usable. Advance engineer units usually
do this repair work. Under the pressure of combat conditions, repairs are sometimes temporary and rapidly
made using the most readily available materials. Such expedient repairs are intended only to meet
immediate minimum needs. As advance units move forward, other engineer units take over additional
repair and maintenance. Early expedient repairs are supplemented or replaced by work that is more
permanent. Surfaces are brought up to a standard that can fully withstand the required use. Maintenance
becomes a matter of routine.
7-120. Engineer units establish a patrol system to cover the road network for which the unit is responsible.
Periodic patrols by elements, such as military police personnel, who use the road net on a sustained and
frequent basis can assist with patrolling. Engineer road maintenance and repair modules are organized with
proper personnel, equipment, and supplies to accomplish road repair and maintenance in a specific area. As
many modules as needed are organized to cover the total area of responsibility.
7-121. The heavy traffic level and limited road durability may make it necessary to conduct maintenance
on a 24-hour basis. A squad-sized road maintenance and repair module equipped with a dump truck, grader,
and hand tools can conduct maintenance and minor repairs encountered on a 5- to 15-mile stretch of road.
This module can be increased or decreased, and more or fewer miles can be assigned to a module as the
mission dictates. Security conditions also influence the size and composition of these elements and the
employment methodology.
7-122. During contingency operations, severe winter weather may present challenging maintenance
problems. Regions of heavy snowfall require special equipment and material to keep pavements and other
traffic areas open. Low temperatures cause icing on pavements and frost effects on subgrade structures.
Alternate freezing and thawing may cause damage to road surfaces and block drainage systems with ice.
Spring thaws could cause surface and subgrade failures and may damage bridging.
7-123. Winter maintenance consists of removing snow and ice, sanding icy surfaces, erecting and
maintaining snow fences, and keeping drainage systems free from obstruction. Each command should
publish a comprehensive snow and ice control plan that clearly specifies the responsibilities of engineer and
nonengineer units. Engineer and nonengineer patrols must be established to monitor snow and ice
conditions within the AO. Adequate personnel and snow and ice control equipment and supplies must be
allocated to support the plan.
7-124. A detailed discussion of pavement failures, maintenance and repair methods, and rigid pavement
maintenance is covered in TM 3-34.63; UFC 3-250-06; and UFC 3-250-08FA.

RAILROADS
7-125. Railroads may be operated by the HN, private companies, contractors, or military transportation
railway personnel. Although transportation units have the responsibility for routine maintenance, engineers

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 7-17

Chapter 7

must be prepared to provide construction support when additional maintenance beyond the organic
capabilities of transportation units is required. Rail lines and supporting facilities must be inspected
regularly to ensure adequate maintenance and proper operation. Necessary action must be undertaken as
quickly as possible to minimize future repair requirements.
7-126. Railroad preventive maintenance, including the proper cleaning and lubrication of equipment and
machinery, will minimize the need for unnecessary maintenance and repair. Railroads are susceptible to
maintenance problems and are vulnerable to enemy attack, guerilla operations, and sabotage. Railroads
used by the transportation railway service already exist. Maintenance is required on supporting facilities,
road crossings, railroad bridges, tracks, sidings, and switching equipment. (See ATP 4-14 for additional
information on railroad maintenance.)

7-18 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 8
Bridging
Rivers and dry gaps have posed serious problems for military forces by obstructing
their freedom of maneuver. Strategically and tactically, bridges are vital and
vulnerable since they influence mobility and access to key terrain. Military traffic
engaged in rapid decisive maneuvers must possess the capability to rapidly cross wet
or dry gaps in existing road networks or natural high-speed avenues of approach at
will. This makes bridging essential across the range of military operations and in the
support of decisive actions. Very few LOCs exist without a bridge, bypass, or detour.
Engineers play a pivotal role in assisting ground maneuver forces with bridge
reconnaissance and site selection analysis. The U.S. Army has a variety of bridges
that it can deploy, assemble, or construct according to situation and mission
requirements. This chapter will discuss bridge types, designs, uses, and planning
considerations in determining the best bridge to use for tactical, support, and LOC
operations.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

8-1. ADRP 3-90 discusses the key role of bridging in the offense. Rivers and gaps are major obstacles,
despite advances in high-mobility weapon systems and extensive aviation support. Wet-gap crossings are
among the most critical, complex, and vulnerable combined arms operations that use tactical and assault
bridging. A crossing is conducted as a hasty crossing and as a continuation of the attack, when possible,
because the time needed to prepare for a gap crossing allows the enemy more time to strengthen the
defense.
8-2. The size of the gap and the enemy and friendly situations will dictate the specific tactics, techniques,
and bridging procedures used in conducting the crossing. The U.S. Army has the capability to conduct a
combined arms gap crossing with organic engineers and tactical bridge sets. Combat engineers are
responsible for conducting tactical and assault bridging with tactical units, while general engineers are
responsible for LOC bridging. Bridging is considered a GE and combat engineering function for mobility
and assault according to JP 3-34.

Notes.

1. See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for more information on combined arms gap crossings.

2. See ADRP 3-90 for more information on offense and defense.

3. See ADRP 4-0 for more information on bridging to support sustainment and the LOC
transportation system network.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 8-1

Chapter 8

UNITED STATES ARMY

8-3. Theater engineer commands have the theater engineering planning oversight, to include bridging,
with a senior engineer planning staff, with mission command or command and control of assigned engineer
brigades. The engineer brigades have staffs for planning bridging operations. Engineer battalions are
assigned bridge missions and control of assigned engineer units performing the actual bridge building
execution. (See ATTP 3-34.23, FM 3-34, and ATP 3-34.22 for more details on U.S. Army engineer unit
organization.)
8-4. U.S. Army engineer units can provide trained personnel and working equipment in support of
bridging missions. The U.S. Army has multirole bridge companies with the expertise, personnel, and
equipment for building a variety of bridges. Engineer units can complement mission support with heavy
equipment like cranes, bulldozers, and dump trucks to move weight-intensive bridge parts. Engineer units
can provide specialized tool sets, kits, and outfits to aid in bridge building. U.S. Army engineers can advise
and assist maneuver forces with bridging expertise by conducting specialized site reconnaissance,
conducting existing bridge structure assessments, and providing geospatial and terrain visualization
products. U.S. Army engineers can also provide topographic services. Combat engineers can remove
damaged bridge structures through demolitions.
8-5. Engineer dive teams can assist in providing critical support to the engineer commander during river-
crossing operations by conducting nearshore and far-shore reconnaissance; performing hydrographic
surveys to depict bottom composition; conducting underwater and surface reconnaissance of bridges to
determine structural integrity and capacity; repairing or reinforcing bridge structures; emplacing, marking
or reducing underwater obstacles using underwater demolitions. Divers may also assist in installing impact
booms, antimine booms, and antiswimmer nets to prevent damage to fixed bridging. Engineer divers
support countermobility by denying enemy access to bridging assets. Divers can be used to survey,
emplace, prime, and detonate explosives on bridge supports to degrade or destroy bridges. (See
TM 3-34.83 for information on U. S. Army engineer organizations and capabilities.) (See ATTP 3-
90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for information on bridge unit details.)

UNITED STATES ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

8-6. The CCDR may use USACE for the design, award, and management of bridge construction contracts
in support of military operations. USACE has a professional staff of engineering subject matter experts for
consulting or collaborating on bridge designs or engineering concepts and for providing technical
assistance. USACE has an extensive system of research laboratories for materials testing, structural
integrity, and product development. In addition, it also has reachback capabilities for the field engineer or
can deploy teams to the field for resolving unique bridging issues. (See FM 3-34 and JP 3-34 for
information on the role of USACE.)

UNITED STATES NAVY

8-7. Naval mobile construction battalions and Seabees have extensive heavy horizontal and vertical
construction capabilities, to include constructing and maintaining roads and bridging for supply routes.
Naval mobile construction battalion tasks include the installation of standard and nonstandard bridging.
They can also install, repackage, and redeploy panel bridges and medium girder bridges. (See NTTP 4-
04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5 for information on Naval mobile construction battalion capabilities, roles, and
missions.)

UNITED STATES MARINES

8-8. The U.S. Marine Corps has engineering units organic to its MAGTF that possess tactical bridging
capabilities. The combat engineer battalion is organic to the Marine division and can enhance mobility
through tactical and assault bridging. A Marine mobile assault company can provide mobile route
reconnaissance and armored bridging. The engineer support battalion provides general support to the
MAGTF by providing combat engineering. Engineer support battalion tasks include standard and
nonstandard bridging and demolitions. (See MCWP 3-17 for more information on Marine capabilities,
roles, and missions. See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for bridging details.)

8-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Bridging

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE CONSTRUCTION AGENTS

8-9. There may be situations in which military forces cannot be committed to building bridges due to their
required use elsewhere. In this case, DOD construction agents (contractors) would be assigned to build
bridges. Contractors become a force multiplier by allowing military engineers to concentrate on
engineering missions in high-threat areas. Contractors may be assigned long-term bridge projects in the
LOC. Their capabilities include the planning, design, award, construction, and management of bridge
projects, to include the acquisition of real estate. These organizations provide in-depth expertise in
engineering research and development. (See JP 3-34 for more information on contractor capabilities.)

OTHER COUNTRIES
8-10. U.S. military allies can be a viable option for obtaining additional bridging assets. Countries like
Great Britain and Germany maintain organic bridging assets with military engineers. Specific, allied
bridging assets are discussed later in this chapter. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for additional
information.)

PLANNING AND DESIGN

8-11. There are two basic bridging types: standard and nonstandard. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.)
While the two types could be combined as a hybrid of some nature, the bridge will normally be identified
by its predominant components. Standard bridging includes any bridging derived from manufactured bridge
systems and components that are designed to be transportable, easily constructed, and reused. Examples of
standard bridging include the Wolverine, dry support, and Bailey. Nonstandard bridging is purposely
designed for a particular gap and typically built utilizing commercial, off-the-shelf or locally available
materials. Nonstandard bridging is normally used when time permits; materials and construction resources
are readily available; standard bridging is inadequate, unavailable, or being reserved for other crossings;
and the situation allows for unique construction. These bridges are normally left on-site, even when they
are no longer necessary to support military movement. Nonstandard bridging is typically constructed by
construction engineers or contractors utilizing steel, concrete, and/or timber.
8-12. There are three bridging categories that are broadly defined by their intended purpose. (See ATTP 3-
90.4/MCWP 3-17.8.) These categories include tactical bridging, support bridging, and LOC bridging. The
bridging category is typically dictated by the operational environment, time, gap characteristics, and
equipment availability. They are subordinate to the bridging types and, therefore, can be standard or
nonstandard. As the situation changes, crossing sites may be eventually abandoned, improved, or replaced
with appropriate bridging alternatives.

TACTICAL BRIDGING
8-13. Tactical bridging is rapidly deployable and has the mobility to maintain the pace of operations with
the maneuver force that it supports. Tactical bridging is typically linked to combat engineers and the
immediate support of ground maneuver forces. Tactical bridging criteria includes the following:
 The bridge can be deployed and recovered.
 There is little bank preparation work required.
 There is minimum time needed to recover.

8-14. The actual bridge can usually be deployed and recovered without exposing the crew to direct or
indirect fire. There are little to no requirements for bank preparation when using tactical bridging assets. It
takes minimal time to deploy and recover for temporary crossings.
8-15. Engineers primarily use four bridge systems to conduct tactical bridging operations. These systems
include—
 The armored vehicle-launched bridge.
 The joint assault bridge.
 The Wolverine bridge.
 A rapidly employed bridge system.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 8-3

Chapter 8

8-16. Although tactical bridging can be used on LOCs, planners should consider using this limited resource
temporarily until it is replaced by a better bridging solution. Tactical bridging is not designed to sustain or
support the heavy volume of vehicle traffic sustained through LOC bridging. Tactical bridging assets
should be freed up as soon as possible to ensure that they support combat maneuver and sustain the tempo
of operations. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for additional information on employing the armored
vehicle-launched bridge, the joint assault bridge, the Wolverine bridge, and the rapidly employed bridge
system.)

SUPPORT BRIDGING
8-17. Support bridging is used to establish semipermanent or permanent support to planned movements
and road networks. Support bridges are normally used to replace tactical bridging as they provide greater
gap-crossing capability to the force than tactical bridging. Units typically deploy and recover these systems
when and where little or no direct fire threat exists. Bank preparation and improvement are important
planning factors for support bridging.
8-18. The support bridging category contains the float bridge (standard and improved ribbon), medium
girder bridge, dry support bridge, Bailey bridge, and rapidly employed bridge system. Although a rapidly
employed bridge system is often considered a tactical bridge, it is more accurately described as a support
bridge because it lacks crew survivability.

Commercial Bridging
8-19. Another support bridging option is procurement of commercially available panel bridges. (See ATTP
3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for more information on employing the Bailey bridge, medium girder bridge, dry
support bridge, and logistics support bridge. See TM 3-34.23 for more information on the Bailey bridge.
See TM 3-34.21/MCRP 3-17.1A for additional information on the medium girder bridge.)

Float Bridging
8-20. A float bridge is designed as a rapid and temporary means to cross maneuver forces over wet gaps by
building raft configurations to transport forces across the wet gap or by emplacing bays to span the entire
width of the wet gap. U.S. forces can use float bridge rafts as assault bridging assets if needed. These rafts
can be used during buildup to assist in assembling full floating bridges during bridgehead operations.
Floating causeways can be used as floating bridges to augment standard floating bridge capability. There is
generally no design limit to the length of this bridge. The normal limiting factor is the quantity of bays and
boats; however, the velocity or current of the water, tidal variations, water depth, underwater obstructions,
floating debris, and entry and exit bank slopes can also limit float bridge operations. Descriptions and
construction techniques for the standard ribbon bridge are found in TM 3-34.85/MCRP 3-17A, and
techniques for the improved ribbon bridge are explained in TM 5-5420-278-10.
8-21. Float bridging may be used when there is a lack of existing fixed facilities or no suitable construction
materials to fabricate, reinforce, or repair existing bridges. When the situation calls for prolonged use or
heavy traffic, an existing bridge should be upgraded or new construction initiated. (See ATTP 3-
90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for technical information on employing float bridging.)

LINE-OF-COMMUNICATIONS BRIDGING
8-22. LOC bridging is generally conducted in areas that are free from the direct influence of enemy action.
Typically, its primary purpose is to facilitate the sustainment of the force according to ADRP 4-0. It can be
used as a semipermanent or permanent structure. LOC bridges are built with the assumption that, once
emplaced, will not likely be removed until replaced by a more permanent structure. LOC bridges may be
tactical fixed bridges if the intention is to leave the system in place for an extended period and they are not
required to support combat maneuver.

8-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Bridging

Planning Considerations
8-23. Planning factors should account for the extended use of the bridge and increased wear because of
extended use. When planning for LOC bridging, planners should consider that an existing permanent
bridge may be damaged or may not be strong enough for mission requirements. Engineers repair and
reinforce a bridge using standard or nonstandard materials to meet mission requirements. The new
construction of LOC bridges is possible; however, improving existing structures is most desirable to avoid
the intense resource and time requirements associated with new construction. Examples of common U.S.
LOC bridging are the Bailey bridge and the logistics support bridge. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 for
more information on LOC bridging.)

BRIDGE SITE SELECTION

8-24. Selecting an adequate site for a bridge requires special considerations. This section discusses the
reconnaissance requirements for new and existing bridges.

Geospatial Considerations
8-25. Engineers use the engineer function of geospatial engineering to greatly improve situational
understanding (to include terrain) and select optimal bridging sites through enhanced terrain visualization
using high-resolution satellite imagery or unmanned aircraft system video. The requirement for the
engineer is to have the appropriate software. Engineer terrain teams should assist in reconnaissance and
assessment conditions in areas at or around potential gap-crossing sites. Terrain teams have software that
can assist in mission planning by determining soil conditions, hydrology, vegetation types, general weather
conditions, and other useful aspects of the terrain. (See ATP 3-34.80 for additional information on
geospatial engineering.)

Bridge Reconnaissance
8-26. ERTs should be used to collect data to determine acceptable terrain and conditions for new bridge
construction. Through reconnaissance information, planners can determine which type of bridge or bridge
combinations are right for the mission based on available resources. (See FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4.)

Note. See ADRP 5-0 for information on bridges in mission planning variables.

8-27. The final selected bridge site is determined by numerous factors, which are reflected in its structural
design. Primary screening considerations include—
 Access and approach roads. Determine if the preexisting roads are adequate. The time to
construct approaches can be a controlling factor in determining if a crossing site is feasible.
Approaches should be straight, with two lanes, and have less than a six percent slope.
 Widths. Determine the width of the gap to be spanned at normal and flood stages for wet gaps.
 Banks. Estimate the character and shape of the banks accurately enough to establish abutment
positions. The banks should be firm and level to limit the need for extensive grading. Select
straight reaches to avoid scour.
 Flow characteristics. Determine the stream velocity and erosion data, taking into consideration
the rise and fall of the water. A good site has steady current that runs parallel to the bank at less
than 3 feet per second.
 Stream bottoms. Record the characteristics of the bottom. This will help determine the type of
supports and footings required. An actual soil sample is useful in the planning process,
particularly in wide gaps that may require an intermediate pier.
 Elevations. Determine and record accurate cross-sectional dimensions of the site to determine
the bridge height. Planners must also know of any existing structures that the bridge must cross
over.
 Materials. Determine the availability and accessibility of firm material, such as rock, for
improving bank conditions.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 8-5

Chapter 8

8-28. If these primary considerations for bridge site selection appear favorable, planners may apply the
following evaluation criteria:
 Proper concealment for personnel and equipment on both sides of the gap.
 The location of bivouac and preconstruction storage sites.
 Firm banks with less than a five percent grade to reduce preparation work. Less than one percent
grade will also require site preparation.
 Terrain that permits the rapid construction of short approach roads to existing road networks on
both sides of gap.
 Turnarounds for construction equipment.
 Large trees or other holdfasts near the banks for fastening anchor cables and guy lines.
 A steady, moderate current that is parallel to the bank.
 A bottom that is free of snags, rocks, and shoals and is firm enough to permit some type of
spread footing.
 Determination of the number of assembly sites (upstream or downstream) for floating portions
of the bridge. If the current is strong, locate all assembly sites upstream from the bridge site.
 Proper siting of logistics support operations to mitigate the possible effects of flooding.

8-29. Criteria for establishing a float bridge site may be the same as those for general bridge site selection.
The following are specific float bridge site considerations:
 Banks should be low, firm, moderately sloping, and free from obstructions. Existing or easily
prepared assembly sites are desirable.
 The stable bank should have a slope of 8° or less and a water depth of at least 48 inches on the
near shore.
 The water velocity near the shore should be less than 5 feet per second. If the current is faster
(up to 10 feet per second), additional boats, personnel, and time will be required to emplace the
bridge.
 Natural holdfasts for anchorages are desirable. Float bridging must be installed far enough
downstream from a demolished or under-capacity bridge to avoid interference with
reconstruction or reinforcement operations. Unstable portions of a demolished bridge and other
debris that may damage the float bridge should be removed before emplacing the float bridge.

Reconnaissance of Existing Bridges

8-30. Part of the site selection process is a reconnaissance of existing structures to evaluate the physical
condition of existing bridges. ERTs inspect the bridge to determine its load-carrying capacity
(classification) and its structural integrity. The engineer reconnaissance team should determine whether the
situation warrants emplacing a tactical, support, or LOC bridge. When a damaged bridge is being
considered for repair or replacement, reconnaissance information should include a report on the
serviceability of the in-place structural members, local materials that might be reused in other construction,
and the potential for overbridging. (See ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8 and TM 3-34.22/MCRP 3-17.1B.)
Maximum use should be made of existing bridge sites to take advantage of existing roads, abutments, piers,
and spans that are serviceable.
8-31. Bridge reconnaissance is classified as hasty or deliberate, depending on the amount of detail
required, time available, and security in the AO. Both types of reconnaissance are fully discussed in FM 3-
34.170/MCWP 3-17.4. A deliberate reconnaissance is usually conducted in support of MSR and LOC
bridging operations since greater traffic requirements dictate that time and qualified personnel be made
available to support the task.
8-32. The use of the automated route reconnaissance kit will assist the engineer reconnaissance team by
tracking the location, speed, curve, and slope of roads and the obstacles encountered along the route. An
engineer light dive team can assist with the deliberate reconnaissance by providing nearshore and far-shore
crossing site data. Additionally, they can mark and prepare landing sites, riverbanks, and exit routes for the
crossing force. A deliberate reconnaissance includes a thorough structural analysis; a report on approaches
to the bridge site; a report on the nature of the crossing site, abutments, intermediate supports, and bridge

8-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Bridging

structure; repair and demolition information; and the possibility of alternate crossing sites. After a proper
reconnaissance, a bridge study is completed. This is the detailed analysis of the selected site. To complete
the bridge study, the engineer should—
 Request a topographic map to a scale of approximately 1:25,000. The map is used to plot the
location and obtain the distances and elevations for design purposes.
 Determine whether physical characteristics at the site limit normal construction methods or
interfere with construction plant installation.
 Make a detailed survey to furnish accurate information from which the bridge layout can be
developed, materials requisitioned, and the construction procedure outlined. Submit the survey
as plan and profile site drawings.
 Conduct a foundation investigation. Develop a soil profile along the proposed bridge centerline
and at pier and abutment locations.

BRIDGE DESIGN
8-33. Bridges are designed to match the specific site conditions, proposed traffic, load-bearing capacity,
type of materials available, and time available for actual construction. The various combinations of bridge
types allows for a variety of designs, ranging from beam bridges, arch bridges, suspension bridges, and
truss bridges. Bridges are usually designed to be standard or nonstandard. Consult the specific standard
bridge model technical manuals for detailed information on applying design variations. (See TM 3-
34.22/MCRP 3-17.1B for more information on designs for military nonstandard fixed bridges.)

BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION
8-34. An efficient MSR network must be capable of carrying expected traffic loads. Often, bridging is the
weak link in the load-carrying capacity of a route. Military standard bridging is assembled in modules that
result in a bridge of known capacities. Support bridging is designed to pass an uninterrupted flow of
combat and tactical vehicles that generally fall within a military load classification below 60. However,
some combinations of vehicle size and weight may exceed a given bridge design capacity.
8-35. Where heavier loads are anticipated, it is best to designate MSRs along routes that already possess
bridges with appropriate classification ratings or to design and emplace bridges that can carry these loads.
The selective use of fords, in conjunction with MSR bridge sites, can provide a solution in selected cases.
8-36. Situations may arise when it is not possible to safely accommodate all traffic designated to cross
MSR bridges. Guidelines are set for special crossings (caution and risk) for oversize or overweight loads on
military standard, nonstandard, and float bridging. Specific guidance for determining special crossings is
contained in TM 3-34.85/MCRP 3-17A, TM 5-5420-212-10-1(Army)/TM 08676A-10/1-1 (Marine Corps),
TM 3-34.23, TM 5-5420-278-10, and TM 5-5420-279-10. Joint task force engineer planners must
recommend appropriate circumstances for risk or caution crossings to the commander and receive the
delegation of authority for approval of such crossings.
8-37. An engineer officer must periodically inspect the bridge for signs of failure when routine caution
crossings are made and after each risk crossing. Structurally damaged parts must be replaced, repaired, or
reinforced before traffic can resume. An engineer light dive team can assist in determining the extent of any
subsurface damage and can complete repairs. (See TM 5-600/AFJPAM 32-1088 for additional information
on bridge inspections, maintenance, and repair.)
8-38. All civilian bridges are not designed to support military MSR traffic, and the required load
classifications may not be known when forces initially enter the AO. There are numerous bridge types that
forces may encounter in a given AO, and there is no single, easy approach to classifying all of them.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 8-7

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 9
Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities
Military base camps have played an instrumental and historical role through various
forms and configurations to support the warrior, whether serving as a platform for
sustainment or as a stronghold to repel enemy attacks. Operating from base camps is
a fundamental tactic of ground-based forces. Base camps may have a specific
purpose, or they may be multifunctional. (See ADRP 4-0.) U.S. Army and Marine
base camp doctrine is provided in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. The use of the term
base camp in this chapter includes the descriptive purpose of facilities that meet the
definition of a base camp, such as en route facilities, access facilities, theater-opening
facilities, bed-down facilities, logistics support facilities, and facilities designated as
bases. All force bed-down facilities are not within base camp perimeters. This chapter
discusses the distinct differences between base camps and bed-down facilities. It
focuses on the GE aspects of base camps (including planning and design, standards,
site layout, construction, and O&M) and other support facilities.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

9-1. This section discusses the responsibilities and capabilities of the U.S. Army, Marine Corps, CCDR,
Service component commander, engineer commander, USACE, and Installation Management Command.
Each entity plays a unique and important role in the support required for base camps or bed-down facilities.

UNITED STATES ARMY AND UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS

9-2. U.S. Army and Marine engineers have key responsibilities and capabilities to support base camps
and force bed-down facilities, but they do not own base camp life cycle activities or provide all bed-down
capabilities. Base camp development and force bed-down are team efforts. U.S. Army forces typically rely
on a mix of bases or base camps to deploy combat power to an operational depth. (See ADRP 4-0.)
9-3. The designated base camp commander temporarily owns the base camp. An engineer may be
designated as a base camp commander, generally with no higher priority than any other officer. Engineers
can be assigned to fill some of the staff positions to operate and maintain a base camp. For example, an
engineer unit may be assigned the responsibility to plan, design, construct, operate, or maintain a base
camp to complete these tasks for a base camp as a turnkey project and then command (own) and operate
from the base camp.
9-4. All Services are capable of planning and executing bed-down support operations. General engineers
can plan, design, and construct base camps and operate and maintain engineer systems for base camps and
force bed-down support operations. (See JP 3-34.)

COMBATANT COMMANDER
9-5. The CCDR is responsible for the major decisions involving base camp location and development
within the AO. The CCDR may delegate authority for base camp decisionmaking to Service component
commanders or to commanders exercising Title 10 USC Service responsibilities. Decisions are often made
in consultation with the HN, subordinate commanders, and U.S. Department of State representatives. The
CCDR establishes the policies, requirements, and procedures for master planning in the JOA. The
requirements for master planning are linked to the theater-basing strategy. The CCDR specifies (in
OPLANs and OPORDs) the construction standards for the overall operation of facilities in the theater to

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-1

Chapter 9

minimize the construction effort expended on any given facility, while assuring that the facilities
adequately support the mission and meet health and safety requirements.

SERVICE COMPONENT COMMANDER

9-6. The Service component commander establishes a staff engineer section with a facilities and
construction department that manages engineering and construction within the AO under the appropriate
Title 10 USC responsibilities. The staff engineer section is responsible for developing the base camp and
bed-down plan for Service personnel and equipment arriving in the area of responsibility. With guidance
from the CCDR and approval from the Service component commander, the staff engineer section provides
guidance on engineering and construction missions; establishes standards for construction; conducts
coordination with the HN; participates in funding, utilization, and resourcing boards; and coordinates with
USACE or the NAVFAC and the theater engineer command. Their responsibilities include integrating the
legal, force health protection, and other aspects of environmental considerations provided from the
respective areas of staff expertise. Service component commanders produce a service level scheme of base
camps that subordinate commanders use as the framework to develop their scheme of base camps.

ENGINEER COMMANDERS
9-7. Engineer commanders and staff are responsible for assisting the supported commanders by
furnishing engineer advice and recommendations to the commander and other staff officers; preparing the
engineering portions of plans, estimates, and orders that pertain to base camps; participating on project
approval and acquisition review boards and base camp working groups as necessary; and coordinating and
supervising specific engineer activities for which the engineer staff is responsible. The engineer staff assists
the commander by performing a variety of functions to synchronize engineer operations in the operational
area. (See FM 3-34 and MCWP 3-17 for more information.)

UNITES STATES ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

9-8. USACE is responsible for providing standards for construction; guidance on scalability,
standardization, and modularity; expertise on contingency standard designs; and management of the AFCS.
They also manage the worldwide power contingency contracts that provide power system services in
conflict and disaster response locations. USACE provides deployable augmentation teams to support base
camps.

INSTALLATION MANAGEMENT COMMAND

9-9. The Installation Management Command is responsible for providing guidance on U.S. Army
installation and facility management. The U.S. Army organization with premier knowledge on best
practices can be transferred to facilities and base camp operations and management. The Installation
Management Command may provide deployable augmentation teams to support base camps.

PLANNING AND DESIGN

9-10. Combat engineers normally support initial entry or access into enemy-held territory through a
beachhead, airhead, or bridgehead. The initial secured and defended area is then expanded into a substantial
defended area, also referred to as a lodgment. GE may support the initial entry or access through LOTS or
JLOTS and airfield or port construction, maintenance, or repair. General engineers replace combat
engineers so that they can move forward with maneuver forces. General engineers then provide support to
expand the lodgment in size and capabilities as it progresses to a support area or joint security area, and
then base development may begin. Some of the expedient bed-down facilities may be upgraded and may be
contained within base camps. Base camps should be planned from the start of the mission, but requirements
may evolve over time. Bed-down facilities may be required before, during, and after combat operations.
9-11. Base camps may also be established in nations adjacent to the operational area to support deployment
before or after initial entry into an area. For example, an intermediate staging base may also serve as a base
camp. GE may also be required to support other en route facility requirements.

9-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

9-12. Base camps and bed-down facilities may include new or prefabricated construction and make
maximum use of existing structures (with and without repair or modification).

SPECIFIC JOINT TERMINOLOGY

9-13. Base development (less force beddown) is the acquisition, development, expansion, improvement,
construction and/or replacement of the facilities and resources of a location to support forces (JP 3-34).
9-14. Force beddown is the provision of expedient facilities for troop support to provide a platform for the
projection of force (JP 3-24). Force bed-down and base camp development is described in JP 3-34 as
separate subfunctions under the sustainment function. (See JP 3-34 for a discussion on bed-down
engineering operations, including troop and aircraft bed-down.)

SPECIFIC UNITED STATES ARMY AND UNITED STATES MARINE TERMINOLOGY

9-15. A base camp is an evolving military facility that supports the military operations of a deployed unit
and provides the necessary support and services for sustained operations (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N).
Base camps are nonpermanent by design and designated as a base when the intention is to make them
permanent. A base or base camp has a defined perimeter and established access controls and should take
advantage of natural and man-made features. A commander designates an area or facility as a base or base
camp and often designates a single commander as the base or base camp commander who is responsible for
protection, terrain management, and day-to-day operations of the base or base camp. Units located within
the base camp are under the tactical control of the base camp commander for security and defense.
According to ADRP 4-0, base camps may be joint or single Service and will routinely support U.S. and
multinational forces. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and JP 3-34 for additional information on base camps.)
9-16. Base camp location selection is the process of evaluating a series of possible locations for a base
camp. (See EP 1105-3-1.) It is part of the overall base camp planning development process. Selecting the
best location for a base camp is a balance between operational, sustainment, and engineering requirements,
and the operational and mission variables. All sites considered as potential base camp sites should be
scalable and easily expanded. The most desirable site locations are those that are easiest to secure and
defend. When the establishment of a base camp is being considered, identify at least three suitable, possible
locations (COAs or options) before recommending the most advantageous COA. The entire staff should be
involved in evaluating potential base camp sites. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N, EP 1105-3-1, and JP 3-34
for additional information.)
9-17. Base camp development planning is a time-sensitive and mission-driven, cyclical planning process
that determines and documents the physical layout of properly located, sized, and interrelated land areas,
facilities, utilities, and other factors to achieve maximum mission effectiveness, maintainability, and
expansion capability in theater (EP 1105-3-1). The process must also address the eventual cleanup and
closure of the base camp after the U.S. military mission is completed. Base camp development planning
products include the planning report, maps, plan drawings, and other geophysical information. Further, the
tabulation of existing and required facilities is essential in defining real property assets and shortfalls and,
subsequently, in developing projects and other actions to mitigate deficiencies. Some documents, such as
selected maps, are used on a daily basis by assigned units and by those individuals who are responsible for
operating and maintaining the base camp. For more detailed information, see EP 1105-3-1.
9-18. Base development (less force beddown) is the acquisition, development, expansion, improvement,
construction and/or replacement of the facilities and resources of a location to support forces. (See
JP 3-34.) According to ADRP 4-0, a base camp is an evolving military facility that supports the military
operations of a deployed unit and provides the necessary support and services for sustained operations. (See
JP 3-34 for more information.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-3

Chapter 9

9-19. A design guide is a design tool for standardizing sustainable energy and water efficiency, safety, and
protection measures; and promoting visual order and consistent architectural themes. It is a written and
graphically depicted set of standards that governs the design, development, visual aspects, and
maintainability of a specific base camp. A design guide applies mostly to longer-duration base camps and
those that will likely be transferred and become permanent facilities/sites in the HN. The guide also may be
used to define performance and customer service standards for various base operations functions. (ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and EP 1105-3-1 for additional information.)
9-20. An environmental baseline survey is—
 (Joint) A multi-disciplinary site survey conducted prior to or in the initial stage of a joint
operational deployment (JP 3-34).
 (Army) An assessment or study done on an area of interest (a property) in order to define the
environmental state or condition of that property prior to use by military forces. Used to
determine the environmental impact of property use by military forces and the level of
environmental restoration needed prior to returning the property upon their departure. (FM 3-
34.5/MCRP 4-11B)
9-21. The EBS documents the original environmental condition of the land. An EBS is required if an area
is to be occupied by U.S. forces for more than 30 days. (See FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B, EP 1105-3-1, and JP
3-34 for additional information on the EBS.)
9-22. General site planning is finding and plotting, to scale, a logical location for every aboveground area,
facility, and infrastructure requirement, along with the portrayal of the various, often invisible, major utility
corridors, safety clearance zones, and various boundaries that influence and support the base camp
development plan (EP 1105-3-1). It requires multidisciplinary expertise in a process that links architecture,
engineering, military operations planning, antiterrorism/force protection, the environment, social science,
and community planning. The result of this process establishes plan-view dimensions, corridors, zones, and
boundaries for the development of a base camp, usually portrayed on overlays to maps of the area. (ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and EP 1105-3-1 for additional information.)
9-23. Land use planning is the process of mapping and planning the allocation of land use areas based on
general use categories, mission analysis products, functional requirements and interrelationships, and
criteria and guidelines (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N). A land use plan is like a jigsaw puzzle, because
each piece of the plan is intended to fit together to form a whole that is greater than the sum of the parts.
The plan is sized and shaped to account for constraints that cannot be overcome, to take advantage of
opportunities that exist, to accommodate existing requirements, and to allow for future expansion.
Compatible land uses are placed close to each other, and incompatible land uses are not. (ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and EP 1105-3-1 for more information.)
9-24. The master planning for base camps generally follows the process that is used for permanent
installations, except it has a shortened planning horizon and may not be prepared to the same level of detail.
(See AR 210-20, ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N, and EP 1105-3-1 for additional information on master
planning.)
9-25. Site design (sometimes referred to as site planning) includes the actions taken by a design
professional to draw up and prepare detailed plans, specifications, and cost estimates for the construction or
renovation of facility complexes, individual buildings, infrastructure, and supporting utilities. The term site
design is used to avoid confusion with the terms site planning and general site planning. (ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for more information.)
9-26. Base camp cleanup and closure is the process of preparing and executing alternative COAs to vacate
a base camp after a U.S. military mission is complete. An archival record is prepared that includes the
operational history of the base camp, the actions taken to clean up and close the base camp, and a
description of cleanup and closure tasks that could not be completed which may lead to land use, health,
safety, and environmental problems in the future. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N and EP 1105-3-1 for more
information.)

9-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

BED-DOWN FACILITIES
9-27. Some expeditionary or initial bed-down facilities are located within a base camp after base
development begins. The CCDR may choose to develop some base camps very early in a campaign or
operation so that some bed-down facilities are within base camps from the start. Bases and base camps
support the reception, bed-down, and employment of personnel, equipment, and logistics. Bed-down
facilities are expeditionary or initial operating facilities with construction standards designated by the
CCDR. Force bed-down facilities include billeting, dining halls, religious support facilities, medical clinics,
hygiene facilities motor pools, and aircraft facilities.
9-28. The planning for bed-down is fully integrated with the CCDR basing strategy, since some of these
initial facilities will later be expanded and upgraded. Life cycle planning flows from bed-down, to a
scheme of base camps, to transfer or close. The information generated from master planning facilitates
future cost benefit analyses that enable decisionmaking for other aspects of base camp operations. (See AR
210-20 for additional information on real property master planning for U.S. Army installations for
considerations that can be applied to contingency operations.)

BASE CAMP DOCTRINE

9-29. The base camp life cycle, classification system, principles, and functional areas are discussed below.
(ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for additional information.)

Base Camp Life Cycle

9-30. The base camp life cycle embodies the major activities that are involved in base camps. These
activities are mutually reinforcing, not mutually exclusive, and include—
 Strategic system and policy integration.
 Planning and design.
 Construction.
 Operations.
 Transfer and closure.
 Mission command.

Base Camp Classification System

9-31. Base camps are broadly classified by size, level of capabilities, and purpose. This classification
system provides common terminology and a framework that aids the conduct of all base camp life cycle
activities. The four sizes of base camps are extra small, small, medium, and large; each size has a range of
population that the base camp is designed to support. The levels of capabilities are basic, expanded, and
enhanced. The levels of capabilities describe the characteristics of a base camp in terms of support and
services (overall quality of life) that are provided. This includes the nature of the construction effort applied
that is commensurate with the anticipated duration of the mission.
9-32. Base camps are developed to serve a specific purpose (such as an intermediate staging or forward
operating or logistics base or as support for reception, staging, onward movement, integration, training,
detainee processing, and resettlement); or they may be developed to serve a multifunctional purpose. The
designated purpose of the base camp and the operational requirements of tenant units serve as primary
guides in designing the base camp.

Base Camp Principles

9-33. Successful base camps are characterized by four principles that are incorporated throughout the life
cycle. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N) Commanders and staffs use the base camp principles as a guide for
analytical thinking. These principles are as follows:
 Scalability.
 Sustainability.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-5

Chapter 9

 Standardization.
 Survivability.

Base Camp Functional Areas

9-34. Base camp functional areas are related base camp tasks and activities, and they are grouped together
to facilitate planning and execution. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N) During mission planning, the base
camp functional areas help commanders and staffs organize the broad range of base camp requirements and
the supporting information and tasks required for execution. The following are the five base camp
functional areas:
 Operations.
 Logistics.
 Services.
 Protection.
 Facilities and infrastructure.

STANDARDS
9-35. Table 9-1 provides an example of CCDR construction standards for various types of construction that
guide GE activities.

Table 9-1. Sample construction standards

Type of
Initial Temporary Semipermanent
Construction
Minimal to no site Clearing and grading for facilities Engineered site preparation,
work; maximized (including drainage and revetments); including paved surfaces for
use of existing petroleum, oil, and lubricants; vehicle traffic areas and aircraft
Site work
facilities ammunition storage; aircraft parking; parking, building foundations,
aggregate for heavily used hardstands; and concrete floor slabs
and soil stabilization
Unit tents Tents (may have wood frames and Wood frame structures,
Troop housing flooring) relocatable structures and
modular building systems
Tactical power Tactical power system or deployable Sustained power system
Electricity
system prime power system
Water points and Water points, wells, and potable water Limited pressurized water
bladders production and pressurized water distribution systems that
Water distribution systems support hospitals, dining
facilities, firefighting units, and
other high-volume users
Contracted or unit- Portable refrigeration with freezer units Refrigeration installed in
Cold storage purchased for medical, food, and maintenance temporary structures
storage
Unit field sanitation Organic equipment, evaporative ponds, Waterborne to austere
kits, pit latrines pit or burnout latrines, lagoons for treatment facilities—priorities
hospitals, and sewage lift stations are hospitals, dining facilities,
Sanitation
bathhouses, decontamination
sites, and other high-volume
users
NA Tactical surfacing, including matting, Conventional pavements
Airfield
aggregate, soil stabilization, and concrete
pavement1
pads
Fuel storage Bladders Bladders Bladders and steel tanks
1
The type of airfield surfacing to be used is based on soil conditions and the expected weight and number of aircraft
involved in operations.
Legend:
NA not applicable

9-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

9-36. DOD construction agents are the principal organizations to design, award, and manage construction
contracts in support of some semipermanent facilities and permanent facilities.
9-37. Major construction standards are as follows:
 Semipermanent. Semipermanent construction standards allow for finishes, materials, and
systems selected for moderate energy efficiency, maintenance, and life cycle cost with a life
expectancy of more than 2 years, but less than 10 years.
 Permanent. Permanent construction is designed and constructed with finishes, materials, and
systems selected for high-energy efficiency and low maintenance and life cycle cost. Permanent
construction has a life expectancy of more than 10 years. The CCDR must specifically approve
permanent construction.

BASE CAMP DEVELOPMENT PLANNING

9-38. Engineers must be familiar with numerous planning considerations and design factors when planning
the base camp. Major base camp planning and design considerations include the base camp doctrine and
standards highlighted in the previous sections of this manual and also include the following areas:
 Protection. Force protection considerations are critical to the development of base camps.
 Facility standards identification. The CCDR establishes the base camp standard for the JOA
by an OPORD or fragmentary order. These standards are intended to provide the CCDR’s
expectations for base camp living and operating conditions to component commanders.
 Master planning. The CCDR establishes the policies and procedures for developing, approving,
and implementing base camp master planning in the JOA. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for
additional information.)
 Construction management. Responsible components (often USACE, theater engineer
command engineers, or facility engineer teams) will track the development of base camp
construction according to the master plan priorities and report progress.
9-39. Base camp planners must be familiar with the appropriate publications, references, and planning
tools required to develop a base development site plan. A base development site plan is an overlay of a
topographic map or a computer-aided design that shows the location of a future development site and the
planned physical site layouts and locations of required areas (facilities and infrastructure required for a
specific base camp). The base development site plan is dimensioned to scale with plan-view outlines of
proposed buildings, utility systems, road networks, and site improvements and the necessary topographic
features. A base development site plan is prepared as part of the overall base camp development planning.
9-40. Preparing a base development site plan is a team effort and requires multidisciplinary expertise that
links architecture, engineering, military operations planning, protection, the environment, social sciences,
and community planning. It includes a set of interrelated documents that record the planning process
involved in laying out, determining the scope, and initiating implementation actions for a base camp during
contingency operations.
9-41. There is no right answer in developing a base development site plan. Each base development site
plan is unique and is shaped by the mission; the units it will support; the land upon which it will be
developed; and the respective backgrounds, skills, and contributions of the planning team members. Once
the base development site plan is completed, an action plan is developed for its implementation. The
appropriate CCDR or theater commander designates the proper level of command authority to approve the
base development site plan.
9-42. The decision to establish a base camp in a TO can be made at any time during the process of
planning and executing a military operation. Ideally, it should be made very early in the process to allow
appropriate planning in a proactive, rather than reactive, environment. USACE usually has the mission to
plan or assist in the planning and development of base camps in support of contingency operations.
Engineers and planners must be prepared to support and assist users (whose first priority is the mission) in
making effective base camp site selection and layout decisions. A base camp could be established in a
hostile nation after active combat operations cease (such as in Iraq), in a friendly nation as a location to be

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-7

Chapter 9

used in the event of a deployment (such as in Kuwait or Turkey), or in a friendly nation to support active
combat operations in a nearby country (such as in Qatar).
9-43. USACE initiated base camp development planning to assist military planners and establish a process.
Key considerations in base camp development planning include—
 Selecting suitable base camp locations, while coordinating with CCDRs, the U.S. Department of
State, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, other federal agencies (as appropriate), and
the HN.
 Planning and documenting the detailed actions needed for a properly located and sized base
camp that consider related land areas, facilities, utilities, and other factors to provide U.S. forces
with the safest, healthiest, and best living and working conditions in the TO.
 Planning and executing the cleanup and closure of a base camp in a manner that meets U.S. and
HN standards or those approved by the theater command.
9-44. The base camp development planning process focuses primarily on the engineer-specific areas of
base camp planning, but also requires team effort contributions from many participants. Base camp
planners assist in the location, design, construction, cleanup, and closure of base camps that support
military forces or governmental organizations across the range of military operations.
9-45. Integral to the base camp development planning process is the expectation that base camp
development has a limited time frame and, therefore, will require rapid planning and fast-track
construction. Other factors (such as rapidly changing military and political situations, parallel missions in
the same or neighboring regions, or a reintroduction of combat operations into the target area of the
proposed base camp) may require the steps in the planning process to be altered. Also, the requirement to
serve HN needs and address concerns regarding the establishment of a single base camp or a series of base
camps may change the described steps of the planning process and the options influencing flexibility within
each planning step. The intended life-span of the facilities and infrastructure of a base camp depends on
mission-driven and economic decisions. A likely component of this effort is the FFE support that USACE
will provide to the tactical commanders who determine the need for a base camp.
9-46. The base camp development planning process is a time sensitive and mission driven, cyclical
planning process that determines and documents the physical layout of properly located, sized, and
interrelated land areas, facilities, utilities, and other factors to achieve maximum mission effectiveness,
maintainability, and expansion capability in theater. The base camp development planning process is
depicted in figure 9-1. Planners rarely perform these steps in exact sequence; consequently, numbers are
not assigned to these steps. At times, planners may enter the process when it is well under way, since
planning is iterative and intuitive in nature. (See EP 1105-3-1 for more information on base camp
development planning.)

Figure 9-1. Base camp development planning process

9-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

9-47. The base camp development planning process requires a multidisciplinary, multistaff team approach
to efficiently identify, analyze, and develop workable solutions to the many challenges that will require
addressing. Base camp planning team members may consist of commanders and staffs from the units that
will occupy, or may already be occupying, the base camp; operational planners and protection experts; civil
affairs specialists; technical experts in engineering and other design professions; environmental and
preventive medicine experts; resource managers; range and training experts; program analysts; contracting,
real estate, and other legal specialists; and HN planners. In other words, organizations that have a major
role or will impact the base camp development planning should be included in the team.
9-48. The base camp development planning process is an iterative process that is continuous; it is not
finished until the facilities and land are turned back over to the HN. Base camp development plans must be
shaped to improve base camp living and working conditions. For example—
 Tents convert to shelters; shelters convert to buildings.
 Field sanitation converts to chemicals; chemicals convert to waterborne systems.

9-49. All levels of command are involved in real property planning and its related facility programming
actions. Therefore, base camp development planning is reviewed and approved by the base camp
commander or designated representative by means of a base camp planning board and by higher echelons
as appropriate. This procedure has the added advantage of serving as a check and balance against hasty or
capricious planning. The additional technical review and approval of development plans for specialized
projects and facilities (such as the planning of munitions storage and handling facilities, ranges and training
areas, and high-security and aviation facilities) are required.
9-50. Base camp development planners should consider the objective end state condition of the base camp
facilities and the land area it occupies from the very start of the planning process. Initial agreements should
address the cleanup, closure, and disposal or turnover of facilities to the HN that were once occupied by
U.S. forces. The objective condition of formerly occupied land must be thoroughly defined, because in
many cases, the original owners want it returned in the same condition that it was in prior to U.S.
occupancy.
9-51. The TCMS is the official U.S. Army tool for base camp development planning and design.

FACILITY PLANNING AND DESIGN

9-52. Adequate bed-down, base camp, and support area facilities are as vital across the range of military
operations as they are critical to sustainment operations. Engineers at the strategic, operational, and tactical
levels construct, maintain, and repair facilities for receiving, storing, and distributing all classes of supply
and supporting all other logistics functions. Engineers are involved in the procurement, construction,
maintenance, and repair of logistics facilities and associated environmental considerations for general
supply and the more specialized purpose of storing munitions.
9-53. Engineers tasked to support logistics installations have four major missions: provide new facilities,
maintain existing facilities, recover and repair facilities damaged by hostile actions, and upgrade existing
facilities to meet minimum standards or usage requirements. In some CCDR AOs, peacetime construction
and HN agreements have provided extensive facilities. In less-developed theaters, there may be no
preexisting logistics facilities. In such theaters, adapting and converting commercial property to military
use or constructing new facilities may be required to provide logistic support facilities.
9-54. Due to the magnitude of new construction and maintenance and repair of existing infrastructure
generally associated with support facilities, it is recommended that planners and designers research the
applicable Army regulations, Department of the Army pamphlets, doctrine manuals, Unified Facilities
Criteria, standard design guides, technical manuals, and other applicable guidance. This includes—
 AR 415-16.
 TM 5-301-2.
 TM 5-301-4.
 TM 5-304.
 UFC 4 series.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-9

Chapter 9

PLANNING FACTORS
9-55. Planning factors can be found in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N.
9-56. The ASCC engineer staff and subordinate commands rely heavily on FFE, in the form of forward
deployment and reachback, to accomplish base camp design, construction, and management functions. The
facilities engineering team is ideally suited to serve as a directorate of public works for a base camp in a
contingency operation. (See FM 3-34 for a discussion on the teams and resources available.)

BASE CAMP PLANNING AND DESIGN

9-57. There is no single correct design to a base camp. There are many possible designs and variations that
are efficient and functional. Specific variables include whether the constructing unit will be—
 Occupying existing facilities or building from the ground up.
 Using local labor and materials or bringing them in from other nations.
 Using a standards book or specific commander’s guidance.

9-58. The design must also consider the operational aspects of the base camp and include base camp land
use categories that will support the purpose of the base camp. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for
information on base camp land use categories.)
9-59. To determine the requirements for land, facilities, and infrastructure, base camp development
planners must assess the mission, population, purpose, life-span, construction standards, and commander’s
guidance.

Population
9-60. The base camp population includes tenant and transient units and organizations, which can include
U.S., multinational, and HN personnel, units, and organizations (CAAF and non-CAAF). Transient units
and organizations are those that come to the base camp for specified services and support, which may not
necessarily require overnight stays. Determining the number of transients that a base camp will serve is a
critical factor in accurately identifying requirements for base camp facilities, infrastructure, services, and
support. Sources of population data for a base camp include—
 Table of organization and equipment documents.
 Table of distribution and allowance documents.
 Nonappropriated fund documents and other U.S. government documents that provide data on
segments of the population, such as contractor personnel and local national employees.
 The time-phased force and deployment list.
 The civilian tracking system, which provides information regarding U.S. civilians present or
scheduled to be present in the TO.
 U.S. government contracting documents that authorize U.S. and foreign contractors and HN
employees. This personnel count must be added to the personnel count of the assigned military
units to determine the total planned population of a proposed base camp.
 The purpose or reason for using the facility to support the mission.
 The projected service life for the use of the facility.
 Construction standards as found in Unified Facilities Criteria and local building codes.
 Commander’s guidance as outlined in the OPLAN or OPORD.

Fire Protection
9-61. Fire protection must be planned into the design of all base camps. Tent separations, wiring standards,
and Soldier or Marine education are all critical components in reducing or preventing base camp fires and
mitigating their effects on Soldiers, Marines, and equipment. On a historical note, more than 50 tents in
Kuwait were lost due to fires during Operation Enduring Freedom/Operation Iraq Freedom. Most fires were
due to improper electrical wiring connections and involved contractor-supplied tents that lacked the same

9-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

flame-retardant material that military-issued tents have. A lack of proper spacing, cleanliness, unit
discipline, fire protection equipment, and training contribute to fire hazard.

Note. It is possible to retrofit tentage that is not flame-retardant.

Utilities
9-62. Utility system design must be based on current applicable technical manuals and guidance.
Engineering calculations will be used to size the system. Where economically supportable and practicable,
electric grids should be connected to commercial power. Smaller or remote bases should construct central
power plants capable of supporting 125 percent of the camp maximum demand load or use distributed
generators of sufficient capacity to support maximum demand loads. When stand-alone, distributed
generators are the main power source, they will be sized so that no generator set is loaded at less than 50
percent capacity.
9-63. Base camp utilities should be tied into local municipalities if it is economically feasible and if they
meet health and other protection standards. The installation of wells for potable water is authorized. There
should be a minimum of two wells per camp—one primary and one for backup (located within the camp
boundaries). The last choice is to use the Tactical Water Purification System, potable-water trucks, or
bottled water.

Land Use Plan

9-64. A land use plan depicts general locations for areas in relation to any existing development patterns
and any existing major constraints identified by earlier data analysis. A land use plan should lay out the
basic scheme for main vehicular and rail networks, and it should designate the most advantageous locations
and alignments for the mains, stations, and plants associated with the utility systems. Land use relationships
should achieve the most efficient arrangement of functions, should resolve existing problems, and should
provide logical and desirable locations for all mission and functional requirements. Use the distances
shown in Table 9-2, page 9-12, as minimum spacing for specific types of facilities. Drainage considerations
must be applied.

PLANNING AND DESIGN OF OTHER BED-DOWN FACILITIES

9-65. Support area facilities in a contingency operation can vary widely. The simplest facility may be a
hardstand surface with rudimentary surface drainage and a supporting road system. More complex
installations may look like urban industrial parks and include warehouses; maintenance and repair facilities;
water, sewage, and electrical utilities; refrigeration or other climate control capability; and supporting
roads, railroads, ports, airfields, protective fencing, fire services, personnel, and support and administration
facilities. Logistics installations include general, ammunition, and maintenance depots; storage sites (to
include fuel storage); and hospitals.
9-66. It is necessary to determine requirements for time-phased facility construction, war damage repair,
construction material, and other engineering needs for supporting deployed U.S. forces. In developing and
evaluating alternatives, planning should result in—
 The determination of critical requirements, duration of construction projects, and acquisition of
information for scheduling and requisitioning.
 A logical task sequence based on the priorities necessary to accomplish the mission.
 An accurate estimate of required materials and labor that takes into account HN guidelines and
resources.
 The determination of command and support relationships, providing for engineering
coordination throughout the theater or AO.
 The identification method for controlling the situation as it develops or changes.
 The identification of environmental considerations that may impact planning decisions.
 Compliance with meeting the commander’s guidance if possible.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-11

Chapter 9

Table 9-2. Minimum distances between facilities

Potable Water

Food Service
Maintenance
Ammunition
Solid Waste

Wastewater
Parking Lot

60 kilowatt
Generator

Bulk Fuel

Laundry
Helipad

Shower

Latrine
Roads

Billets
Facility

Latrine 300 300 500 200 200 15 200 50 300 100 200 0 50 300

Food service 300 300 500 300 300 15 200 50 300 50 200 300 300

Laundry 300 300 500 200 200 15 200 50 300 50 200 50

Shower 300 300 500 200 200 15 200 50 300 50 300

Wastewater 300 200 300 200 200 15 200 50 200 300

Potable
300 200 300 300 300 15 200 50 200
water

Bulk fuel 300 500 300 200 200 15 200 200

Generators 50 300 300 50 200 15 50

Billets 300 200 500 200 200 15

Roads 15 15 300 15 15

Parking lot 200 200 300 50

Maintenance 300 300 300

Helipad 300 300

Ammunition 300

Solid waste

CONVERSION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

9-67. During many operations, the use and modification of existing facilities are more advantageous than
pursuing new construction based on the availability of time, labor, and materials. HN agreements may
require compensation for using or converting such facilities. Engineers, HN parties, and civilian contractors
are encouraged to use ingenuity, imagination, and inventiveness to adapt existing facilities for military use.
9-68. A cost benefit analysis will be one of the factors used to determine if new construction is more
prudent or appropriate. An infrastructure reconnaissance (assessment or survey) is recommended to
document the condition of, and preexisting deficiencies in, existing structures adapted for military use.
Conducting an EBS and EHSA together is highly recommended to ensure that hazmat, which can endanger
Soldier or Marine health, is not present in the existing structures or their surrounding areas and to limit
claims against the U.S. government later in the life of the facility. The EBS and EHSA must be completed
as soon as possible if they cannot be coordinated before the area is inhibited.

9-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

CONSTRUCTION
9-69. The CCDR, JFC, and ASCC with Title 10 USC responsibilities identify the minimum-essential
engineering and construction requirements for facilities, including the new construction and repair of war-
damaged facilities. For the ASCC, the theater engineer command is normally responsible for planning,
prioritizing, and tasking subordinate units for project execution. The theater engineer command can provide
construction assistance and restoration support to the other Services when assets are available or as directed
by the ASCC. Support may also be provided to allied forces when they are assisting U.S. operations. The
CCDR or JFC may designate a regional wartime theater construction manager to coordinate and prioritize
engineer construction activities of Services in a geographic area.

SITE SELECTION AND LAYOUT

9-70. Planners conduct a preliminary reconnaissance (initially a map reconnaissance) that is usually
followed by a field reconnaissance. The field reconnaissance team may be composed of, but not limited to,
representatives of the units that the facility will support, the operations staff officer (S-3) of the unit
responsible for construction, a command group representative, a civil affairs personnel representative, other
specialists (real estate, medical, chemical, radiological, nuclear, legal, environmental) as required, and a
representative of the HN.

Site Selection
9-71. Site selection and layout are shared responsibilities between the engineer and architects and the site
user. The engineer, protection officer, operations officer, and logistician may each have their own ideal site
location, but trade-offs are made based on a priority of criteria or restrictions.
9-72. Emphasis should be placed on the—
 Tactical situation.
 Capability to defend the site.
 Local terrain features.
 Distance from population centers.
 Availability of suitable existing facilities that may be occupied immediately or modified to
desired specifications.
 Environmental restrictions that may limit the size of the required facility. (These may be caused
by weather or HN policies.)
 Other environmental considerations that may affect facility locations, designs, or requirements.
 Accessibility to projected traffic.
 Distance from road networks.
 Availability of construction materials and local labor assets.
 Local weather conditions and climatic extremes that may demand refrigeration or other climate
control measures.
 Potential mission expansion and surge requirements.

Layout
9-73. When locating and positioning each support area facility, the commander evaluates all information
gathered in the planning and reconnaissance phases. Once the commander or designated representative has
finalized a decision on where the installation is to be built, the engineer develops a construction plan that
takes into consideration the location and available resources (military, HN, or contract construction
personnel, materials, and equipment). The layout should be well communicated, coordinated, and organized
in such a way that it can be completed in time to meet the operational priorities and minimize future
controversies.
9-74. Internal operating efficiency must also be considered in the facility layout. The TCMS and AFCS
illustrate typical standardized installation layouts. New construction and use of nonstandard designs must

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-13

Chapter 9

be held to a minimum. When feasible, facility requirements must be met first by the use of existing
facilities (U.S. and HN), organic unit shelters, and portable or relocatable facility substitutes.
9-75. The standards for new construction (initial or temporary) are dictated by the CCDR or ASCC based
on the expected duration of use, availability of materials, man-hours of construction effort, and material
cost. Locally available materials may dictate design and construction criteria. Plans are provided for many
supply and maintenance facilities in the TCMS. Modification may be required to adapt to local conditions.

MEANS, METHODS, AND PROCEDURES

9-76. The force protection of a facility or installation may be accomplished by active and passive security
measures, including facility hardening and dispersion.
9-77. Another consideration that may influence the commander’s decision is the HN policy governing
construction and the use of construction resources. Force health protection and other associated
environmental considerations should always be a factor in assessment and planning.

SPECIFIC FACILITIES WITHIN BASE CAMPS

9-78. Other facilities that may be contained in base camps include housing, administration and support,
ammunition and storage, medical treatment, and internment and resettlement facilities.

Housing Facilities
9-79. The Sand Book and Base Camp Facilities Standards for Contingency Operations (commonly known
as The Red Book) are examples of CCDR guidance that provide very specific recommended minimum
planning factors and construction standards for facilities within base camps. The Southeast Asia hut is a
frequently used solution for bed-down and base camp facilities. (See figure 9-2.)
9-80. Southeast Asia huts, as shown in a cluster configuration in figure 9-2, are 512 square feet (16 feet x
32 feet). A Southeast Asia hut has eight 110- or 220-volt electrical outlets. Normally, there is an
environmental control unit on each end for climate control. A Southeast Asia hut is constructed of wood
with a sheet vinyl floor, 5/8-inch gypsum walls and ceiling, flat latex paint, metal roof, precast concrete
pilings, painted exterior, and a nail board 6 feet above the floor (which allows Soldiers or Marines to put a
nail on the wall to hang things).
9-81. A variation of the Southeast Asia hut is the Davidson Southeast Asia hut, which combines six
Southeast Asia huts to save materials. When in a Davidson configuration, there are five Southeast Asia hut
units, with one 12-foot by 32-foot latrine, for a total of 2,944 square feet of enclosed space. There is a 5-
foot-wide walkway on each side. An administrative configuration has 3,072 square feet, but the latrines
only take up 256 square feet. It has walkways all around the building. The entire footprint is 42 feet by 106
feet, including walkways.

Life Support Areas

9-82. A standard life support area has 20 tent, extendable, modular, personnel tents in various
configurations. The large spacing between tents is for fire lanes and to allow cranes and other heavy
equipment to move around to service air conditioners without damaging the existing tents or wires. The
wide fire lanes also double as firebreaks and allow maneuver room for firefighting equipment.
9-83. Wooden buildups should not be constructed on or inside the tents, as the wind tends to drag the tent
fabric across the rough wooden edges, causing the tents to be destroyed. The tent city has a 4-inch (100-
millimeter) gravel pad surrounded by a ditch. The ditch is for drainage when it rains and to separate the no-
drive area of the life support area from the rest of the camp. The size and depth of the ditch should be
adequate to contain anticipated local rainfall and runoff and to prevent vehicular traffic from entering and
exiting at nondesignated points across the ditch. Geotextile is normally not used to construct ditches.

9-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

Each SEA hut is 16’ x 32’, same size as a general purpose medium tent.
Legend:
SEA Southeast Asia

Figure 9-2. Southeast Asia hut company cluster

Surge Housing
9-84. Base camps should maintain the ability to expand to house an additional 10 percent of the total
population as transients and surges. During surge periods that exceed 10 percent, Tier 2 tents (maximum)
will be used for housing. The definition of construction standards for tents includes—
 Tier 1. Tier 1 consists of a general-purpose, medium field tent with plywood floor panels.
 Tier 2. Tier 2 consists of a general-purpose, medium field tent with plywood floor panels, two
electrical light outlets, two electrical outlets, and space heaters.
 Tier 3. Tier 3 consists of a general-purpose, medium field tent with a full wooden tent frame,
plywood panel sidewalls, raised insulated flooring, four electrical light outlets, eight electrical
outlets, and space heaters.

Toilet and Shower Facilities

9-85. Toilet and shower facilities will be lighted, heated, and equipped with running hot and cold water. A
sanitary wall board is the preferred wall covering for latrines. Sheetrock, if used, must be waterproof, with
a waterproof finish for cleaning. The female-to-male facility ratio will be based on the actual percentage of
the sexes on a base camp at the current time or anticipated for the near future. The shower and toilet
construction goals for base camps are as follows:
 Showers. A shower head per population ratio of 1:20–1:10.
 Toilets. A toilet per population ratio of 1:20–1:10.

9-86. Considerations should be given to shower water reuse systems or other water reuse systems.

Administrative and Support Facilities

9-87. See AFCS or TCMS and ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for specific details on constructing
administrative and support facilities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-15

Chapter 9

Ammunition Supply and Storage Facilities

9-88. A mature theater requires a network of ammunition supply and storage facilities. Well-situated and
-stocked ammunition supply and storage facilities are critical to the timely distribution of required
munitions. Ammunition must be stored with maximum attention to protection against natural and man-
made threats, including accidents caused by careless storage and handling. Class V and Class V (aircraft
ordnance) supply items are explosive and often contain sensitive components.
9-89. Properly designed, constructed, ventilated, and maintained ammunition supply and storage facilities
help limit the possibility of accidents. Appropriate storage ensures maximum serviceability and shelf life of
stocks and keeps maintenance requirements to a bare minimum. Planners must address concerns contained
in DA Pamphlet 385-64 to ensure the effective and safe storage of ammunition.

Theater Ammunition Storage Locations

9-90. A combat service support sustainment brigade, augmented with a theater distribution element,
provides the distribution of theater munitions. Ammunition may be pushed forward to combat service
support battalion ordnance ammunition units, where further distribution is made to forward ammunition
supply points. These are located in a secure area. Units may then draw directly from ammunition supply
points. Ammunition may be brought further forward to ammunition transfer holding points, where
munitions are transferred from corps haul assets to user resupply vehicles. Generally, the farther to the rear
the ammunition facility is, the more elaborate the construction and the more extensive the construction
support required.

Ammunition Storage Planning Considerations

9-91. Planners must consider a number of factors when they are designing ammunition supply and storage
facilities. Planning considerations include—
 Drainage. Munitions can be damaged by excessive moisture and must be kept dry. Proper
grading and, where possible, the planning and installation of drainage facilities in the area of the
ammunition facility will divert rainfall, flash floods, and groundwater away from ammunition
stacks.
 Shelter. Ammunition and explosives must be well sheltered and properly protected from the
elements and the enemy. Depending on the situation and the assets available, these shelters may
range from approved steel, to arch earth-mounded igloos, to an outdoor modular storage system
reinforced with earthwork berms. These systems are discussed in detail in ATP 4-35.1.
 Ventilation. Adequate ventilation is required to protect stocks from moisture and to prevent the
buildup of toxic and combustible gases.
 Size. The size of the facility depends on the kinds and quantities of munitions being handled and
local supply demands. The facility size is determined by the logistics unit commander, based on
standards set forth in DA Pamphlet 385-64 and the tactical situation.
 Vehicle access. Vehicles that use the ammunition facility must be able to travel to and from the
appropriate pickup points. Road networks and traffic flow patterns inside the facility must
support concurrent resupply and issue operations and provide for the rapid evacuation of all
vehicles in case of emergency. Firefighting equipment must have ready access to all parts of the
facility.
 Water supply. Water tanks and reservoirs must be located in key centralized areas to properly
support firefighting activities.
 Facility protection. The adequate protection of an ammunition facility may be provided through
a combination of facility hardening and dispersion and active and passive security measures.
Generally, the area damage control plan will stipulate what specific measures must be taken
before, during, and after a damage incident and who will be responsible for each measure.
 Environmental considerations. With its associated force health protection, environmental
considerations are an aspect of protection that must be properly planned and evaluated.

9-16 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

 Adjacent property use. Present and potential future uses are important. Deeds of restriction
may be required for adjacent properties near the ammunition storage areas to reduce premature
detonation caused by outside hazards.

Ammunition Storage Site Selection

9-92. The logistics unit commander determines the best location for ammunition supply points that best
supports the scheme of maneuver and meets the commander’s intent. The ammunition supply points should
be located within a reasonable support distance of maneuver elements, and it is desirable to place the
ammunition supply points near an established MSR (road or rail) to facilitate transportation network access,
stocking, and distribution. However, ammunition storage facilities should not be placed too close to major
facilities such as airfields; petroleum, oils, and lubricant storage facilities; or ports. Taking this precaution
will reduce the overall extent of massive collateral destruction if the enemy targets other facilities.
9-93. Ideally, choosing a location with level terrain, existing natural barriers, and good drainage is
preferable. This will serve to minimize earthwork cut and fill requirements. If possible, existing facilities or
structures suitable for conversion to storage areas should be used first before pursuing new construction.
9-94. The engineer advises the logistics unit commander on such matters as the location of construction
materials, topography, drainage, and the condition of local road and bridge networks. Consideration must
also be given to security measures and the ease of defense. Where possible, sites should provide a decent
defilade to provide concealment from direct enemy observation.
9-95. The specific layout of an ammunition supply or storage facility depends on the tactical situation,
terrain, and type and amount of ammunition being handled. Engineers supporting the construction of
ammunition supply and storage facilities advise the appropriate commander on construction and
maintenance matters. If required by the urgency of the tactical situation, the facility may be required to
receive and issue ammunition before construction is complete.
9-96. Engineers may have to alter construction plans and techniques to allow for the safe and efficient
handling of ammunition while construction proceeds. Ammunition storage facilities are ideally arranged in
dispersed storage areas. The separation of facilities provides greater protective dispersion; expedites the
handling, receipt, and issue of materials; and facilitates inventory management and segregation.
9-97. The road network is designed so that each area can be entered and exited independently. This
prevents crossing traffic in all areas. Firebreaks wide enough (50 feet minimum) to prevent fires from
spreading should be constructed and maintained. Soil that contains enough organic matter to allow it to
easily burn must be excavated to the mineral subsoil. However, since firebreaks around ammunition stacks
are easily detected by aerial reconnaissance, their use may have to be restricted or camouflaged.
9-98. Existing buildings may be used for ammunition storage as long as the rated floor has sufficient load-
bearing capacity. Chemical, incendiary, and white phosphorus rounds should not be stored on wooden
floors since they are a fire hazard. Ammunition and explosives may be stored outdoors according to DA
Pamphlet 385-64, which details site and layout requirements for the outdoor storage of ammunition.
Ammunition and explosives may be stored temporarily on vehicles for adequate dispersion and rapid
deployment.
9-99. The effects imposed by local weather and climate conditions must be taken into consideration in the
design and construction of ammunition storage facilities. Drainage is an important consideration in certain
climates and areas, including desert environments. Key planning considerations include the following:
 Desert. The need for dispersion is extremely important since natural concealment is generally
quite sparse. Shadows and regular-shaped patterns are conspicuous and can be avoided by the
use of small, irregular stacks and the elimination of regular lines and rows. In this environment,
engineers are seldom required to develop extensive road networks.
 Cold climates. Care must be taken to provide adequate dunnage for ammunition storage.
Defilades must be avoided because they may be susceptible to natural flooding after a thaw.
Engineer assets may be required to clear and maintain the road network in snow and icy
conditions. (See FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-17

Chapter 9

 Wet climates. Particularly in the tropics, the maximum effort must be made to combat the
effects of moisture. Adequate shelter, dunnage, and ventilation must be provided.
 Very hot and very cold areas. Static electricity is an important consideration.

Ammunition Storage Construction

9-100. Engineer units have the following construction responsibilities when supporting ammunition
supply and storage operations:
 Reconnaissance, improvement, and construction of roads and bridges, which provide access to,
and egress from, the ammunition facility. Engineers will also construct internal road networks
within the facility.
 Location of local water sources for firefighting operations, construction of required reservoirs,
and a water distribution system.
 Construction of standard ammunition storage magazines for indoor storage and berms and pads
for outdoor storage. Engineers may be tasked to supply appropriate dunnage for ammunition
stacks according to DA Pamphlet 385-64.
 Construction of housing and support facilities for ammunition facility personnel and security
forces. This includes associated power and sanitation requirements.
 Construction and maintenance of perimeter security fences or other required security,
infrastructure protection, and protection measures.
 Construction of firebreaks in and around the facility.
 Staff proponency for the integration of environmental considerations and the linkage to the
surgeon on matters of the included force health protection issues.
 Adequate lighting protection system plans and installation.

Medical Treatment Facilities

9-101. Regardless of the size, intensity, or duration of a conflict, medical treatment facilities are needed
within base camps. With the fielding of deployable medical systems equipment to the intermediate staging
base and AO, construction requirements are greatly reduced. However, the requirements for site
preparation remain high. The following are the GE considerations for establishing medical facilities:
 Site preparation.
 Trash and garbage pits.
 Soakage pits or a liquid disposal system.
 Incinerators (in addition to solid-waste requirements).
 Facilities such as showers, latrines, laundry services, food preparation, and dining.
 Water distribution.
 Hazardous-waste disposal.
 Regulated medical-waste disposal.
 Motor parking.
 Landing zones.
 Perimeter security.
 Fuel storage.
 Power system support.

9-102. The longer the anticipated duration of the conflict, the greater the need to support medical
treatment through fixed facilities. While medical facilities always entail a considerable amount of
environmental considerations in temporary and fixed facilities, the importance of these considerations will
increase over time and they should be applied as early as possible. These facilities must be designed and
built with the capacity and means to adequately treat injuries and other health problems sustained during
the contingency.
9-103. Medical treatment facilities must facilitate rapid, high-quality treatment within the theater to
expedite Soldier or Marine duty return. In addition, U.S. forces are responsible for the well-being of enemy

9-18 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

prisoners of war, DOD employees, contractors, and other nonmilitary personnel who accompany combat
forces, such as the mass media and nongovernmental organizations. The emergency treatment of allied
Soldiers or Marines or the civilian population may also be required.

Health Service Support System

9-104. In the absence of a deployable medical system-equipped hospital, consider the use of an existing
facility that was originally designed as a medical treatment facility or is readily adaptable to use as a
medical treatment facility. Attention to the types of buildings, their potential patient capacity, and their
effective use prior to the conduct of an operation may result in the selection and use of facilities that will
save precious time and resources. Requirements for fixed facilities are generally restricted to the
intermediate staging base, where hospital units do not move in conjunction with the redeployment of major
tactical units.
9-105. The degree of permanence may range from a temporary field hospital, to a semipermanent station
hospital, to the permanent construction of a general hospital. Site selection is the responsibility of health
service support planners who, in turn, must coordinate with the logistics staff officer. The logistics staff
officer allocates the site and coordinates for the required GE support. These facilities should be located so
that patients from the intermediate staging base can be easily brought in and safely transferred within the
intermediate staging base from one medical treatment facility to another. It is highly desirable to choose
locations near ground transportation networks and air terminals.
9-106. Hospitals may also be located to support high-density troop populations. Medical treatment facility
requirements are based on estimates of inpatient and outpatient loads and the theater patient evacuation
policy. This policy establishes the number of days that patients may be held within the command for
treatment before they return to duty, convalescence, or are evacuated to a facility outside the command.
9-107. Shortcomings in existing hospital facilities and new requirements must be identified so that
construction or rehabilitation can begin. Except when they are located in existing structures, general and
station hospitals require many weeks for development before they become fully functional. Once
established, they can be moved only with substantial difficulty and time-consuming effort. TCMS or AFCS
contains bills of materials, estimates of construction man-hours, and plans for station and general hospital
facilities and associated clinics.

Medical Treatment Facility Planning

9-108. Ideally, the best sites for medical treatment facilities have preexisting utilities, such as a potable-
water supply, sewage disposal, and electrical power. When new medical treatment facility construction
must be initiated, the site should be on a relative geospatial high point, with subsoil that is free-draining.
The site should be isolated from areas where sanitation may be difficult, away from noise, smoke, odors,
and other nuisances.
9-109. The site should be located in an area that is conducive to expansion and safe for handling large
volumes of fuels (up to 50,000 gallons of jet fuel or diesel contained in collapsible fabric tanks). This fuel
is needed for auxiliary power generation. The site should also be located near waste collection facilities that
can easily accommodate large volumes of contaminated material, including discarded food products and
contaminated solids. The principles of phased construction will be enforced.
9-110. Lower-priority, complementary facilities near a medical treatment facility may include a helicopter
landing site, waste collection facilities, motor pools, laundry areas, vehicle parking areas, supply receiving
and shipping facilities, and recreation areas. Even though waste collection facilities have low priority at the
initial planning phase, the importance of this facility increases in direct proportion to the intensity and
duration of the conflict since vast amounts of contaminated waste may be generated.
9-111. Expedient methods for disposing of contaminated waste must be considered during the initial
stages of planning. Such efforts must be designed to avoid any possibility of contaminating ground water
supplies. Expedient methods of landfills and incinerators should be planned to enhance medical treatment
facility operations. These methods should also be planned for semifixed facilities to prevent contamination
of the groundwater supply, thus potentially exposing patients and staff to infections.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-19

Chapter 9

Medical Treatment Facilities Protection

9-112. Precautionary measures taken to prevent or minimize medical treatment facility damage as a result
of natural disasters, accidents, and enemy activity are specified in the area damage control plan. A medical
treatment facility should not be located immediately adjacent to potential tactical targets such as airfields;
ammunition supply and storage facilities; petroleum, oils, and lubricant storage facilities; and major
bridges. When the medical treatment facility must lie within an established defensive position, it should be
located away from the outer perimeter and away from critical targets. The decision to camouflage and
conceal a hospital or directly display the Red Cross emblem rests solely with the tactical commander. All
protection afforded to medical units under the Geneva Conventions of 1949 are compromised when medical
treatment facilities are camouflaged.

Detainee and Resettlement Facilities

9-113. Detention involves the detainment of a population or group that poses some level of threat to
military operations. Detention operations are conducted by military police to shelter, sustain, guard, protect,
and account for populations (detainees or U.S. military prisoners) as a result of military or civil conflict or
to facilitate criminal prosecution. (See ADRP 3-37, FM 3-39, and FM 3-63.)
9-114. Detention operations include—
 Detainees (civilian internees, retained personnel, and enemy combatants [enemy prisoners of
war or members of armed groups]).
 U.S. military prisoners.

9-115. Resettlement is conducted by military police to shelter, sustain, guard, protect, and account for
dislocated civilians as a result of military or civil conflict or natural or man-made disasters. Resettlement
operations include dislocated civilians, refugees, migrants, expellees, internally displaced persons,
evacuees, and stateless persons.
9-116. General engineers may be required to support the construction of detention or resettlement
facilities. (See FM 3-63 for additional information on detention facility designs and logistics
considerations.)
9-117. Depending on the duration and extent of the conflict, requirements for the evacuation of internees
may warrant the establishment of internee holding areas within the corps area and semipermanent detainee
facilities within more secure locations. Further evacuation to semipermanent or permanent facilities outside
the AO may also require provisions for total evacuation. The discussion of detainee facilities in this chapter
is limited to the BCT, regimental combat team, division, and theater levels. Generally, internees are
evacuated for their own safety, for interrogation, for medical treatment, or to relieve troops in the capturing
unit.
9-118. Once detainees are gathered at detainee facilities, they may constitute a pool of potential labor
assets. They are, however, subject to special considerations and limitations. Detainees constitute a
significant labor force of skilled and unskilled individuals. These individuals should be employed to the
fullest extent possible in work that is needed to construct, manage, perform administrative functions for,
and maintain the detainee facility. Per AR 190-8, detainees may be employed in other essential work only
when other qualified civilian labor is not available.
9-119. Detainee labor, which is external to the DOD, is regulated through contracts. (See AR 190-8 for a
complete discussion on the employment and compensation of detainees.)
9-120. Exercise caution when contemplating the use of internees for labor, and contact the staff judge
advocate for guidance. The staff judge advocate ensures that the policy complies with all treaties and
conventions. (See Convention [III] relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War, Geneva; FM 3-63; and JP
3-63.)

Planning Considerations
9-121. The CCDR is responsible for detainee and resettlement operations and provides engineer and
logistics support to the military police commander for the establishment and maintenance of detainee and

9-20 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

resettlement facilities. Planning for the construction of detainee or resettlement facilities must be developed
early in the operation plan. This provides the timely notification of engineers, selection and development of
facility sites, and procurement of construction materials.
9-122. The military police coordinate facility locations with engineers, logistics units, higher
headquarters, and the HN. The failure to properly consider and correctly evaluate all factors may increase
the logistics and personnel efforts required to support operations. If a facility is improperly located, the
entire internee population may require relocation when resources become scarce. (See the planning
considerations in FM 3-63 and JP 3-63 when selecting a site.)
9-123. Engineer participation in managing internee activities includes providing construction support for
building or renovating detainee facilities and employing internee labor in engineer tasks where appropriate.
(See FM 3-63 and JP 3-63.)

Site Selection
9-124. Detainee facilities must be planned early enough during a contingency operation to provide for
timely site selection and development. Construction materials must be procured and construction initiated
promptly. Contingency construction should be planned for a possible expansion capacity if there is a surge
in the acceptance of additional enemy prisoners of war. The site should be located on a topographic high
point with free-draining subgrade soil. This will serve to minimize additional earthmoving requirements for
drainage.
9-125. Greater sanitary precautions must be taken when working in an environment with high water tables
or in a swamp-like environment. Planners should ensure that an adequate potable-water supply, a sewage
system, an electrical power supply, and nearby construction materials are available. If possible, existing
structures should be used to minimize new construction; however, the same basic safety and environmental
considerations and conformity apply. (See FM 3-63 and JP 3-63 for additional information.)

Types of Detainee Facilities

9-126. Within the area of responsibility, detainee facilities are classified as detainee collection points,
detainee holding areas, or theater detainee facilities. All three facilities are built to directed construction
standards and vary in size and capacity, depending on the number and classification of internees. Under
certain circumstances, semipermanent facility construction may be authorized. As with any TO
construction, existing facilities that can be used directly or modified with a justifiable effort are preferable
to new construction.
9-127. The degree of engineer effort required for the construction of these facilities varies from little or no
support to a full-scale GE effort. Normally, the degree of engineer effort depends on the permanence of the
facility, the size and scope of the facility, and the availability of construction materials and engineer assets.
(See the AFCS program guidelines, FM 3-63, and JP 3-63 for detainee or resettlement facility layouts and
designs.)
9-128. The permanency and complexity of internment or resettlement facilities can vary. However,
internees must be provided areas that are dry, environmentally controlled, lighted, and protected from fire.
Facility construction must also conform to sanitary rules, including the best practicable provisions for baths
and showers. Internees must be allowed to physically exercise and have access to fresh air. Sexes must also
be segregated.

Construction
9-129. Detainee and resettlement facility construction standards, bills of material, and estimates of
construction man-hours are contained in the TCMS and AFCS. The length of time that the facility will
operate must be considered when determining the standard of construction. In addition, engineers must
complete an EBS, in conjunction with an EHSA, for the site. (See FM 3-19.4, FM 3-63, and JP 3-63.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-21

Chapter 9

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

9-130. Base camp operation is the O&M of the base camp physical plant and the provision of base camp
services and support that are needed to achieve the base camp purpose and fulfill functional requirements.
The skills needed for operating and managing base camps do not reside in any single branch or functional
area. A grouping of capabilities is required to produce synergic effects within the base camp. Success
hinges on placing the right people, with the right skill sets, at the right time. Any shortfalls in skills or
capabilities at a base camp are filled through the tenant units or reachback for augmentation or contracted
support. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for more information on base camp operations.)

BASE CAMP OPERATIONS

9-131. The base operations center is the centralized facility on a base camp that issues commands
pertaining to the O&M of the base camp. It is the base camp commander’s primary means of maintaining
situational awareness and managing the performance of the base camp function and the provision of
services and support to ensure efficiency and effectiveness. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for more
information on the base operations center. See ADRP 5-0, ADRP 6-0, and MCWP 5-1 for more
information on the operations process.)
9-132. The ground component commander or Service component commanders may share responsibilities
for O&M of access; reception, staging, onward movement, and integration; and initial bed-down facilities,
depending on their assigned areas of responsibility. General engineer assets may be assigned specific tasks
to support the O&M of specific base camps or bed-down facilities, or they may be supported on an area
basis as implied tasks within their supported areas.
9-133. The CCDR and supported commands may share responsibilities for O&M of en route base camps
or facilities and initial bed-down facilities, depending on where they are located with respect to the AO. For
base camps, the primary responsibility for O&M rests with the base camp commander and assigned tenant
units. Anything above and beyond their capabilities can be handled by general engineers or contactors with
specialized skill sets.
9-134. Engineers can support the base camp as a directorate of public works or facility engineer.
Directorates of public works on base camps are supported with assigned personnel and equipment assets to
handle infrastructure O&M improvements, master planning, energy, water, waste, housing, and
environmental compliance. Facility engineers can provide the base camp with O&M support services that
include building maintenance; facility repair; road repair; ice, snow, and sand removal; grounds
maintenance; refuse removal; recycling operations; utility operations; and pest control. (See
AD-A243-233.)
9-135. For bed-down facilities, the designated commander and the assigned tenant units are responsible
for the general O&M of their facilities. Anything beyond their capabilities can be handled by general
engineers. Engineers can be requested to handle O&M activities requiring specialized skill sets. The
maintenance of bed-down facilities is performed at lower standards than that of base camps since bed-down
facilities are used for a limited period of time. Because of the brief utility of bed-down facilities, engineer
resources are limited and the focus is on an economy of effort. That is, engineers would implement field-
expedient and temporary measures for repairing bed-down facilities rather than investing in costly upgrades
and major improvements to the quality of life.
9-136. Commanders may defer routine maintenance during initial bed-down until the tactical situation
allows resources to be committed. The operation of some engineer-specific facilities and systems and the
repair of most facilities will require the early entry of GE units. Depending on real estate agreements, and
when no longer needed, some bed-down facilities may require maintenance and repair to return them to
owners in an agreed-upon condition.

BASE CAMP MAINTENANCE

9-137. Temporary construction in base camps is not intended for long-term use, thus increasing the need
for proper maintenance and repair to keep base camps in good operating condition. The base camp

9-22 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camps and Bed-Down Facilities

commander has the overall responsibility for maintenance and repair. Capabilities that extend beyond
tenant units require support by general engineers.
9-138. Units and organizations that occupy facilities are encouraged to establish internal teams that
perform routine maintenance and repair of facilities. Engineers perform maintenance and repair work that
exceeds the capabilities of user units. This support usually requires specialized skills or heavy equipment.
9-139. General engineers can assist the base camp commander by providing routine maintenance and
services on base camp facilities. This can include facility inspections, structural assessments, construction
material orders, and work schedules. Because materials and parts can be in short supply, base camp
commanders, with the assistance of engineer advisors, must be vigilant in establishing a proactive
maintenance program.
9-140. Base camp commanders are responsible for establishing, directing, and controlling 24-hour
emergency response to base camp incidents due to acts of nature, accidents, or enemy activity. (See
ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N) General engineers can also provide rapid response, which includes—
 Performing immediate repair required after natural disasters (floods, tornadoes, hurricanes).
 Restoring power outages.
 Fixing water main leaks that impact key facilities.
 Responding to fuel and hazmat spills and leaks.
 Fighting fires and dealing with the aftermath of explosions.
 Repairing perimeter fencing, barriers, and obstacles to prevent enemy penetration.
 Repairing lighting and other security systems to restore observation and monitoring.
 Repairing facilities that are deemed mission-critical and -essential to base operations.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 9-23

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 10
Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance
Real estate plays a key role in supporting the warfighter with land and facilities for
mission requirements. Real estate is considered a GE support function per ADRP 4-0.
Military forces must acquire, manage, and dispose of real estate, land, and fixed
facilities within the AO to support committed forces. Included in this support is the
acquisition of real estate for use as office space, billeting, dining facilities, material
storage areas, staging areas, maintenance functions, training, ports, roads, buffer or
safety zones, and so forth. These facilities may be used to house operations, planning,
administrative, logistics, maintenance, and other services. Existing facilities are used,
when possible, to reduce construction requirements. The engineer construction and
other military support effort can then be invested in other immediate commitments.
This chapter discusses real estate management and real property maintenance.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

10-1. The following paragraphs discuss the responsibilities, capabilities, objectives, policies, and planning
and maintenance activities and the transfer of real estate and real property.

CHIEF OF ENGINEERS
10-2. The chief of engineers is the DA staff officer responsible for real estate functions and, as such,
exercises staff supervision over U.S. Army real estate activities of overseas commands. (See AR 405-10.)
The chief of engineers is responsible for carrying out the following duties:
 Establish real estate records and reporting systems necessary to administer responsibilities.
 Provide technical advice and assistance in handling real estate acquisition, management of lease
actions, and disposition.
 Issue instructions to ensure that real estate activities are conducted according to applicable
directives, policies, and regulations.
 Review real estate data, including estimates, justifications, records, and reports.

UNITED STATES ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

10-3. USACE has the capability of providing contingency real estate support teams that can assist in real
estate matters and deploy in support of these requirements. The forward engineer support team–main
provides the localized command for USACE teams in the operational area and provides sustained USACE
engineering execution capabilities within the operational area. Its capability includes real estate acquisition
and disposal. (See FM 3-34 and JP 3-34 for information on the USACE role in real estate support.)

ENGINEER REAL ESTATE TEAM

10-4. Joint engineer real estate teams or USACE contingency real estate support teams can provide real
estate support to U.S. forces in CONUS and during contingency operations by obtaining land and facilities
and managing leases and use agreements. The U.S. Army has a contingency real estate support team with
appropriate delegations from the U.S. Army Secretariat or the Chief of Engineers who is responsible to the
area support command or other command, as appropriate.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-1

Chapter 10

10-5. The real estate teams conduct real estate management within their assigned areas according to the
directives, instructions, and standard operating procedures. A contingency real estate support team is
deployable and can acquire, manage, and dispose of real estate on behalf of the U.S. government. The
contingency real estate support team has the capability to—
 Acquire land or facilities, manage lease and use agreements, dispose of land or facilities, and pay
rents and damages for real estate used within the AO.
 Investigate, process, and settle real estate claims.
 Conduct utilization inspections.
 Record, document, and prepare reports on the real estate used, occupied, or held by the U.S.
Army (or joint forces, as appropriate) within their assigned areas.
 Coordinate with agencies of the friendly HN to execute joint U.S. and HN real estate functions.
 Coordinate with the staff judge advocate for legal issues and claim settlements.
 Include an EBS and EHSA, when possible and appropriate, in all real estate actions.

Note. See FM 3-34 and EP 500-1-2 for more information on the organization and roles of the
contingency real estate support team.

FACILITIES ENGINEER SUPPORT TEAM–ADVANCE

10-6. The facilities engineer support team–advance has the capability to deploy support elements to the
CCDR or joint task force commander with real estate acquisition and disposal and to receive a task-
organized contingency real estate support team, when required. (See FM 3-34 and JP 3-34 for more
information on forward engineer support team–advance.)

NAVAL FACILITIES COMMAND

10-7. NAVFAC is responsible for providing all real estate functions required by the U.S. Navy and U.S.
Marine Corps. NAVFAC has experts who can deploy in support of real estate management requirements,
but has no standing, deployable real estate units. NAVFAC has the capacity and capability to support real
estate transactions in contingency environments with planning, acquisition, management, maintenance, and
disposal of facilities.
10-8. When deployed in theater, Marines normally use the combatant command-designated agent for real
estate procurement. Otherwise, Marines rely on NAVFAC for that support. NAVFAC procures real estate
according to its policies and procedures. When tasked to support a contingency deployment real estate
requirement, NAVFAC task-organizes in a manner best suited for the circumstances. (See JP 3-34,
NAVFAC P-73: Real Estate Procedural Manual, NTTP 4-04.3, and SECNAVINST 11011.47C for
additional information.)

UNITED STATES AIR FORCE

10-9. The U.S. Air Force is responsible for providing the real estate functions required by the U.S. Air
Force. It considers real estate a GE responsibility and assigns Prime BEEF/RED HORSE units with those
mission sets. These units have the capability of providing real estate acquisition, management,
maintenance, and disposal.
10-10. When a component-numbered U.S. Air Force serves as the U.S. Air Force warfighting component
to the CCDR, U.S. Air Force civil engineers are assigned or attached to an installation and mission support
directorate to serve as engineer advisors to the commander of the U.S. Air Force forces. They serve as an
interface for other Service regional wartime construction management support and conduct real estate
activities for the lease or use of HN facilities and bases. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34 and JP 3-34
for additional information.)

10-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

COMBATANT COMMANDER
10-11. A CCDR is responsible for all real estate activities within the AO. This responsibility may be
delegated to a designated deputy or to the U.S. Army, U.S. Navy, or U.S. Air Force Service component
commander with the greatest requirements and the appropriate authority and technical real estate staff
expertise. Maintaining a single inter-Service real estate facility use policy consolidates activities, reduces
duplication, and limits the impact on the local economy. The theater commander may establish a central
real estate office to direct and record all real estate activities or direct that the commander assigned real
estate responsibility establish such an office. The CCDR develops the policies and procedures for real
property and base camp transfers as part of the theater basing strategy. Associated guidance on
environmental considerations will be provided in an annex of the OPLAN or OPORD. The commander of
the assigned AO is responsible for the timely identification and mitigation of negative environmental
impacts within the AO. (See FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B for more information on the environmental real
estate considerations.)

JOINT FORCE COMMANDER

10-12. A JFC is responsible for carrying out the following real estate support duties:
 Determine real estate requirements for the force.
 Plan, execute, and analyze real estate operations according to the pertinent directives, policies,
and regulations.
 Prepare budget estimates and justifications as directed.
 Secure funding for lease payments from the appropriate using command.
 Prepare and submit real estate reports as directed.
 Conduct utilization inspections according to the instructions and criteria furnished by the Chief
of Engineers.
 Notify the Chief of Engineers of utilization problems that require action at the DA level.
 Furnish the Chief of Engineers with copies of all intercommand real estate and space utilization
directives.

JOINT FORCE ENGINEERS

10-13. Joint force engineers are responsible for planning the acquisition of uncontaminated land and
facilities and their management and ultimate disposal to support joint operations. Their capabilities include
real estate acquisition, management, maintenance, and disposal as a sustainment function for joint engineer
support. The command engineer staff and the subordinate joint force engineer staff recommend policies and
priorities for construction, real estate acquisition, and Class IV construction materials. (See JP 3-34 for
additional information.)
10-14. The JFC may establish a joint facilities utilization board that is responsible for assisting and
managing the Service component use of real estate and existing facilities. The joint facilities utilization
board is a temporary board, chaired by the CCDR or subordinate joint force engineer, with members from
the joint force staff, components, and other special activities. The joint facilities utilization board has the
capability to evaluate and reconcile component requests for real estate, use of facilities, inter-Service
support, and construction to ensure compliance with priorities established by the JFC.

ARMY SERVICE COMPONENT COMMANDER

10-15. If the ASCC is assigned responsibility for real estate operations in the AO, all or part of the
responsibility may be delegated to the CCDR. The real property acquisition and lease management will be
accomplished by qualified and delegated real estate teams or the contingency real estate support team. The
theater Army commander may retain control of real estate in the combat zone and delegate responsibility
for rear areas only.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-3

Chapter 10

UNITED STATES ARMY SERVICE COMPONENT STAFF ENGINEER

10-16. The ASCC staff engineer has the capability to operate and manage real estate and property
acquisition, maintenance, and disposal functions. ASCC engineer responsibilities include—
 Furnishing technical real estate guidance and advice to the commander, staff, and all echelons of
command.
 Recommending real estate policies and operation procedures to the logistics officers.
 Preparing, coordinating, distributing (in coordination with the logistics officer), and exercising
staff supervision over the execution of theater real estate directives.
 Acquiring land or facilities, managing leases and use agreements, disposing of land or facilities,
paying rents and damages, handling claims, and preparing records and reports for the real estate
used within the AO.
 Maintaining a real estate office in the area of responsibility.
 Preparing long-range real estate plans and requirements.
 Ensuring compliance with international agreements and the law of land warfare.
 Coordinating with the authorities of the friendly HN.
 Ensuring the integration of appropriate environmental considerations in all real estate policies,
operational policies, and operations.
10-17. The ASCC staff engineer executes all real estate functions in the area of responsibility when
delegated such responsibility by the CCDR. When the commander of another Service component command
is responsible for real estate activities, the ASCC engineer executes only ASCC real estate functions.

SUBORDINATE COMMAND ENGINEER

10-18. Engineers of commands below the ASCC staff engineer are responsible for furnishing technical
real estate guidance to the commanders, staffs, and subordinate echelons of the commands. They have the
capability of handling assigned or delegated real estate duties.

FACILITY ENGINEER AND UNITED STATES ARMY ENGINEER FACILITIES DETACHMENT

10-19. A facility engineer is normally responsible for real property maintenance, also called O&M, on an
installation, facility, or base camp. The facility engineer may work for a directorate of public works, a
facility engineer team, or an engineer staff section and coordinates with higher-level engineer real property
maintenance staff.
10-20. A U.S. Army engineer facilities detachment, normally located in a sustainment brigade or higher
headquarters, provides facilities management for troop concentrations in a TO. The detachment has the
following O&M capabilities:
 Provides O&M training.
 Implements short- and long-range facility work plans.
 Writes service and support contracts.

OBJECTIVES
10-21. The efficient conduct of real estate activities depends largely on a command-wide understanding of
the objectives of the real estate program in overseas commands. These objectives are to—
 Acquire and administer real property that is essential to the mission.
 Acquire and use existing facilities to keep new construction to a minimum.
 Acquire environmentally safe real property and facilities that promote force health protection
and coordinate for the performance of an EHSA when applicable.

10-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

 Protect the United States and its allies against unjust and unreasonable claims and charges for
using, renting, or leasing real or personal property. Linking an EBS to the signing of a lease,
when possible, is an excellent method of providing desired financial protection for the
government.
 Provide reasonable compensation to individuals or private entities for the use of real property,
except enemy-held property or, possibly, property that is located in a combat zone or enemy
territory.

UNITED STATES ARMY POLICIES

10-22. DA policy concerning real estate acquisitions is described in AR 405-10, DODD 4165.06, and TM
5-300. Real estate operations in overseas theaters are based on the following general principles:
 Adhere to international conventions. U.S. forces will adhere to the provisions of Convention
(IV) respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land and its annex: Regulations concerning
the Laws and Customs of War on Land, Hague; Convention (IV) relative to the Protection of
Civilian Persons in Time of War, Geneva; Convention for the Protection of Cultural Property in
the Event of Armed Conflict, Hague; and FM 27-10.
 Conform to international agreements. The U.S. Army real estate program will conform to
international agreements and all other agreements affecting the United States, such as treaties,
memoranda of understandings and land leases and reciprocal aid, military assistance, status-of-
forces, and civil affairs agreements.
 Make appropriate compensation. When required, fair and reasonable rent will be paid for real
estate used, occupied, or held by the U.S. Army. Payment for the occupation of land will not be
made to any person or persons who are members of the enemy government or who are hostile to
interests of the United States. Compensation will not be made for any real property located in the
combat zone that is lost, damaged, or destroyed as a result of military action.
 Honor HN laws. U.S. forces will honor the real estate laws and customs of the host country to
the fullest extent possible, consistent with military requirements.
 Use existing facilities. U.S. forces will use existing facilities as much as possible to reduce the
need for new construction and to conserve resources, time, and personnel.
 Facilitate antiterrorism and other protection requirements. U.S. forces will recognize,
understand, and adhere to theater command antiterrorism and other protection requirements for
facilities with regard to security and protection.
 Minimize acquisition. Real estate acquisition will be held to an absolute minimum, consistent
with military requirements, to minimize the disruption of the local economy. Joint utilization
should be encouraged, and the duplication of function and services should be avoided.
 Follow appropriate acquisition policies. The full use of HN governmental agencies will be
made when possible if not restricted by treaties. The acquisition of real estate in an overseas TO
will be by requisition, by lease, or through consignment by the HN to the United States where
the property is in the territory of an ally or by requisition, confiscation, or seizure when the
property is owned by the enemy.

UNITED STATES NAVY POLICIES

10-23. U.S. Navy policy for the acquisition, management, and disposal of real property and real property
interests is provided in SECNAVINST 11011.47C.

PLANNING
10-24. These are key terms related to real estate and real property maintenance:
 Real estate is interests in real property as referred to as rights or estates, hence real estate is
similar to real property (AR 405-45).
 A facility is a real property entity consisting of one or more of the following: a building, a
structure, a utility system, pavement, and underlying land (JP 3-34).

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-5

Chapter 10

 A joint facilities utilization board is a joint board that evaluates and reconciles component
requests for real estate, use of existing facilities, inter-Service support, and construction to
ensure compliance with Joint Civil-Military Engineering Board priorities (JP 3-34).
 Maintenance is the routine recurring work required to keep a facility in such condition that it
may be continuously used at its original or designed capacity and efficiency for its intended
purpose (JP 4-0).
 Operation and maintenance is the maintenance and repair of real property, operation of utilities,
and provision of other services such as refuse collection and disposal, entomology, snow
removal, and ice alleviation (JP 3-34).
 Real property is lands, buildings, structures, utilities systems, improvements, and appurtenances,
thereto that includes equipment attached to and made part of buildings and structures, but not
movable equipment (JP 3-34). AR 405-45 provides additional clarity by stating, “It includes
equipment affixed and built into the facility as an integral part of the facility (such as heating
system), but not movable equipment (such as plant equipment). In many instances, this term is
synonymous with ‘real estate’”.
 Solid waste is garbage, refuse, sludge, or other waste material (except those excluded by Federal
regulation) in the form of solid, liquid, semi-solid, or contained gaseous material that has been
discarded or is being accumulated, stored, or treated prior to being discarded as a result of
institutional, industrial, commercial, mining, agricultural, or community operations and
activities. (For purposes related to recycling, infectious waste material is not included in this
category.) (See Section 261.2, Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations for additional information.)

REAL ESTATE MANAGEMENT

10-25. According to JP 3-34, real estate operations involve planning, acquisition, management, and
disposal of land and facilities to support joint operations. GE encompasses real estate management from
acquisition of real property to final turnover of land and facilities upon completion of an operation. USACE
(contingency real support team) and NAVFAC have experts who can deploy in support of these
requirements. Rather than use the general engineer, real estate management requires professionally trained
and experienced real estate specialists with special skills and authority sets to properly acquire, manage,
and dispose of real estate. (See JP 3-34 and TM 5-300 for information on real estate team deployments.)
10-26. The acquisition of privately owned property overseas, whether improved or unimproved, will
almost always be accomplished through leasing. The use of HN land and facilities should be via written
agreement. Acquiring real estate in other counties can be complex since many landowners do not have
actual titles to the land, such as in Afghanistan. This can delay acquisition and cause multiple claims
against the government.
10-27. Trained and qualified personnel are essential for the proper handling of real estate management
responsibilities. Real estate activities must be well managed to avoid facing major consequences or damage
in relations between U.S. forces and the HN. Military legal officers, USACE or NAVFAC counsel, and
civilian lawyers familiar with the laws of countries within the theater must be included to assist the
planning group with sound advice and comprehensive technical reviews of proposed real estate policies and
procedures impacting the United States and its allies.
10-28. During COA development, the engineer staff assists in determining real property and real estate
requirements. Real estate operations involve planning, acquisition, management, and disposal of land and
facilities to support military operations. (See FM 3-34 and JP 3-34 for more information on real estate
requirements and real estate management.)
10-29. Real estate OPLANs and policies are based on directives or instructions issued to the CCDR by the
Joint Chiefs of Staff or by the Service commander appointed as executive agent for the Joint Chiefs of
Staff.

10-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

PLANNING GROUP
10-30. A planning group, which includes the combatant command staff and representatives of all Service
commanders, must initiate real estate planning during the preparatory phases of a campaign. The agency
that will execute real estate operations when the campaign begins is organized at this time and should
participate in all planning activities. Real estate support enables force projection and enables logistics
support for theater opening. In addition to plans for real estate operations during hostilities, consideration
should be given to real estate requirements for the occupation period after hostilities cease. This may be
most critical for those requirements that will be met by new construction, such as base camps.
10-31. The site selection process is a joint effort that is conducted by several members. If available, a
USACE contingency real estate support team member should be included as an integral part of the site
selection team, helping to ensure site acquisition through a HN use agreement or lease of private property.
The site selection team should also include engineer, medical, or other required subject matter experts to
conduct an EBS and EHSA and integrate appropriate environmental considerations when possible. (See
ATP 4-45 for more information on on-site selection team and site selection considerations.)

EXISTING FACILITIES
10-32. Facilities are grouped into six broad categories that emphasize the use of existing assets over new
construction, as discussed in JP 3-34. Consolidate and use existing facilities as much as possible to reduce
the need for new construction. To the maximum extent possible, facilities or real estate requirements should
be met from the following categories, in the priority listed:
 U.S.-owned, -occupied, or -leased facilities (including captured facilities).
 U.S.-owned facility substitutes pre-positioned in theater.
 HN and multinational support facilities where an agreement exists for the HN or partner nation
to provide specific types and quantities of facilities at specific times in designated locations.
 Facilities available from commercial sources.
 U.S.-owned facility substitutes stored in the United States.
 Newly constructed facilities identified during an assessment of available existing assets.

10-33. Existing facilities should be used when they are available. The use of existing facilities—
 Allows swift occupation by military activities.
 Uses existing utilities; existing telephone service; and connecting air, ground, and sea LOC
facilities.
 Uses available, on-site administrative and industrial equipment.
 Permits less diversion of troops from combat missions.
 Uses a smaller outlay of government funds and resources.
 Provides some inherent camouflaging of military activity.

Note. The location may be near major government, industrial, transportation, or resource centers.

10-34. The advantages of using existing facilities normally outweigh the disadvantages. However, there
may be some disadvantages that make the facilities strongly undesirable for military use. Planners should
consider alternatives when existing facilities cannot be adapted to the desired mission requirements, such as
when—
 Facilities cannot be adapted to desired survivability and force protection standards.
 Dispersion is difficult or impossible.
 Facilities are inflexible and cannot be tailored to meet military needs.
 Environmental considerations and associated force health protection issues make the site
undesirable or questionable for occupation.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-7

Chapter 10

REAL ESTATE ACQUISITION

10-35. During conventional combat operations in the active combat zone, real estate required by U.S.
forces is acquired by seizure or requisition, without formal documentation. Seizure is resorted to only when
it is justified in the accomplishment of mission requirements, is driven by urgent military necessity, and is
done with the expressed approval of the commander who has AO responsibility. HN property may be
occupied without real estate documentation to the extent that tactical operations dictate. After the cessation
of hostilities, private property may be leased if there are valid mission requirements for its continued use, if
the property is required at least 30 days or longer, and if the property owner is known.
10-36. Normally, real estate property is obtained through requisition, which is a demand placed on the
owner of the property or the owner’s representative. No rent or other compensation is paid for requisitioned
or seized property in the combat zone. This includes its use or its damage resulting from acts of war or
caused by ordinary military wear and tear.
10-37. Outside the active combat zone, property is normally acquired only by requisition and lease and all
transactions are documented thoroughly under the applicable provisions of theater directives. Large tracts
of real estate are required for ports, staging areas, training and maneuver areas, leave centers, supply
depots, base camps, and headquarters installations. Some of this property may be highly developed and
have considerable value to the civilian population. Established procedures must be followed to acquire
required property, while also ensuring that the legal rights of its owners are protected. Occupying units are
responsible for providing funds for lease payments. (See AR 405-10.)
10-38. Use local government officials to help identify available facilities or properties that meet
approximate military requirements. The military would obtain permission to modify or upgrade the facility
to meet the requirements. Another resource is for the engineer to seek assistance from military intelligence
in identifying facilities, such as airfields or seaports, for adequate use (a good historical example is the
Bagram Airfield in Afghanistan). This teamwork approach capitalizes on the use of existing intelligence to
aid in the proper selection of facilities. Civil affairs personnel and U.S. Army engineer real estate or
contingency real estate support teams may work through local government officials or directly contact
property owners to achieve agreements. When possible, local government officials normally evict and
resettle civilians from property requisitioned by the military forces. U.S. military forces evict tenants or
occupants only in the most urgent circumstances or upon refusal or inability of local authorities to act.
10-39. Normally, a local government representative assists in preparing property inventories for local
government-owned property. It is particularly important that requisitions carry the correct real estate
property descriptions and that local government officials check requisitions against corresponding entries in
permanent records. An EBS is also desirable to protect the U.S. government from future claims.
10-40. If local records have been lost or destroyed, local authorities must establish a correct legal
identification for the requisitioned property. The signature of the local official charged with real estate
responsibility must be obtained on the initial and release inventories. This official signature is required by
international agreement to ensure that the U.S. government is protected from unjust claims and liability for
loss of, or damage to, property used by U.S. forces.
10-41. When possible, integrate an EBS and EHSA into the process of obtaining real property and real
estate. This is to ensure that EBSs and EHSAs meet acceptable levels of appropriate inquiry into the
previous ownership and that the uses of the property are consistent with good commercial or customary
practice. The goal of this process is to identify environmental conditions that may present a material risk of
harm to public health or the environment.

FACILITY MODIFICATION
10-42. The situation may require the modification of existing facilities to better serve military needs. This
could be as a result of changing existing mission requirements, accommodating special unit needs,
correcting deficiencies, or conducting upgrades and improvements. Correcting deficiencies should be the
primary focus of GE work. Theater planning should identify deficiencies and required corrective actions.
Theater requirements for antiterrorism and other protection tasks must be considered in the initial planning
stages. Area-of-responsibility real estate principles for property acquisition apply as discussed above. These

10-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

changes could require additional compensation to property owners and should be factored into the initial
planning and budget. Draw on the expertise, ingenuity, and innovation of engineers, HN experts, and
civilian contractors to resolve these issues. In addition, use tools such as the TCMS/AFCS to modify
existing facilities for military use and to upgrade according to applicable Unified Facilities Criteria.

NEW FACILITY CONSTRUCTION

10-43. New construction in the AO is strictly limited to mission-essential facilities that are vital to the
accomplishment of the overall mission when existing facilities do not meet the criteria required by
commanders. It is likely that base camps will require new construction due to land location and protection
requirements.

REAL PROPERTY MAINTENANCE

10-44. Real property maintenance are those actions taken to ensure that real property is maintained in a
timely manner. This section includes the operation, maintenance, and repair of facilities and utilities of
solid-waste management.
10-45. Real property maintenance does not include the maintenance and repair of mobile and portable
equipment or other items not classified as real property. Some of the coordination aspects of real property
maintenance, however, do include many tasks not normally associated with minor construction and routine
maintenance and repair.
10-46. Maintenance is the routine prevention and correction of damage and deterioration caused by
normal use and exposure to the elements. Repair restores damage caused by abnormal use, accidents,
hostile forces, and severe weather actions. Repair includes the resurfacing of a road or airfield when
maintenance can no longer accomplish its purpose. Rehabilitation restores facilities that have not been in
the hands of friendly forces and do not meet operational requirements. Rehabilitation resembles war
damage repair, except that it is accomplished before occupancy.
10-47. Routine maintenance and repair operations include performing inspections, stockpiling materials
for maintenance and repair work, maintaining and repairing road surfaces and drainage systems, controlling
dust and mud, and removing snow and ice. The main purpose of maintenance and repair work is to keep
road surfaces in a usable and safe condition. It also maintains route capacity and reduces vehicle
maintenance requirements.

RESPONSIBILITIES
10-48. Per AR 405-10, the Chief of Engineers is the DA staff officer responsible for real estate functions
exercising staff supervision over U.S. Army real estate activities in overseas commands. Real property
maintenance is administered by the theater Army area command through its subordinate area support
groups. (See TM 5-300.)
10-49. The Installation Management Command supports the U.S. Army warfighting mission by working
to provide standardized, effective, and efficient services, facilities, and infrastructure to Soldiers, civilians,
and families. Support for real property maintenance is provided on an area basis to all installations, organic
activities, and tenant units. The theater engineer command at the theater Army level provides overall
supervision and technical assistance. The administration of real property maintenance forward of the corps
rear boundary is a corps responsibility. Command relationships in the theater Army are described in ATTP
3-34.23.

PLANNING
10-50. The theater engineer command (or senior engineer brigade) and the responsible engineer staff must
consider current and anticipated real property maintenance requirements for the AO. These include—
 Maintaining and repairing the LOC.
 Estimating potential requirements for repairing war damage.
 Coordinating phase planning and target date requirements.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-9

Chapter 10

 Reviewing after action reviews and lessons learned from recent operations.
 Considering contract support (such as the logistics civil augmentation program [U.S. Army]),
preplacement of contract vehicles, and mechanisms for the management of such contracts in
theater (such as engineer advisory board or Defense Contract Management Command).
 Considering other U.S. agencies (such as the Department of State and the U.S. Agency for
International Development) that may be in the area of responsibility concurrently, considering
how the competencies of each might be leveraged, and establishing working relations across the
agencies in peacetime.
 Determining the limitations (such as political) on using a cost-effective local work force and
local contractors.
 Ensuring that a management system is in place that identifies facilities to support U.S. facility
needs.
 Identifying procedures for the accountability, security, maintenance, and training of appropriate
local national facilities personnel if they are to be transferred to local authorities after the ceasing
of hostilities.
 Integrating appropriate environmental considerations and related force health protection
concerns.
10-51. Any alteration or renovation work that is planned for existing structures should be designed
according to AFCS guidance and should essentially be nonpermanent in nature. Plans for major repairs,
renovations, or alterations on existing structures must include estimates for labor and materials. Planners
may also use estimating sources, such as the engineer performance standards or a commercial estimating
guide (means estimating guide).
10-52. There may be situations in the theater where the estimated materials or labor resources are
insufficient or unavailable. Local materials, labor, and services should be used to accomplish real property
maintenance when possible. With the approval of the theater Army engineer and support of the theater
engineer command or assigned engineer brigade, the local responsible engineer may change the design or
scope of planned project work to capitalize on locally available personnel, resources, and services.

OPERATION OF UTILITIES
10-53. In the TO, the O&M or upgrade of existing utilities and the construction, operation, and
maintenance of new utilities systems may be an engineer responsibility. Utility systems include electric
power, wastewater collection and treatment, and other systems (cooling and refrigeration, compressed air,
heating). Operating these systems requires specially certified, licensed, or trained personnel. These
personnel may be available through the theater engineer command or assigned engineer brigade, trained
locally, or hired from the local work force.
10-54. Utility systems must be reliable, properly operated, and protected. Appropriate measures should be
implemented to ensure their correct operation and servicing. Measures should be implemented to provide
increased or upgraded physical security if the situation warrants. Such measures include controlled access,
continuous inspection, and adequate security personnel. (See ATP 3-39.32 for more details on facility
physical security.)

Wastewater Collection and Treatment Systems

10-55. Large troop concentrations at fixed facilities generate increased requirements for handling sewage
and wastewater collection and treatment. When existing fixed facilities are occupied, they usually include
wastewater systems. However, these systems may not be fully operational or suitable for use by military
forces. These systems should be properly inspected, operated, maintained, repaired, or upgraded by
engineer elements or qualified indigenous personnel.
10-56. The construction, operation, maintenance, and repair of adequate sewage disposal systems are
described in AR 420-1 and UFC 3-240-03N.

10-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

10-57. Field sanitation measures (such as pit latrines and grease sumps), portable chemical toilets, and
waste treatment plants may be used temporarily until fixed facilities are completed and in operation. Force
health protection is facilitated through good unit standard operating procedures, leadership enforcement,
and field discipline in conjunction with the conduct of an EHSA and medical monitoring procedures. (See
ATP 4-25.12 and FM 21-10/MCRP 4-11.1D.)
10-58. As with all AFCS designs in the AO, the standard of construction for wastewater systems will
nearly always be nonpermanent and designed to require minimum maintenance during the limited time
anticipated for the period of occupation. Locally available materials may be used if approved by the ASCC
engineer. Engineers will perform real property maintenance and operate the system as directed by the
ASCC engineer. Guidance on environmental considerations will be provided in an annex of the OPORD.
(See the AFCS for standard designs of wastewater systems.)

Shower and Laundry Systems

10-59. The U.S. Army Quartermaster sustainment brigades can provide a system of mobile shower and
laundry systems. The laundry system includes a giant mobile washer and dryer facility that stands on a
flatbed tractor-trailer. The shower system includes a multipoint shower facility, which features separate
stalls that are erected under a large tent. (See ATP 4-93 for more information on shower and laundry
systems.)

Other Utility Systems

10-60. In some areas, other types of central utility systems may have to be operated by theater forces.
These systems include heating, cooling, or refrigeration. Utility equipment in existing facilities must be
repaired and/or maintained if it is to be operated. The responsibility for supervising this work will be
directed by the ASCC engineer.
10-61. Local, portable, or unit systems (such as stoves and portable refrigeration units) will be ordered,
maintained, repaired, and operated by the using unit. Engineers usually inspect and maintain central utility
systems, such as steam plants, cold storage warehouses, or cooling plants. Where existing facilities are
used, the theater engineer command may ensure the maintenance of these systems.

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF FACILITIES

10-62. The maintenance and repair of facilities are the responsibility of the local commander who is
supported by engineer assets. Existing facilities that need maintenance and repair before they can be used
are repaired to minimum standards. Early in planning, engineers should ensure that repair materials are
properly estimated and prestocked to assure their availability when needed.
10-63. Much short-term maintenance and repair work can be performed by local troops who are organized
into self-help teams. These teams coordinate with local logistics sources or supporting engineers to obtain
the required expertise, materials, and tools. The early identification of spare parts requirements and the
establishment of supply sources in the early stages of planning are critical. Adequately trained and
supported self-help teams can perform most maintenance and repair work on facilities, releasing engineer
troops to accomplish more critical duties, complex repair work, and major construction projects.
10-64. When major repairs are required, the engineer unit assigned to the area support group, augmented
when necessary with supporting assets from the theater engineer command or assigned engineer brigade,
makes repairs as prioritized by the theater Army engineer. Generally, these priorities are developed and
scheduled based on the impact that the work has on the mission.
10-65. After immediate and ongoing maintenance and repair requirements are determined, the
commander’s senior engineer will establish a repair and maintenance program for the installation, base, or
facility using self-help, supporting engineer assets, and/or local personnel or contracted support to
accomplish the work. If the program is extensive or long-term, the unit commander should coordinate with
the ASCC engineer to initiate a continuing facility engineer operation at the facility or installation. The
facility engineer will then coordinate requirements and resources needed to accomplish the mission. Further
guidance on facilities maintenance and repair may be found in AR 420-1 and TM 5-610.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-11

Chapter 10

SOLID-WASTE MANAGEMENT
10-66. Solid-waste management includes collection, recycling, and disposal. Improperly handled solid
waste can be a safety and health hazard. The local commander is usually made responsible for solid-waste
collection and disposal, and engineers accomplish the task. Guidance on solid-waste collection and disposal
is found in AR 420-1 and NAVFAC MO-213/AFR 91-8/TM 5-634.
10-67. Placing in a landfill, burning, and removing are normal means for solid-waste disposal in an AO.
Because of potential surface and groundwater contamination, the explosive hazard associated with
uncontrolled methane gas production, increased vermin activity, and the obvious problems with solid-waste
odors, it is imperative that landfills be properly planned, designed, managed, and maintained. Options
available to lessen the quantity and/or eliminate specific types of solid waste in sanitary landfills include—
 Using incineration equipment.
 Using recycling programs and services.
 Using appropriate compost methods.
 Using a combination of several methods.

Note. See UFC 3-240-10A for more information on landfills.

10-68. Compaction and selective disposal are two alternate methods for reducing the volume of solid
waste:
 Compaction. Compaction is accomplished with specialized equipment for collecting and
compacting solid waste prior to it being dumped into a landfill. At the landfill site, special
mobile compaction equipment may be used to reduce the volume of solid waste before it is
buried and covered. Other compaction and solid waste-handling techniques include compacting
and baling solid waste for burial or removal from the area.
 Selective disposal. Selective disposal is the separation of certain types of solid waste, such as
wood or metal, from the waste stream. The separated material is then stored or reused.
10-69. Table 10-1 shows an example of estimated solid-waste disposal requirements in tons per day for
supported populations for standard base camp sizes and levels of base camp capabilities (basic, expanded,
and enhanced). The top end of the population range is multiplied by planning factors from ATP 3-
37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. These estimates can be used for the initial, field-expedient planning of the total
daily, solid-waste disposal requirements for base camps when no other information is available.

Table 10-1. Example of base camp estimated solid-waste disposal in tons per day
Basic Water Expanded Water Enhanced Water
Size Population Requirements (4 Requirements (6 Requirements (10
p/per/day)/2,000 p/per/day)/2,000 p/per/day)/2,000
Extra small 299 0.6 0.9 1.5
Small 1,999 4.0 6.0 10.0
Medium 5,999 12.0 18.0 30.0
Estimate waste disposal requirements based on the planned population
Large >6,000
and planning factors.
LEGEND:
p/per/day pounds per person per day

10-12 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Real Estate and Real Property Maintenance

10-70. The waste management principles of reduce, reuse, and recycle can reduce the generated waste
amounts and reduce the required capacities of disposal facilities or other waste management options. TM 3-
34.56/MCIP 4-11.01 provides information on developing more detailed waste generation rates that are
tailored to a specific situation and waste management options.
10-71. Solid-waste collection and disposal techniques depend on the volume of waste generated, the
duration of facility occupation, existing collection facilities, the resources available to perform the work,
the facility location, the situation, and the environmental aspects of the area. In some cases, selected
recycling may be enacted.
10-72. Special consideration should be given to hazardous waste, especially waste products generated by
medical facilities and maintenance operations. Hazardous waste should be disposed of according to
regulations, laws, treaties, and agreements. Specific guidance should be contained in an annex of the
OPORD. The improper disposal of hazardous waste may cause serious illness or death to those who operate
landfills or cause irreversible environmental damage. Specialized medical expertise exists to support the
engineer and the commander when dealing with hazardous waste. (See TM 5-814-7 for more information
on hazardous-waste disposal in land treatment facilities.)

REAL ESTATE OR REAL PROPERTY TRANSFER

10-73. The transfer of real estate or real property to another Service, a multinational force, a governmental
or nongovernmental organization, or the HN is an extensive process that can vary between commands and
theaters of operation. It requires advanced planning and coordination between the current occupant and the
receiving organization.
10-74. If the transfer involves coalition or HN forces, there are special requirements to ensure that the
United States is fully relieved of liability and that monetary reimbursements are made for any
improvements. Activities include providing legal requirements, conducting real estate reconciliation,
executing property distribution (retrograde and disposal operations), descoping contractual requirements,
monitoring environmental cleanup, and documenting records and archives to capture relevant transactions
and agreements.
10-75. Proper transfer procedures can facilitate the timely withdrawal of U.S. forces, reduce costs, prevent
undue liabilities, protect U.S. interests, and promote good relations. (See UFC 1-300-08 for guidance and
criteria on the transfer and acceptance of DOD real property. ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for information
on base camp transfer and closure. See AR 405-90 for real estate disposal.)
10-76. During initial occupation, the inbound unit should focus on documenting facility conditions,
inventorying the property, and reviewing existing records. It is imperative that units properly manage and
maintain records and reports as they will ease the transfer of future real estate or real property transactions
with other units. Real estate documents (property agreements, location, description, condition, surveys,
value, and maps) should be requested from the outbound unit, kept on file, and updated as changes occur.
(See AR 405-45 and DA Pamphlet 405-1.)
10-77. To support redeployment and transition, engineers may be required to repair, refurbish, and turn
over property and real estate to the HN. Closure actions may include the need to terminate leases and
curtail services and facility contracts. Engineers can also support in planning and executing the destruction
of facilities to prevent enemy use.
10-78. To complete a transfer, units must properly complete the list of transfer requirements and comply
with applicable laws and regulations before finalizing the transaction. Once the transfer is approved for
acceptance or return, commands—
 Coordinate with authorized representatives of units receiving the property, usually the real
property accounting officer or designated representative (when feasible or required).
 Conduct a joint inspection of the property or facility and prepare and sign a verification of joint
inspection and record of return.
 Prepare and sign an outgoing inventory report.
 Prepare and sign a condition report.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 10-13

Chapter 10

 Prepare and sign an environmental summary report.

 Complete DD Form 1354 (Transfer and Acceptance of DOD Real Property), ensuring that real
property accountable officers or designated representatives of both organizations receive copies.
(See UFC 1-300-08 for details on completing DD Form 1354.)

10-14 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 11
Power Systems
Military operations require electrical power to support mission command,
communications, targeting, force protection, logistics, and force sustainment
functions throughout all phases of military operations. Powered networks include
interior wiring, distribution, and power generation systems. Safe, reliable, efficient,
scalable, and sustainable power systems are essential and require adequate planning
and consideration by all military units, from the tactical to the strategic level. Power
systems (consisting of standardized and compatible modular components) may range
from small systems powering single facilities to large systems with multiple power
sources and may incorporate alternative fuels, power storage options, and renewable
energy sources. General engineers play a key role in synchronizing the construction,
operation, and maintenance of power systems to achieve the desired GE effort in
unison with CCDR priorities. This chapter provides an overview of Service
capabilities and includes all phases of power systems.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

11-1. During the initial phases of military operations, power systems will be low-voltage, tactical power
systems that are common to all Services. These tactical power systems include limited distribution and
lighting capabilities. As operations progress and power requirements change, each Service possesses
varying, complementary capabilities to support operations.
11-2. Small, engine-driven generators are the main source of electrical power for armed forces in the field.
Other power-generating capabilities can be used, such as commercial power systems, renewable energy
(water, wind, solar) electric-generating systems, and rechargeable battery systems.

UNITED STATES ARMY

11-3. U.S. Army units own, operate, and maintain organic tactical generators to meet command
requirements and essential life support electrical power requirements. U.S. Army and U.S. Navy units own,
operate, and maintain deployable prime power generators and can assist in using commercial power.
Engineer prime power units provide temporary power from their organic generators or from local power
grids.

Responsibilities
11-4. General engineers have the capability to plan, design, construct, operate, and maintain basic power
generation and secondary distribution systems. U.S. Army engineer prime power assets can reach back to
USACE and provide power planning beyond the capability of assigned engineers.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 11-1

Chapter 11

11-5. There is a division of labor among the specialized U.S. Army electricians who handle interior,
distribution, and power plant systems. This includes the following:
 Interior system electricians. Interior electricians are trained and equipped to perform electrical
work within the interior of the building, up to the circuit box. This includes reading electrical
system blueprints; installing wiring, transformers, circuit breakers, service panels, switches,
electrical boxes, and lighting systems; and inspecting, testing, repairing, and replacing electrical
systems within facilities.
 Distribution system electricians. Power distribution specialists are trained and equipped to
perform tasks associated with electrical distribution. They connect service drops and conduits on
deenergized systems. Their duties also include installing—
 Electrical prime power distribution systems.
 Exterior services.
 Utility poles.
 Guys.
 Anchors.
 Crossarms.
 Conductors.
 Insulators.
 Transformers.
 Other electrical hardware.
 Power plant system electricians. Prime power production specialists are trained and equipped
to perform electrical assessments and facility power system maintenance. They can perform
quality assurance or quality control operations and supervision. They can operate, install, and
perform direct support/general support level maintenance on electric power plants. They can
work on prime power generator sets of 500-kilowatt capacity and higher and associated auxiliary
systems and equipment. Other duties include the liaison officer and technical advisor to the
Federal Emergency Management Agency and other federal organizations as necessary.
11-6. Every U.S. Army element that is authorized power system components (such as generators and
electrical distribution equipment) on their modified table of organization equipment is required to have a
unit power manager who is trained and licensed to operate the unit tactical power system. The tactical
power system will typically be a plug-and-play power system that provides power to the unit tactical
operations center, communication facility, or maintenance facility.

Prime Power Units

11-7. When power requirements exceed the capabilities of the unit power manager and/or the unit-owned
tactical power system, the unit may request GE support, which may include support from a specialized
engineer prime power unit. Engineer prime power units support GE efforts theater-wide by providing
expertise and technical assistance on all aspects of electrical power and providing utility grade power to
support large military operations and base camps. Prime power efforts and capabilities must be closely
coordinated, integrated, and synchronized with the GE effort to ensure that sufficient, reliable, and resilient
electrical power is available to support all operations. (See TM 3-34.45.)
11-8. Engineer prime power units can help plan, install, operate, and maintain their organic power system.
The prime power system can help support a variety of military facility requirements, to include bases/base
camps, seaports, airfields, major headquarters, and medical treatment (field hospital) or other critical
facilities. They may also repair, operate, and maintain nonstandard or commercial power plants and
electrical distribution systems to support the range of military operations. Engineer prime power units may
perform other technical, power-related tasks, to include—
 Providing power-related planning and staff assistance.
 Conducting power requirement assessments and electrical-load surveys.
 Analyzing existing power systems and recommending COAs for improvement or expansion.

11-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Power Systems

 Drafting the scope of work for contracted power system support.

 Serving as the technical representative of the contracting officer.

UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS

11-9. U.S. Marine Corps utility units are organized and equipped to deliver power across the MAGTF.
Each element of the MAGTF possesses an organic utility capability. MAGTF power systems are scalable
to the level of activity and the mission. MAGTF utility personnel plan, install, operate, and maintain
military standard 120, 208, 240, and 416 volts alternating current power generation and distribution
equipment for base camps and vertical construction projects. Utilizing the MAGTF mobile electric power
systems, utility units safely deliver electric power using equipment that produces from 2 to 100 kilowatts.
Enduring power requirements, such as those needed at air facilities, can be operated for up to 2 years.
When power requirements exceed the capabilities of the organic utility units, the MAGTF requests
augmentation from external sources, such as the Naval Construction Force (Seabees) or commercial
contractors. Additional information pertaining to U.S. Marine Corps power generation and distribution
capabilities (including tactics, techniques, and procedures) can be found in Theater of Operations Electrical
Systems.

UNITED STATES NAVY

11-10. The U.S. Navy construction battalion maintenance unit provides follow-on public works
operations to maintain and repair existing advanced base shore facilities or facilities constructed by the
Naval mobile construction battalion during contingency operations. The mobile construction battalion is
capable of manning, equipping, and maintaining steam and electrical power generation and distribution
systems for advanced base facilities, up to 5,000 personnel. (See NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5 for more
information on construction battalion maintenance units and Naval mobile construction battalion
capabilities.)
11-11. The U.S. Navy has mobile utility support units that provide power plants, substations, steam
plants, and technical expertise to support DOD utility shortfalls worldwide. Mobile utility support
equipment technicians attend the prime power production specialist course and a mobile utility support
equipment familiarization course. Technicians are rapidly deployable within a 24-hour notice to provide
technical assistance for organic and nonorganic utilities. Technicians install, repair, maintain, and operate
power generation, electrical distribution, transformation, and steam-generating equipment and
infrastructure. Mobile utility support equipment teams are compact and multidimensional and have
expertise and skills to resolve a wide range of utility issues. (See NTTP 4-04.3 for more information on
mobile utility support equipment.)

UNITED STATES AIR FORCE

11-12. The U.S. Air Force has Prime BEEF and RED HORSE units that are stand-alone squadrons. They
are highly mobile, largely self-sufficient, and rapidly deployable. Both of these units are capable of
providing electrical-system installation. Prime BEEF are mobile assets that are deployed to air bases, where
they can combine to form a main operating base combat engineer force of 200 to 320 people, depending on
the threat and number and type of aircraft. RED HORSE units provide heavy repair capability and
construction support when requirements exceed normal base civil engineer capabilities and where U.S.
Army engineer support is not readily available. (See Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34 for additional
information.)

BASE CAMPS
11-13. Base camps may provide power from generators, a central power plant, or commercial utility
power sources to meet operational and life support requirements. Base camps can connect a variety of
power sources to the base camp distribution system to create a self-contained microgrid. A microgrid is a
localized grouping of electricity generation, energy storage, and loads that normally operate connected to a
traditional, commercial centralized grid (microgrid).

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 11-3

Chapter 11

11-14. A microgrid may provide more efficient distribution and use of electrical power. Base camp power
generation and distribution systems may also include power storage capabilities into their grid for
supporting mission-essential facilities or equipment. The installation, operation, and maintenance of power
storage capabilities may be performed by units, interior electricians, prime power personnel, or contractors.

OTHER SOURCES
11-15. The HN may operate regional or national power systems or have commercial utility power systems
that are capable of supporting U.S. military operations. However, HN power may not be sufficient, reliable,
or compatible with U.S. military equipment or facilities. Exercise caution when considering HN power, as
it may undermine counterinsurgency goals and actions.
11-16. Contracted power support may be available through local military contracts, the USACE
worldwide power contract, or the logistics civil augmentation program. Contract support may range from
simple O&M of military power systems to the construction and leasing of large power systems to support
large base camps. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for additional information.)

PLANNING AND DESIGN

11-17. There is no one-size-fits-all solution to supplying electrical power throughout the range of military
operations. The capacity, mobility, and flexibility requirements of the electrical system of a mission
command or command and control node during large-scale combat are very different from those of a large,
established contingency base camp used as a force projection platform or logistics operations hub. Often, a
site occupied at the cessation of combat operations will develop into an enduring contingency base. Just as
the mission of the contingency base camp evolves, so too must its electrical system.

POWER CONTINUUM
11-18. The power continuum illustrates a well-planned, designed, and implemented electrical-power
system progression from initial combat operations through long-term peacetime military engagements and,
ultimately, to base camp closure. (See figure 11-1.) The power systems are constructed to be compatible
building blocks from one system to another, ensuring that all users have sufficient electrical power in a
scalable system that will support the changing electrical power demands of the theater.

Figure 11-1. Power continuum

11-19. Typically, a contingency power system will begin with a unit-owned tactical power system,
transition to a deployable prime power system and, ultimately, progress to the civilian- or contractor-
managed sustained power system for long-term engagements. However, the phases of the power continuum
do not have to occur consecutively and several or all phases can occur concurrently. The goal is to employ
power systems that support and build on one another.

11-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Power Systems

11-20. The following power systems are depicted in the power continuum in figure 11-1:
 Tactical power system. This is a highly mobile contingency power system that produces and
distributes electrical power at user voltage and is installed, operated, and maintained by Soldiers.
Initial tactical power systems are composed of modified table of organization equipment-
authorized, U.S. Army standard generators and power distribution equipment; but they may
include commercial, off-the-shelf power equipment as missions dictate. User voltage is typically
120/208 volts at 60 hertz, but may also be 230/400 volts at 50 hertz, depending on the TO.
Tactical power is generated by a mobile, electrical-power unit that is dedicated to supporting the
missions of units engaged in combat operations. Tactical power uses two classes of generators:
precise and utility. These standard military generators are highly mobile, produce low voltages,
and do not require the use of transformers. They have an output capacity that ranges from 0.5 to
200 kilowatts. These generators are in the unit table of organization and equipment and are
referred to as tactical generators. Distribution systems for tactical power are usually very simple.
They often consist of standard components, such as field wiring, distribution illumination sets,
and electrical sets. The installation, operation, and maintenance of tactical generators and
distribution equipment are the responsibility of the using unit.
 Deployable prime power system. This is a deployable contingency power system that produces
and distributes electrical power at medium voltage; uses transformers to produce user voltage;
and is installed, operated, and maintained by Soldiers. Medium-voltage is typically a 2400- to
13,800-volt power system that is capable of distributing power.
 Sustained power system. This is a contingency power system that is site-specific and may be
composed of low- or medium-voltage power equipment, fixed generators, and commercial
electrical equipment. It is installed, operated, and maintained by contracted civilian personnel.
11-21. See TM 3-34.45 for additional information on power systems.

POWER SYSTEMS
11-22. There are many sources of electrical power. Each source varies in complexity, efficiency, and
reliability. Routine power sources are tactical generators, prime power generators, and commercial power.
Engineers estimate power requirements; plan for sources over time; and design and construct basic power
generation systems, secondary distribution systems, and fixed-site storage systems. As the TO matures,
power requirements grow significantly and engineers conduct detailed planning to forecast and estimate
future power demands to ensure that demands do not exceed supply over time.

Power System Planning Considerations

11-23. Power system master planning consolidates and interprets the information gathered from the initial
assessment and merges it with geospatial information. This information includes terrain, existing and
planned facilities, and vehicle and pedestrian traffic patterns to determine the optimum placement of power
system components. Additional planning considerations include—
 Survivability. Do not locate power system components near installation perimeter walls.
Protection from direct and indirect fire (such as using T-shaped walls or sandbag walls) may be
required. Ensure that installed obstacles or barriers do not physically restrict cooling air flow.
 Drainage. Do not locate power system components in low areas that may be prone to flooding,
or near streams, ponds, or rivers where water levels could rise unexpectedly.
 Fuel storage location. Locate remote fuel tanks and reserve fuel supply (5-gallon fuel cans)
close to equipment as authorized by the Unified Facilities Criteria and national fire code.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 11-5

Chapter 11

 Utility corridors/utility space. A utility corridor is a linear strip of land, normally running
parallel with roads, that is identified for present or future locations of utility lines. Locate power
cables in dedicated utility corridors out of main traffic patterns to minimize damage and to
ensure access for repair or expansion/modification of the power system. Do not locate power
cables under facilities, T-shaped walls, sandbags, or other obstructions to access. Provide a
dedicated space for generators and other power system components out of main traffic patterns
to prevent physical damage, but allow access for maintenance or replacement.
 Equipment standards. Use only commercial power system components that have been
approved by one of the nationally recognized testing laboratories or that have been inspected and
approved by the authority with jurisdiction. Military power system components must meet
military standards or adhere to military specifications. Do not use nonlisted components of
existing facilities. Replace discovered nonlisted parts. (See DA Pamphlet 385-26.)
11-24. Power system planners should be integrated into the planning committee or working group to
coordinate with facility master planners, communications personnel, force protection personnel, and
logistics personnel. This is needed to ensure that the power system will best meet the needs of all supported
and minimize conflicts with other mission requirements.
11-25. Always consider personnel and system safety with respect to locating overhead power lines in
close proximity to facilities or in areas that frequently use tall combat vehicles with tactical radio antennas,
high-lift forklifts, or cranes. Work on energized circuits during system installation or maintenance requires
an energized work permit. A complete power system design will require a short-circuit analysis of potential
fault currents to aid in determining proper circuit breaker and component sizing and ratings. The data from
the short-circuit analysis is used in an arc flash hazard analysis to determine arc flash protection
boundaries, incident energy at the working distance, minimum requirements of arc-rated protective
clothing, and potential risks to personnel performing system maintenance and to develop risk mitigation
strategies.
11-26. Automated planning and design tools, such as the TCMS, are available to provide baseline
standard designs and produce a construction bill of materials. The Auto Distribution Illumination System,
Electrical, is a computer model developed to simulate the use of the Distribution Illumination System,
Electrical, or the Power Distribution Illumination Systems, Electrical. The Distribution Illumination
System, Electrical, refers to the military family of power distribution equipment (military customized
electrical breaker boxes). These tools can aid in proper system configuration and component selection.
11-27. Additional references are as follows:
 See TM 3-34.46/MCRP 3-17.7K for detailed design, layout, installation, and maintenance of
electrical systems.
 See the AFCS program guidelines for standard electrical designs.
 See UFC 3-500 series for commercial power system guidance, and UFC 3-501-01 for details of
electrical engineering.
 See TM 3-34.45 for deployable power systems.
 See TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083 for guidance on the facilities maintenance
of interior electrical systems.
 See TM 5-684/NAVFAC MO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082 for the maintenance and repair of exterior
electrical distribution systems.
 See DA Pamphlet 385-26, TM 5-682, and UFC 3-560-01 for details on safe electrical practices.

11-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Power Systems

Power System Requirements

11-28. The initial assessment of what the power system must do is the critical first step, which must be
performed before construction begins or installation commences. The observations made, questions asked,
and resulting answers set the framework for establishing a safe, reliable, and efficient power system.
Executing an effective initial assessment requires a combination of technical expertise, engineer art, and
forecast of future requirements. Some considerations are—
 What size area will the base camp or facilities occupy? The geographic area is a very
important consideration when determining if power must be provided by one power system or
multiple power systems. This also affects the distribution system used; for example, overhead or
buried cables. A relatively large, spread-out installation will likely require multiple power
systems, regardless of population, because excessively long power cables will degrade the
performance and efficiency of the power system. The available area will also determine whether
expansion (of services/capabilities and/or population) can occur within the existing perimeter or
will require additional land.
 What is the projected population to be served? This is important because, generally, larger
populations have greater power requirements.
 How soon must the power system be operational? The need for speed will often override the
ability to design and resource materials to construct a more efficient power system. However, if
the initial power system is emplaced in power system modules, consolidation into a more
sustainable system will be easier to achieve and more cost effective.
 How long will the power system be required? It is difficult and inefficient to operate and
sustain multiple small power systems for an extended period of time (years). If longer duration
missions can be properly determined or planned for, power systems can be properly planned for
consolidation or upgraded accordingly to the deployable prime power system or a long-term
sustained power system.
 Will the power system utilize an existing power system or facilities? The decision to utilize
existing facilities may be expedient and enhance force protection, but may require repair,
modification, or upgrade to be made suitable for military use. The commercial standards of
construction may require modification to adapt to military power systems. The repair and/or
expansion of existing commercial facilities will require additional planning and design
consideration and may place challenges on logistics sustainment. Changes must equal or exceed
applicable building codes and standards.
 What voltage and frequency will be required? U.S. military power systems and equipment are
designed to operate at 120/208 volts at 60 hertz, and must comply with U.S. safety and
construction standards. The HN power system will almost certainly operate at a different voltage
or frequency and may not comply with U.S. safety and construction standards. Most HN power
systems will operate at 50 hertz and voltage will range from 220 to 240 volts and 380 to 415
volts. Some office equipment may operate at either voltage standard, but adapters will most
likely be required to enable office equipment plugs to be inserted into HN power outlets
(receptacles). It is highly recommended to select a single standard and eliminate the necessity for
disparate power systems or utilization of complex power conversion equipment (transformers).
 What type of installation will the power system serve? ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N
discusses several levels and capabilities of base camps and resultant power considerations. The
types of facilities and equipment, projected power consumption, and level of services available
will have a large impact on determining power system requirements. Getting the right
information will enable better planning and design decisions. Consider the following:
 Will the installation have large operations or personnel centers requiring large industrial-
style heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems?
 Will there be large consolidated dining facilities? Will there be a hospital? Will there be
extensive, refrigerated/frozen food?
 Will U.S. Army and U.S. Air Force Exchange Service facilities, vendors, or support
contractors be on-site?

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 11-7

Chapter 11

 Will there be large logistics, transportation, and maintenance facilities or water purification
and ice production equipment?
 Will there be a large consolidated laundry facility?
 What power system assets are available, and are they sustainable? An initial assessment
includes a listing of serviceable power system equipment on-site or readily available. Decisions
to utilize or purchase nonstandard, commercial equipment must carefully consider whether the
power system is sustainable with readily available service and repair parts and whether trained
technicians are available to operate and maintain the equipment.

Note. An effective planning rule of thumb is that, for standard 120/208-volt power systems, the
total distance from the power source to the point of consumption should not exceed 300 feet.
(See TM 3-34.45 for additional information.)

POWER PLANT SIZES FOR BASE CAMPS

11-29. Table 11-1 shows an example of estimated power plant sizes, in kilowatts, for supported
populations in standard base camps (basic, expanded, and enhanced). The top end of the population range
for each base camp size is multiplied by planning factors from ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. These
estimates can be used for the initial, field-expedient planning of the total power requirements and plant
sizes for base camps when no other information is available. The base or base camp power system may
initially be constructed from tactical generators and then converted to prime power or may initially be
constructed using prime power plants and then be converted to commercial power generation systems, as
discussed in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. TM 5-811-6 provides detailed procedures for designing power
plants.

Table 11-1. Example of estimated power plant sizes, in kilowatts

Population Basic Power Plant Expanded Power Enhanced Power Plant
Size
(x 1.25) (1.5 kw/per) Plant (2.5 kw/per) (3.5 kw/per)
Extra small 374 561 935 1,309
Small 2,499 3,749 6,248 8,747
Medium 7,499 11,249 18,748 26,247
Estimate the power plant size based on the planned population and planning
Large > 7,500
factors.
Legend:
kw/per kilowatt(s) per person

DESIGN OF POWER SYSTEMS

11-30. Electrical systems include basic power generation, secondary distribution or wiring, and storage
capabilities.

Notes.

1. See TM 3-34.46/MCRP 3-17.7K for electrical system designs, layouts, installation

requirements, and maintenance.

2. See the AFCS program guidelines for standard electrical designs.

3. See UFC 3-500 series for electrical criteria requirements.

4. See TM 3-34.45 for deployable prime power system designs.

5. See UFC 3-501-01 for electrical engineering details.

11-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Power Systems

6. See TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083 for information on the maintenance of

interior electrical systems (600 volts and less).

7. See TM 5-684/NAVFAC MO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082 for the maintenance and repair of

exterior electrical distribution systems.

8. See DA Pamphlet 385-26, TM 5-682, and UFC 3-560-01 for electrical safety practices.

CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION, AND CONNECTION

11-31. GE units may install low-voltage tactical power systems, install medium-voltage deployable prime
power systems, construct or install facilities (interior) electrical systems, and connect facilities to the power
system.
11-32. GE tasks for constructing, installing, and connecting power systems include—
 Trenching and backfilling power cables in utility corridors.
 Placing concrete foundations for power system components.
 Constructing secondary containment berms for fuel systems.
 Installing power system components (includes generators, switchgears, transformers, and fuel
tanks).
 Installing utility poles and overhead conductors.
 Terminating, testing, and connecting power cables.
 Constructing enclosures for power system components.
 Testing and commissioning power systems prior to use.

11-33. GE units may also assist in writing the scope of work for power system construction contracts.
11-34. The proper power system grounding and bonding of electrical components are essential to ensure
reliable system operation and protective device operation. This will also ensure that personnel are protected
from electrocution due to equipment malfunction. The IEEE Standard 142-2007 (commonly referred to as
the Green Book) provides guidelines for electrical system grounding and bonding. Additional standards
govern power system construction and safe electrical work practices.
11-35. Power systems that operate or will operate at the U.S. military standard 120/208 volts at 60 hertz
must be constructed to meet the standards outlined in NFPA 70: National Electrical Code; the IEEE
Standard 142-2007; the National Electrical Safety Code; and applicable military standards and directives.
Power systems that operate at different voltages or frequencies must be constructed to meet HN electrical
construction and safety standards. If the HN electrical code is inadequate, then use the TCMS to plan
electrical system construction.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

11-36. Operating and maintaining power systems are manpower-intensive. The continuous operation of
large, fixed plants exceeds the manpower capabilities of the prime power platoons so plan accordingly.
11-37. Engineer prime power units will install, operate, and maintain the deployable prime power system.
They will be responsible for designing and safely employing the system. They will be responsible for the
interconnection between the deployable prime power system and the tactical power system. They will
coordinate fuel support and perform maintenance or repair as required. GE unit support may be required for
trenches, concrete foundations, or other support to facilitate power system installation.
11-38. O&M for a sustained power system may range from a simple service contract for operator level
preventive maintenance checks and services to the more typical full service contract, which includes daily
operation, fueling services, periodic maintenance, and repair as needed. A sustained power system contract
may include system construction and facility connections and repair. The sustained power system may
utilize power system equipment provided by the contractor or equipment purchased by the government to
be used by the contractor, or it may be a tactical power system or deployable power system whose

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 11-9

Chapter 11

operational responsibility has been transferred to a contractor. (See TM 3-34.45 for additional information
on power system configurations.)

POWER SYSTEM EXPANSION OR DOWNSIZING

11-39. Military operations usually require adding, moving, or upgrading facilities and equipment, which
necessitates changes in the power system. A well-designed power system should be able to support some
load growth without requiring major modification to the system. There are two basic methods:
 Over build. This method advocates intentionally overbuilding the system beyond initial
forecasted/calculated requirements. This easily allows for anticipated expansion or a surge in
demand. However, this is also very costly and is not an efficient use of power sources.
 Scalable build. This method allows a power system to be designed and constructed as scalable
modules for expansion or contraction. See TM 3-34.45 for more information about the modular
design of power systems.
11-40. Smaller tactical power system modules can be consolidated onto larger tactical generators, with the
smaller generators remaining as redundant backup power for high-priority circuits/tactical facilities. The
larger modules can be further consolidated when transitioning to the deployable prime power system,
which provides much greater efficiency and reliability and minimizes the number of personnel required for
O&M.
11-41. Mixing military and commercial power equipment requires specialized design considerations to
ensure that the system functions safely and efficiently.
11-42. Downsizing a power system requires safety considerations to ensure that any remaining or
abandoned equipment has been properly disconnected and isolated to minimize residual danger to
personnel. Downsizing may require consolidation of facilities to ensure that entire modules can be removed
from the power system, which minimizes isolated facilities remaining outside the power system footprint.

REDEPLOYMENT AND BASE CLOSURE

11-43. Redeployment and base closure require deliberate planning, which begins with a mission statement
of the desired end state. The command must determine which facilities and systems, if any, will remain for
HN use, which facilities and systems will be demolished, and which equipment is excess and requires
disposal. Plan to relocate supported units to allow the orderly demolition of facilities and systems. Conduct
an assessment to determine the serviceability of facilities, systems, and equipment and whether the assets
are suitable for transfer to the HN, if applicable.
11-44. Population and power requirements may temporarily increase during retrograde operations. Plan
temporary lodging for a population surge, as required. If the location is a logistics or transportation hub,
plan to seek out additional areas that are suitable for temporary staging and equipment storage. Consider
plans for security lighting and additional support, as required.
11-45. Base closure and demolition work require an assessment of energized circuits and conductors
before any demolition work begins. Complete an electrical safety survey, and communicate the results to
using organizations who will be affected throughout the redeployment, transfer, or closure activities.
Carefully identify all energy sources and deenergize all circuits to prevent fires or electrocutions.
11-46. Plan accordingly to allow sufficient time for base closure activities. Contracted support for a
sustained power system may require 90 to 120 days or more prior to base closure, to terminate service, and
to dismantle and remove power system equipment. Engineer prime power units can assess the power
system and, if necessary, reestablish a deployable prime power system to support an orderly build-down
process. As redeployment operations progress, the power system will eventually revert back to a tactical
power system with unit responsibility. Additional tactical generators may be needed for the final closeout.
(ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for additional base closure information.)

11-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Chapter 12
Water Production, Well Drilling, and Distribution
Water is vital to sustaining the force and must be made available in sufficient quantity
and quality for Soldier consumption, sanitation, medical operations, CBRN
decontamination, construction, and equipment maintenance. Water is an essential
service to support DSCA, stability, and foreign humanitarian assistance. Water supply
requirements depend on climatic and environmental conditions, terrain, and the type
of operation conducted. Water production and distribution are team efforts conducted
by engineer, quartermaster, medical, and tactical units. Logistics officers estimate
unit water requirements and plan required procurement, production, and distribution
needs. Commanders will request GE support when the logistics plan includes well
drilling or support for water supply points, the establishment of distribution systems,
or water utilities on base camps. This chapter covers water capabilities, planning and
design methods, detection procedures, production techniques, operation measures,
and distribution methods.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND CAPABILITIES

12-1. This section discusses the responsibilities and capabilities of each Service in providing water
production, well drilling, and distribution. Capabilities vary between Services.

UNITED STATES ARMY

12-2. The Secretary of Defense designated the U.S. Army as the executive agent for the management of
land-based water resources in support of contingency operations. This applies to the support of land-based
forces. The U.S. Army is responsible for developing and maintaining an intelligence database to provide
data on the location, quality, and quantity of land-based water resources. USACE supports the U.S. Army
G-4 in this effort. (See AR 700-136 and DODD 4705.1.)
12-3. The combat sustainment support battalion (attached to a sustainment brigade) executes logistics,
including water. Water production and distribution are sustainment unit tasks. Water production is a field
service and supply function. Quartermaster supply units normally perform water purification in conjunction
with the storage and distribution of potable water. (See ADRP 4-0.)
12-4. The U.S. Army sustainment brigade provides material and supply management for water and
synchronizes the supply and distribution of water. Water supply includes the receipt, storage, inspection,
testing, issue, distribution, and accountability of water stocks for the AO. The combat sustainment support
battalion may contain water purification, distribution, and augmentation support companies that provide
water production, package capability, storage, and purification and distribute bottled and bulk water to the
AO. Tactical units have limited water production and distribution capabilities. In temperate climates, water
purification, packaging, storage, and distribution take place in the brigade support battalion. Water
reconnaissance is primarily a sustainment/combat service support unit responsibility. General engineers
assist the water reconnaissance team in water detection. The task to provide water support includes
purification, distribution, storage, and quality surveillance. (See ATP 4-93 for additional information. See
FM 10-115 for quartermaster water unit capabilities.)
12-5. U.S. Army engineer units locate and develop water resources; provide well drilling; and construct,
maintain, and operate permanent and semipermanent water utility systems in the TO. U.S. Army GE units
provide infrastructure support, facilities engineer support, and engineer support, including well drilling, to
bases and installations. GE tasks include the planning, design, construction, repair, maintenance, and

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 12-1

Chapter 12

operation of permanent and semipermanent water facilities. This includes water supply and distribution
systems within base camps, facilities, or buildings. Plumbing is a system of piping, apparatus, and fixtures
for water distribution and waste disposal within a facility or building. The facility engineer manages water
utilities on an installation or base camp.

UNITES STATES ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS

12-6. USACE is another professional reachback resource for seeking comprehensive solutions to complex
water issues. With a staff of subject matter experts and an extensive system of testing and research
laboratories, USACE can assist in resolving unique water system challenges.
12-7. Well drilling is a GE task. The drilling unit turns the operation of the well over to a quartermaster
unit or facilities engineer. U.S. Army engineer organizations are responsible for the following water-related
actions in a TO:
 Surveying, identifying, and compiling data pertaining to surface water sources to supplement
existing data.
 Compiling data using information (such as well-drilling logs and ground surveys) to establish
groundwater well-drilling sites.
 Providing well-drilling teams that are task-organized to nondivisional engineer units.
 Constructing and repairing rigid water storage tanks and water pipelines.
 Improving water point sites that require construction support.
 Constructing and maintaining permanent and semipermanent water utilities, including water
wells, at fixed U.S. Army installations.

UNITED STATES MARINES

12-8. The U.S. Marine Corps maritime pre-positioning force has ships with the capability to purify water
and transfer it ashore.

UNITED STATES NAVY AND UNITED STATES AIR FORCE

12-9. The U.S. Navy and U.S. Air Force have GE infrastructure support and well-drilling capability.

WATER DETECTION, TESTING, AND WELL DRILLING

12-10. The water detection response team is sponsored by USACE, which is the primary DOD
organization for assisting military well drillers for military, humanitarian, or nation-building activities. The
water detection response team provides military well drillers with specific information to help mission
planners make informed decisions and meet mission requirements. The primary function of the water
detection response team is to assist and advise well-drilling teams on the locations of the best well-drilling
sites and depths and to provide information on well-drilling conditions for logistics planners.
12-11. The hydrologic analysis team is staffed on an as-needed basis from a pool of civilian scientists and
engineers that represent various government agencies. The team possesses state-of-the-art, remote sensing
and geophysical equipment and has numerous bibliographic sources readily available for most areas of the
world. The water detection response team also offers a Hydrogeology for Military Well Drillers short
course upon request. Hydrologic analysis team support can be requested through the USACE Water
Resource Database Web site.
12-12. The Hydrologic Data Resources Application is an unclassified smartphone application created to
provide the water detection community with a way to access water resources information through data
collection, visualization, and dissemination. The water resources database is a geodatabase that contains the
location, quantity, and quality of land-based surface, ground, and existing water resources to support DOD
water logistics decisions. The Hydrologic Data Resources Application allows engineers in the field to view,
collect, and edit water resource features on smartphones, using mobile technology and government
databases. For more information on current Hydrologic Data Resources Application systems, see the
USACE Web site.

12-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Water Production, Well Drilling, and Distribution

12-13. Water testing is normally conducted at the lowest level through local medical teams. See the
Center for Disease Control and Prevention Web site for further assistance. As a reachback resource, the
center has comprehensive water-testing capabilities that exceed those of local medical teams and a staff of
subject matter experts beyond local medical teams.

PLANNING AND DESIGN

12-14. Water support requirements are considered in the initial phases of each military operation. The
planning for water is initially based on the sustainment preparation of the operational environment.
Logistics planners use FM 10-52 to estimate the required quantity and quality, based on the mission, size of
the supported force, dispersion of forces in the AO, and availability of various sources of water supply.
Logisticians use FM 10-52 and FM 10-52-1 to plan water supply point operations, which include water
reconnaissance, source and point development, treatment, purification, storage, and distribution. (See UFC
3-230-01 and UFC 3-230-03 for design criteria for water storage, treatment, distribution, and transmission.)
12-15. Water information determines the need for the early deployment of well drilling, water production,
and distribution units. Reconnaissance should include the evaluation of potential water sources, field
reconnaissance to support water detection, the evaluation of infrastructure, and the determination of GE
support requirements.

WATER QUALITY MONITORING

12-16. The production, treatment, and distribution of water provided by military forces and contractors
are monitored for sanitary control. The intent is to provide the highest-quality water to support and sustain
the health and performance of deployed personnel. (See TB MED 577/NAVMED P-5010-10/AFMAN 48-
138_IP for more information.)
12-17. The U.S. Army Public Health Command Web site provides information on drinking-water
protection and updates on other health-related issues. The U.S. Army Public Health Command was
formerly known as the U.S. Army Center for Health Promotion and Preventive Medicine. It also provides
military units with technical support and expertise in the areas of preventive medicine, public health, health
promotion, and wellness.
12-18. There is a variety of technology available to monitor water on-site. Most are handheld devices that
are linked to digital platforms, which transfer data to laboratories that identify basic water quality
parameters and detect a wide range of microbial pathogens and chemical health hazards. The USACE can
assist in identifying the best devices for use by military units.

WATER WELLS
12-19. Water wells are engineer construction projects and must be planned, designed, managed, and
reported in the same manner as other projects. The detailed planning, designing, and drilling of wells is
discussed in NTRP 4-04.2.13/TM 3-34.469/AFMAN 32-1072. The U.S. Navy and U.S. Air Force maintain
well-drilling capabilities, which are also addressed in this manual. Wells should be drilled in a secure area
within the AO and, if possible, within base camps or other facilities for which the water will be used. The
well-drilling team is inherently modular and deploys to the AO with the organic equipment for well
drilling.
12-20. Well-drilling teams are a theater engineer command asset and should be deployed, and employed
by, an engineer brigade or battalion capable of providing expertise and logistics support. Because the well-
drilling team has limited personnel, the engineer headquarters must plan security at the work site.

WATER FOR STABILITY AND HUMANITARIAN ASSISTANCE

12-21. In planning support for stability tasks and foreign humanitarian assistance, consider water an
essential service. Engineers may restore the HN water service or develop the HN capability and capacity to
operate, maintain, and improve the water service.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 12-3

Chapter 12

12-22. Water may be required for human consumption, agriculture, livestock, or industrial use or to
support sanitary measures. The U.S. military may have to temporarily take over the repair and operation of
a municipal water system until the local capability is restored. See the USACE Web site to obtain
information on water resources, including dams, irrigation systems, and transmission systems (aqueducts
and tunnels).
12-23. When drilling a water well, avoid drilling into the same aquifer that the local populace is using.
This will eliminate the perception that the U.S. military is taking water from the local water supply.

BASE CAMP WATER SYSTEMS

12-24. GE includes basic water supply and distribution systems for base camps, facilities, and buildings.
A water supply system receives and purifies water and then moves it to a storage tank or distribution
system. The water may come from a sustainment/combat service support unit distribution system or from a
surface water or groundwater source. The water distribution system is an arrangement of connected pipes,
control valves, pumps, and water heating equipment that carries the water to its destination.
12-25. When engineers or architects design a facility or building, they produce prints and specification
plans that detail the types and quality of materials to be used in the plumbing systems. Plumbing systems
must meet national plumbing code standards. The designer may provide a bill of materials, or a plumber
may compile it. The AFCS also provides a bill of materials for standard facilities. Plumbers use the prints,
specifications, and bill of materials to layout and plan the project. (See Plumbing, Pipe Fitting, and
Sewerage for the detailed planning and design of plumbing systems, including basic water supply and
distribution systems, sewerage systems, hot-water supply systems, fire protection water systems, heating
systems, and plumbing repair and maintenance techniques. This manual also discusses engineer support to
the TO water supply and distribution systems.)
12-26. Planning and designing for the efficient use of water on fixed facilities reduces resources that
could be best used for other operations. The efficient use of water includes using water-efficient fixtures in
buildings, using storm water runoff, and recycling and reusing water.
12-27. USACE AFCS and TCMS provide planning and design details for water and utility facilities. (See
FM 10-52, FM 10-52-1, and FM 10-115 for information on details of GE support to sustainment/combat
service support unit water production and distribution. ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N for water planning
factors for base camps.)
12-28. UFC 3-230-01 provides information on the design criteria for water storage, distribution, and
transmission. Transmission systems convey water from the source to the treatment plant and to the
distribution system. The water may be treated or untreated, depending on the location of the treatment
plant. Transmission system types include pipelines, aqueducts, and tunnels. (See UFC 3-230-03 for
additional information on water treatment. See UFC 3-240-01 for design criteria for wastewater collection.
See UFC 3-240-03N and UFC 3-240-02 for design criteria for wastewater treatment. See UFC 4-832-01N
for information on industrial and oily wastewater control. See FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B and UFC 3-240-02
for details on waste management system design. See TM 3-34.70/MCRP 3-17.7E for details on plumbing
system design. See UFC 3-230-02 for information on the O&M of water supply systems. See UFC 3-240-
02, UFC 3-240-03N, and UFC 3-240-13FN for information on the O&M of wastewater treatment systems.)

WATER PRODUCTION
12-29. Sustainment and engineer units contribute to water production to meet operational requirements.
Water supply units produce potable water. Water distribution units distribute potable water. Preventive
medicine personnel analyze, test, and certify water supplies. Together, these units ensure that there is
enough quality water production and distribution to continuously support the forces.
12-30. Engineer units support water production by conducting GE support, which includes—
 Building combat roads and trails to establish traffic control patterns at the distribution site.
 Connecting existing roads.
 Clearing, preparing, and maintaining the site.

12-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Water Production, Well Drilling, and Distribution

 Constructing water storage and production sites.

 Constructing improvised dams for impounding small streams to obtain a steady source of water.
 Constructing gravel pads to ensure a steady platform for operating reverse osmosis water
purification units.
 Constructing a brine pit (reverse osmosis water purification units support).
 Digging intake galleries along banks of streams.
 Improving drainage at the facility to prevent muddy conditions that may cause the area to
become unstable or unsafe.
 Constructing pads for water storage blivets.
 Constructing or repairing troop bed-down, protection, antiterrorism, and maintenance facilities.
 Providing diving support for the emplacement and inspection of underwater utilities and offshore
water hoses and pipelines.
 Rehabilitating damaged wells and distribution points.
12-31. GE support in the form of well drilling is provided to support water production. Well drilling may
occur when—
 Surveys, analytical data, or hydrology studies confirm the likely presence of subsurface water in
areas.
 Surface sources of water are inadequate (due to quantity or quality) to support the force. (This is
likely to occur in arid terrain where the quantity of water required is high and surface sources are
low.)
 The distribution system lacks the capacity to support the force. (Haul distances may be
significantly reduced by a well that is drilled close to the consumer.)
 CBRN or other contamination is expected that would render surface sources unsafe.
 The mission is part of a humanitarian and civic assistance mission. (A major portion of the world
population lacks access to sufficient sources of potable water. This makes well drilling a
decisive operation in stability or reconstruction operations and a critical part of the overall
inform and influence activities.) (See FM 3-13 for more information.)

WATER DETECTION
12-32. The effective detection of groundwater sources is critical for successful well-drilling operations.
Without proper analysis, the potential for finding an adequate source is less likely. Determining the most
suitable sites to drill for groundwater falls primarily on geospatial teams and water detection response
teams.
12-33. Geospatial teams use data from the worldwide water resources database, terrain products, field
reconnaissance, geophysical surveys, and other geospatial products to recommend the best sites to conduct
well-drilling operations. They also have the reachback capability to access experts at the U.S. Army
Geospatial Center to obtain data and analysis from historical records and subject matter expertise to
identify areas with a high potential for developing water supply sources. Geospatial teams are not equipped
or trained for actual detection, only predictive analysis. The U.S. Army Geospatial Center provides water
resources information to the military community under the authority of DODD 4705.1. (See the USACE
Web site.)
12-34. In unfamiliar terrain, well-drilling teams may drill exploratory test holes to detect groundwater, but
this method is costly and time-consuming. It is only recommended if other water detection methods are not
available or have been proven to be unsuccessful.

WELL-DRILLING OPERATIONS
12-35. Wells provide water to deployed forces. Well-drilling projects should be managed the same as any
construction project. The well-drilling team commander must coordinate closely with the construction or
operations officer of the higher headquarters unit to ensure timely reporting. Because well-drilling
equipment is inherently large and heavy, engineers must ensure its mobility in areas with poor trafficability.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 12-5

Chapter 12

As the team moves from project to project, the operations officer arranges the transfer of completed work
to the user, movement to the new project site, and additional logistics and security arrangements.
12-36. Well-drilling operations include auxiliary activities that consist of exploratory drilling, soil and
rock sampling, well installation monitoring, and construction and demolition support.
12-37. Drilling rigs are truck- or semitrailer-mounted. Current well-drilling and well completion
equipment consists of a 600-foot, well-drilling system (referred to as the LP-12) that includes—
 A truck-mounted drilling machine.
 A truck-mounted tender vehicle.
 A lightweight, well completion kit (including accessories, supplies, and tools required for
drilling a well).
12-38. The U.S. Army also uses the CF-15-S trailer-mounted, 1,500-foot, well-drilling machine and the
1,500-foot well completion kit. The LP-12 replaced the CF-15-S and 1,500-foot well completion kit, but
the CF-15-S may still be forward-deployed for contingency operations.
12-39. The LP-12 can be deployed to anywhere in the world with minimal preparation and support
equipment. With the completion kit, drillers can construct a well to a depth of 600 feet using mud, air, or a
down-hole hammer equipped with or without foam injection. With the augmentation of an auxiliary 250-
cubic-feet-per-minute air compressor, a drill pipe, and 400 feet of drilling stem, the LP-12 can drill to
depths of 1,500 feet in a variety of soil conditions, using mud or drilling foam. Additional equipment
includes casing elevators and slips, larger drill bits, and an additional drill stem. Well-drilling teams should
ensure that they have the rig accessory kit for the LP-12 to be fully mission-capable. Although well-drilling
systems can be deployed rapidly, they are thin-skinned vehicles and need protection when moving around
the battlefield.
12-40. The LP-12 is—
 Air-transportable by a C-130, C-141, C-5, or C-17.
 Equipped for tie-down and lift operations during transport.
 Equipped for air percussion drilling and for rotary drilling with mud or air.
 Equipped to drill wells up to a depth of 600 feet.
 Adaptable for drilling to a depth of 1,500 feet.
 Truck-mounted for mobility.
 A three-mode, water transfer pumping system.

DISTRIBUTION
12-41. Sustainment and GE units conduct water distribution tasks. Sustainment units deliver water in
packages, by line haul distribution in trucks, or by hose and pipelines. They distribute water to units,
storage tanks, bulk distribution areas, and hoses or pipelines that connect to plumbing supplies.
12-42. The tactical water purification system provides the military with mobile, tactical water purification
for a broad range of water sources to meet water requirements. The U.S. Army tactical water purification
system configuration is mounted on a load handling system-compatible flat rack, while the Marine version
is skid-mounted. The tactical water purification system platform can be efficiently transported by truck,
marine vessel, or fixed-wing aircraft. Although the system is intended for use by the U.S. Army and
Marines, it can also be used to provide potable water to civilian agencies or HNs during emergencies,
disaster relief efforts, humanitarian efforts, and peacekeeping missions.
12-43. The tactical water purification system uses state-of-the-art reverse osmosis technology to produce
1,500 gallons of potable water per hour from any source, including freshwater, seawater, brackish water,
and contaminated freshwater that contains nuclear, biological, and chemical agents. The tactical water
purification system can be operated by a small crew and includes a pretreatment system, a chemical
injection kit, a high-pressure pump, reserve osmosis elements, valves, piping, a wastewater collection
system, an ocean intake system, and a storage tank system. (See TM 10-4610-309-10 (Army)/TM 10802A-
OI/1A Vol 1 (Marine Corps) for more information on the tactical water purification system.)

12-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Water Production, Well Drilling, and Distribution

12-44. GE units plan, design, construct, operate, and maintain the water distribution systems that are
internal to base camps and facilities. They also support sustainment/combat service support unit water
distribution by planning, designing, constructing, and maintaining fixed distribution facilities, such as rigid
storage tanks and pipelines. The water supply may come from existing sources, existing distribution
systems, sustainment/combat service support units, or base camp water sources or wells. On a facility or
installation, water is also called a utility. Distribution pipelines enter a building and become plumbing to
the point of use; then they become waste collection systems to the point of storage, treatment, or recycling.
GE water distribution tasks include support to sustainment/combat service support units installing—
 Pipelines.
 Plumbing supplies.
 Pipe fittings.
 Sewage matter.

HOSES AND PIPELINES

12-45. Purified water enters the distribution system from onshore or offshore water sources. Most water
supply units are equipped with two 10-mile segments of the tactical water distribution system. The tactical
water distribution system is composed of hoses used to transport potable water from wells, desalination
plants, and other sources over distances of less than 10 miles (per segment) to 20,000-gallon fabric storage
tanks. The system is capable of transporting water forward up to 80 miles at a rate of 600 gallons per
minute across level terrain. Sustainment unit water distribution operations are discussed in FM 10-52-1.
Details on water distribution units are covered in FM 10-602.
12-46. Engineers support the tactical water distribution system by providing GE support to set up the
distribution point, leveling water storage pads, and assisting with the emplacement of the hose system
(including gap-crossing). The need to cross hard-surfaced roads and other obstacles requires engineers to
install culverts or emplace suspension kits at various locations throughout the hose system. Engineers assist
in water hose route selection, clearing, preparation, and maintenance.

PLUMBING, PIPE FITTING, AND SEWERAGE

12-47. GE supports the life cycle of water, including plumbing, pipe fitting, and used water collection for
possible recycling. Plumbing systems include water supply methods, water distribution systems, plumbing
fixtures, sewerage or waste systems, and recycling systems. (See Plumbing, Pipe Fitting, and Sewerage for
additional information on plumbing and water heating systems.)

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 12-7

This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix A
Metric Conversion Chart
This appendix complies with AR 25-30 which states that weights, distances,
quantities, and measurements contained in U.S. Army publications will be expressed
in both U.S. standard and metric units. Table A-1 is a metric conversion chart for the
measurements used in this manual. For a complete listing of preferred metric units
for general use, see Federal Standard 376B.

Table A-1. Metric conversion chart

U.S. Units Multiplied By Equals Metric Units
Fahrenheit -17.22000 Celsius
Feet 0.30480 Meters
Inches 2.54000 Centimeters
Inches 0.02540 Meters
Inches 25.40000 Millimeters
Miles 1.60934 Kilometers
Pounds 0.45360 Kilograms
Tons 0.90720 Metric tons
Yards 0.91440 Meters
Metric Units Multiplied By Equals U.S. Units
Celsius 33.80000 Fahrenheit
Centimeters 0.39370 Inches
Meters 3.28084 Feet
Meters 39.37010 Inches
Meters 1.09361 Yards
Millimeters 0.03937 Inches
Kilograms 2.20460 Pounds
Kilometers 0.62137 Miles
Metric tons 1.10230 Tons
Legend:
U.S. United States

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 A-1

This page intentionally left blank.
Appendix B
Base Camp Construction Planning Factors
This appendix provides engineers with basic, necessary, common planning factors
and considerations for base camp construction. Use the information in this appendix
for initial planning to estimate requirements if there is no other directed planning
guidance or theater-specific information provided. Additional information can be
found in ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N, NTRP 4-04.2.5/TM 3-34.42/AFPAM 32-
1020/MCRP 3-17.7F, EP 1105-3-1, JP 3-34, the TCMS, FM 6-0, and other
documents as identified throughout this appendix. See UFC 4-010-01 for planning
factors used for the standoff and separation of facilities. See ATP 4-25.12 and TM 3-
34.56/MCIP 4-11.01 for standoff planning factors for waste management areas. The
Sand Book and the Base Camp Facilities Standards for Contingency Operations
provides specific base camp construction planning factors. Ammunition holding area
planning factors may be found in DA Pamphlet 385-64. For medical facilities
information, see the Health Facility Planning Agency Web site.

BASE CAMP PLANNING SUMMARY

B-1. The tables in this appendix do not show an extra small base camp; they show small (population 500
and 1,500), medium (population 3,000), and large (population 10,000) base camps. (ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-
17.7N for additional information.)
B-2. Planners can interpolate and extend the planning factors to other base camp populations. These tables
are intended to be used during the initial phase of planning for base camp construction and are not intended
to be a substitute for the required detailed planning. Table B-1 and table B-2, page B-2, provide a summary
of the engineer work effort and aggregate necessary for supported populations for indicated base camp
populations.
Table B-1. Summary table—base camp engineer construction effort

Short Equipment Man-Hours

Tons Hours Horizontal Vertical General Total Man-Hours
2,755 77 3,506 33,175 10,232 46,913
7,698 247 8,124 86,047 26,331 120,502
15,138 503 15,093 171,012 53,730 239,835
50,460 1,680 51,093 570,040 179,100 800,233

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 B-1

Appendix B

Table B-2. Summary table—base camp aggregate requirements

Fine Aggregate, Course Aggregate,

Base Camp Population
in Cubic Yards in Cubic Yards
500 450 620
1,500 1,700 2,485
3,000 3,320 4,820
10,000 11,200 16,066

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION EFFORT REQUIREMENTS

B-3. Table B-3 and table B-4 describe the general construction effort requirements for site preparation and
basic facilities for a 500-man base camp.
Table B-3. Construction effort—site preparation requirements
Man-Hours
Facility Size Basis Qty
Hor Ver Gen Total
Road, Class A, 1-inch,
NA As required 0.2 58 NA 10 68
multisurface, 1 mile
Hardstand 1,000 sq yd As required 4.0 168 NA 80 248
Road, Class A, graded,
NA As required 0.2 235 NA 84 319
drained
Hardstand 1,000 sq yd As required 4.0 288 NA 104 392
Site prep, 1 acre NA As required 5.0 440 NA 160 600
Legend:
gen general
hor horizontal
NA not applicable
prep preparation
qty quantity
sq yd square yard(s)
ver vertical

B-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camp Construction Planning Factors

Table B-4. Construction effort—facilities requirements (temporary to semipermanent

standard/temperate climate/wood frame)

Size, Man-Hours
Facility Basis Qty
in feet Hor Ver Gen Total
Shop, motor repair 48x48x14 1/100 veh 1 55 1,185 287 1,527
Storehouse 20x50x8 2 sq ft/man 1 32 461 136 629
Dispensary 20x60x8 1/500 men 1 33 1,290 115 1,438
Headquarters/unit supply 20x40x8 1/200 men 3 84 1,293 240 1,617
Barracks, 50-man 20x100x8 40 sq ft/man 10 450 7,510 1,860 9,820
Kitchen Varies 1/250 men 2 154 10,352 3,788 14,294
1 shower/10
Bathhouse/latrine 20x30x8 1 24 941 61 1,026
men
1 shower/24
Bathhouse/latrine 20x80x8 1 39 1,754 150 1,943
men
Quarters (office) 20x100x8 80 sq ft/office 1 45 869 186 1,100
Guardhouse 20x60x8 1–250 men 1 33 626 115 774
Dayroom 40x60x8 5 sq ft/man 1 43 868 178 1,089
Power system 500 man light/power 1 56 460 192 708
1/2 dining/1/2
Boiler plant Varies 1 208 4,112 1,200 5,520
sleeping
Drainage 500 man 17.5 gpd 1 205 384 490 1,079
Water supply well Varies As required 1 396 45 230 671
Water tank 200 gal As required 1 105 4 109
Water distribution 500 man 25 gpd/man 1 352 812 416 1,580
effective radius,
Sump fire 10,000 gal 1 16 108 16 240
500 feet
Legend:
gal gallon(s)
gen general
gpd gallons per day
HOR horizontal
qty quantity
sq ft square foot (feet)
veh vehicle
VER vertical

SUPPORT AND STORAGE FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION

PLANNING FACTORS
B-4. Table B-5 and table B-6, page B-4, provide construction planning information on motor parks and
Soldier or Marine support facilities.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 B-3

Appendix B

Table B-5. Motor park

Base Camp Population Area in Square Feet
500 61,760
*1,500 242,160
*3,000 541,200
*10,000 721,600
*Based on combinations of 500-man, 1,000-man, and 5,000-man
estimates.

Table B-6. Soldier or Marine support facilities

Population
Facility Criteria
500 1,500 3,000 10,000
Dining sq ft/person varies by unit size NA NA NA NA
Fire station 2.6 x size of vehicle + 90 sq ft NA NA NA NA
Detainee 250 sq ft/MP + 50 sq ft/confinee NA NA NA NA
Bakery 0.6 sq ft/person supported 300 900 1800 6000
Laundry sq ft/person varies by unit size 4.4 4.4 3.3 3.0
Dry cleaning sq ft/person varies by unit size 4.4 4.4 1.75 1.0
Chapel 1.785 sq ft/person 893 2,678 5,55 17,850
Craft/hobby 1 sq ft/person 500 1,500 3,000 10,000
Gymnasium 3.3 sq ft/person 1650 4,950 9,900 33,000
Library 0.75 sq ft/person 375 1,125 2,250 7,500
Service club 7.5 sq ft/NCO; 9.5 sq ft/officer NA NA NA NA
Post exchange 1.2 sq ft/person 600 1,800 3,600 12,000
Post office sq ft/person varies by unit size NA NA 0.5 0.5
Theater sq ft/person varies by unit size NA NA 5.5 5.5
Legend:
NA not applicable

B-5. Table B-7, table B-8, and table B-9 provide examples of selected storage requirements planning
factors for base camps.
Table B-7. Covered/open storage requirements for 14 days of stockage
Base Camp Population Covered Storage, in Square Feet Open Storage, in Square Yards
500 44 1,330
1,500 132 3,990
3,000 265 7,980
10,000 882 26,600

B-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camp Construction Planning Factors

Table B-8. Cold storage requirements for 14 days of stockage

Base Camp Class I, Class VI, Class VIII, Class IX,
Population in Cubic Feet in Cubic Feet in Cubic Feet in Cubic Feet
500 585 155 34 12
1,500 1,755 465 101 36
3,000 3,510 930 202 72
10,000 11,690 3,095 672 238

Table B-9. Fuel storage

Base Camp Population Diesel* (Barrels) MOGAS* (Barrels)
500 160 600
1,500 480 1,800
3,000 960 3,600
10,000 3,200 12,000
*Assuming a stock objective of 8 days.
Legend:
MOGAS motor gasoline

SOLDIER OR MARINE HOUSING

B-6. Table B-10, table B-11, and table B-12, page B-6, provide basic planning guidance for Soldier or
Marine housing.
Table B-10. Soldier or Marine housing
Officer, Enlisted,
Base Camp Population
in Square Feet in Square Feet
500 11,000 28,800
1,500 33,000 86,400
3,000 66,000 172,800
10,000 220,000 576,000
Note: Assumes 20/80 officer to enlisted ratio, 110 square feet/officer, and
72 square feet/enlisted.

Table B-11. Quality-of-life standards for tentage

Tier
Bed-Down and Base Camp Living Standards
Level
Tier I Simple tent setup without floor, nonpermanent
Tier II Wood floor, lights, pole-supported, two electrical outlets
Slightly nicer wood floor, two-thirds wooden wall structure with frame, more than two
Tier III
electrical outlets

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 B-5

Appendix B

Table B-12. Selected tentage planning factors

Floor Area, Weight, Packed, Volume, Packed,
Tent Type
in Square Feet in Pounds in Cubic Feet
Tent, GP, small 198.9 163 26.2
1
Tent, GP, medium 512.0 534 33.0
Tent, GP, large 936.0 665 69.0
Tent, expandable modular (temper) 640.0 2,192 200.0
Tent, maintenance, medium 640.0 1,798 62.0
1
The Operation Joint Endeavor living standard was 10 Soldiers or Marines per each GP, medium, tent.
LEGEND:
GP general purpose

ADDITIONAL PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

B-7. Table B-13 and table B-14 provide general planning factors for water, utilities, and transportation
requirements.
Table B-13. General planning factors for potable and nonpotable water requirements
Consumer Rate of Consumption Remarks
Individual 3–6 gpd/per man NA
Base camp (basic-enhanced) 20–50 gpd/per man Include waterborne sewage
Vehicles (tactical) 1/2–1 gpd/per vehicle NA
Support Facilities
Hospital 200 gpd/per bed 20-hour operation
QM laundry company 64,000 gpd 20-hour operation
Construction Equipment
Road construction 10,000 g/km Nonpotable, clean
Rockcrusher 22,500 gph Nonpotable, clean
Concrete mixer 560gph/140 gph Nonpotable, clean
Other Considerations
Sewage treatment requirements 2.5 gpd/per man Nonpotable, clean
LEGEND:
g/km gallons per kilometer
gpd gallons per day
gph gallons per hour
QM quartermaster

B-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Base Camp Construction Planning Factors

Table B-14. Selected transportation information

1
Air Sea Land
Allow- Allow-
able able, Ship/ Capacity, Load, in
Motor 2 Usable
Aircraft Cabin in Barge in Long Short Rail
Vehicle Cube
Load, in Cubic Type Tons Tons
pounds Feet
50 short
C-5A 204,000 18,368 7,029 2,207.8 2.5-ton 2.5 Well flatcar
tons
Medium 25 short
C-141 90,200 7,024 7,028 1,131.2 5-ton 5.0
flatcar tons
12-ton 12 short
C-130 35,000 2,818 7,005 570.0 12.0 Small flatcar
S&P tons
22.5-ton 10 short
C-17 167,000 NA 231A 585.0 15.0 Boxcar
flatbed tons
34-ton
KC-10A 169,350 12,980 231B 578.0 25.0 Coach 40 pax
trailer
60-ton
B-747 180,000 NA 2,001 24/24 pax tractor- 40.0 Sleeper 32 pax
trailer
1
Estimates are for peacetime payload planning.
2
The maximum length of a train is 40 cars; the maximum net load of a train is 400 tons or 1,000 Soldiers
or Marines.
LEGEND:
lb pound(s)
NA not applicable
pax passengers
S&P stake and platform

SUMMARY
B-8. The preliminary estimate performed when planning for base camp construction should contain the
following:
 Real estate required, in square feet or meters.
 Equipment hours required for construction.
 Man-hours required for construction, by construction skill.
 Materiel requirements, in short tons.
 Detailed cost estimate to allow a cost comparison of one or more base camp concept designs.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 B-7

This page intentionally left blank.
Glossary
The glossary lists acronyms with U.S. Army, U.S. Marine Corps, and joint
definitions.

SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

ADP Army doctrine publication
ADR airfield damage repair
ADRP Army doctrine reference publication
AFCS Army Facilities Components System
AFJPAM Air Force joint pamphlet
AFM Air Force manual
AFMAN Air Force manual
AFPAM Air Force pamphlet
AFR Air Force regulation
AFTTP Air Force tactics, techniques, and procedures
AO area of operations
AOR area of responsibility
AR Army regulation
ASCC Army Service component command
ATP Army techniques publication
attn attention
ATTP Army tactics, techniques, and procedures
BCT brigade combat team
C4ISR command, control, communications, computer, intelligence, surveillance, and
reconnaissance
CAAF contractor personnel authorized to accompany the force
CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
CCDR combatant commander
CCR United States Central Command regulation
CG Coast Guard
CJCSM Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff manual
COA course of action
COMDTINST Commandant of the Coast Guard instruction
CONUS continental United States
DA Department of the Army
DC District of Columbia
DD Department of Defense
DOD Department of Defense
DODD Department of Defense directive

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 Glossary-1

Glossary

DODI Department of Defense instruction

DSB dry support bridge
DSCA defense support of civil authorities
EBS environmental baseline survey
EHSA environmental health site assessment
EM engineer manual
EMO electronic media only
EP engineer pamphlet
ETL engineering technical letter
FC Facilities Criteria
FFE field force engineering
FM field manual
FMFM Fleet Marine Force manual
G-3 assistant chief of staff, operations
G-4 assistant chief of staff, logistics
GE general engineering
GTA graphic training aid
HN host nation
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP information paper
IRB improved ribbon bridge
IS information system
JFC joint force commander
JFOB Joint forward operations base
JLOTS joint logistics over-the-shore
JOA joint operations area
JOPES Joint Operation Planning and Execution System
JP joint publication
LOC line of communications
LOTS logistics over-the-shore
MAGTF Marine air-ground task force
MCDP Marine Corps doctrine publication
MCIP Marine Corps interim publication
MCO Marine Corps order
MCRP Marine Corps reference publication
MCWP Marine Corps warfighting publication
MDMP military decisionmaking process
METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time
available, and civil considerations
MO Missouri
MOG maximum (aircraft) on ground

Glossary-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

Glossary

MSCoE Maneuver Support Center of Excellence

MSR main supply route
NAVFAC Naval Facilities Engineering Command
NAVMED Navy medical
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
No. Number
NTRP Navy tactical reference publication
NTTP Navy tactics, techniques, and procedures
NWP Navy warfare publication
O&M operation and maintenance
OCONUS outside the continental United States
OPLAN operation plan
OPNAVINST Chief of Naval Operations instruction
OPORD operation order
PCC Portland cement concrete
Prime BEEF Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force
RED HORSE Rapid Engineer Deployable Heavy Operational Repair Squadron Engineer
S-3 operations staff officer
SECNAVINST Secretary of the Navy instruction
TB MED technical bulletin (medical)
TC training circular
TCMS Theater Construction Management System
TM technical manual
TO theater of operations
TWPS Tactical Water Purification System
UAS unmanned aircraft system
UFC Unified Facilities Criteria
U.S. United States
USA United States of America
USACE United States Army Corps of Engineers
USC United States Code
USCENTCOM United States Central Command
USCG United States Coast Guard
USMC United States Marine Corps
VA Virginia

SECTION II – TERMS
None.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 Glossary-3

This page intentionally left blank.
References
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.
ADRP 1-02. Terms and Military Symbols. 2 February 2015.
JP 1-02. Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. 8 November 2010.

RELATED PUBLICATIONS
These documents contain relevant supplemental information.

AIR FORCE
Most Air Force doctrinal publications are available online at <http://www.e-publishing.af.mil/>.
AFMAN 91-201. Explosives Safety Standards. 12 January 2011.
AFPAM 10-219 V5. Bare Base Conceptual Planning. 30 March 2012.
AFPAM 10-1403. Air Mobility Planning Factors. 12 December 2011.
Air Force Doctrine Annex 3-34. Engineer Operations. 19 September 2011.
<https://doctrine.af.mil/DTM/dtmengineerops.htm>, accessed on 14 August 2014.

ARMY
Most Army doctrinal publications are available online at <www.apd.army.mil>.
AD-A243 233. U.S. Army Engineer Studies Center. Army Directorate of Public Works Reference
Guide. September 1991. <http://oai.dtic.mil/oai/oai?verb=getRecord&metadataPrefix
=html&identifier=ADA243233>, accessed on 21 August 2014.
ADP 3-0. Unified Land Operations. 10 October 2011.
ADP 3-28. Defense Support of Civil Authorities. 26 July 2012.
ADP 3-37. Protection. 31 August 2012.
ADP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012.
ADP 6-0. Mission Command. 17 May 2012.
ADRP 3-0. Unified Land Operations. 16 May 2012.
ADRP 3-07. Stability. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-28. Defense Support of Civil Authorities. 14 June 2013.
ADRP 3-37. Protection. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-90. Offense and Defense. 31 August 2012.
ADRP 4-0. Sustainment. 31 July 2012.
ADRP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012.
ADRP 6-0. Mission Command. 17 May 2012.
AR 25-30. The Army Publishing Program. 27 March 2006.
AR 190-8. Enemy Prisoners of War, Retained Personnel, Civilian Internees and Other Detainees.
1 October 1997.
AR 210-20. Real Property Master Planning for Army Installations. 16 May 2005.
AR 385-10. The Army Safety Program. 27 November 2013.
AR 405-10. Acquisition of Real Property and Interests Therein. 14 May 1970.
AR 405-45. Real Property Inventory Management. 1 November 2004.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-1

References

AR 405-90. Disposal of Real Estate. 10 May 1985.

AR 415-16. Army Facilities Components System. 17 March 1989.
AR 420-1. Army Facilities Management. 12 February 2008.
AR 700-136. Tactical Land-Based Water Resources Management. 5 June 2009.
ATP 3-11.50. Battlefield Obscuration. 15 May 2014.
ATP 3-34.22. Engineer Operations–Brigade Combat Team and Below. 5 December 2014.
ATP 3-34.80. Geospatial Engineering. 23 June 2014.
ATP 3-37.2. Antiterrorism. 3 June 2014.
ATP 3-39.32. Physical Security. 30 April 2014.
ATP 4-0.1. Army Theater Distribution.29 October 2014.
ATP 4-12. Army Container Operations. 10 May 2013.
ATP 4-13. Army Expeditionary Intermodal Operations. 16 April 2014.
ATP 4-14. Expeditionary Railway Center Operations. 29 May 2014.
ATP 4-25.12. Unit Field Sanitation Teams. 30 April 2014.
ATP 4-35. Munitions Operations and Distribution Techniques. 5 September 2014.
ATP 4-35.1. Techniques for Munitions Handlers. 31 May 2013.
ATP 4-43. Petroleum Supply Operations. 21 July 2014.
ATP 4-45. Force Provider Operations. 24 November 2014.
ATP 4-93. Sustainment Brigade. 9 August 2013.
ATP 5-19. Risk Management. 14 April 2014.
ATTP 3-34.23. Engineer Operations–Echelons Above Brigade Combat Team. 8 July 2010.
DA Pamphlet 385-1. Small Unit Safety Officer/Noncommissioned Officer Guide. 23 May 2013.
DA Pamphlet 385-10. Army Safety Program. 23 May 2008.
DA Pamphlet 385-26. The Army Electrical Safety Program. 1 February 2013.
DA Pamphlet 385-64. Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards. 24 May 2011.
DA Pamphlet 405-1. Army and Air Force Basic Real Estate Agreements. 22 February 1995.
Environmental Surveys Handbook: Contingency Operations (Overseas). September 2005.
<https://www.us.army.mil/suite/doc/37474769 >, accessed on 21 August 2014.
FM 3-07. Stability. 2 June 2014.
FM 3-13. Inform and Influence Activities. 25 January 2013.
FM 3-19.4. Military Police Leaders’ Handbook. 4 March 2002.
FM 3-34. Engineer Operations. 2 April 2014.
FM 3-34.214. Explosives and Demolitions. 11 July 2007.
FM 3-39. Military Police Operations. 26 August 2013.
FM 3-63. Detainee Operations. 28 April 2014.
FM 3-90-1. Offense and Defense, Volume I. 22 March 2013.
FM 4-01. Army Transportation Operations. 3 April 2014.
FM 5-415. Fire-Fighting Operations. 9 February 1999.
FM 6-0. Commander and Staff Organization and Operations. 5 May 2014.
FM 7-15. The Army Universal Task List. 27 February 2009.
FM 10-52. Water Supply in Theaters of Operations. 11 July 1990.
FM 10-52-1. Water Supply Point Equipment and Operations. 18 June 1991.
FM 10-67-1. Concepts and Equipment of Petroleum Operations. 2 April 1998.
FM 10-115. Quartermaster Water Units. 15 February 1989.

References-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

References

FM 10-602. Headquarters and Headquarters Units, Petroleum and Water Distribution Organization.
12 September 1996.
FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18 July 1956.
GTA 90-01-011. Joint Forward Operations Base (JFOB) Protection Handbook.
1 October 2011.
TC 5-340. Air Base Damage Repair (Pavement Repair). 27 December 1988.
TM 3-34.23. M2 Bailey Bridge. 13 August 2013.
TM 3-34.45. Engineer Prime Power Operations. 13 August 2013.
TM 3-34.51. Construction Drafting. 15 June 2012.
TM 3-34.55. Construction Surveying. 3 August 2012.
TM 3-34.61. Geology. 12 February 2013.
TM 3-34.63. Paving and Surfacing Operations. 13 August 2013.
TM 3-34.72. Pile Construction. 15 November 2013.
TM 3-34.73. Port Construction and Repair. 4 January 2013.
TM 3-34.83. Engineer Diving Operations. 2 August 2013.
TM 5-300. Real Estate Operations in Oversea Commands. 10 December 1958.
TM 5-301-1. Army Facilities Components System–Planning (Temperate). 27 June 1986.
TM 5-301-2. Army Facilities Components System–Planning (Tropical). 27 June 1986.
TM 5-301-3. Army Facilities Components System–Planning (Frigid). 27 June 1986.
TM 5-301-4. Army Facilities Components System–Planning (Desert). 27 June 1986.
TM 5-302-1. Army Facilities Components System: Design. 28 September 1973.
TM 5-303. Army Facilities Components System–Logistic Data and Bills of Materiel. 1 June 1986.
TM 5-304. Army Facilities Components System User Guide. 1 October 1990.
TM 5-315. Firefighting and Rescue Procedures in Theaters of Operations. 20 April 1971.
TM 5-610. Preventive Maintenance Facilities Engineering Buildings and Structures.
1 November 1979.
TM 5-626. Unsurfaced Road Maintenance Management. 16 January 1995.
TM 5-682. Facilities Engineering Electrical Facilities Safety. 8 November 1999.
TM 5-803-1. Installation Master Planning. 13 June 1986.
TM 5-811-6. Electric Power Plant Supply. 20 January 1984.
TM 5-814-7. Hazardous Waste Land Disposal/Land Treatment Facilities. 29 November 1984.
TM 5-818-7. Foundations in Expansive Soils. 1 September 1983.
TM 5-840-2. Storage Depots. 7 October 1994.
TM 5-850-1. Engineering and Design of Military Ports. 15 February 1983.
TM 5-852-3. Arctic and Subarctic Construction for Runway and Road Design. 29 October 1954.
TM 5-5420-278-10. Operator’s Manual for Improved Ribbon Bridge (IRB). 8 April 2003.
TM 5-5420-279-10. Operator’s Manual for Dry Support Bridge (DSB). 10 May 2004.

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
Most Department of Defense doctrinal publications are available online at <http://www.dtic.mil
/whs/directives/corres/dir.html>.
Defense Contingency Contracting Handbook. October 2012. < http://www.acq.osd.mil/dpap/ccap/
cc/jcchb/HTML/read_the_handbook.html>, accessed on 21 August 2014.
DODD 3025.18. Defense Support of Civil Authorities (DSCA). 29 December 2010.
DODD 4165.06. Real Property. 13 October 2004.
DODD 4270.5. Military Construction. 12 February 2005.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-3

References

DODD 4705.1. Management of Land-Based Water Resources in Support of Contingency Operations.

9 July 1992.
DODI 3025.21. Defense Support of Civilian Law Enforcement Agencies. 27 February 2013.

FACILITIES CRITERIA
Most Facilities Criteria documents are available online at <www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=4>.
FC 1-300-09N. Navy and Marine Corps Design Procedures. 1 May 2014.
UFC 1-200-01. General Building Requirements. 1 July 2013.
UFC 1-200-02. High Performance and Sustainable Building Requirements. 1 March 2013.
UFC 1-201-01. Non-Permanent DOD Facilities in Support of Military Operations. 1 January 2013.
UFC 1-300-07A. Design Build Technical Requirements. 1 March 2005.
UFC 1-300-08. Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property. 16 April 2009.
UFC 2-000-05N. Facility Planning for Navy and Marine Corps Shore Installations.
23 January 2012.
UFC 2-100-01. Installation Master Planning. 15 May 2012.
UFC 3-230-01. Water Storage, Distribution, and Transmission. 1 November 2012.
UFC 3-230-02. Operation and Maintenance: Water Supply Systems. 10 July 2001.
UFC 3-230-03. Water Treatment. 1 November 2012.
UFC 3-240-01. Wastewater Collection. 1 November 2012.
UFC 3-240-02. Domestic Wastewater Treatment. 1 November 2012.
UFC 3-240-03N. Wastewater Treatment Systems Augmenting Handbook Operation and Maintenance.
16 January 2004.
UFC 3-240-10A. Sanitary Landfill. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-240-13FN. Industrial Water Treatment Operation and Maintenance. 25 May 2005.
UFC 3-250-01FA. Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas.
16 January 2004.
UFC 3-250-03. Standard Practice Manual for Flexible Pavements. 15 May 2001.
UFC 3-250-04. Standard Practice for Concrete Pavements. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-250-06. Repair of Rigid Pavements Using Epoxy Resin Grouts, Mortars, and Concretes.
16 January 2004.
UFC 3-250-08FA. Standard Practice for Sealing Joints and Cracks in Rigid and Flexible Pavements.
16 January 2004.
UFC 3-250-09FA. Aggregate Surfaced Roads and Airfields Areas. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-250-11. Soil Stabilization for Pavements. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-260-01. Airfield and Heliport Planning and Design. 17 November 2008.
UFC 3-260-02. Pavement Design for Airfields. 30 June 2001.
UFC 3-260-03. Airfield Pavement Evaluation. 15 April 2001.
UFC 3-260-17. Dust Control for Roads, Airfields, and Adjacent Areas. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-270-01. Asphalt Maintenance and Repair. 15 March 2001.
UFC 3-270-02. Asphalt Crack Repair. 15 March 2001.
UFC 3-270-03. Concrete Crack and Partial-Depth Spall Repair. 15 March 2001.
UFC 3-270-04. Concrete Repair. 15 March 2001.
UFC 3-270-07. O&M: Airfield Damage Repair. 12 August 2002.
UFC 3-270-08. Pavement Maintenance Management. 16 January 2004.
UFC 3-501-01. Electrical Engineering. 3 February 2010.
UFC 3-520-01. Interior Electrical Systems. 3 February 2010.

References-4 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

References

UFC 3-550-01. Exterior Electrical Power Distribution. 3 February 2010.

UFC 3-560-01. Electrical Safety, O&M. 6 December 2006.
UFC 3-600-01. Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities. 26 September 2006.
UFC 3-601-02. Operation and Maintenance: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection
Systems. 8 September 2010.
UFC 4-010-01. DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings. 9 February 2012.
UFC 4-010-02 (FOUO). DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings.
9 February 2012.
UFC 4-010-03. Security Engineering: Physical Security Measures for High-Risk Personnel.
8 February 2011.
UFC 4-010-05. Sensitive Compartmented Information Facilities Planning, Design, and Construction.
1 February 2013.
UFC 4-020-01. DoD Security Engineering Facilities Planning Manual. 11 September 2008.
UFC 4-020-03FA (FOUO). Security Engineering: Final Design. 1 March 2005.
UFC 4-021-01. Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems. 9 April 2008.
UFC 4-021-02. Electronic Security Systems. 1 October 2013.
UFC 4-022-01. Security Engineering: Entry Control Facilities/Access Control Points.
25 May 2005.
UFC 4-022-02. Selection and Application of Vehicle Barriers. 8 June 2009.
UFC 4-023-03. Design of Buildings to Resist Progressive Collapse. 14 July 2009.
UFC 4-023-07. Design to Resist Direct Fire Weapons Effects. 7 July 2008.
UFC 4-024-01. Security Engineering: Procedures for Designing Airborne Chemical, Biological, and
Radiological Protection for Buildings. 10 June 2008.
UFC 4-025-01. Security Engineering: Waterfront Security. 1 November 2012.
UFC 4-141-10N. Design: Aviation Operation and Support Facilities. 16 January 2004.
UFC 4-150-02. Dockside Utilities for Ship Service. 12 May 2003.
UFC 4-150-06. Military Harbors and Coastal Facilities. 12 December 2001.
UFC 4-150-07. Maintenance and Operation: Maintenance of Waterfront Facilities. 19 June 2001.
UFC 4-150-08. Inspection of Mooring Hardware. 1 April 2001.
UFC 4-151-10. General Criteria for Waterfront Construction. 10 September 2001.
UFC 4-152-01. Design: Piers and Wharves. 28 July 2005.
UFC 4-832-01N. Design: Industrial and Oily Wastewater Control. 16 January 2004.
UFC 4-860-01FA. Railroad Design and Rehabilitation. 16 January 2004.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-5

References

JOINT
Most Joint doctrinal publications are available online at <http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/>.
CJCSM 3122.05. Operating Procedures for Joint Operation Planning and Execution System
(JOPES)–Information Systems (IS) Governance. 15 December 2011.
CJCSM 3500.04F. Universal Joint Task Manual. 1 June 2011.
JP 1. Doctrine for the Armed Forces of the United States. 25 March 2013.
JP 2-0. Joint Intelligence. 22 October 2013.
JP 3-0. Joint Operations. 11 August 2011.
JP 3-05. Special Operations. 16 July 2014.
JP 3-07. Stability Operations. 29 September 2011.
JP 3-15. Barriers, Obstacles, and Mine Warfare for Joint Operations. 17 June 2011.
JP 3-18. Joint Forcible Entry Operations. 27 November 2012.
JP 3-26. Counterterrorism. 24 October 2014.
JP 3-27. Homeland Defense. 29 July 2013.
JP 3-28. Defense Support of Civil Authorities. 31 July 2013.
JP 3-34. Joint Engineer Operations. 30 June 2011.
JP 3-63. Detainee Operations. 13 November 2014.
JP 4-0. Joint Logistics. 16 October 2013.
JP 4-01.2. Sealift Support to Joint Operations. 22 June 2012.
JP 4-01.5. Joint Terminal Operations. 6 April 2012.
JP 4-01.6. Joint Logistics Over-the-Shore. 27 November 2012.
JP 4-09. Distribution Operations. 19 December 2013.
JP 4-10. Operational Contract Support. 16 July 2014.
JP 5-0. Joint Operation Planning. 11 August 2011.

MARINE CORPS
Most Marine Corps doctrinal publications are available online at
<http://www.marines.mil/News/Publications/ELECTRONICLIBRARY/tabid/13081/Default.aspx?Custompubt
ype=Doctrine+Pubs>.
MCWP 3-17. Engineering Operations. 14 February 2000.
MCWP 5-1. Marine Corps Planning Process. 24 August 2010.

MULTI-SERVICE
ATP 3-28.1/MCWP 3-36.2/NTTP 3-57.2/AFTTP 3-2.67. Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and
Procedures for Defense Support of Civil Authorities and Integrating With National Guard
Civil Support. 11 February 2013.
ATP 3-37.10/MCRP 3-17.7N. Base Camps. 26 April 2013.
ATP 3-37.34/MCWP 3-17.6. Survivability Operations. 28 June 2013.
ATP 3-90.8/MCWP 3-17.5. Combined Arms Countermobility Operations. 17 September 2014.
ATTP 3-34.84/MCRP 3-35.9A/NTTP 3-07.7/AFTTP 3-2.75/CG COMDTINST 3150.1C.
Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Military Diving Operations.
12 January 2011.
ATTP 3-90.4/MCWP 3-17.8. Combined Arms Mobility Operations. 10 August 2011.
FM 3-34.5/MCRP 4-11B. Environmental Considerations. 16 February 2010.
FM 3-34.170/MCWP 3-17.4. Engineer Reconnaissance. 25 March 2008.
FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume I, Planning and Design of Roads, Airfields, and Heliports
in the Theater of Operations–Road Design. 26 August 1994.

References-6 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

References

FM 5-430-00-2/AFJPAM 32-8013, Volume II. Planning and Design of Roads, Airfields, and Heliports
in the Theater of Operations–Airfield and Heliport Design. 29 September 1994.
FM 5-472/NAVFAC MO 330/AFJMAN 32-1221(I). Materials Testing. 27 October 1999.
FM 21-10/MCRP 4-11.1D. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 21 June 2000.
MCIP 3-33.02/NWP 3-07/COMDTINST M3120.11. Maritime Stability Operations. 25 May 2012.
NAVFAC MO-213/AFR 91-8/TM 5-634. Solid Waste Management. 1 May 1990.
NTRP 4-04.2.3/TM 3-34.41/AFPAM 32-1000/MCRP 3-17.7M. Construction Estimating.
1 December 2010.
NTRP 4-04.2.5/TM 3-34.42/AFPAM 32-1020/MCRP 3-17.7F. Construction Project Management.
December 2012.
NTRP 4-04.2.13/TM 3-34.469/AFMAN 32-1072. Water-Well Drilling Operations. 1 December 2008.
NTTP 3-02.1M/MCWP 3-31.5. Ship-to-Shore Movement. May 2007.
NTTP 4-04.1M/MCWP 4-11.5. Seabee Operations in the MAGTF. February 2008.
NWP 4-0M/MCWP 4-2. Naval Logistics. July 2011.
OPNAVINST 3500.38B/MCO 3500.26A/USCG COMDTINST 3500.1B. Universal Naval Task List.
30 January 2007.
TB MED 577/NAVMED P-5010-10/AFMAN 48-138_IP. Sanitary Control and Surveillance of Field
Water Supplies. 1 May 2010.
TM 3-34.21/MCRP 3-17.1A. Medium Girder Bridge. 10 November 2010.
TM 3-34.22/MCRP 3-17.1B. Military Nonstandard Fixed Bridging. 17 October 2013.
TM 3-34.44/MCRP 3-17.7D. Concrete and Masonry. 23 July 2012.
TM 3-34.46/MCRP 3-17.7K. Theater of Operations Electrical Systems. 3 May 2013.
TM 3-34.47/MCRP 3-17.7C. Carpentry. 20 September 2013.
TM 3-34.56/MCIP 4-11.01. Waste Management for Deployed Forces. 19 July 2013.
TM 3-34.62/MCRP 3-17.7I. Earthmoving Operations. 29 June 2012.
TM 3-34.65/NTRP 4-04.2.12/AFMAN 10-903. Quarry Operations. 30 October 2013.
TM 3-34.70/MCRP 3-17.7E. Plumbing, Pipe Fitting, and Sewerage. 23 July 2012.
TM 3-34.85/MCRP 3-17A. Engineer Field Data. 17 October 2013.
TM 5-600/AFJPAM 32-1088. Bridge Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair. 6 December 1994.
TM 5-622/NAVY MO-104/AFM 91-34. Maintenance of Waterfront Facilities. 1 June 1978.
TM 5-628/AFR 91-44. Railroad Track Standards. 8 April 1991.
TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083. Facilities Engineering Electrical Interior Facilities.
30 November 1995.
TM 5-684/NAVFAC MO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082. Facilities Engineering Electrical Exterior
Facilities. 29 November 1996.
TM 5-803-5/NAVFAC P-960/AFM 88-43. Installation Design. 1 March 1981.
TM 5-818-1/AFM 88-3, chapter 7. Soils and Geology Procedures for Foundation Design of Buildings
and Other Structures (Except Hydraulic Structures). 21 October 1983.
TM 5-818-8/AFJMAN 32-1030. Engineering Use of Geotextiles. 20 July 1995.
TM 5-820-1/AFM 88-5, chapter 1. Surface Drainage Facilities for Airfields and Heliports.
20 August 1987.
TM 5-822-14/AFJMAN 32-1019. Soil Stabilization for Pavements. 25 October 1994.
TM 5-852-1/AFR 88-19, Volume 1. Arctic and Subarctic Construction General Provisions.
4 September 1987.
TM 5-852-2/AFR 88-19, Volume 2. Arctic and Subarctic Construction Site Selection and
Development. 21 May 1990.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-7

References

TM 5-852-4/AFM 88-19, chapter 4. Arctic and Subarctic Construction Foundations for Structures.
15 October 1983.
TM 5-852-5/AFR 88-19, Volume 5. Arctic and Subarctic Construction Utilities. 31 August 1987.
TM 5-852-6/AFR 88-19, Volume 6. Arctic and Subarctic Construction Calculation Methods for
Determination of Depths of Freeze and Thaw in Soils. 25 January 1988.
TM 5-5420-212-10-1(Army)/TM 08676A-10/1-1 (Marine Corps). Operator’s Manual for Medium
Girder Bridge. 16 February 1993.
TM 10-4610-309-10 (Army)/TM 10802A-OI/1A Vol 1 (Marine Corps). Operator Manual for Tactical
Water Purification System (TWPS). 15 May 2008.

NAVY
Most Navy doctrinal publications are available online at <http://doni.daps.dla.mil/default.aspx> and at
<https://ndls.nwdc.navy.mil/default.aspx> (registration is required).
NTTP 4-04.3. Naval Contingency Engineering Operations. December 2008.
NWP 4-04. Naval Civil Engineering Operations. December 2007.
OPNAVINST 11010.20H. Navy Facilities Projects. 16 May 2014.
SECNAVINST 11011.47C. Acquisition, Management, and Disposal of Real Property and Real
Property Interests by the Department of the Navy. 26 August 2013.
SS521-AG-PRO-010. U.S. Navy Diving Manual. 15 April 2008.
<http://www.supsalv.org/pdf/Dive%20Manual%20Rev%206%20with%20Chg%20A.pdf>.

OTHER
10 USC. Armed Forces. <http://uscode.house.gov/view.xhtml?req=granuleid:USC-prelim-title10
-front&num=0&edition=prelim>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
10 USC 2801. Armed Forces, General Military Law.
<http://uscode.house.gov/view.xhtml?req=(title:10 section:2801 edition:prelim)>, accessed
on 14 August 2014.
32 USC. National Guard. <http://uscode.house.gov/view.xhtml?req=granuleid:USC-prelim-title32
-front&num=0&edition=prelim>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
49 USC 10901. Transportation, Interstate Transportation.
<http://uscode.house.gov/view.xhtml?req=(title:49 section:10901 edition:prelim)>, accessed
on 14 August 2014.
Base Camp Facilities Standards for Contingency Operations.
<http://www.eur.army.mil/pdf/Red_Book.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
40 CFR 261.2. Protection of the Environment. <http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-
idx?SID=06350259669347fcd740addc950ae27f&node=pt40.26.261&rgn=div5#se40.26.261_
12>. accessed on 3 February 2015.
Convention for the Protection of Cultural Property in the Event of Armed Conflict. The Hague.
<http://www.icrc.org/ihl/INTRO/400>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Convention (III) relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War. Geneva.
<http://www.icrc.org/ihl/INTRO/375?OpenDocument>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Convention (IV) relative to the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War. Geneva.
<http://www.icrc.org/applic/ihl/ihl.nsf/385ec082b509e76c41256739003e636d/6756482d8614
6898c125641e004aa3c5>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Convention (IV) respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land and its annex: Regulations
concerning the Laws and Customs of War on Land. The Hague.
<http://www.icrc.org/applic/ihl/ihl.nsf/385ec082b509e76c41256739003e636d/1d1726425f69
55aec125641e0038bfd6>, accessed on 14 August 2014.

References-8 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

References

EM 385-1-1. Safety and Health Requirements Manual. 3 November 2003.

<http://www.usace.army.mil/SafetyandOccupationalHealth/SafetyandHealthRequirementsMa
nual.aspx>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Emergency Support Function #3–Public Works and Engineering Annex.
<http://www.usda.gov/documents/ESF03.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
EP 415-1-261. Quality Assurance Representative’s Guide, Volume 3. 1 August 1992.
<http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerPamphlets/EP_415
-1-261_Vol-03.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
EP 500-1-2. Field Force Engineering–United States Army Corps of Engineers Support to Full
Spectrum Operations. 1 August 2010.
<http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications
/EngineerPamphlets/EP_500-1-2.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
EP 1105-3-1. Base Camp Development in the Theater of Operations. 19 January 2009.
<http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerPamphlets/EP_110
5-3-1.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
EP 1110-1-8. Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating Expense Schedule. 30 April 2014.
<http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/USACEPublications/EngineerPamphlets.aspx?udt_
43545_param_orderby=Pub_x0020_Date_UDT_Value&udt_43545_param_direction=descen
ding>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
ETL 07-8. Spall Repair of Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Airfield Pavements in Expeditionary
Environments. 27 July 2007. <http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/AF/AFETL/etl_07_8.pdf>, accessed
on 14 August 2014.
ETL 08-2. Testing Protocol for Rigid Spall Repair Materials. 30 January 2008.
<http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/AF/AFETL/etl_08_2.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
ETL 09-1. Airfield Planning and Design Criteria for Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS). 28 September
2009. <http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/AF/AFETL/etl_09_1.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
ETL 13-3. Minimum Airfield Operating Surface Selection and Repair Quality Criteria. 18 January
2013. <http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/AF/AFETL/etl_13_3.pdf>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
ETL 97-9. Criteria and Guidance for C-17 Contingency and Training Operations on Semi-Prepared
Airfields. 25 November 1997. <http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/AF/AFETL/etl_97_9.pdf>,
accessed on 14 August 2014.
Federal Standard 376B. Preferred Metric Units for General Use by the Federal Government. 27
January 1993. <http://www.nist.gov/pml/wmd/metric/upload/fs376-b.pdf>, accessed on 14
August 2014.
The Geneva Conventions of 1949 and their Additional Protocols. <http://www.icrc.org/eng/war-and-
law/treaties-customary-law/geneva-conventions/>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
IEEE Standard 142-2007. IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial
Power Systems. <http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/xpl/mostRecentIssue.jsp?punumber=4396961>,
accessed on 14 August 2014.
National Electrical Safety Code. http://standards.ieee.org/about/nesc/, accessed on 14 August 2014.
NAVFAC P-73, Real Estate Procedural Manual. 10 September 2014. <http://www.navfac.navy.mil
/products_and_services/am/about_us/resources.html>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. <http://www.nfpa.org/codes-and-standards/document-
information-pages?mode=code&code=70>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Universal Joint Task List (UJTL). <http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/training/ujtl_tasks.htm>, accessed on
14 August 2014.

PRESCRIBED FORMS
None.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-9

References

REFERENCED FORMS
Unless otherwise indicated, DA forms are available on the Army Publishing Directorate Web site at
<www.apd.army.mil>. DD forms are available on the Office of the Secretary of Defense Web site at
<www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/formsprogram.htm>.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
DD Form 1354. Transfer and Acceptance of DOD Real Property.
DD Form 1391. FY____ Military Construction Project Data.

WEB SITES
Base Engineering Survey Tool Web site,
<http://proceedings.esri.com/library/userconf/proc02/pap0315/p0315.htm>, accessed on
14 August 2014.
Center for Disease Control and Prevention Web site, < http://www.cdc.gov/>, accessed on 14 August
2014.
Construction Criteria Base Index, National Institute of Building Sciences Web site,
<http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/ccb.php>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Health Facility Planning Agency Web site,
<http://www.armyhealthfacilities.amedd.army.mil/index.html>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
NAVFAC Engineering Criteria and Programs Office, National Institute of Building Sciences Web site,
<http://www.wbdg.org/references/pa_dod_cieng.php>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
TCMS Web site, <https://redi.usace.army.mil/Pages/index.htm>, accessed on 28 January 2015.
Transportation Systems Center Web site, < https://transportation.erdc.dren.mil/tsmcx/>, accessed on
14 August 2014.
Unified Facilities Criteria Index, National Institute of Building Sciences Web site,
<http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=4>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
U.S. Army Combined Arms Center, Center for Army Lesson’s Learned Web site, <
http://usacac.army.mil/cac2/call/ll-links.asp>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
U.S. Army Public Health Command Web site, < http://phc.amedd.army.mil/Pages/default.aspx>,
accessed on 14 August 2014.
U.S. Army Safety Center Web site, < https://safety.army.mil/>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
U.S. Air Force Civil Engineer Center Web site, <http://www.afcec.af.mil/>, accessed on 14 August
2014.
U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Web site,
<https://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owastand.display_standard_group?p_part_number=1926
&p_toc_level=1>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
U.S. Marine Corps Engineer School Training and Education Command Web site,
<http://www.mces.marines.mil/>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
USACE Engineer Pamphlets Web site, <
http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/USACEPublications/EngineerPamphlets.aspx? >,
accessed on 23 January 2015.
USACE Hydrology Web site, < http://www.agc.army.mil/Missions/Hydrology/AboutHyDRA.aspx>,
accessed on 14 August 2014.
USACE Publications Web site, < http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/>, accessed on
14 August 2014.
USACE Reachback Operations Center Web site, <https://uroc.usace.army.mil>, accessed on
14 August 2014.
USACE Technical Information Web site, <http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering
/TECHINFO.aspx>, accessed on 14 August 2014.

References-10 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

References

USACE Water Resource Database Web site,

<<http://www.agc.army.mil/Media/FactSheets/FactSheetArticleView/tabid/11913/Article/480
935/water-resource-database-wrdb.aspx>, accessed on 14 August 2014.
Whole Building Design Guide ETL Web site, < http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=125>,
accessed on 14 August 2014.
Whole Building Design Guide Web site, < http://www.wbdg.org>, accessed on 14 August 2014.

RECOMMENDED READINGS
These documents contain relevant supplemental information.
ADRP 2-0. Intelligence. 31 August 2012.
AR 415-18. Military Construction Responsibilities. 1 December 1982.
AR 415-28. Real Property Category Codes. 15 April 2014.
AR 415-32. Engineer Troop Unit Construction in Connection With Training Activities. 15 April 1998.
ATP 2-01.3/MCRP 2-3A. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield/Battlespace. 10 November 2014.
ATTP 3-97.11/MCRP 3-35.1D. Cold Region Operations. 28 January 2011.
DA Pamphlet 405-45. Real Property Inventory Management. 15 September 2000.
FM 3-05.70. Survival. 17 May 2002.
FM 3-57. Civil Affairs Operations. 31 October 2011.
FM 3-90-2. Reconnaissance, Security, and Tactical Enabling Tasks, Volume 2. 22 March 2013.
FM 3-97.6. Mountain Operations. 28 November 2000.
FM 90-3/FMFM 7-27. Desert Operations. 24 August 1993.
FM 90-5. Jungle Operations. 16 August 1982.
JP 3-57. Civil-Military Operations. 11 September 2013.
JP 4-01. The Defense Transportation System. 6 June 2013.
JP 4-03. Joint Bulk Petroleum and Water Doctrine. 09 December 2010.
MCDP 5. Planning. 21 July 1997.
STANAG 2238. Allied Joint Doctrine for Military Engineering–AJP-3.12, Edition B. 20 June 2014.
<https://nso.nato.int/protected/,> accessed on 18 November 2014.
STANAG 2394. Land Force Combat Engineer Doctrine–ATP-52(B). 18 December 2008.
<https://nso.nato.int/protected/,> accessed on 18 November 2014.
TM 3-34.64/MCRP 3-17.7G. Military Soils Engineering. 25 September 2012.
TM 5-627/NAVY MO-103/AFM 91-33. Maintenance of Trackage. 1 January 1980.
TM 5-698-1. Reliability/Availability of Electrical & Mechanical Systems for Command, Control,
Communications, Computer, Intelligence, Surveillance and Reconnaissance (C4ISR)
Facilities. 19 January 2007.
TM 5-814-3/AFM 88-11. Domestic Wastewater Treatment. 31 August 1988.
TM 5-822-9/AFM 88-6, chapter 10. Repair of Rigid Pavements, Using Epoxy Resin Grouts, Mortars,
and Concretes. 20 January 1989.
TM 5-822-11/AFP 88-6, chapter 7. Standard Practice for Sealing Joints and Cracks in Rigid and
Flexible Pavements. 11 June 1993.
TM 5-830-3/AFM 88-17, chapter 3. Dust Control for Roads, Airfields, and Adjacent Areas.
30 September 1987.
UFC 3-510-01. Foreign Voltages and Frequencies Guide. 1 March 2005.
UFC 3-520-05. Stationary Battery Areas. 14 April 2008.

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 References-11

This page intentionally left blank.
Index
Entries are by page number.

A P
AFCS, 4-2 engineering life cycle, 1-1 partner capacity, 1-5
air traffic control and landing environmental baseline survey. power generation and distribution,
systems, 6-11 See EBS 11-3
airbase damage repair, 6-14 explosive hazards, 10-12 electrical, 11-3
aircraft, 11-3 F Prime Base Engineer Emergency
airfield, 3-20 Force. See Prime BEEF
force projection, 2-1
ammunition storage, 9-15 Prime BEEF, 11-3
G project management, 4-3
armored vehicle launched bridge,
8-3 general engineer, 2-10 protection, 10-5, 10-8, 12-5
Army Facilities Components general engineer unit, 2-3 cultural, 10-5
System. See AFCS geospatial financial, 10-5
teams, 12-5 fire protection, 3-20
Army Geospatial Center, 12-5
protection design, 6-9
assured mobility, 2-3 H
hazmat, 3-20 R
B
Hydrologic Data Resources railroad bridging, 7-9
Bailey bridge, 8-4
Application, 12-2 Rapid Engineer Deployable Heavy
base Operational Repair Squadron
air, 11-3 I Engineer. See RED HORSE
base camp, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 12-3 improved ribbon bridge, 8-4 rapidly employed bridge system,
shore facility, 11-3 8-3
J
bed down, 12-5 reachback, 12-5
job site safety, 4-4
C job site security, 4-4 reachback capacity, 3-25
civil engineer, 11-3 joint assault bridge, 8-3 real estate, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6
combat engineer, 11-3 acquisition, 10-1, 10-5, 10-8
L activities, 10-3, 10-4
combat engineering, 2-3 Army service component staff
labor
construction, 10-7 estimates, 10-10 engineer, 10-4
new, 10-9 resources, 10-10 contingency real estate
contingency operation, 10-1, 11-3, support team, 10-1
line of communications. See LOC functions, 10-1, 10-2
12-6
LOC, 10-7 guidance, 10-4
D logistics over-the-shore, 5-8 intercommand, 10-3
decontamination laws and customs, 10-5
logistics support bridge, 8-4
CBRN, 12-1 modification, 10-8
M operations, 10-5
defense support of civil
planning, 10-6
authorities. See DSCA Mabey Johnson bridge, 8-4
policies, 10-4
detainee labor, 9-20 master planning, 3-8 program, 10-4, 10-5
detention, 9-20 MDMP, 3-10 team, 10-3
drainage medium girder bridge, 8-4 transfer, 10-13
improving, 12-5 military decisionmaking process. rear area, 10-3
DSCA, 2-9 See MDMP RED HORSE, 11-3
mobility, 12-6 resettlement, 9-20
E
EBS, 10-2, 10-7, 10-8 O S
engineer reconnaissance, 3-7 obstacle, 12-7 Seabees, 5-2

25 February 2015 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 Index-1

Index

Southeast Asia hut, 9-14 requirements, 10-8 water detection response team,
special forces, 2-8 theater Army area command, 12-2
10-9 water supply, 12-3
standard ribbon bridge, 8-4
Theater Construction sources, 12-5
survivability, 10-7 Management System. See units, 12-7
T TCMS water testing, 12-3
TCMS, 4-2, 10-9 threat, 11-3 well drilling, 12-1, 12-5, 12-6
theater, 10-6, 10-10 U equipment, 12-5
commander, 10-3 machine, 12-6
Unified Facilities Criteria, 3-23 operations, 12-3, 12-5
directives, 10-8
engineer command, 10-9, 10- unified land operations, 2-1 project, 12-5
11, 12-3 universal joint task list, 1-6 system, 12-6
forces, 10-11 team, 12-3, 12-6
overseas, 10-5 W Wolverine, 8-3
planning, 10-8 Warfare, Law-of-land, 10-4
real estate, 10-4 water detection, 12-5

Index-2 ATP 3-34.40/MCWP 3-17.7 25 February 2015

*ATP 3-34.40 (FM 3-34.400)
MCWP 3-17.7
25 February 2015

By order of the Secretary of the Army:

RAYMOND T. ODIERNO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

GERALD B. O’KEEFE
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
1504401

DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: Not to be distributed; electronic
media only (EMO).
PCN 143 000164 00 PIN 105043−000